Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Edition 7.0
www.siemens.com/energy
Publisher
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Energy Sector
Freyeslebenstrasse 1
91058 Erlangen, Germany
www.siemens.com/energy
Publishing House:
Publicis Pro, Erlangen, Germany
DTP:
Mario Willms
Publicis Pro, Erlangen, Germany
Edition 7.0
Dear reader,
This updated edition of the well-known Power Engineering Guide is a manual for everyone involved in the generation,
transmission and distribution of electrical energy – from system planning, to implementation and control. Our guide is
designed to assist and support engineers, technicians, planners and advisors, as well as students, trainees and teachers
of electrical engineering and energy technology. Beyond that, we hope the Power Engineering Guide will also be useful
as a reference work for technical questions and support continuing education and training in the technical field.
Our guide covers the entire portfolio of Siemens products for the transmission and distribution of electrical power –
including high, medium and low voltage, switching substations, transformers and switchgear, and is organized by product
and function. It also covers solutions in the areas of Smart Grids: energy automation, energy management and network
communication, as well as service and support. Key terms and abbreviations are explained in a handy appendix, and
Internet addresses are provided for additional in-depth information.
Siemens AG is a global leader in electronics and electrical engineering. Siemens’ products, systems and integrated,
complete solutions benefit customers by meeting a wide variety of local requirements. They represent the key technologies
of the future and set global standards. All our developments and innovations – which also affect methods and processes
– are distinguished by energy efficiency, economy, reliability, environmental compatibility and sustainability. The portfolio
includes solutions for power transmission and distribution, for Smart Grids, for low and medium voltage as well as energy
automation.
The importance of electricity is emphasized by the rapidly increasing number of electrical applications and the fact that
demand will continually grow in the coming decades. To help our customers master their respective challenges and
achieve success and further growth, we continue to work on selectively strengthening and optimizing our portfolio.
As a result, in addition to “traditional” products for power transmission and distribution, today’s portfolio includes a wide
range of additional products. We offer grid operators, electricity customers, planners and builders of electrical systems the
additional benefits of integrated communications and automation technology. Our spectrum of services includes the
planning, maintenance and repair of entire power supply systems.
Thanks to our vast experience in managing projects around the world, we provide power utilities, industrial companies,
cities, urban planer and city hubs (airports and harbors) with cost-efficient custom-tailored solutions. Please do not hesitate
to contact your local Siemens sales office. You will find the contacts to Siemens in your region at www.siemens.com/energy
and www.siemens.com/infrastructure-cities.
Fig. 1-1: Siemens offers complete communication solutions for the construction of Smart Grids for power utilities
1
Electrical energy is the backbone of our economy and supports
every aspect of social and cultural life today. The comfort of
always having electricity available is anything but guaranteed,
however. We face major challenges in providing adequate power
generation, transmission, and distribution to meet the world’s
needs.
Fossil fuels, on the other hand, are becoming more scarce, and
exploration and production of oil and gas are becoming more
expensive. To slow the threat of climate change we must reduce
our CO2 emissions worldwide; for power supply systems, this
means increased integration of renewable energy sources such
as hydro, wind, and solar power. At the same time, it also means
boosting the energy efficiency of power supply systems so they
contribute to our environmental and climate protection efforts
and help keep energy costs under control. The growing interna-
tional trade in energy, fueled by the liberalization of energy
markets, and the integration of power grids across regions
requires investment in more transmission power supply systems
to ensure system stability and guarantee power supplies.
The objectives set for Smart Grids are as diverse as they are
exciting and ambitious. Instead of overloads, bottlenecks, and
blackouts, Smart Grids will ensure the reliability, sustainability,
and efficiency of power supplies. Information and communica-
tion systems within the network will be systematically expanded
Fig. 1-2: The Power Matrix: The energy system is being transformed. Distributed power generation is growing – increasing the system’s
complexity. The energy chain has evolved into a multi-faceted system with countless new participants – the power matrix. It reflects
the reality of the energy system. Individual power matrices are appearing in each country and region – depending on the specific
situation, challenges and goals. Siemens knows the markets and needs of its customers, and offers innovative and sustainable
solutions in all parts of the power matrix
Network planning mission is the best way to ensure highly efficient power trans-
1
Building Smart Grids is a highly complex task that begins with mission of 2,000 kilometers or more. Electrical Super Grids
a detailed quantitative assessment of the system requirements, based on UHVDC transmission can interconnect regions across
definition of actual targets and their required performance climate and time zones, allowing seasonal changes, time of day
levels, and specification of system concepts and equipment. and geographical features to be used to maximum advantage.
As a result, a comprehensive strategy for building Smart Grids
is necessary – including the part of the network that addresses Siemens’ most recent development in HVDC transmission is
power supply systems. called HVDC PLUS. Its key component is an innovative Modular
Multilevel Converter (MMC) that operates virtually free of har-
The foundation for designing an efficient Smart Grid is a detailed monics. HVDC PLUS converter stations are highly compact
analysis of the system’s required performance. This is the key because there is no need for complex filter branches. This
task for strategic network planning. Keeping a rigorous focus on feature makes HVDC PLUS perfectly suited for installation on
the system as a whole ensures that the architecture and configu- offshore platforms; for example, to connect offshore wind
ration deliver the necessary performance levels, and meet other farms.
requirements as well. The solution will integrate the most
innovative technologies for power generation, transmission, See section 2.2, page 19 (HVDC), and
distribution and consumption, while taking into account each section 2.4, page 27 (FACTS).
system’s individual history and current condition. In most cases,
the transition from today’s power supply system to the future Bulk renewable integration
Smart Grid cannot be made in one step; instead it requires In order to begin fulfilling the climate protection requirements
step-by-step modification plans. of 2020, we need to use energy efficiently and reduce CO2
emissions. Power generation needs to change accordingly.
See chapter 9, page 478. Large power plants will continue to ensure basic supplies, but
there will also be renewable energy sources that fluctuate
Power electronics (HVDC / FACTS) locally depending on weather and other conditions.
Siemens power electronic solutions for High Voltage Direct
Current transmission (HVDC) and Flexible Alternating Current Energy Management System (EMS)
Transmission Systems (FACTS) address the greatest challenges in At power plants, the focus is on ensuring reliable supply, using
power transmission. generation resources efficiently, and reducing transmission
losses. An Energy Management System (EMS) handles these by
FACTS devices can significantly increase the power transmission balancing the demands of the transmission system, generating
capacity of existing alternating current (AC) systems and extend units, and consumption. Intelligent Alarm Processors (IAPs)
maximum AC transmission distances by balancing the variable reduce the critical time needed to analyze faults in the grid and
reactive power demand of the system. Reactive power compen- take corrective action, as well as the risk of incorrect analysis.
sation is used to control AC voltage, increase system stability, Innovative Voltage Stability Analysis (VSA) applications running
and reduce power transmission losses. automatically and independently alert the operator before
critical situations that jeopardize static system voltage stability
State-of-the-art FACTS devices include Fixed Series Compensators occur, giving the operator time to take preventive action rather
(FSC) and Thyristor Controlled Series Compensators (TCSC), or than having to react under stress. Increased grid reliability is
Static VAR Compensators (SVC) for dynamic shunt compensa- provided by Optimal Power Flow (OPF) applications that continu-
tion. The latest generation of Siemens SVC devices is called SVC ously work to keep the system’s voltage level high and eliminate
PLUS. These are highly standardized compact devices that can invalid voltage conditions. Any control measures that must be
easily be implemented in demanding network environments; for taken can be automatically executed in a closed-loop-control
example, to allow connection of large offshore wind farms. procedure.
AC technology has proven very effective in the generation, Using the most efficient resources is a challenge under today’s
transmission and distribution of electrical power. Nevertheless, more stringent environmental restrictions, increasingly competi-
there are tasks that cannot be performed economically or with tive markets, and growing contractual complexity. An integrated
technical precision using AC. These include power transmission set of closely interacting applications – ranging from back
over very long distances, as well as between networks operating office-based, year-ahead resource optimization and maintenance
asynchronously or at different frequencies. In contrast, a unique planning to week- or day-ahead unit commitment and hydro-
feature of HVDC systems is their ability to feed power into grids scheduling to online closed-loop control of generating units –
that cannot tolerate additional increases in short-circuit currents. ensures maximum efficiency grounded in powerful optimization
algorithms and models. Security Constrained Unit Commitment
The transmission capacity of a single HVDC transmission system (SCUC) has become the essential application for managing the
has recently been extended by the Siemens Ultra High Voltage world’s most complex energy market in California at California
Direct Current transmission system (UHVDC). With a capacity of ISO. SCUC increases grid and market efficiency, reduces barriers
more than seven gigawatts and low rate of loss, UHVDC trans- to alternative power resources like demand-response and green
1 HMI HMI
Printer
Master Clock
Router Firewall
Corporate
UPS Network
Server 1 Server 2
HV MV LV
Our solutions integrate
all voltage levels and all
necessary information
from the energy supply
enviroment in one system.
M
3~
generation, and gives the operators new tools for managing mated substation must reflect the point of view of operators and
transmission bottlenecks and dispatching the lowest-cost power maintenance personnel to become a best-in-class system that is
plants. simple both to operate and maintain. Smart Substation Automa-
tion ensures rapid and – more importantly – correct responses to
See chapter 7, page 402. unpredictable system events. The ability to reliably supply
electrical power on demand can only be guaranteed by consid-
Smart substation automation and protection ering the power supply system in its entirety (fig. 1-4).
The automation and protection of substations must be enhanced
to securely meet the extended requirements of future Smart Smart Substation Automation Systems from Siemens support
Grids. The substation is in the process of becoming a node on the following goals:
the utility IT network for all information from the distribution tȋSecure and reliable power supply
substation to the customer. For example, data from the feeder tȋGuaranteed high levels of protection for facilities and people
automation units, power quality, meters, decentralized energy tȋReduction of manual interactions to enhance rapid self-healing
resources and home automation systems will be collected and operations
analyzed to improve the system. Besides the new Smart Grid tȋImplementation of intelligent remote error monitoring,
challenges, the usual tasks of protection, control and automa- detection, reporting
tion have to remain as reliable and efficient as ever. The objec- tȋEnabling condition-based predictive maintenance
tives for substations are beginning to cross departmental bound- tȋSupport for engineering and testing through plug-and-play
aries, encompassing operations, maintenance and security functionality
requirements. Smart substation solutions and their individual tȋProactively distributing substation information to all relevant
components should be designed with this overarching vision and stakeholders
framework in mind. The use of intelligent feeder devices, an tȋReduced costs for installation and maintenance.
open IEC 61850 communication architecture, powerful substa-
tion computers, equipment knowledge modules and local Siemens Smart Substation Automation Systems are always
storage all support this approach. The automated substation for customized to meet each customer’s specific requirements. The
Smart Grids must integrate all aspects of intelligence, from use of standard components allows the system to scale in every
protection, automation and remote control to operational safety respect. Siemens solutions offer a fully integrated and fully
and advanced data collection. Going beyond the traditional automated way to operate substations under normal and emer-
concept of substation control and protection, the new auto- gency conditions. The system is flexible and open for future
modifications, making it easy to expand the substation while fiber optic, power line and wireless infrastructures based on
1
allowing the addition of new Smart Grid functions. energy industry standards.
See chapter 6, page 262. An important element in creating and operating Smart Grids is
comprehensive, consistent communication using sufficient
Integrated Substation Condition Monitoring (ISCM) bandwidth and devices with IP/Ethernet capability. Networks of
Integrated Substation Condition Monitoring (ISCM) is a modular this kind must eventually extend all the way to individual con-
system for monitoring all relevant substation components, from sumers, who will be integrated into them using smart metering.
the transformer and switchgear to the overhead line and cable. Consistent end-to-end communication helps meet the require-
Based on known, proven telecontrol units and substation auto- ment for online monitoring of all grid components and, among
mation devices, ISCM provides a comprehensive solution per- other things, creates opportunities to develop new business
fectly suited to substation environments. It integrates seamlessly models for smart metering and integrating distributed power
into the existing communication infrastructure so that moni- generation.
toring information from the station and the control center is
displayed. See chapter 8, page 442.
1 Vertical SG
solutions
Grid
Applications
Applications Infrastr. Grid
Applications
Electrification Applications DG / VPP
Applications
Response Metering
Horizontal IT
Grid-specific
Enterprise IT
Operational IT Energy Ind. Distribution Rail SCADA Distribution Microgrid & Dec. Demand Resp. Meter Data
Mgt. System Mgt. System System Mgt. system Gen. Controller Mgmt. System Management
Information &
Grid specific communication platform
Communicat.
Field
Equipment
Electr./Gas/Water/Heat
Solutions incl.
Primary
equipment
Smart Grid operation
Service Grid consulting & design Grid deployment & automation & optimization Value-added services
Fig. 1-5: Siemens refers to its Smart Grid portfolio as Smart Grid Suite. The Suite contains everything necessary for a Smart Grid: hardware,
software, IT solutions, and services for the development of intelligent grids. This refers not only to power supply grids, but also gas,
water, and district heating networks. In power supply grids, Siemens also includes networks for railway electrification
Monitoring only (one-way communication to distribution tȋRobust primary and secondary equipment to withstand tough
substation or control center) outdoor conditions
tȋMessaging box (for example, short-circuit indicators with tȋFlexible IO-modules adapted to the requirements of the
one-way communication to distribution substation or control specific RMU type, for example, for direct output to motor-
center for fast fault location) driven switches or input from RMU sensors
tȋOptimized CPUs with advanced automation and protection
Control, monitoring, and automation (two-way communication functions to secure a safe and reliable power supply, with
to distribution substation or control center) automated system recovery functions and convenient remote
tȋDistribution Automation RTU (DA-RTU) with powerful access
communication and automation features applicable to tȋReliable (emergency) power supplies for all components in the
Smart Grid functions, for instance: RMU, for example, to operate the switchgear motor drive, to
– Automated self-healing routines run a heating system for outdoor application, or to power the
– Node station for power quality applications controller and communication units
– Data concentrator for smart metering systems tȋFuture-oriented, fast communication via different
– Node station for decentralized power generation infrastructures, for example, GPRS-/GSM modem, fiber optic,
– Node station for demand-response applications and power line carrier
tȋMultiple communication protocols like IEC61850 and DNPi to
Protection, control, monitoring, and automation (two-way connect the RMU with the distribution substation, control
communication to distribution substation or control center) center, or end-user applications
tȋRecloser controller for overhead lines, plus auto reclose tȋModular, sustainable controller functions to fulfill specific Smart
breaker with enhanced protection functionality and advanced Grid requirements like fault detection and isolation, automatic
communication and automation features reclosing functions, voltage or load-flow regulation, and more
tȋA user-friendly, powerful engineering tool with seamless
To fulfill all these requirements in a Smart Grid feeder automa- integration in the overall engineering process of the distribution
tion system, a modular approach to protection, monitoring, automation system to enable maximum re-use of data
automation and communication equipment is needed. Siemens tȋOpen interfaces for all system components, enabling the
offers a complete portfolio for each level of Smart Grid applica- integration of other applications; in other words, a system that
tion: is equipped for future Smart Grid modifications
To manage these tasks with a global perspective, it is crucial to their power consumption. Experts estimate that the use of smart
1
fully understand the overall structure of distribution grids: meters can save up to ten terawatt-hours of electricity, or almost
primary and secondary equipment, voltage levels (from high two percent of total energy consumption. For the expansion of
voltage via medium voltage to low voltage), indoor and outdoor Smart Grids, Siemens has developed a Smart Grid solution based
applications, and multiple local regulations and standards. A big on its AMIS system, which covers both smart metering and the
advantage derives from the use of flexible components in the automation of distribution systems. In addition, Siemens has for
same system family for the diverse feeder automation applica- the first time integrated in this application the energy automa-
tions. Siemens provides this and more with our comprehensive tion, power quality and multimedia functions. For example, the
Advanced Energy Automation portfolio, which transforms a power snapshot analysis is the first Smart Grid application
Smart Grid vision into reality. worldwide, which provides synchronous grid information via
AMIS smart meters. Power quality data supplements this infor-
Distributed Energy Resources (DER) mation, with the aid of which grid stability and supply security
The integration of distributed energy resources (DER) calls for a can be enhanced. Open interfaces for tablet computers or smart
completely new concept: the virtual power plant. A virtual phones, via which consumption and energy data can be graphi-
power plant connects many small plants that participate in the cally displayed, are also available. Since Siemens acquired
energy market in a completely new way. It makes it possible to eMeter, a California-based MDM company, in January 2012, the
use sales channels that otherwise would not be available to the Metering Data Management System (MDM) EnergyIP also has
operators of individual plants. Linked together in the network, been part of Siemens’ Smart Grid portfolio.
the plants can be operated even more efficiently – and therefore
more economically – than before, benefiting the operators of See section 10.3, page 502.
decentralized generating facilities.
There is no doubt that the future belongs to the Smart Grid, and
In the virtual power plant, decentralized energy management that power generation will change significantly by the time it
and communication with the generating facilities play a special becomes a reality. Large power plants will continue to ensure
role, and thanks to the Siemens products Decentralized Energy the basic supply, but there will also be renewable energy
Management System (DEMS) and DER Controller, are optimally sources, causing fluctuations in the grid. In the not too distant
supported. The centerpiece is DEMS, which enables the intelli- future, flexible intermediate storage of temporary excess power
gent, economical and environmentally friendly linkage of decen- in the grid will be possible using electric vehicles and stationary
tralized energy sources. The DER Controller facilitates communi- storage units. Sensors and smart meters will switch these units
cations, and is specifically tailored to the requirements of on or off, ensuring efficient load management. From generating
decentralized energy sources. large offshore wind farms to delivering smart metering in
homes, Siemens is one of the worldwide leading providers of
See section 7.2.2, page 436. products, systems, technology and solutions for Smart Grids.
2.8 SIESTORAGE 56
2.8.1 The Modular Energy Storage System
for a Sustainable Energy Supply 56
2.8.2 Spot-on for a Wide Variety of Applications 58
2.8.3 The Solution Provider
for Energy Storage Solutions 59
2.9 SIEHOUSE 60
2.9.1 Compact, Mobile Plug-and-Play E-Houses
for Power Distribution 60
2.9.2 Spot-on for a Broad Range of Applications 61
2.9.3 It is All about the Best Design 62
2.9.4 Completely Integrated Solutions
from a Single Source 63
2.1 Overview of
2 Technologies and Services
Feeding the power generated at different locations over long Smart grids will help achieve a sustainable development. It is
distances into power systems often calls for extraordinary power worthwhile mentioning that the smart grid vision is in the same
transmission and distribution solutions. Despite the challenges it way applicable to the system developments in other regions of the
poses, however, interconnecting of different regions, countries world. Smart grids will help achieve a sustainable development.
or even continents remains a viable option for providing these
areas with economical access to power (fig. 2.1-1). As a solution An increasingly liberalized market will encourage trading oppor-
provider with extensive experience in every aspect of power tunities to be identified and developed. Smart grids are a neces-
transmission and distribution, Siemens has already implemented sary response to the environmental, social and political demands
a large number of projects linking power systems or connecting placed on energy supply.
decentralized generating units to the grid. In each case, condi-
tions were unique. And because Siemens strives to provide its
customers with the most cost-efficient results, the implemented 2.1.2 AC/DC Transmission and
solutions using different technologies were also unique. Distribution
2.1.1 Solutions for Smart and Super HVDC, FACTS and SIPLINK
Grids with HVDC and FACTS Today’s power transmission systems have the task of transmitting
power from point A to point B reliably, safely and efficiently. It is
The power grid of the future must be secure, cost-effective and also necessary to transmit power in a manner that is not harmful
environmentally compatible. The combination of these three to the environment. Siemens offers comprehensive solutions,
tasks can be tackled with the help of ideas, intelligent solutions technical expertise and worldwide experience to help customers
as well as advanced technologies. meet these challenges.
Innovative solutions with HVDC (High-Voltage Direct Current For each application and technical transmission stage, Siemens
Transmission) and FACTS (Flexible AC Transmission Systems) offers optimized solutions with SIPLINK (Siemens Multifunctional
have the potential to cope with the new challenges. By means of Power Link), HVDC transmission or FACTS for the most efficient
power electronics, they provide features which are necessary to use of AC power systems and lines.
avoid technical problems in the power systems, they increase
the transmission capacity and system stability very efficiently Typical applications for FACTS include fast voltage control,
and help to prevent cascading disturbances. increased transmission capacity over long lines, power flow
control in meshed systems, and power oscillation damping. With
The vision and enhancement strategy for the future electricity FACTS, more power can be transmitted within the power system.
networks are, for example, depicted in the program for “Smart When technical or economical feasibility of conventional three-
Grids”, which was developed within the European Technology phase technology reaches its limit, HVDC will be the solution
Platform. (fig. 2.1-2). Its main application areas are economical transmis-
sion of bulk power over long distances and interconnection of
Features of a future smart grid such as this can be outlined as asynchronous power grids. Siemens‘s latest innovation in high-
follows: voltage direct current technology is HVDC PLUS. The advantages
tȋFlexible: fulfilling operator needs whilst responding to the of the new system, which employs voltage-sourced converters,
changes and challenges ahead include a compact layout of the converter stations and advanced
tȋAccessible: granting connection access to all network users, control features such as independent active and reactive power
particularly for RES and high-efficiency local generation with control, and black start capability.
zero or low carbon emissions
tȋReliable: assuring and improving security and quality of supply For medium-voltage DC transmission, Siemens offers the SIPLINK
tȋEconomic: providing best value through innovation, efficient system. Depending on the application and the configuration of
energy management and “level playing field” competition and the existing system, SIPLINK will reduce investment, system and
regulation lifecycle costs. The system controls the active power and opti-
mizes voltage stability by providing reactive power (section 2.3).
North system
50 Hz
CL
SC
current limiter cable links
Industrial
energy supply
Power
exchange
Tariff
South system
60 Hz
Power lines
Since the very beginning of electric power supply, overhead lines Investment
costs Total
have constituted the most important component for transmission AC
and distribution systems. Their portion of the overall length of Break-even distance costs
electric circuits depends on the voltage level and on local condi- Total
tions and practice. When environmental or structural factors make 2xSSC* DC
overhead lines impossible, Siemens‘s “underground” transmission costs
DC line
path is the ideal solution. Siemens gas-insulated transmission costs
lines (GIL) are an economically viable alternative to conventional
2xSSC* DC terminal costs
power cables (section 2.5).
AC line
costs
Grid access
Decentralized generating units are custom-engineered, which
involves reconciling contrasting parameters, such as high reli- AC terminal costs –
including grid transformers
ability, low investment costs and efficient transmission, in the
best possible solution. Specific attention is paid to intelligently Transmission distance
designing the “collection systems” at the medium-voltage level, * SSC = Series and shunt compensation of AC lines – required for each section of the line
Solar power
As an alternative power supply for rural electrification, Siemens
integrates solar power in the low-voltage distribution system for
private consumers, as stand-alone systems or even with grid
connection (section 2.7).
2.1.3 Managing Entire Projects expertise and from the work of experienced Siemens engineers
who have already participated in a wide range of projects world-
Project management wide. Working on this basis, Siemens can provide the best
Supplying power is more than just combining a number of technology for projects based on proprietary Siemens compo-
individual components. It calls for large-scale projects, such as nents and additional hardware purchased from reputable ven-
transmission systems or industrial complexes, especially in dors. Siemens experts have the important task of determining
2
economical feasibility of conventional high-voltage AC transmis- transmission AC AC
sion technology have reached their limits. The limits are over-
come by the basic operation principle of an HVDC system, which DC Cable
is the conversion of AC into DC and viceversa by means of high
power converters. Long-distance
OHL transmission
AC AC
Featuring its fast and precise controllability, a Siemens HVDC can DC Line
serve the following purposes:
tȋTransmission of power via very long overhead lines or via long Fig. 2.2-1: Overview of main power transmission applications with
cables where an AC transmission scheme is not economical or HVDC
even not possible
tȋTransmission of power between asynchronous systems
tȋExact control of power flow in either direction 2.2.2 Main Types of HVDC Schemes
tȋEnhancement of AC system stability
tȋReactive power control and support of the AC voltage The main types of HVDC converters are distinguished by their DC
tȋFrequency control circuit arrangements (fig. 2.2-1), as follows:
tȋPower oscillation damping
Back-to-back:
Rectifier and inverter are located in the same station. These
2.2.1 Siemens HVDC Technologies converters are mainly used:
tȋTo connect asynchronous high-voltage power systems or
Depending on the converter type used for conversion between systems with different frequencies
AC and DC, two technologies are available: tȋTo stabilize weak AC links
tȋLine Commutated Converter technology (LCC) based on tȋTo supply more active power where the AC system already is at
thyristor valves the limit of its short circuit capability
tȋVoltage Sourced Converter technology (VSC) based on IGBT tȋFor grid power flow control within synchronous AC systems
valves, also known as HVDC PLUS
Cable transmission:
Both technologies enable Siemens to provide attractive solutions DC cables are the most feasible solution for transmitting power
for most challenging transmission tasks ranging from extra high across the sea to supply islands/offshore platforms from the
voltage bulk power transmission to the connection of systems in mainland and vice versa.
remote locations to main grids; from long distance overhead line
or cable to interconnection of two systems at one location. Long-distance transmission:
Whenever bulk power is to be transmitted over long distances,
DC transmission is the more economical solution compared to
high-voltage AC.
2 Technology
Thyristor valves
The thyristor valves are used to perform the conversion from AC
into DC and thus make up the central component of the HVDC
converter station. The valves are described by the following
features:
tȋRobust design Fig. 2.2-2: Earthquake-proof and fire-retardant thyristor valves in
long-distance transmission in Guizho-Guangdong, China
tȋSafe with respect to fire protection due to consequent use of
fire-retardant, self-extinguishing material
tȋMinimum number of electrical connections and components
avoiding potential sources of failure
tȋParallel cooling for the valve levels using de-ionized cooling
water for maximum utilization of the thyristors
tȋEarthquake-proof design as required (fig. 2.2-2)
tȋDirect Light-Triggered Thyristors (LTT) with wafer-integrated
overvoltage protection – the standard solution for transmission
ratings up to 5,000 MW
tȋElectrically triggered thyristors for bulk power transmission up
to 7,200 MW and above
Filter technology
Filters are used to balance the reactive power of HVDC and
power system and to meet high harmonic performance stan-
dards.
tȋSingle-tuned, double-tuned and triple-tuned as well as high-
pass passive filters, or any combination thereof, can be
installed depending on the specific requirements of a station.
tȋActive AC and DC filters are available for highest harmonic
performance.
tȋWherever possible, identical filters are selected maintaining
the high performance even when one filter is switched off.
Applications
The primary application areas for LCC HVDC are:
tȋEconomical power transmission over long distances
tȋInterconnection of asynchronous power grids without increase
in short-circuit power
tȋSubmarine DC cable transmission
tȋHybrid integration of HVDC into a synchronous AC system for
stability improvement
Fig. 2.2-3: Two times two 400 kV converter systems connected in
tȋIncrease in transmission capacity by conversion of AC lines into series form a ± 800 kV UHV DC station
DC lines
Power ratings
Typical ratings for HVDC schemes include:
tȋBack-to-back: up to typically 1,200 MW
tȋCable transmission: up to 800 MW per HVDC cable
tȋLong-distance transmission: up to typically 5,000 MW
The thyristor valves are equipped with either 5’’ or 6’’ thyristors
depending on the transmission rating (fig. 2.2-5).
Fig. 2.2-4: A 20.8 m long wall bushing is required in order to connect
the 800 kV terminal of the indoor thyristor valves to the
Applications
outdoor HVDC equipment and overhead line
UHV DC transmission is the solution for bulk power transmission
of 5,000 MW or higher over some thousand kilometers. Com-
pared to a 500 kV LCC HVDC system, the Siemens 800 kV UHV
DC reduces line losses by approx. 60 % – an important aspect
with respect to CO2 reduction and operational cost.
Power ratings
The Siemens 800 kV HVDC systems are designed to transmit up
to 7,200 MW over long distances.
UAC
UAC
The high power ratings available today make HVDC PLUS increas- 0
ingly attractive also for projects where LCC HVDC could be used
1
from a technical perspective.
2
n
Features -Ud /2
HVDC PLUS provides important technical and economical
advantages compared to LCC: Fig. 2.2-6: The HVDC PLUS multilevel converters achieve conversion
tȋHVDC technology in the smallest possible space: between AC and DC virtually free from harmonics. The AC
An HVDC PLUS station does not require any filters (fig. 2.2-6). side converter terminal voltage is perfectly sinusoidal
Applications
HVDC PLUS can be applied in all fields of HVDC transmission –
there are no technical restrictions. The advantages of HVDC PLUS
Fig. 2.2-7: The heart of HVDC PLUS is a modular multilevel converter
will be most apparent in circumstances that require the follow-
(MMC) which can be scaled according to the voltage or
ing capabilities:
power requirements. Transbay Cable, USA
tȋBlack start of AC networks
tȋOperation in AC networks with low short-circuit capacity
tȋCompact design, e. g., for offshore platforms
tȋOperation in DC multi-terminal systems or in a DC grid
Power ratings
The design of HVDC PLUS is optimized for power applications in
the range from 30 MW up to 1,000 MW or higher, depending on
the DC voltage.
dedicated PLUSCONTROL comprising the fast Current Control Operator Level SIMATIC WinCC
System (CCS) and the Module Management System (MMS). Local HMI SCADA Interface
Remote HMI
SIMATIC WinCC and SIMATIC TDC are used in a wide range of in-
RCI
dustrial applications including power generation and distribution.
2.2.7 Services
The following set of services completes the Siemens HVDC
portfolio.
Turnkey service
Experienced staff designs, installs and commissions the HVDC
system on a turnkey basis.
Project financing
Siemens is ready to assist customers in finding proper project
Fig. 2.2-10: The control and protection cubicles are intensively tested
financing. in the Siemens laboratories before they are shipped
to site assuring fast and smooth commissioning of the
General services HVDC system
Extended support is provided to customers of Siemens from the
very beginning of HVDC system planning, including:
tȋFeasibility studies
tȋDrafting the specification
tȋProject execution
tȋSystem operation and long-term maintenance
tȋConsultancy on upgrading/replacement of components/
redesign of older schemes, e. g., retrofit of mercury-arc valves
or relay-based controls
Studies during contract execution are conducted on system
engineering, power system stability and transients:
tȋLoad-flow optimization
tȋHVDC systems basic design
tȋSystem dynamic response
For further information:
tȋHarmonic analysis and filter design for LCC HVDC
http://www.siemens.com/energy/hvdc
tȋInsulation and protection coordination
http://www.siemens.com/energy/hvdc-plus
tȋRadio and PLC interference http://www.siemens.com/energy/uhvdc
tȋSpecial studies, if any
2.3 Medium-Voltage DC
Links with SIPLINK
Just like HVDC systems in transmission networks, medium- tȋConnection of ships berthed in port to the more environment-
The system also takes into account the different types of ships,
such as passenger ships, container ships and ferries. Thanks to
its modular basis, any combination of 50 Hz and 60 Hz power
supply systems is possible, as are all voltage levels. Fig. 2.3-3: An innovative solution to counter “harbor smog”: Siemens
technology supplies ships in port with environmentally
friendly electricity from the public network
2.3.2 Power Transfer Between
Distribution Networks 135
Another application area for SIPLINK is the linking of distribution 130
MW
networks (urban networks) where SIPLINK controls the exchange Lower energy
125
of electrical energy between independent networks. The purchases
particular advantage here is that in the event of supply bottle- 120 thanks to
SIPLINK feeder
necks in one network, available power reserves in another 115
network can be used to make up for the shortfall (fig. 2.3-4). 110
The amount of costly energy that needs to be brought in “from
105
outside,” especially during periods of peak demand is decreased.
This allows significant cost savings. Other advantages, aside 100
07:30 h
08:15 h
10:00 h
12:15 h
14:15 h
15:15 h
19:45 h
SIPLINK can also provide a reliable power supply to complex Auxiliaries 3 ~, 400V
7UT 7UT
plants and equipment, for example, in the oil and gas industry or
M Pre- M
chemical industry. charge
2
2x7.5 MVA 2x7.5 MVA
6/1.1 kV ~ 6/1.1 kV
=
SIPLINK provides unlimited options for switching electricity ~ ~
= =
between two or more networks at a medium-voltage level 15 MVA
=
15 MVA
~
exactly according to the individual requirements in the particular Ene 15 MVA
w
rgy fl flo
network. This capability ensures improved supply reliability and ow rgy
Ene
better voltage quality at the distribution level. The protection 2x7.5 MVA
afforded acts in both directions. Sensitive loads are protected 1.1/6 kV
Voltage
recovery by
second feeder
Time
Fig. 2.3-7: Voltage curve on the busbar in the case of a short circuit
in the feeding system with support by SIPLINK
FACTS can also help solve technical problems in the interconnected Static Var Compensator (SVC)
power systems. FACTS are available in parallel connection: Static Var Compensators are a fast and reliable means of control-
tȋStatic Var Compensator (SVC) ling voltage on transmission lines and system nodes (fig. 2.4-1b,
tȋStatic Synchronous Compensator (STATCOM) fig. 2.4-2). The reactive power is changed by switching or con-
or in series connection: trolling reactive power elements connected to the secondary
tȋFixed Series Compensation (FSC) side of the transformer. Each capacitor bank is switched ON and
tȋThyristor Controlled/Protected Series Compensation (TCSC/TPSC)
Parallel compensation
MSC (DN)/MSR
a)
(DN = Damping network)
b) SVC c) SVC PLUS
5
5
1 1
3 3 3 3 6
2
2 2 7
4
Fig. 2.4-1a: Mechanically switched capacitors (MSC) and mechanically switched reactors (MSR) connected to the transmission system
Fig. 2.4-1b: Static Var Compensator (SVC) with three branches (TCR, TSC, filter) and coupling transformer
Fig. 2.4-1c: SVC PLUS connected to the transmission system
OFF by thyristor valves (TSC). Reactors can be either switched For higher system voltages, standard AC transformers are used.
(TSR) or controlled (TCR) by thyristor valves. tȋHybrid solutions with mechanically switched capacitors (MSC)
or reactors (MSR) are available.
When system voltage is low, the SVC supplies capacitive reactive
power and rises the network voltage. When system voltage is
high, the SVC generates inductive reactive power and reduces
SVC PLUS – new generation of STATCOM Fig. 2.4-3: Two SVC PLUS units in New Zealand
SVC PLUS is an advanced STATCOM which uses Voltage-Sourced
Converter (VSC) technology based on Modular Multilevel
Converter (MMC) design.
tȋThe MMC provides a nearly ideal sinusoidal-shaped waveform
on the AC side. Therefore, there is only little – if any – need for
high-frequency filtering and no need for low order harmonic
filtering.
tȋMMC allows for low switching frequencies, which reduces
system losses.
tȋSVC PLUS uses robust, proven standard components, such as
typical AC power transformers, reactors and switchgear.
tȋThe footprint of an SVC PLUS installation is up to 50 % smaller
than that of a conventional SVC installation of the same rating.
Applications
SVC PLUS fulfills the same task as conventional SVCs. Due to the
advanced technology, SVC PLUS is the preferred solution for grid
access solutions (e. g., wind parks). Fig. 2.4-4: SVC PLUS containerized solution
Additional benefits of thyristor-controlled series compensation: Fig. 2.4-6: View of a TCSC system
tȋDamping of power oscillations (POD)
tȋLoad flow control
tȋIncrease in system stability
tȋThyristor-Protected Series Capacitor (TPSC) For further information:
http://www.siemens.com/energy/facts
Series compensation
220 < kV < 800 52 < kV < 800 220 < kV < 800
200 < MVAr < 800 50 < MVAr < 800 100 < MVAr < 800
2 2 2
5 3 4 3 4
L im
6
operational while in service until its end of service life. Due to its
properties and low losses, the overall CO2 impact of GIL is clearly
lower than that of traditional overhead-lines, proving the GIL’s
environment friendliness.
Reliable technology
The gas-insulated transmission line technique is highly reliable
in terms of mechanical and electrical design. Experience over
the course of 35 years shows that after a GIL system is commis-
2
sioned and in service, it runs safely without dielectrical or
mechanical failures. Consequently, Siemens GIL – in service for
decades – did not have to undergo their initially planned revision
after 20 years of operation. Instead, a mere inspection was
sufficient as there was no sign of any weak point. From the
operational experience gained with Siemens GIL and GIB, the
Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) was estimated > 213 years Fig. 2.5-3: Long-term test setup at IPH, Berlin
for a 1-km-long GIL system.
Basic design
In order to meet electrical and mechanical design criteria, gas-
insulated lines have considerable cross-sections of enclosure and
conductor, which ensures high-power transmission ratings and
low losses. Because of the geometry and the gaseous insulating
medium, the systems create only low capacitive loads, so that
compensation of reactive power is not needed, not even for
longer distances. The typical technical data of the GIL are shown
in table 2.5-1.
Testing
GIL systems are tested according to the international standard
IEC 62271-204 “Rigid high-voltage, gas-insulated transmission
lines for voltages of 72.5 kV and above” (fig. 2.5-3, fig. 2.5-4).
Electromagnetic compatibility allows flexible route planning Table 2.5-1: Technical data of GIL
The construction of the GIL results in much smaller electromag-
netic fields than with conventional power transmission systems.
A reduction by a factor of 15 to 20 can be achieved. This makes
GIL suitable to follow new routings through populated areas
(e.g., next to hospitals or residential areas, in the vicinity of
flight monitoring systems, etc.). GIL can be laid in combined
Jointing technique
In order to perfectionize gas tightness and to facilitate laying of
long straight lines, flanges may be avoided as a jointing tech-
nique. Instead, welding the various GIL construction units
ensures highest quality (fig. 2.5-5). Siemens’ welding process is
highly automated by using orbital welding machines. This as
well contributes to high productivity in the welding process and Fig. 2.5-5: Orbital welding of GIL pipes
a short overall installation time. To ensure quality, the welds are
controlled by a new sophisticated ultrasonic testing system
which exceeds even X-ray test standards.
Laying
During the installation process, climatic influences such as rain,
dust, seasons of the year, etc. need to be taken into account. To
meet Siemens’ requirements for cleanness and quality, the laying
techniques of GIL differ from pipeline technology. To protect the
assembly area against dust, particles, humidity and other envi-
ronmental factors, a temporary installation tent is set up for the
installation period. In this way, working conditions are created
which meet the standards of modern GIS factories. After the GIL Fig. 2.5-6: Above ground installation
is installed, these supporting installations are removed com-
pletely, and the entire area is re-naturalized. Thus, GIL are well
suitable for use in environmentally protected areas. Due to the
small width of GIL routes, the system is specifically compatible
with the landscape.
Tunnel installation
Tunnels made up of prefabricated structural elements provide a
quick and easy method of GIL installation especially in densely
populated areas. The tunnel elements are assembled in a dig-
and-cover trench, which is backfilled immediately. The GIL is
installed once the tunnel has been completed. Thus, the open
trench time is minimized. With this method of installation, the
land above the tunnel can be fully restored to other purpose of
use (fig. 2.5-7).
Vertical Installation
Gas-insulated tubular lines can be installed without problems at
any gradient, even vertically. This makes them a top solution
especially for cavern power plants, where large amounts of Fig. 2.5-8: Directly buried GIL
Direct burying
Especially when used in lesser populated areas, directly buried
2
GIL are a perfect solution. For that purpose, the tubes are safe-
guarded by a passive and active corrosion protection. The pas-
sive system comprises a HDPE coating which ensures at least 40
years of protection. The active system additionally provides
cathodic DC protection potential for the aluminum tubes.
Magentic fields measured at the surface above the line are
minimal. The high transmission power of GIL minimizes the
width of trench. The land consumption is lower by approx. 1/3
related to comparable cable installations (fig. 2.5-8). Total length, single phase: > 80,000 m
Above ground installation: > 52,000 m
Tunnel installation: > 23,000 m
References Directly buried installation: > 5,000 m
Siemens has gained experience with gas-insulated transmission
lines at rated voltages of up to 550 kV, and with phase lengths Fig. 2.5-9: References: Gas-insulated transmission lines,
totalling more than 85 km (2011). Implemented projects include status July 2010
GIL in tunnels, sloping galleries, vertical shafts, open-air installa-
tions, as well as directly buried. Flanging as well as welding has
been applied as jointing technique.
The first GIL stretch built by Siemens was the connection of the
turbine generator pumping motor of the pumped storage power
station of Wehr in the Black Forest in Southern Germany with the
switchyard. The 420 kV GIL is laid in a tunnel through a moun-
tain and has a single-phase length of ~4,000 m (fig. 2.5-1). This
connection was commissioned in 1975. One of the later installa-
tions is the Limberg II pumped-storage power station in Kaprun,
Austria, which was commissioned in 2010. Here a GIL system
was laid in a shaft with a gradient of 42 °. It connects the cavern
power plant with the 380 kV overhead line at an altitude of Fig. 2.5-10: GIL laid in shaft with 42 ° gradient
(Limberg, Kaprun, Austria)
about 1,600 meters. The GIL tunnel is used for ventilation
purposes, and serves for emergency exit as well. That resulted in
substantial cost reduction by eliminating the need for a second
shaft in this project (fig. 2.5-10).
2.5.2 Overhead Lines 420 kV network. The thermal capacity of the 420 kV circuits may
reach 2,000 MVA, with a surge impedance load of approximately
Since the very beginning of electric power generation, overhead 600 MVA and a transmission capacity up to 1,200 MVA.
transmission lines (OHL) have constituted the most important
component for transmission and distribution of electric power. Overhead power lines with voltages higher than 420 kV AC will
The portion of overhead transmission lines within a transmission be required in the future to economically transmit bulk electric
Conclusions:
tȋ300 kV voltage level:
The range of 750 and 1,000 km with a power transfer of Power per circuit
2,000
600 MW has been evaluated. The line and converter costs have
been added, and transferred into a cost factor per MW power MW
P
and km of transmission line. The result shows that for long- 1,000
distance HVDC transmission, the 300 kV voltage level is not
the optimal solution (refer to 400 kV below). However, this
voltage level is useful in short HVDC interconnectors such as 700 kV
2
500
the Thailand-Malaysia Interconnector, which has a line length
of 113 km.
tȋ400 kV voltage level:
The range 750, 1,000 and 1,500 km with a power transfer of 200
600, 1,000 and 2,000 MW has been evaluated. The line and 380 kV
converter costs have been added, and transferred into a cost
factor per megawatt power and kilometer of transmission line 100
length. The result shows that the 400 kV voltage level is a
suitable solution for line lengths of 750 to 1,000 km with 220 kV
50
transmitted power of 600 to 1,000 MW.
tȋ500 kV voltage level:
The range 1,000 and 1,500 km with a power transfer of 1,000,
2,000 and 3,000 MW has been evaluated. The line and
20
converter costs have been added, and transferred into a cost
110 kV
factor per megawatt power and kilometer of transmission line
Transmission distance
length. The result shows that the 500 kV voltage level is a 10
suitable solution for the line lengths of 1,000 km to 1,500 km 10 20 50 100 200 km 500
with transmitted power of 1,000 to 2,000 MW. However, the l
400 kV voltage level can also be competitive in this range of Limit of operation
Selection of conductors and earth wires feature affecting the voltage drop and the energy losses along the
Conductors represent the most important component of an over- line and, therefore, the transmission costs. The cross-section has
head power line because they have to ensure economical and to be selected so that the permissible temperatures will not be
reliable transmission and contribute considerably to the total exceeded during normal operation as well as under short-circuit
line costs. For many years, aluminum and its alloys have been condition. With increasing cross-section, the line costs increase,
the prevailing conducting materials for power lines due to the while the costs for losses decrease. Depending on the length of
For aluminum conductors, there are a number of different High-voltage results in correspondingly high-voltage gradients at
designs in use. All-aluminum conductors (AAC) have the highest the conductor’s surface, and in corona-related effects such as
conductivity for a given cross-section; however, they possess visible discharges, radio interference, audible noise and energy
only a low mechanical strength, which limits their application to losses. When selecting the conductors, the AC voltage gradient
short spans and low tensile forces. To increase the mechanical has to be limited to values between 15 and 17 kV/cm. Since the
strength, wires made of aluminum-magnesium-silicon alloys are sound of the audible noise of DC lines is mainly caused at the
adopted. Their strength is approximately twice that of pure positive pole and this sound differs from those of AC lines, the
aluminum. But single-material conductors like all-aluminum and subjective feeling differs as well. Therefore, the maximum surface
aluminum alloy conductors have shown susceptibility to eolian voltage gradient of DC lines is higher than the gradient for AC
vibrations. Compound conductors with a steel core, so-called lines. A maximum value of 25 kV/cm is recommended. The line
aluminum conductor, steel-reinforced (ACSR), avoid this disad- voltage and the conductor diameter are one of the main factors
vantage. The ratio between aluminum and steel ranges from that influence the surface voltage gradient. In order to keep this
4.3:1 to 11:1. An aluminum-to-steel ratio of 6.0 or 7.7 provides gradient below the limit value, the conductor can be divided into
an economical solution. Conductors with a ratio of 4.3 should be subconductors. This results in an equivalent conductor diameter
used for lines installed in regions with heavy wind and ice loads. that is bigger than the diameter of a single conductor with the
Conductors with a ratio higher than 7.7 provide higher conduc- same cross-section. This aspect is important for lines with volt-
tivity. But because of lower conductor strength, the sags are ages of 245 kV and above. Therefore, so-called bundle conduc-
bigger, which requires higher towers. tors are mainly adopted for extra-high-voltage lines. Table 2.5-2
shows typical conductor configurations for AC lines.
Experience has shown that ACSR conductors, just like aluminum
and aluminum alloy conductors, provide the most economical From a mechanical point of view, the conductors have to be
solution and offer a life span greater than 40 years. Conductors designed for everyday conditions and for maximum loads
are selected according to electrical, thermal, mechanical and exerted on the conductor by wind and ice. As a rough figure, an
economic aspects. The electric resistance as a result of the con- everyday stress of approximately 20 % of the conductor rated
ducting material and its cross-section is the most important tensile stress can be adopted, resulting in a limited risk of con-
Table 2.5-2: Electric characteristics of AC overhead power lines (data refer to one circuit of a double-circuit line)
Selection of insulators
Overhead line insulators are subject to electrical and mechanical
stresses, because they have to isolate the conductors form
potential to earth and must provide physical supports. Insulators
must be capable of withstanding these stresses under all condi-
tions encountered in a specific line.
marking
66
Insulator types
Various insulator designs are in use, depending on the require-
ments and the experience with certain insulator types: HTV silicone rubber
tȋCap-and-pin insulators (fig. 2.5-14) are made of porcelain or Epoxy-resin reinforced with
ECR glass fibers,
4,520
pre-stressed glass. The individual units are connected by (electrical grade corrosion
fittings of malleable cast iron or forged iron. The insulating Ø151 resistant)
bodies are not puncture-proof, which is the reason for a
relatively high number of insulator failures. Y Ø43
66
The composite insulator is made of a glass fiber reinforced Design of creepage distance and air gaps
epoxy rod. The glass fibers applied are ECR glass fibers that are The general electrical layout of insulation is ruled by the volt-
resistant to brittle fracture (ECR = electrical grade corrosion ages to be withstood and the pollution to which the insulation is
resistant glass fibers). In order to avoid brittle fracture, the glass subjected. The standards IEC 60071-1 and IEC 60071-2 as well
fiber rod must additionally be sealed very carefully and durably as the technical report IEC 60815, which provides four pollution
against moisture. This is done by application of silicone rubber. classes (the new version will have five classes), give guidance for
The silicone rubber has two functions within this insulator type:
the design of the insulation.
Cross arm
Fig. 2.5-17a: I-shaped suspension insulator set for 245 kV Table 2.5-3: Guideline for specific creepage distances for different
insulator materials
Cross arm
Fig. 2.5-17b: Double tension insulator set for 245 kV (elevation, top)
Fig. 2.5-17c: Double tension insulator set for 245 kV (plan, bottom)
sible and a narrow right-of-way, which can only be met by tȋConductor configuration
compromises. The minimum clearance of the conductors tȋElectric field requirements
depends on the voltage and the conductor sag. In ice-prone tȋInsulation design
areas, conductors should not be arranged vertically, in order to
avoid conductor clashing after ice shedding. For DC lines, two basic outlines (monopole and bipole), with
variations should be considered. Fig. 2.5-19i–l show examples
For AC lines comprising more than two circuits, there are many Various loading conditions specified in the respective national
possibilities for configuring the supports. In the case of circuits and international standards have to be met when designing
with differing voltages, those circuits with the lower voltage towers. The climatic conditions, the earthquake requirements
should be arranged in the lowermost position (fig. 2.5-19g). and other local environmental factors are the next determining
factors for the tower design.
DC lines are mechanically designed according to the normal
practice for typical AC lines. The differences from AC Line layout When designing the support, a number of conditions have to be
are the: considered. High wind and ice loads cause the maximum forces
to act on suspension towers. In ice-prone areas, unbalanced
Fig. 2.5-19: (a–h): tower configurations for high-voltage lines (AC); (i–l): tower configurations for high-voltage lines (DC)
Concrete blocks or concrete piers are in use for poles that exert
bending moments on the foundation. For towers with four legs,
a foundation is provided for each individual leg (fig. 2.5-21). Pad
and chimney and concrete block foundations require good
bearing soil conditions without groundwater.
After the route design stage and approval procedure, the final
line route is confirmed. Following this confirmation and Pad-and-chimney Auger-bored
foundation foundation
approval, the longitudinal profile has to be surveyed, and all
crossings over roads, rivers, railways, buildings and other over-
head power lines have to be identified. The results are evaluated
with a specialized computer program developed by Siemens that
calculates and plots the line profile. The towers are spotted by
means of the same program, which takes into account the
conductor sags under different conditions, the ground clear-
2
ances, objects crossed by the line, technical data of the available
tower family, specific cost for towers and foundations and cost Rock anchor Pile foundation
for compensation of landowners. foundation
2 16.00
292.00
292.00
282.00
279.00
1 2
WA+0 T+0
DA DH
255.00
232.50
175.00 o. D. 286.50 276.50 273.50 280.00 283.00 275.50 270.50 270.00 265.00
281.50 273.00 280.50 284.50 275.00 270.50 272.50 267.50 264.00
190.00° M21
60.0m
3
T+8 Arable land Stream
f40 = 17.46
2
DH
fE = 16.52 Meadow Road
17.30 16.75
16.38 15.86 Earth wire: ACSR 265/35 * 80.00 N/mm2
Conductor: ACSR 265/35 * 80.00 N/mm2
Equivalent sag: 11.21 m at 40 °C
7.55 Equivalent span: 340.44 m
11.38
8.44
12.29
Bushes, height up to 5 m
263.00
24.20
f40 = 5.56
fE = 5.87
4
WA+0
DA
223.00
1.45
16.00
270.00
292.50
at km 10.543 169.00°
2 160
160
64
64
158
88 127 153
73
Fig. 2.5-24: 300kV HVDC interconnector from Thailand to Malaysia Fig. 2.5-25a: 400 kV HVDC Basslink project in Australia
(bipole transmission line) (monopole transmission line)
Fig. 2.5-25b, c: 400 kV HVDC Basslink project in Australia (monopole transmission line)
essential part of Smart Grid and Super Grid developments (refer Moreover, an earthing concept and coordination of the insula-
to chapter 1). Grid access solutions involve reconciling con- tion for the entire grid connection must also be defined. The
trasting parameters, such as high reliability, low investment static and dynamic characteristics must be checked and the
costs and efficient transmission, in the best possible solution. reactive power compensation defined (static and dynamic). The
For example, in the design of high-voltage offshore platforms for resonance phenomenon for all elements should be investigated,
offshore wind farm connections to the grid (fig. 2.6-1), special from the transmission system itself to cables, transformers,
attention is paid to intelligent collection systems at the medium- reactors, wind turbines and capacitor banks. Compatibility and
voltage level, followed by the design of the high-voltage trans- conformity with grid code requirements must be established, as
mission system and the onshore receiving substation and its well as a control and protection system.
reactive compensation to meet local grid code requirements.
High-Voltage Offshore Platform
Turnkey proposition and project execution Siemens Wind Power Offshore Substation ( WIPOS™) is the
By offering a turnkey solution (fig. 2.6-2), Siemens provides a optimal solution that ensures long-term offshore operation. With
holistic setup of a complex project involving project administra- WIPOS, Siemens marks an innovative role in the design, engi-
tion, design and engineering services, subcontracting, procure- neering and installation of offshore platforms (see section 2.6.1
ment and expediting of equipment, inspection of equipment References).
prior to delivery, shipment, transportation, control of schedule
and quality, pre-commissioning and completion, performance- In the offshore wind industry, the word ‘platform’ reflects two
guarantee testing, and training of owner’s operating and/or construction entities, namely the ‘topside’ where all the high-
maintenance personnel. voltage, medium-voltage and operational equipment are
installed, and the ‘foundation’ entity which serves as the base
For both AC and DC transmission technologies, Siemens offers a for the topside. Siemens offers optimized designs for both
broad range of solutions. The technical constraints of a decentral- entities by joining workforces with offshore, maritime and
ized generating unit or remote loads in connection with AC or DC shipyard experts.
transmission systems are well known and addressed accordingly.
The engineering expertise of Siemens is all inclusive from the WIPOS (fig. 2.6-3) serves as an interface between the wind
conceptual and basic design to digital and real-time simulations, turbines and the mainland, whereby power harvested from wind
therefore assuming responsibility for presenting the solution to is bundled and then passes through the export cables to reach
the grid owner which is essential in executing such projects. the point of connection onshore.
Fig. 2.6-1: A comprehensive overview for both AC and DC offshore wind grid connections
2.6.1 References
Fig. 2.6-4: The offshore wind farm Lillgrund, consisting of 48
wind turbines, each 2.3 MW, from Siemens Wind Power, is
installed in Oresund. Its location is on Swedish national waters,
roughly 7 km away from the Swedish coast line near to the City
Fig. 2.6-5: The offshore wind farms Lynn and Inner Dowsing,
consisting of 54 wind turbines, each 3.6 MW, from Siemens
Wind Power, are located in the Greater Wash area, on Great
Britain national waters. This is roughly 5 km away from the coast
line of Skegness, Lincolnshire. The owner is Centrica Renewable
Energy Ltd., U.K.
The grid connection was energized in autumn 2009, with all 100
wind turbines running by autumn 2010. Now the offshore wind
2
farm provides enough energy for approximately 215,000 homes,
and reduces the CO2 emissions by 830,000 tons a year.
Now the offshore wind farm provides enough energy for approx-
imately 350,000 homes and reduces the CO2 emissions by
1,350,000 tons a year.
BorWin2
Bremen
HelWin1
Bremen
SylWin1
Bremen
HelWin2
Bremen
2.7 Solar Power Solutions for extremely low losses. Master/slave operation has the advan-
tage that the inverters can always be operated close to the
optimum efficiency range. If, for example, solar irradiation
Photovoltaic (PV) systems convert sunlight directly into electrical decreases, superfluous inverters can be switched off automati-
energy without any environmentally harmful emissions, and cally and the remaining inverters loaded more effectively so that
thus reduce dependence on expensive and ending fossil energy the maximum possible electricity yield can flow into the grid. At
obtained by feeding solar electricity into the grid. Requirements for PV systems for buildings
When planning a photovoltaic system, numerous structural
The three main application areas are: engineering requirements must be taken into account, because
tȋGrid-connected photovoltaic systems: often no allowance was made for installing photovoltaic systems
These photovoltaic systems (from 5 kWp to 50 MWp) are when a building was first constructed. For many years, Siemens
connected to the grid and generate alternating current that is has been developing highly flexible structural and electrical
fed into the grid or used directly on the site. engineering solutions for specific applications for the production
tȋStand-alone photovoltaic systems: of solar electricity. The following factors directly influence
Stand-alone photovoltaic systems equipped with batteries for efficiency and hence cost-effectiveness when planning and
storing electricity are used to supply power to areas that have installing a PV system:
no connection to the grid. tȋLocation of the system (maximum solar irradiation)
tȋHybrid systems for back-up supply in regions where the public tȋOrientation of the system (due south is optimal)
supply is unreliable. tȋQuality of the products (optimally matched)
tȋEngineering excellence (electrical/mechanical combination)
Components and mode of operation
A grid-connected PV system typically consists of the following The following building integrated systems are available:
components: tȋFacade-mounted system (fig. 2.7-1a)
tȋSolar modules tȋRoof-mounted system (fig. 2.7-1c)
tȋCabling tȋFlat-roof installation
tȋInverters and switchgears tȋSpecial structural engineering solutions (fig. 2.7-1b)
tȋMetering
tȋConnection to the public grid Planning guidelines
When planning a grid-connected PV system (fig. 2.7-2),
Solar cells absorb sunlight and transform it into electrical the following points must be clarified in advance:
energy, thereby generating direct current. Several solar cells tȋChoice of the ideal application and orientation
wired together form a solar module. Solar cells are usually (solar irradiation)
manufactured from either monocrystalline or polycrystalline tȋChoice of the ideal system:
silicon. The use of thin-layer modules is also becoming increas- – Deciding on the total capacity of the system,
ingly common. The modules are connected in series and com- depending on the investment volume and the area
bined into arrays. The arrays are connected to the inverter via available for the installation
several connection boxes. Centralized inverter combinations – Drawing up a financing plan
convert the direct current generated by the solar modules into – Statical calculation of the load-bearing capacity
alternating current that than can be fed into the grid. Optimum of the roof or facade
electrical and structural engineering forms the basis for max- – Electrical and mechanical engineering
imum efficiency and a high degree of reliability. – Determining whether feeding into the grid is possible and
making an application to the local distribution network
SINVERTsolar inverter units operator
The core elements of grid-connected PV systems are the power
inverters. With its SINVERTsolar range of inverter units, Siemens Electricity from roof and facade-mounted systems is usually fed
offers certified series-manufactured products that comply with into the low-voltage or medium-voltage system of the local
all important national and international safety standards. Thanks distribution network operator as a 3-phase current. The type of
to their electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) compliant construc- current that is fed into the grid should be clarified with the local
tion, they are even suitable for operation in areas susceptible to distribution network operator in each individual case.
electromagnetic interference.
Planning process
Large subsystems up to 1.6 MVA peak capacity (master/slave Siemens supports the planning process with advice from experts
combination) can also be implemented with SINVERTsolar about economical and technical aspects and basic and detailed
inverters. The devices, which are based on IGBT technology, can engineering. Siemens can also help to devise the financing plan.
attain an efficiency of up to 97 %, because they are optimized Projects, located in the Netherlands, can offer the following
B
A
B A
Cable sizes:
A = 35 mm 2
B = 70 mm 2
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
2.8 SIESTORAGE
2.8.1 The Modular Energy Storage
System for a Sustainable Energy
Supply
2 The challenge: reliable energy supply! Distributed, renewable
energy sources, such as wind turbines and photovoltaic plants,
are making a bigger and bigger contribution to the energy mix
of the public power supply (fig. 2.8-1). However, as the amount
of electrical power they generate cannot be predicted, their
increasing use is creating new challenges in terms of system
stability, integration into the power supply system, operating Fig. 2.8-1: SIESTORAGE offers solutions for distribution systems with
reserves, quality of voltage and supply, as well as peak load a high share of distributed renewable energy sources
management.
The answer: SIESTORAGE – Siemens Energy Storage – the Powerful combination: Power system Smart Network Control
sustainable and eco-friendly solution! Energy storage systems Cutting-edge power
electronics and high-power Medium-voltage switchgear
are the right solution in all these cases. SIESTORAGE ensures a Li-ion batteries
sufficient amount of available reserve power for balancing and Transformer System control
Variable through modularity:
regulation purposes, especially of renewable energy sources,
In power and capacity with Filter
and creates higher system stability for industry, buildings and parallel connection of
SIPLINK
combined energy storage AC/DC Inverter
infrastructure. Energy that is stored by the system can be control
cabinets on the AC side inverter
regained in case of demand. Generation outages can be com-
pensated for minutes and even for hours on end. SIESTORAGE Adequate capacity:
Data logging
Up to about 2 MWh
combines cutting-edge power electronics for power system
in series
Li-ion
n cells
battery Battery
applications with high-performance lithium-ion-batteries. With a Top performance:
system management
compact battery and converter cabinet as the smallest unit, the Modular up to about 8 MW
Drawer for up to
8 battery modules
Drawer for up to
8 battery modules
Battery module 2
Battery management
SIPLINK converter
Combined energy storage cabinet (batteries + converter) Fully equipped energy storage cabinet
for up to 16 battery modules up to 24 kWh / 144 kWp including power electronics
Fig. 2.8-3: Batteries and control electronics are inserted in cabinets as plug-in units, thus facilitates the exchange of individual units
Usable capacity*
16 kWh to 24 kWh
depending on battery type
Rated power
32 kW to 96 kW depending
on battery type
Usable capacity*
48 kWh to 72 kWh
depending on battery type
Rated power
96 kW to 288 kW
Fig. 2.8-4: The integration of the energy storage cabinets into a con- depending on battery type
tainerized enclosure ensures a particularly easy application
Usable capacity*
Up to 12 energy storage cabinets are connected to one control 80 kWh to 120 kWh
depending on battery type
cabinet and one system connection cabinet. This results in
additional redundancy in the control system of larger units Rated power
(tab 2.8-1). 160 kW to 480 kW
depending on battery type
Integrated containerized solution
Up to 24 energy storage cabinets can be installed in a container.
Systems larger than 2 MVA/500 kWh can be scaled with several Usable capacity*
Up to 500 kWh in standard
containers. The storage unit can be connected to the MV system container
with a medium-voltage transformer and switchgear. The integra-
tion of the cabinets into a containerized enclosure ensures a Rated power
1 MVA to 2 MVA depending
particularly easy application (fig. 2.8-4). It is easy to transport
on battery type
the containers, and they can be positioned flexibly. An air-condi-
tioning system makes smooth operation possible even at
*The usable capacity is guaranteed to the end of the service life
extreme ambient temperatures. Comprehensive safety functions
ensure the safety of the system and the operators. Tab. 2.8-1: A modular solution for each application
Integration of renewables
Ever more renewable energy sources are connected to the
Fig. 2.8-5: SIESTORAGE can be Fig. 2.8-6: SIESTORAGE ensures
distribution system. Their performance fluctuates naturally. This used for performance high reliability and
can disturb the balance between generation and load. buffering at electric quality of the energy
SIESTORAGE can compensate for those imbalances. SIESTORAGE vehicle charging supply for industrial
stores power when generation is high, and delivers it in case of stations production processes
insufficient power generation. The power supply systems are
relieved, and renewable energy becomes more calculable Frequency regulation
(fig. 2.8-7). Imbalances between generation and load lead to fluctuations in
power frequency. This can lead to unstable power systems.
Microgrids System operators have to keep the power frequency stable and
Microgrids with renewable generation require a self-sufficient, provide short-term compensation for generation failures.
reliable supply of energy. SIESTORAGE stores energy in case of SIESTORAGE stores energy during peak generation, and provides
high generation, and releases it on demand. This makes the it as balancing power in case it is required. SIESTORAGE contrib-
system an eco-friendly alternative to diesel generators. Thanks utes to frequency regulation. This means that system operators
to SIESTORAGE‘s black start capability, the power supply can be can ensure a secure power supply.
re-established without difficulties after an outage. A reliable
power supply for microgrids is ensured. Peak load management
Industrial businesses and utilities agree on fixed prices for power
T & D deferral and maximum load. However, production factors can cause peak
The growing demand for energy and the rising share of renew- loads. Even a single case of exceeding the agreed maximum load
ables can make power supply systems reach the limits of their causes high costs. The high purchase costs can be avoided with
transmission capacity. This makes the costly extension of power SIESTORAGE. SIESTORAGE stores energy in times of low energy
supply systems necessary. In case of imminent overloads, consumption. It can provide energy for peak loads with next to
SIESTORAGE stores energy that cannot be transmitted over the no delay. This means that industrial businesses can avoid the
power supply system. It is fed back into the system during low expensive exceeding of the agreed maximum load.
load levels to avoid a system overload. This means that existing
system capacities can be utilized better, and that a costly exten-
sion of the power supply system can be avoided.
Power quality
System operators have to ensure a uniformly high quality of
power. Short drops and variations of power have to be compen-
sated. SIESTORAGE reliably compensates for voltage fluctuations.
This is how system operators can ensure a uniformly high power
quality.
Critical power
Data centers, hospitals and industrial processes require an
absolutely reliable power supply. An outage of only a few milli-
seconds can have serious consequences. SIESTORAGE helps to
preserve this reliably. In case of outages, single consumers or
parts of the power supply system are supplied with previously
stored energy. SIESTORAGE ensures secure power supply for Fig. 2.8-7: SIESTORAGE ensures self-sufficient energy supply for
critical facilities. microgrids with renewable generation
2.9 SIEHOUSE
2.9.1 Compact, Mobile Plug-and-Play
E-Houses for Power Distribution
Fig. 2.9-3: A fully integrated solution: SIEHOUSE is a fully integrated power distribution system that is completely engineered, manufactured,
assembled and tested at the Siemens facilities, and then joined on site
Resistant to environmental impact Fig. 2.9-4: 19 SIEHOUSE E-houses to supply power for oil pipelines in
In some industries, it is not enough to simply install electrical Colombia (ECOPETROL)
equipment inside a building in order to protect it from external
influences. A number of reasons make it advisable to accommo-
date the equipment separately, for example, a high degree of
particles in the air, as well as potential dangers in case of direct
contact with hazardous environments and substances. In such
cases, SIEHOUSE E-houses are a simple, efficient and econom-
ical solution. The interlocking wall and roof panels are a barrier
against environmental influences. External particles are kept
outside thanks to HVAC overpressures. Enclosure integrity can
be enhanced with additional weatherproofing. The coating
provides outstanding resistance to chemicals, moisture and
abrasion. The enclosure can also be customized for extreme
ambient temperatures and humid environments. E-houses can
be designed for high wind speeds (up to 240 km/h), the use in
seismic zone 4, and high snow loads. Fireproof exterior walls
that protect switchgear from transformer failures are also
available. Special exterior finishes help match the E-houses to
Fig. 2.9-5: 3 split modules SIEHOUSE for Pearl GTL in Qatar, jointly
its surroundings.
developed by QP and Shell
pressure relief, arc suppression ducts, batteries, uninterruptible Polycarbonate Roof trim
viewing
power supply (UPS), and power compensation devices (fig. 2.9-9). window with
safety glass Interior wall liner
MV switchgear
Battery room
Turnkey solutions all over the world The benefits of SIEHOUSE solutions
To deliver an E-house that is perfectly suited to its purpose is the tȋComprehensive, integrated range of products
one thing. But it is equally important to ensure its reliable
operation throughout the entire lifecycle, even if it is exposed to
the most adverse conditions. Siemens provides a single-source
tȋApplication expertise
tȋGlobal experience
tȋProven Siemens products
2
solution for E-houses and electrical equipment requirements. tȋReliability and safety
Siemens’s know-how in energy supply is based on decades of tȋOne contact for the entire project
experience and constant innovation. We provide integrated tȋFinancing support
solutions all over the world – from engineering and network
planning to project management and all the way to installation,
pre-commissioning, commissioning and additional services.
Siemens supports the local creation of value and ensures that a
reliable contact person is in close reach of every project. The
Siemens experts bring their experience in project management,
financial services, and lifecycle management to every project.
This enables them to consider all aspects of safety, logistics and
environmental protection.
Fig. 2.9-10: From engineering to after sales service: complete integration from a single source
transformer Civil
Control
system (MV/HV) Control and Engineering
–ȋPower plants (in load centers) monitoring, Buildings,
measurement, roads,
–ȋRenewable power plants (e.g., windfarms) protection, etc. foundations
tȋTransform voltage levels within the high-voltage system Design
Fire
(HV/HV) AC/DC s protection
e
auxiliari Env
tȋStep down to a medium-voltage level of a distribution system iron
ge Ancillary pro menta
(HV/MV) Sur rters equipment
tec
tion l
e
div g Lig
tȋInterconnection in the same voltage level. in ht
rth
les
ni
Carrie
Ea stem ng
Ve
ab
ables
signal c nd
equipm
sy
nti
rc
la
Scope
lat
we
r-freq
Contro
ion
Po
High-voltage substations comprise not only the high-voltage
ent
u.
equipment which is relevant for the functionality in the power
supply system. Siemens plans and constructs high-voltage
substations comprising high-voltage switchgear, medium-
voltage switchgear, major components such as high-voltage
equipment and transformers, as well as all ancillary equipment Fig. 3.1-1: Engineering of high-voltage switchgear
such as auxiliaries, control systems, protective equipment and so
on, on a turnkey basis or even as general contractor. The instal-
lations supplied worldwide range from basic substations with a
single busbar to interconnection substations with multiple All planning documentation is produced on modern CAD/CAE
busbars, or a breaker-and-a-half arrangement for rated voltages systems; data exchange with other CAD systems is possible via
up to 800 kV, rated currents up to 8,000 A and short-circuit interfaces. By virtue of their active involvement in national and
currents up to 100 kA. The services offered range from system international associations and standardization bodies, our
planning to commissioning and after-sales service, including engineers are always fully informed of the state of the art, even
training of customer personnel. before a new standard or specification is published.
Depending on the answers, either AIS or GIS can be the right Fig. 3.1-2: Air-insulated outdoor switchgear
choice, or even a compact or hybrid solution.
Busbars are the part of the substation where all the power is
concentrated from the incoming feeders, and distributed to the
outgoing feeders. That means that the reliability of any high-
voltage substation depends on the reliability of the busbars
present in the power system. An outage of any busbar can have
dramatic effects on the power system. An outage of a busbar
leads to the outage of the transmission lines connected to it. As
a result, the power flow shifts to the surviving healthy lines that
are now carrying more power than they are capable of. This
leads to tripping of these lines, and the cascading effect goes on
until there is a blackout or similar situation. The importance of
busbar reliability should be kept in mind when taking a look at
the different busbar systems that are prevalent. Fig. 3.1-4: Special single busbar, H-scheme (1 BB)
are increasingly used to replace wire conductors for busbars and Symbols
feeder lines. They can handle rated currents up to 8,000 A and
3
Generating of:
short-circuit currents up to 80 kA without difficulty. Other
t Material lists Completion of: “Delta engineering“
influences on the switchyard design are the availability of land, tEquipment lists 3D-models Adapting to the
the lie of the land, the accessibility and location of incoming and tTerminal diagrams schematic customer
tWiring lists diagrams requirements
outgoing overhead-lines, and the number of transformers and tCable lists
voltage levels. A one-line or two-line arrangement, and possibly
a U-arrangement, may be the proper solution. Each outdoor
Fig. 3.1-10: Database-supported engineering
switchgear installation, especially for step-up substations in
connection with power stations and large transformer substa-
tions in the extra-high-voltage transmission system, is therefore
unique, depending on the local conditions. HV/MV transformer
substations of the distribution system, with repeatedly used
equipment and a scheme of one incoming and one outgoing line
as well as two transformers together with medium-voltage
switchgear and auxiliary equipment, are usually subject to a
standardized design.
Preferred designs
Conceivable designs include certain preferred versions that are
often dependent on the type and arrangement of the busbar
disconnectors.
H-arrangement
The H-arrangement is preferred for use in applications for
feeding industrial consumers. Two overhead-lines are connected
with two transformers and interlinked by a double-bus sectional-
izer. Thus, each feeder of the switchyard can be maintained
without disturbance of the other feeders (fig. 3.1-11, fig. 3.1-12).
Fig. 3.1-11: H-arrangement 123 kV, GIS (3D view – HIS)
H-arrangement
The H-arrangement is preferred for use in applications for feeding
industrial consumers. Two overhead-lines are connected with two
transformers and interlinked by a double-bus sectionalizer. Thus,
each feeder of the switchyard can be maintained without distur-
bance of the other feeders (fig. 3.1-13, fig. 3.1-14).
SECTION A-A
BUSBAR 1 BUSBAR 2
9,000
6,300
3 18,500 12,000
54,300
23,800
A
20,000
4,500
5,500
SECTION A-A
3,000
BUSBAR 1 BUSBAR 2
13,000
9,000
A
16,000
SECTION A-A
4,000
BUSBAR SYSTEM
18,000
3
9,000 32,000 15,000 15,000 21,000 27,000 5,000
A
18,000
SECTION A-A
BUSBAR 1 BUSBAR 2
7,000
3
27,000
31,000 20,250 19,000 33,000 27,000 32,500 27,000 33,000 29,300 16,700
268,750
32,000
A A
3
24,000 21,500 15,000 58,500 53,000 58,500 15,000 21,500 22,000
289,000
A A
8.3 m
improved and the drive unit is weatherproofed. Pre-assembled
components reduce installation times. In SIMOVER, all compo-
nents of a high-voltage outdoor switchgear bay, including the
2m
2m
1.7
m
cubicle, implementation costs are considerably reduced. All
1.7
2m
2m
m
components needed for the full scope of functioning of the mov-
able circuit-breaker can be obtained from a single source, so
there is no need for customer-provided items, coordination work
is greatly reduced and interface problems do not even arise
25 m
Planning principles
For air-insulated outdoor substations of open design, the
following planning principles must be taken into account:
tȋHigh reliability
–ȋReliable mastering of normal and exceptional stresses
–ȋProtection against surges and lightning strikes
–ȋProtection against surges directly on the equipment
concerned (e.g., transformer, HV cable)
tȋGood clarity and accessibility
–ȋClear conductor routing with few conductor levels
–ȋFree accessibility to all areas (no equipment located at
3 inaccessible depth)
–ȋAdequate protective clearances for installation, maintenance
and transportation work
–ȋAdequately dimensioned transport routes
tȋPositive incorporation into surroundings
–ȋAs few overhead conductors as possible
–ȋTubular instead of wire-type busbars
–ȋUnobtrusive steel structures
–ȋMinimal noise and disturbance level
–ȋEMC earthing system for modern control and protection
tȋFire precautions and environmental protection
–ȋAdherence to fire protection specifications and use of flame-
retardant and non-flammable materials
–ȋUse of environmentally compatible technology and
products.
16 m
40 m
3.1.6 Gas-Insulated Switchgear for More than 45 years of experience with gas-insulated switchgear
3
Where the availability of land is low and/or prices are high, 2000 Introduction of the trendsetting switchgear concept HIS
(Highly Integrated Switchgear) for extension, retrofit and new
e.g., in urban centers, industrial conurbations, mountainous compact AIS substations
regions with narrow valleys or in underground power stations,
2005 First GIS with electrical endurance capability (class E2)
gas-insulated switchgear is replacing conventional switchgear
because of its very small space requirements. 2009 New generation of cast resin insulators for GIS
tȋFull protection against contact with live parts: 2010 New 420 kV / 80 kA GIS – powerful and compact
The surrounding metal enclosure affords maximum safety 2011 New 170 kV / 63 kA GIS – powerful and compact
for personnel under all operating and fault conditions. 2011 New generation of 420 kV / 63 kA GIS – powerful and compact
tȋProtection against pollution:
Its metal enclosure fully protects the switchgear interior Table 3.1-1: Siemens experience with gas-insulated switchgear
against environmental effects such as salt deposits in coastal
regions, industrial vapors and precipitates, and sandstorms.
The compact switchgear can be installed as an indoor as well This objective is attained only by incorporating all processes in
as an outdoor solution. the quality management system, which has been introduced and
tȋFree choice of installation site: certified according to EN 29001/DIN EN ISO 9001.
The small site area required for gas-insulated switchgear saves
expensive grading and foundation work, e.g., in permafrost Siemens GIS switchgear meets all performance, quality and
zones. Another advantage is the short erection time because reliability demands, including:
of the use of prefabricated and factory tested bay units. tȋCompact and low-weight design:
tȋProtection of the environment: Small building dimensions and low floor loads, a wide range of
The necessity to protect the environment often makes it options in the utilization of space, and less space taken up by
difficult to erect outdoor switchgear of conventional design. the switchgear.
Gas-insulated switchgear, however, can almost always be tȋSafe encapsulation:
designed to blend well with the surroundings. Gas-insulated An outstanding level of safety based on new manufacturing
metal-enclosed switchgear is, because of the modular design, methods and optimized shape of enclosures.
very flexible and meets all requirements for configuration that tȋEnvironmental compatibility:
exist in the network design and operating conditions. No restrictions on choice of location due to minimum space
requirement; extremely low noise and EMC emission as well
Each circuit-breaker bay includes the full complement of discon- as effective gas sealing system (leakage < 0.1 % per year per
necting and earthing switches (regular or make-proof), instru-
ment transformers, control and protection equipment, and
interlocking and monitoring facilities commonly used for this
type of installation.
gas compartment). Modern spring mechanisms that are SF6-insulated switchgear for up to 170 kV, type 8DN8
currently available for the whole GIS 8D product spectrum 3-phase enclosures are used for switchgear type 8DN8 in order to
eliminates the need for hydraulic oil. achieve small and compact component dimensions. The low bay
tȋEconomical transport: weight ensures low floor loading, and helps to reduce the cost
Simplified fast transport and reduced costs, because of a of civil works and to minimize the footprint. The compact low-
minimum of shipping units. weight design allows installing it almost anywhere. Capital cost
tȋLow operating costs: is reduced by using smaller buildings or existing ones, e.g., when
The switchgear is practically maintenance-free, e.g., contacts of replacing medium-voltage switchyards with the 145 kV GIS.
circuit-breakers and disconnectors are designed for extremely
long endurance, motor operating mechanisms are lubricated for The bay is based on a circuit-breaker mounted on a supporting
life, the enclosure is corrosion-free. This ensures that the first frame (fig. 3.1-33). A special multifunctional cross-coupling
inspection is required only after 25 years of operation. module combines the functions of the disconnector and earthing
tȋHigh reliability: switch in a 3-position switching device. It can be used as:
The longstanding experience of Siemens in design, production tȋAn active busbar with an integrated disconnector and work-in-
and commissioning – more than 330,000 bay operating years progress earthing switch (fig. 3.1-33, pos. 3 and 5)
in over 28,000 bay installations worldwide – is testament to the tȋAn outgoing feeder module with an integrated disconnector
fact that the Siemens products are highly reliable. The mean and work-in-progress earthing switch (fig. 3.1-33, pos. 9)
time between failures (MTBF) amounts to > 900 bay years for tȋA busbar sectionalizer with busbar earthing.
major faults. A quality management system certified according
to ISO 9001, which is supported by highly qualified employees, Cable termination modules can be equipped with either conven-
ensures high quality throughout the whole process chain from tional sealing ends or the latest plug-in connectors (fig. 3.1-33,
the offer/order process to the on-site commissioning of the GIS. pos. 10). Flexible 1-pole modules are used to connect overhead-
tȋSmooth and efficient installation and commissioning: lines and transformers with a splitting module that links the
Transport units are fully assembled, tested at the factory and 3-phase enclosed switchgear to the 1-pole connections.
filled with SF6 gas at reduced pressure. Coded plug connectors
are used to cut installation time and minimize the risk of Thanks to their compact design, the completely assembled and
cabling failures. factory-tested bays can be shipped as a single transport unit.
tȋRoutine tests: Fast erection and commissioning on site ensure the highest
All measurements are automatically documented and stored in possible quality.
the electronic information system, which provides quick access
to measured data for years.
1 3 5
7
3
2
2 8
3 9
9
7
4 8
5
10 10
1 Integrated local control cubicle 6 Stored-energy spring mechanism with circuit-breaker control unit
2 Current transformer 7 Voltage transformer
3 Busbar II with disconnector and earthing switch 8 High-speed earthing switch
4 Interrupter unit of the circuit-breaker 9 Outgoing feeder module with disconnector and earthing switch
5 Busbar I with disconnector and earthing switch 10 Cable sealing end
Fig. 3.1-34: 8DN8 GIS for a rated voltage of 145 kV Fig. 3.1-35: 8DN8 HIS for a rated voltage of 145 kV for onshore wind
power access to the system
2 14 4 68 5 3 10 7 12
6
M 35 M
M 8
3 1
M 9
11
M 7
12 10
13
gas-tight bushings
gas-permeable bushings 1 11 9 13
1. Circuit-breaker interrupter unit 5. Busbar disconnector II 10. Make-proof earthing switch (high-speed)
2. Stored-energy spring mechanism 6. Busbar II 11. Current transformer
with circuit-breaker control unit 7. Outgoing feeder disconnector 12. Voltage transformer
3. Busbar disconnector I 8. Work-in-progress earthing switch 13. Cable sealing end
4. Busbar I 9. Work-in-progress earthing switch 14. Integrated local control cubicle
1 2 3 4 5 7 6 10 11
7
3
13
M 4 M 5
M 6
12 8
9
9
3
M 10
M 11
14
13 12
8
14
gas-tight bushings
gas-permeable bushings
3
1 M
M
10
4 6
M
2
7
3
8
9
5
Special arrangements
Gas-insulated switchgear – usually accommodated in buildings
(such as a tower-type substation) – is expedient wherever land is
very expensive or restricted, or where necessitated by ambient
conditions. When it comes to smaller switching stations, or in
cases of expansion where installation in a building does not
provide any advantage, installing the substation in a container is
a good solution.
accommodated in the container. This allows largely independent A general SLD and a sketch showing the general arrangement of
operation of the installation on site. Containerized switchgear is the substation will be part of a proposal. Any switchgear quoted
pre-assembled at the factory and ready for operation. The only will be complete and will form a functional, safe and reliable sys-
on-site work required is setting up the containers, fitting the tem after installation, even if certain parts required to achieve
exterior system parts and making the external connections. this have not been specifically been included in the inquiry.
Shifting the switchgear assembly work to the factory enhances tȋApplicable standards
quality and operational reliability. Mobile containerized All equipment is designed, built, tested and installed according
switchgear has a small footprint, and usually fits well within the to the latest issues of the applicable IEC standards, which are:
environment. For operators, prompt availability and short –ȋIEC 62271-1 “High-voltage switchgear and controlgear:
commissioning times are a further significant advantage. Common specifications”
Considerable cost reductions are achieved in planning, –ȋIEC 62271-203 “High-voltage switchgear and controlgear:
construction work and assembly.
Specification guide for metal-enclosed SF6-insulated Siemens can assure that the pressure loss for each individual gas
switchgear compartment – i.e., not just for the complete switchgear installa-
Note: The points below are not considered exhaustive, but are a tion – will not exceed 0.5 % per year and gas compartment. Each
selection of the important. These specifications cover the tech- gas-filled compartment comes equipped with static filters that
nical data applicable to metal-enclosed SF6-insulated switchgear are capable of absorbing any water vapor that penetrates into
for switching and distributing power in cable and/or overhead- the switchgear installation for a period of at least 25 years. Inter-
line systems and transformers. Key technical data are contained vals between required inspections are long, which keeps mainte-
in the data sheet and the single-line diagram (SLD) attached to nance costs to a minimum. The first minor inspection is due
the inquiry. after ten years. The first major inspection is usually required
26.90 m
Busbars
All busbars of the enclosed 3-phase or the 1-phase type are
Relay room
connected with plugs from one bay to the next.
23.20 m
Circuit-breakers
The circuit-breakers operate according to the dynamic self-com-
pression principle. The number of interrupting units per phase
depends on the circuit-breaker‘s performance. The arcing cham-
3 Earthing
resistor
Gas-insulated
switchgear type
8DN9
bers and circuit-breaker contacts are freely accessible. The
circuit-breaker is suitable for out-of-phase switching and
designed to minimize overvoltages. The specified arc interrup-
15.95 m
tion performance has to be consistent across the entire oper-
ating range, from line-charging currents to full short-circuit
13.8 kV
switchgear currents.
Shunt
reactor
The circuit-breaker is designed to withstand at least 10 opera-
11.50 m
Cable duct
3 ms, that is, the time between the first and the last pole‘s
Compensator
opening or closing. A standard station battery that is required for
control and tripping may also be used for recharging the oper-
ating mechanism. The drive and the energy storage system are
Radiators
provided by a stored-energy spring mechanism that holds suffi-
40 MVA transformer cient energy for all standard IEC close-open duty cycles.
The control system provides alarm signals and internal interlocks
2.20 m
Disconnectors
Fig. 3.1-42: Special arrangement for limited space. Sectional view of
All disconnectors (isolators) are of the single-break type. DC
a building showing the compact nature of gas-insulated motor operation (110, 125, 220 or 250 V), which is fully suited
substations to remote operation, and a manual emergency operating mecha-
nism are provided. Each motor operating mechanism is self-con-
tained and equipped with auxiliary switches in addition to the
mechanical indicators. The bearings are lubricated for life.
after more than 25 years of operation unless the permissible
number of operations is reached before that date. Earthing switches
Work-in-progress earthing switches are generally provided on
Arrangement and modules either side of the circuit-breaker. Additional earthing switches
may be used to earth busbar sections or other groups of the
Arrangement assembly. DC motor operation (110, 125, 220 or 250 V) that is
The system is of the enclosed 1-phase or 3-phase type. The fully suited for remote operation and a manual emergency
assembly consists of completely separate pressurized sections, operating mechanism are provided. Each motor operating
and is thus designed to minimize any danger to the operating mechanism is self-contained and equipped with auxiliary posi-
staff and risk of damage to adjacent sections, even if there tion switches in addition to the mechanical indicators. The
should be trouble with the equipment. Rupture diaphragms are bearings are lubricated for life. Make-proof high-speed earthing
provided to prevent the enclosures from bursting discs in an switches are generally installed at the cable and overhead-line
uncontrolled manner. Suitable deflectors provide protection for terminals. They are equipped with a rapid closing mechanism to
the operating personnel. For maximum operating reliability, provide short-circuit making capacity.
internal relief devices are not installed, because these would
affect adjacent compartments. The modular design, complete
segregation, arc-proof bushing and plug-in connections allow
Instructions
Detailed instruction manuals on the installation, operation and
maintenance of the equipment are supplied with all equipment
delivered by Siemens.
Scope of supply
Siemens supplies the following items for all GIS types and
interfaces as specified:
Fig. 3.1-46: Outdoor termination module: High-voltage bushings Fig. 3.1-47: Transformer/reactor termination module: These
are used for the SF6-to-air transition. The bushings termination modules form the direct connection between
can be matched to specific requirements with regard the GIS and oil-insulated transformers or reactance coils.
to clearance and creepage distances. They are connected Standardized modules provide an economical way of
to the switchgear by means of angular-type modules matching them to various transformer dimensions.
of variable design.
3.2 Medium-Voltage rents) are preferred for power transmission in order to minimize
losses. The voltage is not transformed to the usual values of the
Switchgear low-voltage system until it reaches the load centers close to the
consumer.
1 2 1 3
Fig. 3.2-1: Voltage levels from the power plant to the consumer
3 Fuse-link
Fuse-base x
x x
x
x
Surge arrester* x 2) x 3) x 4) x 5)
Current limiting reactor x x x
Bushing x x x 6)
Post insulator (insulator) x x 6)
x Selection parameter 4) Rated discharge current for surge arresters
1) Limited short-circuit making and breaking capacity 5) For surge arresters: short-circuit strength in case of overload
2) Applicable as selection parameter in special cases only, e.g., 6) For bushings and insulators:
for exceptional pollution layer Minimum failing loads for tension, bending and torsion
3) For surge arresters with spark gap: rated voltage * See also section 3.3
(Parameters of the secondary equipment for operating mechanisms, control and monitoring are not taken into consideration in this table.)
E
E0
E1
0 × Ima
2 × Ima
circuit making
capacity
Short-circuit
For general requirements
between classes of mechanical (M) and electrical (E) endurance,
whereby they can also be used together on the same switching
device; for example, a switching device can have both mechani-
3
making Reduced maintenance cal class M1 and electrical class E3.
E2 5 × Ima capacity required tȋSwitches:
Standard IEC 62271-103 / VDE 0671-103 only specifies classes
Table 3.2-5: Endurance classes for earthing switches
for the so-called general-purpose switches. There are also
“special switches” and “switches for limited applications.”*
–ȋGeneral-purpose switches:
Class Description General-purpose switches must be able to break different
Not ≤ 1 restrike types of operating currents (load currents, ring currents,
C0 explicitely per currents of unloaded transformers, charging currents of
defined interruption
24 × O per 10…40% Ilc, Icc, Ibc unloaded cables and overhead-lines), as well as to make on
24 × CO per 10…40% Ilc, Icc, Ibc Low ≤ 5 cummu-
lated restrikes
short-circuit currents.
C C1 probability General-purpose switches that are intended for use in
on test duties
of restrikes*
BC1 and BC2 systems with isolated neutral or with earth earth-fault
24 × O per 10…40% Ilc, Icc, Ibc
Very low compensation, must also be able to switch under earth-fault
C2 probability of No restrikes* conditions. The versatility is mirrored in the very exact
128 × CO per 10…40% Ilc, Icc, Ibc
restrikes**
specifications for the E classes.
* Class C2 is recommended for capacitor banks
–ȋSF6 switches:
Table 3.2-6: Classes for contactors SF6 switches are appropriate when the switching rate is not
more than once a month. These switches are usually
classified as E3 with regard to their electrical endurance.
tȋRated normal current: –ȋAir-break or hard-gas switches:
The current that the main circuit of a device can continuously Air-break or hard-gas switches are appropriate when the
carry under defined conditions. The temperature increase of switching rate is not more than once a year. These switches
components – especially contacts – must not exceed defined are simpler and usually belong to the E1 class. There are
values. Permissible temperature increases always refer to the also E2 versions available.
ambient air temperature. If a device is mounted in an –ȋVacuum switches:
enclosure, it may be advisable to load it below its full rated The switching capacity of vacuum switches is significantly
current, depending on the quality of heat dissipation. higher than that of the M2/E3 classes. They are used for
tȋRated peak withstand current: special tasks – mostly in industrial power supply systems –
The peak value of the major loop of the short-circuit current or when the switching rate is at least once a week.
during a compensation process after the beginning of the tȋCircuit-breakers:
current flow, which the device can carry in closed state. It is a Whereas the number of mechanical operating cycles is
measure for the electrodynamic (mechanical) load of an specifically stated in the M classes, the circuit-breaker standard
electrical component. For devices with full making capacity, IEC 62271-100/VDE 0671-100 does not define the electrical
this value is not relevant (see the next item in this list). endurance of the E classes by specific numbers of operating
tȋRated short-circuit making current: cycles; the standard remains very vague on this.
The peak value of the making current in case of short-circuit at The test duties of the short-circuit type tests provide an
the terminals of the switching device. This stress is greater orientation as to what is meant by “normal electrical
than that of the rated peak withstand current, because endurance” and “extended electrical endurance.” The number
dynamic forces may work against the contact movement. of make and break operations (Close, Open) is specified in
tȋRated breaking current: table 3.2-3.
The load breaking current in normal operation. For devices
* Disconnectors up to 52 kV may only switch negligible currents up to 500 mA
with full breaking capacity and without a critical current range, (e.g., voltage transformer), or larger currents only when there is an insignificant
this value is not relevant (see the previous item in this list). voltage difference (e.g., during busbar transfer when the bus coupler is closed).
Modern vacuum circuit-breakers can generally make and break 3.2.3 Requirements of Medium-Voltage
the rated normal current up to the number of mechanical Switchgear
operating cycles.
The switching rate is not a determining selection criterion, The major influences and stress values that a switchgear assembly
because circuit-breakers are always used where short-circuit is subjected to result from the task and its rank in the distribution
breaking capacity is required to protect equipment. system. These influencing factors and stresses determine the
tȋDisconnectors: selection parameters and ratings of the switchgear (fig. 3.2-4).
Disconnectors do not have any switching capacity (switches for
limited applications must only control some of the switching Influences and stress values
duties of a general-purpose switch). Switches for special
applications are provided for switching duties such as System voltage
Ambient conditions
t Room climate
t Temperature
t Altitude
t Air humidity
and busbar and other panels remain energized
* Maximum possible IAC classification ** Wall-standig arrangement *** Free-standig arrangement **** Depending on HV HRC fuse-link
NXPLUS C Single 15
1s
31.5
3s
24 20 20 1,250 1,250
Dimensions in mm
Width W Circuit-breaker panel ≤ 1,000 A 600*
1,250 A 800
2,500 A / 3,150 A / 4,000 A 1,000
Contactor panel ≤ 400 A 435
Disconnecting panel 1,250 A 800
2,500 A / 3,150 A / 4,000 A 1,000
Bus sectionalizer 1,250 A 2 × 800
2,500 A / 3,150 A / 4,000 A 2 × 1,000
Metering panel 800
Busbar connection panel ≤ 4,000 A 800/1,000
Height H1 With standard low-voltage 2,300
compartment, natural ventilation
Height H2 With high low-voltage compartment or 2,350
additional compartment for busbar
components
Height H3 With forced ventilation for 4,000 A 2,450
Height H4 With optional internal arc absorber 2,500
Depth D Single busbar, all panel types ≤ 31.5 kA 1,350
(except contactor panel) 40 kA 1,500
W D Contactor panel ≤ 40 kA 1,400*/1,500
* ≤ 31.5 kA
Performance features
The air-insulated, metal-clad switchgear type NXAIR is an tȋInsulating medium air is always available
innovation in the switchgear field for the distribution and tȋSingle busbar, double busbar (back-to-back,face-to-face)
process level up to 17.5 kV, 40 kA, 4,000 A. tȋWithdrawable vacuum circuit-breaker
tȋDesign verified, IEC 62271-200, metal-clad, loss of service tȋWithdrawable vacuum contactor
continuity category: LSC 2B; partition class: PM; tȋPlatform concept worldwide, local manufacturing presence
internal arc classification: IAC A FLR ≤ 40 kA 1 s tȋUse of standardized devices
tȋEvidence of the making and breaking capacity for the circuit- tȋMaximum security of operation by self-explaining
breakers and the make-proof earthing switches inside the operating logic
panel tȋMaintenance interval ≥ 10 years
NXAIR, 24 kV Rated
Voltage kV 24
Frequency Hz 50/60
Dimensions in mm
Performance features
The air-insulated, metal-clad switchgear type NXAIR, 24 kV is the tȋSingle busbar, double busbar (back-to-back, face-to-face)
resulting further development of the NXAIR family for use in the tȋInsulating medium air is always available
distribution and process level up to 24 kV, 25 kA, 2,500 A. tȋWithdrawable vacuum circuit-breaker
tȋDesign verified, IEC 62271-200, metal-clad, loss of service tȋPlatform concept worldwide, local manufacturing presence
continuity category: LSC 2B; partition class: PM; tȋUse of standardized devices
internal arc classification: IAC A FLR ≤ 25 kA 1s tȋMaximum security of operation by self-explaining
tȋEvidence of the making and breaking capacity for the circuit- operating logic
breakers and the make-proof earthing switches inside the tȋMaintenance interval ≥ 10 years
panel
NXAIR P Rated
Voltage kV 7.2 12 17.5
Frequency Hz 50 / 60 50 / 60 50 / 60
Short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage kV 20* 28* 38
(phase/phase, phase/earth)
Lightning impulse withstand voltage kV 60 75 95
(phase/phase, phase/earth)
Short-circuit breaking current max. kA 50 50 50
Short-time withstand current, 3 s max. kA 50 50 50
Short-circuit making current max. kA 125 / 130** 125 / 130** 125 / 130**
Dimensions in mm
Width W Circuit-breaker panel ≤ 2,000 A 800
> 2,000 A 1,000
Contactor panel ≤ 400 A 400
Disconnecting panel ≤ 2,000 A 800
> 2,000 A 1,000
Bus sectionalizer ≤ 2,000 A 2 × 800
> 2,000 A 2 × 1,000
Metering panel 800
Height H1 With standard low-voltage 2,225
compartment (≤ 3150 A)
Height H2 With high low-voltage compartment 2,485
Height H3 With top-mounted pressure relief duct 2,550
as standard
Height H4 With forced ventilation (4000 A) 2,710
Depth D Single busbar (except contactor panel) 1,635
Contactor panel 1,650
Double busbar in back-to-back 3,320
arrangement (except contactor panel)
Performance features
The air-insulated, metal-clad switchgear type NXAIR P is based tȋEvidence of the making and breaking capacity for the circuit-
on the construction principles of the NXAIR family and designed breakers and the make-proof earthing switches inside the
for use in the distribution and process level up to 17.5 kV, 50 kA, panel
4,000 A. tȋWithdrawable vacuum circuit-breaker
tȋDesign verified, IEC 62271-200, metal-clad, loss of service tȋWithdrawable vacuum contactor
continuity category: LSC 2B; partition class: PM; internal arc tȋMaximum availability due to modular design
classification: IAC A FLR ≤ 50 kA 1 s tȋMaximum security of operation by self-explaining
tȋInsulating medium air is always available operating logic
tȋSingle busbar, double busbar (back-to-back, face-to-face) tȋMaintenance interval ≥ 10 years
8BT1 Rated
Voltage kV 12 24
Frequency Hz 50 50
Short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage kV 28 50
(phase/phase, phase/earth)
Lightning impulse withstand voltage kV 75 125
(phase/phase, phase/earth)
Short-circuit breaking current max. kA 25 25
Short-time withstand current, 3 s max. kA 25 25
Short-circuit making current max. kA 63 63
Peak withstand current max. kA 63 63
Normal current of the busbar
Normal current of the feeders
max. A 2,000 2,000
3
with circuit-breaker max. A 2,000 2,000
with switch-disconnector max. A 630 630
with switch-disconnector and fuses max. A 200 A* 200 A*
* Depending on rated current of the HV HRC fuses used.
Performance features
The air-insulated, cubicle-type
H2
factory-assembled, design
verified indoor switchgear for
lower ratings in the distribu-
tion and process level up to
24 kV, 25 kA, 2,000 A.
tȋDesign verified, IEC 62271-
200, cubicle-type, loss of W D1
service continuity category: D2
LSC 2A; partition class: PM;
All panel types Dimensions in mm
internal arc classification:
IAC A FLR ≤ 25 kA 1 s 7.2/12 kV
tȋInsulating medium air is Width W For circuit-breaker max. 1,250 A 600
always available For circuit-breaker 2,000 A 800
For switch-disconnector 600
tȋEvidence of the making and
breaking capacity for the Height H1 With standard low-voltage compartment 2,050
H2 With pressure relief system 2,300*
circuit-breakers and the
H2 With lead-off duct 2,350*
make-proof earthing
Depth D1 Without low-voltage compartment 1,200
switches inside the panel
D2 With low-voltage compartment 1,410
tȋSingle busbar
24 kV
tȋWithdrawable vacuum
circuit-breaker Width W For circuit-breaker max. 1,250 A 800
For circuit-breaker 2,000 A 1,000
tȋAll switching operations with
For switch-disconnector 800
door closed
Height H1 With standard low-voltage compartment 2,050
H2 With pressure relief system 2,300*
H2 With lead-off duct 2,350*
Depth D1 Without low-voltage compartment 1,200
D2 With low-voltage compartment 1,410
* For 1 s arc duration.
8BT2 Rated
Voltage kV 36
Frequency Hz 50/60
Dimensions in mm
W D
Performance features
The air-insulated, metal-clad switchgear type 8BT2 is a factory- tȋEvidence of the making and breaking capacity for the circuit-
assembled, design verified indoor switchgear for use in the breakers and the make-proof earthing switches inside the
distribution and process level up to 36 kV, 31.5 kA, 3,150 A. panel
tȋDesign verified, IEC 62271-200, metal-clad, loss of service tȋSingle busbar
continuity category: LSC 2B; partition class: PM; internal arc tȋWithdrawable vacuum circuit-breaker
classification: IAC A FLR ≤ 31.5 kA 1 s tȋAll switching operations with door closed
tȋInsulating medium air is always available
8BT3 Rated
Voltage kV 36
Frequency Hz 50/60
Short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage kV 70
(phase/phase, phase/earth)
Lightning impulse withstand voltage kV 170
(phase/phase, phase/earth)
Short-circuit breaking current max. kA 16
Short-time withstand current, 1 s max. kA 16
Short-circuit making current max. kA 40/42*
Peak withstand current max. kA 40/42*
Normal current of the busbar
Normal current of the feeders
max. A 1,250
3
with circuit-breaker max. A 1,250
with switch-disconnector max. A 630
with switch-disconnector and fuses max. A 100**
* Values for 50 Hz: 40 kA; for 60 Hz: 42 kA.
** Depending on the rated current of the HV HRC fuses used.
Performance features
The air-insulated, cubicle-type
switchgear type 8BT3 is a
factory-assembled, design
verified indoor switchgear for
lower ratings in the distribu-
H
8DA/8DB Rated
Voltage kV 12 24 36 40.5
Frequency Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60
Short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage kV 28 50 70 85
Lightning impulse withstand voltage kV 75 125 170 185
Short-circuit breaking current max. kA 40 40 40 40
Short-time withstand current, 3 s max. kA 40 40 40 40
Short-circuit making current max. kA 100 100 100 100
Peak withstand current max. kA 100 100 100 100
Performance features
tȋDesign verified according to
H
IEC 62271-200
tȋEnclosure with modular
standardized housings made
from corrosion-resistant
aluminum alloy
tȋSafe-to-touch enclosure and
standardized connections for W D2
plug-in cable terminations
tȋOperating mechanisms and Dimensions Dimensions in mm
transformers are easily
Width (spacing) W 600
accessible outside the
Height H Standard design 2,350
enclosure
Design with higher low-voltage compartment 2,700
tȋMetal-enclosed, partition
Depth D1 Single-busbar switchgear 1,625
class PM
D2 Double-busbar switchgear 2,665
tȋLoss of service continuity
category for switchgear: Fig. 3.2-20: Dimensions of 8DA/8DB
LSC 2
tȋInternal arc classification: Advantages tȋCompact tȋOperational reliability
IAC A FLR 40 kA 1 s tȋIndependent of the tȋMaintenance-free tȋEnvironmentally compatible
environment and climate tȋPersonal safety tȋCost-efficient
8DJH Rated
Voltage kV 7.2 12 15 17.5 24
Frequency Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60
Short-duration power-frequency kV 20 28* 36 38 50
withstand voltage
Lightning impulse withstand voltage kV 60 75 95 95 125
Normal current for ring-main feeders A 400 or 630
Normal current for busbar max. A 630
Normal current for circuit-breaker feeders A 250 or 630
Normal current for transformer feeders A 200**
3
Short-time withstand current, 1 s max. kA 25 25 25 25 20
Short-time withstand current, 3 s max. kA 20 20 20 20 20
Peak withstand current max. kA 63 63 63 63 50
50 Hz
Short-circuit making current
for ring-main feeders max. kA 63 63 63 63 50
for circuit-breaker feeders max. kA 63 63 63 63 50
Fig. 3.2-21: 8DJH block type for transformer feeders max. kA 63 63 63 63 50
Short-time withstand current, 1 s max. kA 21 21 21 21 20
The gas-insulated medium-
Short-time withstand current, 3 s max. kA 21 21 21 21 20
voltage switchgear type 8DJH is
Peak withstand current max. kA 55 55 55 55 52
60 Hz
used for power distribution in
secondary distribution systems Short-circuit making current
for ring-main feeders max. kA 55 55 55 55 52
up to 24 kV. Ring-main feeders,
for circuit-breaker feeders max. kA 55 55 55 55 52
circuit-breaker feeders and for transformer feeders max. kA 55 55 55 55 52
transformer feeders are all part * 42 kV according to some national requirements ** Depending on HV HRC fuse-link
of a comprehensive product
range to satisfy all require- Table 3.2-20: Technical data of 8DJH
ments with the highest level of
operational reliability –
also for extreme ambient
conditions.
Performance features
tȋDesign verified according to
IEC 62271-200
H
8DJH
H2
H2
H1
H1
3
W W D
NXPLUS Rated
Voltage kV 12 24 36 40.5
Frequency Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60
Short-duration power-frequency withstand kV 28 50 70 85
voltage
Lightning impulse withstand voltage kV 75 125 170 185
Short-circuit breaking current max. kA 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5
Short-time withstand current, 3 s max. kA 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5
Short-circuit making current max. kA 80 80 80 80
Peak withstand current max. kA 80 80 80 80
Normal current of the busbar
Normal current of the feeders
max. A
max. A
2,500
2,500
2,500
2,500
2,500
2,500
2,000
2,000
3
Table 3.2-22: Technical data of NXPLUS
NXPLUS is a gas-insulated
medium-voltage circuit-breaker
H2
H1
Performance features
Dimensions Dimensions in mm
tȋDesign verified according to
Width (spacing) W Feeders up to 2,000 A 600
IEC 62271-200
tȋSealed pressure system with Height H1 Single-busbar switchgear 2,450
H2 Double-busbar switchgear 2,600
SF6 filling for the entire
service life Depth D1 Single-busbar switchgear 1,600
D2 Double-busbar switchgear 1,840
tȋSafe-to-touch enclosure and
standardized connections for Fig. 3.2-26: Dimensions of NXPLUS
plug-in cable terminations
tȋSeparate 3-pole gas-
insulated modules for busbar
with three-position outside the switchgear tȋInternal arc classification: tȋCompact
disconnector, and for circuit- vessels and are easily IAC A FLR 31.5 kA, 1 s tȋMaintenance-free
breaker accessible tȋNo gas work during tȋPersonal safety
tȋInterconnection of modules tȋMetal-enclosed, partition installation or extension tȋOperational reliability
with 1-pole insulated and class PM tȋEnvironmentally compatible
screened module couplings tȋLoss of service continuity Advantages tȋCost-efficient
tȋOperating mechanisms and category for switchgear: tȋIndependent of the
transformers are arranged LSC 2 environment and climate
NXPLUS C Rated
Voltage kV 7.2 12 15 17.5 24
Frequency Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60
Short-duration power-frequency kV 20 28* 36 38 50
withstand voltage
Lightning impulse withstand voltage kV 60 75 95 95 125
Short-circuit breaking current max. kA 31.5 31.5 31.5 25 25
Short-time withstand current, 3 s max. kA 31.5 31.5 31.5 25 25
Short-circuit making current max. kA 80 80 80 63 63
Peak withstand current max. kA 80 80 80 63 63
Performance features
tȋDesign verified according to W D
IEC 62271-200
Dimensions Dimensions in mm
tȋSealed pressure system with
SF6 filling for the entire Width W 630 A/1,000 A/1,250 A 600
service life 2,000 A/2,500 A 900
tȋSafe-to-touch enclosure and Height H1 Standard design 2,250 (W = 600);
standardized connections for 2,550 (W = 900)
plug-in cable terminations H2 With horizontal pressure relief duct 2,640 (W = 600);
tȋLoss of service continuity 2,640 (W = 900)
H3 For higher low-voltage compartment 2,650
category for switchgear:
–ȋWithout HV HRC fuses: Depth D Wall-standing arrangement 1,250
Free-standing arrangement 1,250
LSC 2
tȋ1-pole insulated and Fig. 3.2-28: Dimensions of NXPLUS C
screened busbar
tȋ3-pole gas-insulated tȋWith horizontal pressure tȋType-Approved by LR, DNV, Advantages
relief duct GL, ABS, RMR tȋNo gas work during
switchgear vessels with
tȋExtended number of tȋInternal arc classification for: installation or extension
three-position switch and
operating cycles (up to 15 kV, – Wall-standing tȋCompact
circuit-breaker arrangement:
up to 31.5 kV, up to 1,250 A) tȋIndependent of the
tȋOperating mechanisms and –ȋfunction DISCONNECT: IAC A FL 31.5 kA, 1 s environment and climate
transformers are located 5,000 ×, 10,000 × –ȋFree-standing tȋMaintenance-free
outside the switchgear vessel –ȋfunction READY-TO-EARTH: arrangement: tȋPersonal safety
and are easily accessible 5,000 ×, 10,000 × IAC A FLR 31.5 kA, 1 s tȋOperational reliability
tȋMetal-enclosed, partition –ȋfunction CIRCUIT- tȋEnvironmentally compatible
class PM BREAKER: 30,000 × tȋCost-efficient
SIMOSEC Rated
Voltage 7.2 kV 12 kV 15 kV o.r. 17.5 kV 24 kV
Frequency Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60
Short-duration power-frequency withstand
kV 20 28* 36 38 50
voltage
Lightning impulse withstand voltage kV 60 75 95 95 125
Short-circuit breaking current max. kA 25 25 25 25 20
Short-time withstand current, 1 s max. kA 25 25 25 25 20
Short-time withstand current, 3 s max. kA – 21 21 21 20
3
Short-circuit making current max. kA 25 25 25 25 20
Peak withstand current max. kA 63 63 63 63 50
Normal current of the busbar A 630 or 1,250
Normal current of the feeders max. A 1,250 1,250 1,250 1,250 1,250
* 42 kV/75 kV, according to some national requirements
Fig. 3.2-31: SIMOSEC switchgear
Table 3.2-25: Technical data of SIMOSEC
The air-insulated medium-
voltage switchgear type
SIMOSEC is used for power
distribution in secondary and
primary distribution systems
up to 24 kV and up to 1,250 A.
The modular product range
includes individual panels such
as ring-main, transformer and
circuit-breaker panels or
metering panels to fully satisfy
all requirements for power
supply companies and indus-
trial applications.
Performance features
tȋDesign verified according to
IEC 62271-200
tȋPhases for busbar and cable
connection are arranged one
behind the other
tȋ3-pole gas-insulated D
system with SF6 filling for Circuit-breaker feeders, bus sectionalizer 750 or 875
the entire service life Metering panels 500 / 750 / 875
tȋAir-insulated busbar system Height H1 Panels without low-voltage compartment 1,760
tȋAir-insulated cable H2 Panels without low-voltage compartment 2,100 or 2,300
connection system, for Depth D Standard 1,170 and 1,230
conventional cable sealing
ends Fig. 3.2-32: Dimensions of SIMOSEC
tȋMetal-enclosed, partition
class PM tȋInternal arc classification for: –ȋFree-standing Advantages
tȋLoss of service continuity –ȋWall-standing arrangement: tȋCompact modular design
category for switchgear: arrangement: IAC A FLR 21 kA, 1 s tȋHigh operating and personal
LSC 2 IAC A FL 21 kA, 1 s tȋCan be mounted safety
side-by-side and extended as tȋEnvironmentally compatible
desired tȋCost-efficient
3.2.5 High-Current and Generator off extremely high short-circuit currents. Siemens generator
Switchgear circuit-breakers, designed using environmentally friendly
vacuum switching technology, are designed to withstand
As central components, high-current and generator switchgear maximum normal currents and meet the demanding
provides the link between the generator and the transformer requirements of the generator circuit-breaker standard
(feeding into the transmission and distribution networks). IEEE C37.013-1997.
Siemens offers various generator switchgear types with rated
voltages up to 17.5 kV, rated currents up to 10,000 A and rated Performance features
short-circuit breaking currents up to 72 kA for indoor and out- tȋHigh mechanical stability
door installations. tȋLow fire load
tȋHigh operational safety
The heart of the generator switchgear is the circuit-breaker. Its
primary function is to withstand very high currents and to switch HIGS (highly integrated generator switchgear)
HIGS is an air-insulated, metal-enclosed generator switchgear for
3
voltages and currents up to 13.8 kV, 63 kA, 3,150 A for indoor
and outdoor installation. For the first time, the neutral treat-
ment of the generator as well as the auxiliary feeder are inte-
grated in a single generator switchgear (fig. 3.2-33).
Performance features
tȋGenerator circuit-breaker according to IEEE C37.013 in the
main transformer feeder
tȋEarthing switch on generator and transformer side
tȋCurrent and voltage transformers
tȋSurge arresters
tȋSurge capacitors
tȋIntegrated auxiliary feeder with disconnector and generator
circuit-breaker or with switch-disconnector and fuses
8BK40
8BK40 is an air-insulated, metal-enclosed generator switchgear
with truck-type circuit-breaker for indoor installation up to
17.5 kV; 63 kA; 5,000 A (fig. 3.2-34).
Performance features
tȋGenerator circuit-breaker according to IEEE C37.013, or circuit-
breaker according to IEC 62271-100
tȋDisconnecting function by means of truck-type circuit-breaker
tȋEarthing switch on generator and transformer side
tȋCurrent and voltage transformers
3 tȋSurge arresters
tȋSurge capacitors
Performance features
tȋGenerator circuit-breaker according to IEEE C37.013
tȋDisconnector
tȋEarthing switch on generator and transformer side
tȋCurrent and voltage transformers
tȋSurge arresters
tȋSurge capacitors
tȋFurther options
–ȋIntegrated SFC starter
–ȋIntegrated auxiliary feeder, with generator circuit-breaker or
with switch-disconnector and fuses
–ȋIntegrated excitation feeder
–ȋBrake switch
3.2.6 Industrial Load Center Substation Whether in the automobile or food industry, in paint shops or
bottling lines, putting SITRABLOC to work in the right place
Introduction considerably reduces transmission losses. The energy is trans-
Industrial power supply systems call for a maximum level of formed in the production area itself, as close as possible to the
personal safety, operational reliability, economic efficiency loads. For installation of the system itself, no special building or
and flexibility. And they likewise necessitate an integral fire-protection measures are necessary.
approach that includes “before” and “after” customer service,
that can cope with the specific load requirements and, above Available with any level of output
all, that is tailored to each individually occurring situation. SITRABLOC can be supplied with any level of power output, the
With SITRABLOC® (fig. 3.2-38), such an approach can be easily latter being controlled and protected by a fuse/switch-discon-
turned into reality. nector combination.
General
SITRABLOC is an acronym for Siemens TRAnsformer BLOC-type.
A high-current busbar system into which up to four transformers
can feed power ensures that even large loads can be brought
3
SITRABLOC is supplied with power from a medium-voltage onto load without any loss of energy. Due to the interconnection
substation via a fuse/switch-disconnector combination and a of units, it is also ensured that large loads are switched off
radial cable. In the load center, where SITRABLOC is installed, selectively in the event of a fault.
several SITRABLOCs are connected together by means of cables
or bars (fig. 3.2-39).
Features
tȋDue to the fuse/switch-disconnector combination, the short-
circuit current is limited, which means that the radial cable can
be dimensioned according to the size of the transformer.
tȋIn the event of cable faults, only one SITRABLOC fails.
tȋThe short-circuit strength is increased due to the connection of
several stations in the load center. The effect of this is that, in
the event of a fault, large loads are selectively disconnected in
a very short time.
tȋThe transmission losses are optimized because only short
connections to the loads are necessary.
tȋSITRABLOC has, in principle, two transformer outputs:
–ȋ1,250 kVA during AN operation
(ambient air temperature up to 40 °C)
–ȋ1,750 kVA during AF operation
(140 % with forced cooling)
Fig. 3.2-38: SITRABLOC system
Substation
The SITRABLOC components are: 8DC11/8DH10
tȋTransformer housing with roof-mounted ventilation for AN/AF
operating mode
tȋGEAFOL transformer
– (Cast-resin insulated) with make-proof earthing switch
– AN operating mode: 100 % load up to an ambient air Load-center
substation
temperature of 40 °C Utilities
–ȋAF operating mode: 140 % load substation
tȋLV circuit-breaker as per transformer AF load
tȋAutomatic power factor correction equipment (tuned/detuned)
tȋControl and metering panel as well as central monitoring
interface
tȋUniversal connection to the LV distribution busway system LV busways
(fig. 3.2-40)
Power distribution
Utilities substation
3
Circuit-breakers and
switch-disconnectors
Substation with HV HRC fuses
t < 10 ms
M M M Production M M M
Personal safety
Reduced costs
Low system losses
Fig. 3.2-41: Capacitor Banks Fig. 3.2-43: Transformer and earthing switch, LV bloc
Information distribution
3 PROFIBUS DP
PG/PC COROS OP
PROFIBUS
Communications interface
SITRABLOC
ET 200M 12/24 kV
P P
GEAFOL transformer
with built-in
make-proof earthing switch
0.4 kV
Option
LV busbar system
with sliding link
(e.g., SENTRON busways)
tȋSimplification of operational management by transparent, Regional America Europe Australia Asia Africa
PAS CENELEC
simple power system structures
tȋLow costs for power losses, e.g. by medium-voltage-side National USA: ANSI D: DIN VDE AUS: SA CN: SAC SA: SABS
power transmission to the load centers CA: SCC I: CEI NZ: SNZ J: JISC
tȋHigh reliability of supply and operational safety of the BR: COBEI F: UTE …
installations even in the event of individual equipment failures … GB: BS
(redundant supply, selectivity of the power system protection,
ANSI American National Standards Institute
and high availability) BS British Standards
tȋEasy adaptation to changing load and operational conditions CENELEC European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization
(Comité Européen de Normalisation Electrotechnique)
tȋLow operating costs thanks to maintenance-friendly CEI Comitato Ellettrotecnico Italiano Electrotechnical Committee Italy
equipment COBEI Comitê Brasileiro de Eletricidade, Eletrônica, Iluminação e
Telecomunicações
tȋSufficient transmission capacity of equipment during normal DIN VDE Deutsche Industrie Norm Verband deutscher Elektrotechniker
operation and also in the event of a fault, taking future (German Industry Standard, Association of German Electrical
expansions into account Engineers)
JISC Japanese Industrial Standards Committee
tȋGood quality of the power supply, i.e. few voltage changes due PAS Pacific Area Standards
to load fluctuations with sufficient voltage symmetry and few SA Standards Australia
SABS South African Bureau of Standards
harmonic distortions in the voltage SAC Standardisation Administration of China
tȋCompliance with applicable standards and project-related SCC Standards Council of Canada
SNZ Standards New Zealand
stipulations for special installations UTE Union Technique de l’Electricité et de la Communication Technical
Association for Electrical Engineering & Communication
Standards
To minimize technical risks and / or to protect persons involved in Table 3.3-1: Representation of national and regional standards in
electrical engineering
handling electrotechnical components, essential planning rules
have been compiled in standards. Standards represent the state
of the art; they are the basis for evaluations and court decisions. level) and then be adopted as regional or national standards.
Only if the IEC is not interested in dealing with the matter of if
Technical standards are desired conditions stipulated by profes- there are time constraints, a draft standard shall be prepared at
sional associations which are, however, made binding by legal the regional level.
standards such as safety at work regulations. Furthermore, the
compliance with technical standards is crucial for any approval of The interrelation of the different standardization levels is illus-
operator granted by authorities or insurance coverage. While trated in table 3.3-1. A complete list of the IEC members and
decades ago, standards were mainly drafted at a national level further links can be obtained at www.iec.ch –> Members &
and debated in regional committees, it has currently been Experts –>List of Members (NC); http://www.iec.ch/dyn/
agreed that initiatives shall be submitted centrally (on the IEC www/f?p=103:5:0.
System Configurations e.g. the (n–2) principle would also be possible. In this case,
Table 3.3-2 and table 3.3-3 illustrate the technical aspects and these power sources will be rated as such that two out of three
influencing factors that should be taken into account when transformers can fail without the continuous supply of all
electrical power distribution systems are planned and network consumers connected being affected.
components are dimensioned. tȋRadial system in an interconnected grid
Individual radial networks in which the consumers connected
tȋSimple radial system (spur line topology) are centrally supplied by one power source are additionally
All consumers are centrally supplied from one power source. coupled electrically with other radial networks by means of
Each connecting line has an unambiguous direction of energy coupling connections. All couplings are normally closed.
flow.
tȋRadial system with changeover connection Depending on the rating of the power sources in relation to the
Table 3.3-2: Exemplary quality rating dependent on the power system configuration
Power Supply Systems according to the Type of Connection tȋDepending on the power system and nominal system voltage
to Ground there may be different requirements regarding the
disconnection times to be met (protection of persons against
TN-C, TN-C/S, TN-S, IT and TT systems indirect contact with live parts by means of automatic
The implementation of IT systems may be required by national disconnection).
or international standards. tȋPower systems in which electromagnetic interference plays an
important part should preferably be configured as TN-S
tȋFor parts of installations which have to meet particularly high systems immediately downstream of the point of supply. Later,
requirements regarding operational and human safety (e.g. in it will mean a comparatively high expense to turn existing
medical rooms, such as the OT, intensive care or post- TN-C or TN-C/S systems into an EMC-compatible system.
anaesthesia care unit)
tȋFor installations erected and operated outdoors (e.g. in
mining, at cranes, garbage transfer stations and in the
chemical industry).
The state of the art for TN systems is an EMC-compatible design
as TN-S system. 3
Table 3.3-3: Exemplary quality rating dependent on the power supply system according to its type of connection to ground
3.3.2 Dimensioning of Power have effects on the neighboring higher-level or all lower-level
Distribution Systems network sections (high testing expense, high planning risk).
When the basic supply concept for the electricity supply system Dimensioning principles
has been established, it is necessary to dimension the electrical For each circuit, the dimensioning process comprises the
power system. selection of one or more switching protective devices to be
used at the beginning or end of a connecting line, and the
Dimensioning means the sizing rating of all equipment and selection of the connecting line itself (cable/line or busbar
components to be used in the power system. connection) after considering the technical features of the
corresponding switching protective devices. For supply circuits
The dimensioning target is to obtain a technically permissible in particular, dimensioning also includes rating the power
Supply circuits
Particularly stringent requirements apply to the dimensioning of Supply
Connecting line between Load feeders in final
distribution boards circuits
supply circuits. This starts with the rating of the power sources.
Power sources are rated according to the maximum load current
Start node
to be expected for the power system, the desired amount of
reserve power, and the degree of supply reliability required in Transmission
case of a fault (overload short-circuit). medium
Load conditions in the entire power system are established by Load Target node
3
Fig. 3.3-3: Schematic representation of the different circuit types
usually established by building up appropriate redundancies, for
example, by doing the following:
tȋProviding additional power sources (transformer, generator,
UPS). In order to ensure overload protection, the standardized conven-
tȋRating the power sources according to the failure principle; tional (non-)tripping currents referring to the devices in applica-
n- or (n–1) principle: Applying the (n–1) principle means that tion have to be observed. A verification based merely on the
two out of three supply units are principally capable of rated device current or the setting value Ir would be insufficient.
continually supplying the total load for the power system
without any trouble if the smallest power source fails. Basic rules for ensuring overload protection:
tȋRating those power sources that can temporarily be operated Rated current rule
under overload (e.g., using vented transformers). tȋNon-adjustable protective equipment
Ib ≤ In ≤ Iz
Independent of the load currents established, dimensioning of The rated current In of the selected device must be between
any further component in a supply circuit is oriented to the the calculated maximum load current Ib and the maximum
ratings of the power sources, the system operating modes permissible load current Iz of the selected transmission
configured and all the related switching states in the vicinity of medium (cable or busbar).
the supply system. tȋAdjustable protective equipment
Ib ≤ Ir ≤ Iz
As a rule, switching protective devices must be selected in such The rated current Ir of the overload release must be between
a way that the planned performance maximum can be trans- the calculated maximum load current Ib and the maximum
ferred. In addition, the different minimum/maximum short-cir- permissible load current Iz of the selected transmission
cuit current conditions in the vicinity of the supply system, medium (cable or busbar).
which are dependent on the switching status, must be deter-
mined. Tripping current rule
I2 ≤ 1.45 x Iz
When connecting lines are rated (cable or busbar), appropriate
reduction factors must be taken into account; these factors The maximum permissible load current Iz of the selected trans-
depend on the number of systems laid in parallel and the instal- mission medium (cable or busbar) must be above the conven-
lation type. tional tripping current I2-/1.45 of the selected device.
When devices with a tripping unit are used, observance of this Depending on the system operating mode (coupling open,
rule across the entire characteristic device curve must be verified. coupling closed) and the medium of supply (transformer or
generator), the protective equipment and its settings must be
A mere verification in the range of the maximum short-circuit configured for the worst-case scenario for short-circuit currents.
current applied (Ik max) is not always sufficient, in particular
when time-delayed releases are used. In contrast to supply or distribution circuits, where the choice of
a high-quality tripping unit is considered very important, there
Short-circuit time are no special requirements on the protective equipment of final
ta (Ik min) ≤ 5 s circuits regarding the degree of selectivity to be achieved. The
use of a tripping unit with LI characteristics is normally suffi-
The resulting current-breaking time of the selected protective cient.
3.3.3 Low-Voltage Switchgear short as possible. The use of circuit-breaker protected and
fuse-protected withdrawable design is an important principle.
When developing a power distribution concept including Selectivity is also of great importance for reliable power supply.
dimensioning of the systems and devices, its requirements and Between these two extremes there is a great design variety that
feasibility have to be matched by the end user and the is to be optimally matched to customer requirements. The
manufacturer. prevention of personal injury and damage to equipment must,
however, be the first priority in all cases. When selecting appro-
When selecting a low-voltage main distribution board (LVMD), priate switchgear, it must be ensured that it is a design verified
the prerequisite for its efficient sizing is knowledge of its use, switchgear assembly (in compliance with IEC 61439-2, resp.
availability and future options for extension. The demands on DIN EN 61439-2, VDE 0660-600-2) with extended testing of
power distribution are extremely diverse. They start with build- behavior in the event of an accidental arc (IEC 61641, VDE 0660-
ings that do not place such high demands on the power supply,
such as office buildings, and continue through to the high
demands, for example, made by data centers, in which smooth
500, Addendum 2), and that the selection is always made in
light of the regulations governing the entire supply system (full
selectivity, partial selectivity).
3
operation is of prime importance.
Overview
The SIVACON S8 low-voltage switchgear (fig. 3.3-4) is a variable,
multi-purpose and design verified low-voltage switchgear
assembly that can be used for the infrastructure supply not only
in administrative and institutional buildings, but also in industry
and commerce. SIVACON S8 consists of standardized, modular
components that can be flexibly combined to form an economi-
cal, overall solution, depending on the specific requirements.
SIVACON S8 has a high level of functionality, flexibility and
quality, and has compact dimensions and a high degree of safety
for persons and equipment. Siemens or its authorized contract- 2 3 4 5 6
1
3 ing party will perform the following:
tȋThe customer-specific configuration
tȋThe mechanical and electrical installation
tȋThe testing, for which design verified function modules are
used
The device mounting space is intended for the following functions: Plug-in 3NJ6 in-line switch-disconnector design
tȋIncoming/outgoing feeders with 3WL circuit-breakers in fixed- The panels for cable feeders in the plug-in design up to 630 A
mounted and withdrawable designs up to 6,300 A are intended for the installation of in-line switch-disconnectors.
tȋBus sectionalizer and bus coupler with 3WL circuit-breakers in The plug-in contact on the supply side is a cost-effective alterna-
fixed-mounted and withdrawable designs up to 6,300 A tive to the withdrawable design. The modular design of the
tȋIncoming/outgoing feeders with 3VL circuit-breakers in fixed- plug-ins enables an easy and quick retrofit or replacement under
mounted design up to 1,600 A operating conditions. The device mounting space is intended for
plug-in, in-line switch-disconnectors with a distance between
Universal installation design pole centers of 185 mm. The vertical plug-on bus system is
The panels for cable feeders in fixed-mounted and plug-in arranged at the back of the panel and is covered by an optional
designs up to 630 A are intended for the installation of the touch protection with pick-off openings in the IP20 degree of
following switchgear (fig. 3.3-7): protection. This enables the in-line switch-disconnectors to be
tȋSIRIUS 3RV/3VL circuit-breaker replaced without shutting down the switchgear (fig. 3.3-8).
tȋ3K switch-disconnector
tȋ3NP switch-disconnector Fixed-mounted design with front covers
tȋ3NJ6 switch-disconnector in plug-in design The panels for cable feeders in fixed-mounted design up to
630 A are intended for the installation of the following switch-
The switching devices are mounted on mounting plates and gear (fig. 3.3-9):
connected to the vertical current distribution bars on the supply tȋSIRIUS 3RV/3VL circuit-breaker
side. Plug-in 3NJ6 in-line switch-disconnectors can be installed tȋ3K switch-disconnector
using an adapter. The front is covered by panel doors or com- tȋ3NP switch-disconnector
partment doors. tȋModular devices
A
Installation – clearances and corridor widths
The minimum clearances between switchgear and obstacles Front
specified by the manufacturer must be taken into account when
installing low-voltage switchgear (fig. 3.3-11). The minimum B Front B
dimensions for operating and servicing corridors according to
IEC 60364-7-729 (DIN VDE 0100-729) must be taken into
account when planning the space requirements (table 3.3-4,
C
Caution! If a lift truck is used to insert circuit-breakers or with-
drawable units, the minimum corridor widths must be adapted
to the lift truck! Front
A: 100 mm from the rear side of the installation
Transportation units B: 100 mm from the side side panels
Depending on the access routes available in the building, one or C: 200 mm from the rear panels with back to back installation
more panels can be combined into transportation units (TU).
The max. length of a TU should not exceed 2,400 mm. Fig. 3.3-11: Clearances to obstacles
Space requirements
Height: 2,000 mm and 2,200 mm
(optionally with 100 mm or 200 mm base)
Width: For data required for the addition of panels please refer
to the panel descriptions
Depth:
busbar entry
2000 1)
installation
current of
the main
position
Type of
busbar
Busbar
Cable /
Rated
600 mm Rear 4,000 A Single front Top & bottom 600 600
800 mm Rear 7,010 A Single front Top & bottom 700 700 700 700
1,000 mm Rear 4,000 A Double front Top & bottom 1) Minimum height of passage under covers or enclosures
1,200 mm Rear 7,010 A Double front Top & bottom
500 mm Top 3,270 A Single front Bottom Fig. 3.3-12: Reduced corridor widths within the area of open doors
800 mm Top 3,270 A Single front Top & bottom
800 mm Top 6,300 A Single front Bottom
1,200 mm Top 6,300 A Single front Top & bottom
Table 3.3-4: SIVACON S8 switchgear dimensions Min. corridor width Escape Min. free passage
700 or 600 mm direction 500 mm 1)
2)
Double-front installations
Double-front installations – top view
In the double-front installation, the panels are positioned in a
Double-front installations only with main busbar system at the rear
row next to and behind one another. The main advantage of a
double-front installation is the extremely economic design
through the supply of the branch circuits on both operating (1)
panels from one main busbar system.
The "double-front unit" system structure is required for the (2) (3) (4)
assignment of certain modules.
Table 3.3-5: Average weights of the panels including busbar (without cable)
3 3WL1232 3,200 A
3WL1340 4,000 A
Size II
Size III
3,680
4,260
2,500
2,720
3WL1350 5,000 A Size III 5,670 3,630
3WL1363 6,300 A Size III 8,150 5,220
Universal mounting design panel (incl. withdrawable units, fixed mounting with front doors) 600 W
3NJ4 in-line-type switch-disconnector panel (fixed mounting) 600 W
3NJ6 in-line-type switch-disconnector design panel (plugged) 1,500 W
Fixed-mounted type panel with front covers 600 W
Reactive power compensation panel non-choked 1.4 W / kvar
choked 6.0 W / kvar
Level 1 Level 2
High level of High level of
personal safety personal safety
without major with restriction of
restriction of the the effects of
effects of arcing arcing on a single
within the power section or double
distribution board. fronted section.
Level 3 Level 4
High level of High personal
personal safety safety with
with restriction to restriction of the
main busbar effects of arcing to
compartment in the site of origin.
single- or double
fronted section as
well as device or
cable connection
compartments.
Fig. 3.3-15: The arcing fault levels describe the classiication in accrdance with the characteristics under arcing fault conditions and the
restriction of the eects of the arcing fault to the system or system section
2000 A
A
B B
A
1800 C B
A
D B
A
1600 E B
A
F B
A
1400 G B
A
H B
A
1200 J B
A
K
3
B
A
1000 L B
A
M B
A
800 N B
A
P B
A
600 Q B
A
R B
A
400 S B
A
T B
A
200 U B
V
0
600
400 1000 1000 1000 600 800
400
200
4800
Installation front
75 W–150 Boring 4 x Ø 14,8 mm
Threaded hole M12
Installation front
300
D–50
300
W–100 W–100
50 50
50
50
W W
Fig. 3.3-16: SIVACON S8, busbar position at rear 2,200 × 4,800 × 600 (H × W × D in mm)
Panel type Circuit-breaker Universal 3NJ6 in-line switch- Fixed- 3NJ4 in-line switch- Reactive power
design mounting design disconnector mounted disconnector compensation
design design design
Mounting design Fixed mounting
Fixed mounting Fixed-mounted
Plug-in design
Withdrawable-unit Plug-in design design with Fixed mounting Fixed mounting
Withdrawable-unit
design front covers
design
Function Incoming feeder Central
Cable feeders
Outgoing feeder Cable feeders Cable feeders Cable feeders compensation of
Motor feeders
Coupling the reactive power
Current In Up to 630 A /
Up to 6,300 A Up to 630 A Up to 630 A Up to 630 A Up to 600 kvar
Up to 250 kW
Connection Front and rear
Front and rear side Front side Front side Front side Front side
side
Panel width [mm] 400 / 600 / 800 /
600 / 1,000 / 1,200 1,000 / 1,200 1,000 / 1,200 600 / 800 800
1,000 / 1,400
Internal compart- 1, 2b, 3b, 4a,
1, 2b, 3a, 4b 4a, 3b, 4b 1, 3b, 4b 1, 2b 1, 2b
mentalization 4b
Busbars Rear / top Rear / top Rear / top Rear / top Rear Rear / top / without
Fuse-protected switchgear
(fuse switch disconnector / switch disconnector
SD Switch disconnector
Depending on the type of operation,
these devices are divided into two
main groups:
Operator-dependent
– Without breaker latching
mechanism, with protection (fuse);
with these devices, the fuse is
also moved when making and breaking
(= fuse switch disconnector)
Operator-independent
– With breaker latching mechanism,
without protection (without fuse);
these devices are only used to interrupt
the circuit, similar to a main switch
(= switch disconnector without fuse)
Final circuit
Task: Motor protection
Protective devices:
–ȋMCCB (circuit-breaker for motor protection) M M M
–ȋSD (switch disconnector)
–ȋMSP (3RT contactor, 3RU overload relay, 3UF motor
protection and control devices Fig. 3.3-17: Core functions of the protective devices in the individual
circuit types
Criteria for Device Selection
A protective device is always part of a circuit and must satisfy
the corresponding requirements (see also section 3.3.2
“Dimensioning of Power Distribution Systems”). The most 1. Application
plants/motor/isolators
important selection criteria are shown in the following.
2. 3-pole/4-pole
6. Release
Influences selectivity
M M M and protection setting M M M
7. Communication
Fuse-protected and data transfer Circuit-breaker-protected
MCCB
ACB air molded- Fuse switch Switch dis- MCB minia-
circuit- case circuit- disconnec- connector ture circuit- Reference values,
breaker breaker tor with fuses breaker specifications
Standards IEC Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Region
Application System Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Power supply system
protection
Installation Fixed mounting Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Availability
Plug-in – up to 800 A – Partly –
Withdrawable Yes Yes – – –
unit
Rated current
Short-circuit breaking
In
Icu
6,300 A
up to
1,600 A
up to
630 A
up to
630 A
up to
125 A
up to 25 kA
Operating current IB
Maximum short-circuit
3
capacity 150 kA 100 kA 120 kA 120 kA current Ik max
Current carrying capacity Icw up to 80 kA up to 5 kA – – – Circuit
Number of poles 3-pole Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Power supply system
4-pole Yes Yes – Partly –
Tripping characteristic ETU Yes Yes – – – Power supply system
TM – up to 630 A Yes Yes Yes
Tripping function LI Yes Yes Yes* Yes* Yes Power supply system
LSI Yes Yes – – –
N Yes Yes – – –
G Yes Yes – – –
Characteristics Fixed – Yes Yes Yes Yes Power supply system
Adjustable Yes Yes – – –
Optional Yes Yes – – –
Protection against Detection of Ik min No No Depends on Depends on Depends on Minimum short-circuit
electric shock, tripping limitation limitation *) cable length cable length cable length current Ik min
condition
Communication (data High Yes – – – – Customer specification
transmission)
Medium Yes Yes – – –
Low Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Activation Local Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Customer
specifications
Remote (motor) Yes Yes – Partly –
Derating Full rated current 60 ºC 50 ºC 30 ºC 30 ºC 30 ºC Switchgear
up to
System synchronization Yes up to 800 A – – – Power supply system
Table 3.3-10: Overview of the protective devices; *) with ETU: No limitation / with TMTU: depends on cable length
tion circuit as of a rated current of 630 A or 800 A. As the ACB is supplies it to the consumer (e.g. motor, lamp, non-stationary
not a current-limiting device, it differs greatly from other protec- load (power outlet), etc.). The protective device must satisfy
tive devices such as MCCB, MCB and fuses. the requirements of the consumer to be protected by it.
3
cable is very expensive
Fire load Fire load with PVC cable is up to 10 times greater, with Very low, see catalog
PE cable up to 30 times greater than with busbars
Design verified switchgear assembly The operational safety depends on the version Tested system, non-interchangeable assembly
Benefits 140
System CD-K up to 40 A
The versatile busbar trunking system for area-wide power I e [%] 120
distribution to lighting systems:
tȋVersatile thanks to high degree of protection IP55
tȋLower planning costs through simple configuration Ie =100
tȋQuick-release plug-in connection for fast assembly Busbar
tȋVariable changes of direction 80
tȋOptimum utilization of the busbar line through tap-off points
fitted to both sides 60
Cable
tȋUniform current loading of the conductors through splitting of
the tap-off plugs among the individual phases
40
tȋTap-off plugs allow fast and flexible load relocation 15 10 25 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65
tȋTransmission of the KNX, DALI protocol for intelligent lighting Ambient temperature [°C]
control directly via the busbar
Fig. 3.3-19: Comparison of temperature response and derating
System BD01 up to 160 A
The busbar trunking system for power distribution in trade and
commerce:
70
tȋHigh degree of protection up to IP55
Depending on
tȋFlexible power supply 60 type 10 to 30
times higher
kWh/m
tȋAdvance power distribution planning without precise Communication-capable busbar trunking system
knowledge of device locations Communication-capable functional extensions to be combined
tȋReady to use in no time thanks to fast and easy installation with known tap-off units:
tȋInnovative construction: expansion units to compensate for tȋFor use with the systems BD01, BD2, LD and LX
expansion are eliminated. tȋApplications:
tȋTap-off units and tap-off points can be coded at the factory –ȋLarge-scale lighting control
tȋUniformly sealable –ȋRemote switching and signaling in industrial environments
–ȋConsumption metering of distributed load feeders
System LD up to 5,000 A tȋInterfacing to KNX / EIB, AS-Interface and PROFIBUS bus
The perfect busbar trunking system for power distribution in systems
industrial environments: tȋEasy contacting of the bus line with insulation displacement
Brochure
So that energy flows safely– SIVACON 8PS busbar trunking
systems
tȋGerman: Order no. E10003-E38-9B-D0010
tȋEnglish: Order no. E10003-E38-9B-D0010-7600
7 4
3 B
D
0
1
-K
B
1 3
1
0
D
B
B
-K
1
0
D
B
1 CD-K system
2 BD01 system 5 LX system
3 BD2 system 6 LR system
4 LD system 7 Communication-capable busbar trunking systems
Technology reflecting the latest state of the art and years of That means that the operating energy is truly minimized. The
operating experience are put to use in constant further develop- self-compression interrupter unit allows the use of a compact
ment and optimization of Siemens circuit breakers. This makes stored-energy spring mechanism that provides unrestricted high
Siemens circuit breakers able to meet all the demands placed on dependability.
high-voltage switchgear.
Stored-energy spring mechanism –
The comprehensive quality system is certified according to for the complete product range
DIN EN ISO 9001. It covers development, manufacturing, sales, The operating mechanism is a central part of the high-voltage
commissioning and after-sales service. Test laboratories are circuit breakers. The drive concept of the 3AP high-voltage
accredited to EN 45001 and PEHLA/STL. circuit breakers is based on the stored-energy spring principle.
The use of such an operating mechanism for voltage ranges of
The modular design up to 800 kV became appropriate as a result of the development
Circuit breakers for air-insulated switchgear are individual com- of a self-compression interrupter unit that requires minimal
ponents, and are assembled together with all individual elec- actuating energy.
trical and mechanical components of an AIS installation on site.
Advantages of the stored-energy spring mechanism are:
Due to the consistent application of a modular design, all tȋHighest degree of operational safety: It is a simple and sturdy
Siemens circuit breaker types, whether air-insulated or gas-insu- design and uses the same principle for rated voltages from
lated, are made up of the same range of components based on 72.5 kV up to 800 kV with just a few moving parts. Due to the
our well-proven platform design (fig. 4.1-1): self-compression design of the interrupter unit, only low
tȋInterrupter unit actuating forces are required.
tȋOperating mechanism tȋAvailability and long service life: Minimal stressing of the latch
tȋSealing system mechanisms and rolling-contact bearings in the operating
tȋOperating rod mechanism ensure reliable and wear-free transmission of
tȋControl elements. forces.
tȋMaintenance-free design: The spring charging gear is fitted
Interrupter unit – with wear-free spur gears, enabling load-free decoupling.
self-compression arc-quenching principle
The Siemens product range from 72.5 kV up to 800 kV includes Siemens circuit breakers for rated voltage levels from 72.5 kV up
high-voltage circuit breakers with self-compression interrupter to 800 kV are equipped with self-compression interrupter units
units – for optimum switching performance under every oper- and stored-energy spring mechanisms.
ating condition for every voltage level.
For special technical requirements such as rated short-circuit
Self-compression circuit breakers breaking currents of 80 kA, Siemens can offer twin-nozzle circuit
3AP high-voltage circuit breakers for the complete voltage range breaker series 3AQ or 3AT with an electrohydraulic mechanism.
ensure optimum use of the thermal energy of the arc in the
contact cylinder. This is achieved by the self-compression inter-
rupter unit.
Circuit-breaker for
air-insulated switchgear
Circuit-breaker in
SF6-insulated switchgear
Fig. 4.1-1: Circuit-breaker parts: circuit-breaker for air-insulated switchgear (top), circuit-breaker in SF6-insulated switchgear (bottom)
Major features:
tȋSelf-compression interrupter unit
tȋUse of the thermal energy of the arc
tȋMinimized energy consumption Opening
Arcing contact open Open position
tȋHigh reliability for a long time.
1 8
2
9
3
10
11
4 12
13
5
14
4
15
6
16
17
The control unit includes all necessary devices for circuit breaker
control and monitoring, such as:
tȋPressure / SF6 density monitors
tȋRelays for alarms and lockout
tȋOperation counters (upon request)
tȋLocal circuit breaker control (upon request)
tȋAnti-condensation heaters.
Transport, installation and commissioning are performed with Fig. 4.1-5: 800 kV circuit breaker pole 3AP4
expertise and efficiency. The routine-tested circuit breaker is
dismantled into a few subassemblies for transportation.
21 22
22.38 16 22.39
16
15 Corner gear
16 15.11 Filter cowl
11 Base 15.16.3 Filter bag
16.9 15.8.3 Shaft
12 Control cubicle
15.1 Operating mechanism 15.9 Lever
11 housing 16 Post insulator
16 Post insulator 16 16.9 Operating rod
15.1
21
22
22.38
Bell-crank mechanism
Interrupter unit
Corona ring of the
21
22
Bell-crank
mechanism
Interrupter unit
4
15.9
12 double-break assembly 22.1 Jacket
15 22.22 High-voltage
22.39 Corona ring of the pole
column 15.8.3 terminal
Fig. 4.1-6: 550 kV circuit breaker 3AP2FI Fig. 4.1-7: Sectional view of pole column
6
4,5
Fig. 4.1-8: 145 kV circuit breaker 3AP1FG with 3-pole stored-energy Fig. 4.1-9: 3AP1FG on site
spring mechanism
Table 4.1-1: Technical data of circuit breakers 3AP1, 3AP2 and 3AP4
Dead-tank circuit breaker The 3AP2/3 DT for 550 kV (fig. 4.1-13, fig. 4.1-14) consists of
two interrupter units in a series that features a simple design.
Type SPS2 and 3AP DT The proven Siemens arc-quenching system ensures faultless
The type SPS2 power circuit breakers (table 4.1-2) are used for operation, consistently high arc-quenching capacity and a long
the US and ANSI markets, and the 3AP DT breaker types are service life, even at high switching frequencies.
offered in IEC markets. Both types are designed as general,
definite-purpose circuit breakers for use at maximum rated Thanks to constant further development, optimization and
voltages of 72.5 kV up to 550 kV. consistent quality assurance, Siemens self-compression arc-
quenching systems meet all the requirements placed on modern
The design high-voltage technology.
Dead-tank circuit breakers (except for the 550 kV version) con-
sist of three identical pole units mounted on a common support A control cubicle mounted at one end of the circuit breaker
frame. The opening and closing spring of the FA-type operating houses the spring operating mechanism and circuit breaker
mechanism is transferred to the moving contacts of the inter- control components. The interrupter units are located in the
rupter unit through a system of connecting rods and a rotating aluminum housing of each pole unit. The interrupters use the
seal at the side of each phase. latest Siemens self-compression arc-quenching system.
4 The connection to the overhead lines and busbars is realized by The stored-energy spring mechanism is the same design as used
SF6-insulated air bushings. The insulators are available in either within the Siemens 3AP live-tank circuit breakers, GIS and
porcelain or composite (epoxy-impregnated fiberglass tube with compact switchgear. This design has been documented in
silicone rubber sheds) materials. service for more than 10 years, and has a well-documented
reliability record.
The tanks and the bushings are charged with SF6 as at a rated
pressure of 6.0 bar. The SF6 is used for insulation and arc- Operators can specify up to four (in some cases, up to six)
quenching purposes. bushing-type current transformers (CT) per phase. These CTs,
mounted externally on the aluminum housings, can be removed
without dismantling the bushings.
Technical data
Operating mechanism
The mechanically and electrically trip-free spring mechanism
type FA is used on type SPS2 and 3AP1/2 DT circuit breakers. The
closing and opening springs are loaded for “O-C-O” operations. 22.22
24
A weatherproofed control cubicle (degree of protection IP55)
has a large door, sealed with rubber gaskets, for easy access
during inspection and maintenance. Condensation is prevented
by heaters that maintain a difference in inside/outside tempera- 28
ture, and by ventilation.
22.1 22.1.20
The control system includes all the secondary technical compo- 22.1.50
nents required for operating the circuit breaker, which are 27
typically installed in the control cubicle. The current transformer 22.27
22.1.10
connections are also located in the control cubicle. 22
26 23
The control, tripping, motor and heating power supplies are
selectable in a great extent. Depending on customer require-
15 16.9 22.1.21 4
ments, two standard control versions are available.
15 Corner gear 22.1.50 Additional heating
16.9 Operating rod 22.22 High-voltage terminal
Basic version 22 Interrupter unit 22.27 Conductor connection
The basic variant includes all control and monitoring elements 22.1 Housing 23 Grading capacitor
that are needed for operation of the circuit breaker. In addition 22.1.10 Cover 24 Bushing conductor
22.1.10.1 Cover 26 Closing resistor
to the elementary actuation functions, it includes: 22.1.20 Cover with bursting disc 27 Current transformer
tȋ19 auxiliary switch contacts (9 normally open, 9 normally 22.1.21 Cover with filter material 28 Bushing
closed, 1 passing contact)
tȋOperations counter Fig. 4.1-13: Sectional view of a 3AP2/3-DT circuit breaker pole
tȋLocal actuator.
Compact version
In addition to the basic version, this type includes:
tȋSpring monitoring by motor runtime monitoring
tȋHeating monitoring (current measuring relay)
tȋLuminaire and socket attachment with a common circuit
breaker to facilitate servicing and maintenance work
tȋOvervoltage attenuation
tȋCircuit breaker motor
tȋCircuit breaker heating.
Standard 4
The international IEC 62271-205 standard treats compact
switchgear assemblies for rated voltages above 52 kV. The used
terminology for the hybrid concept is the so-called mixed tech-
nology switchgear (MTS).
Fig. 4.1-19: 3AP1 DTC 145 kV with voltage transformer and cable
connection
High-voltage
3AP1 DTC
compact switchgear
Rated power-frequency
withstand voltage [kV] 275 460
Rated short-time
withstand current (3 s) [kA] 40 63
Fig. 4.1-17: 3AP1 DTC 245 kV Table 4.1-3: Technical data of 3AP1 DTC
4
Attached earthing switch (optional) yes no
Type-tested according to IEC 62271-108
*) Other ambient temperature values on request **) Or porcelain
General
Disconnectors are an essential part of electrical power substa-
tions. They indicate a visible isolating distance in air isolated gap.
Center-break disconnectors
The center-break disconnector is the most frequently used
disconnector type. The disconnector base supports the operating
mechanism and two rotating porcelain support insulators. The
current path arms which are fixed to the insulators open in the
center. Each rotating unit comprises two high-quality ball bear-
ings and is designed for high mechanical loads. They are lubri-
cated and maintenance-free for the entire service life (fig. 4.2-
1).
Pantograph disconnectors
This type is generally used in double-busbar systems to connect
the two busbars or a busbar to a line.
Vertical-break disconnectors
The current path of the vertical-break disconnector opens verti- Fig. 4.2-3: Components of the pantograph
cally and requires a minimum phase distance (fig. 4.2-4). disconnector
1. Scissor arms
The current path performs two movements: 2. Bearing frame
tȋA vertical swinging movement 3. Support insulator
tȋA rotary movement around its own longitudinal axis. 4. Rotating insulator
5. Motor operating mechanism
For voltage levels higher than 245 kV, contact strips are attached
to the ends of the current path tubes. The contact fingers are
part of the fixed contacts. In this design, the current path per-
forms a combined swinging and rotary movement. After comple-
tion of the swinging movement, the contact force is generated
by the rotation of the current path around its own axis.
Knee-type disconnectors
This disconnector type has the smallest horizontal and vertical
space requirements. The knee-type disconnector has two fixed
and one rotating insulator. Thanks to its folding-arm design, only
limited overhead clearance is required, which results in lower Fig. 4.2-5: Double-side break disconnector with integrated
investment costs (fig. 4.2-6). surge arrester
Earthing switches
The auxiliary switch is custom-fit to the gear unit and signals the
switch position with absolute reliability. This ensures safe sub-
station operation.
After the motor starts, the auxiliary switch moves and the switch
position signal is cancelled. The disconnector operates there-
after until the end position is reached.
The auxiliary switch then moves again and issues the switch
position signal.
This sequence ensures that the CLOSED position is indicated only
after the disconnector is locked and short-circuit-proof, and the
rated current can be carried. The OPEN position is indicated only
after the opened current path has reached the nominal dielectric
strength.
Technical data
To earth and between phases [kV] 325 550 650 750 1,050 1,050 1,175 1,425 1,550
Across the isolating distance [kV] 375 630 750 860 1,200 1,050 1,175 1,425 1,550
(+170) (+205) (+240) (+315)
Rated switching impulse withstand voltage 250/2,500 µs
To earth and between phases [kV] – – – – – 850 950 1,050 1,175
Across the isolating distance [kV] – – – – – 700 (+245) 800 (+295) 900 (+345) 900 (+450)
Rated normal current up to [A] 4,000
Rated peak withstand current up to [kA] 160
Rated short-time withstand current up to [kA] 63
Rated duration of short circuit [s] 1/3
Icing class 10/20
Temperature range [°C] –50/+50
Operating mechanism type Motor operation/Manual operation
Control voltage [V, DC] 60/110/125/220
[V, AC] 220…230, 1~, 50/60 Hz
Motor voltage [V, DC] 60/110/125/220
[V, AC] 110/125/220, 1~, 50/60 Hz
220/380/415, 3~, 50/60 Hz
Maintenance 25 years
Technical data
Design Pantograph
Rated voltage 123 145 170 245 300 362 420 550
Rated power-frequency withstand voltage 50 Hz/1 min
To earth and between phases [kV] 230 275 325 460 380 450 520 620
Across the isolating distance [kV]
Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage 1.2/50 µs
265 315 375 530 435 520 610 800
4
To earth and between phases [kV] 550 650 750 1,050 1,050 1,175 1,425 1,550
Across the isolating distance [kV] 630 750 860 1,200 1,050 (+170) 1,175 (+205) 1,425 (+240) 1,550 (+315)
Rated switching impulse withstand voltage 250/2,500 µs
To earth and between phases [kV] – – – – 850 950 1,050 1,175
Across the isolating distance [kV] – – – – 700 (+245) 800 (+295) 900 (+345) 900 (+450)
Rated normal current up to [A] 5,000
Rated peak withstand current up to [kA] 200
Rated short-time withstand current up to [kA] 80
Rated duration of short circuit [s] 1/3
Icing class 10/20
Temperature range [°C] –50/+50
Operating mechanism type Motor operation/Manual operation
Control voltage [V, DC] 60/110/125/220
[V, AC]
220…230, 1~, 50/60 Hz
Motor voltage [V, DC] 60/110/125/220
[V, AC] 110/125/220, 1~, 50/60 Hz
220/380/415, 3~, 50/60 Hz
Maintenance 25 years
Technical data
To earth and between phases [kV] 550 650 750 1,050 1,050 1,175 1,425 1,550
Across the isolating distance [kV] 630 750 860 1,200 1,050 (+170) 1,175 (+205) 1,425 (+240) 1,550 (+315)
Rated switching impulse withstand voltage 250/2,500 µs
To earth and between phases [kV] – – – – 850 950 1,050 1,175
Across the isolating distance [kV] – – – – 700 (+245) 800 (+295) 900 (+345) 900 (+450)
Rated normal current up to [A] 4,000
Rated peak withstand current up to [kA] 160
Rated short-time withstand current up to [kA] 160
Rated duration of short circuit [s] 1/3
Icing class 10/20
Temperature range [°C] –50/+50
Operating mechanism type Motor operation/Manual operation
Control voltage [V, DC] 60/110/125/220
[V, AC] 220…230, 1~, 50/60 Hz
Motor voltage [V, DC] 60/110/125/220
[V, AC] 110/125/230, 1~, 50/60 Hz
220/380/415, 3~, 50/60 Hz
Maintenance 25 years
Technical data
Design Knee-type
Rated voltage 123 550
Rated power-frequency withstand voltage 50 Hz/1 min
To earth and between phases [kV] 230 620
Across the isolating distance
Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage 1.2/50 µs
[kV] 265 800
4
To earth and between phases [kV] 550 1,550
Across the isolating distance [kV] 630 1,550 (+315)
Rated switching impulse withstand voltage 250/2,500 µs
To earth and between phases [kV] – 1,175
Across the isolating distance [kV] – 900 (+450)
Rated normal current up to [A] 4,000
Rated peak withstand current up to [kA] 100 160
Rated short-time withstand current up to [kA] 40 63
Rated duration of short circuit [s] 1/3
Icing class 10/20
Temperature range [°C] –50/+50
Operating mechanism type Motor operation/Manual operation
Control voltage [V, DC] 60/110/125/220
[V, AC] 220…230, 1~, 50/60 Hz
Motor voltage [V, DC] 60/110/125/220
[V, AC] 110/125/230, 1~, 50/60 Hz
220/380/415, 3~, 50/60 Hz
Maintenance 25 years
Technical data
To earth and between phases [kV] 550 650 750 1,050 1,050 1,425 1,550 2,100
Across the isolating distance [kV] 630 750 860 120 1,050 1,425 1,550 2,100
(+170) (+240) (+315) (+455)
Rated switching impulse withstand voltage 250/2,500 µs
To earth and between phases [kV] – – – – 850 1,050 1,175 1,550
Across the isolating distance [kV] – – – – 700 (+245) 900 (+345) 900 (+450) 1,200
(+650)
Rated normal current up to [A] 4,000
Rated peak withstand current up to [kA] 160
Rated short-time withstand current up to [kA] 63
Rated duration of short circuit [s] 1/3
Icing class 10/20
Temperature range [°C] –50/+50
Operating mechanism type Motor operation/Manual operation
Control voltage [V, DC] 60/110/125/220
[V, AC] 220…230, 1~, 50/60 Hz
Motor voltage [V, DC] 60/110/125/220
[V, AC] 110/125/230, 1~, 50/60 Hz
220/380/415, 3~, 50/60 Hz
Maintenance 25 years
Circuit-breakers Disconnectors
Circuit-breakers must make and break all Disconnectors are used for no-load
currents within the scope of their ratings, closing and opening operations. Their
from small inductive and capacitive load function is to “isolate” downstream
currents up to the short-circuit current, equipment so they can be worked on.
and this must occur under all fault
conditions in the power supply system, Switch-disconnectors
including earth faults and phase A switch-disconnector is to be
opposition. Outdoor circuit-breakers have understood as the combination of a
the same applications, but are also switch and a disconnector, or a switch
exposed to weather influences. with isolating distance.
Contactors
Contactors are load breaking devices with
a limited making and breaking capacity.
They are used for high switching rates
but can neither make nor break short-
circuit currents.
Rated voltage
4.3.2 Selection of Components by The rated voltage is the upper limit of the highest system
Ratings voltage the device is designed for. Because all high-voltage
switching devices are zero-current interrupters – except for some
The switching devices and all other equipment must be selected fuses – the system voltage is the most important dimensioning
for the system data available at the place of installation. This criterion. It determines the dielectric stress of the switching
system data defines the ratings of the components (table 4.3-1) device by means of the transient recovery voltage and the
recovery voltage, especially while switching off.
Rated insulation level
The rated insulation level is the dielectric strength from phase to Rated normal current
earth, between phases and across the open contact gap, or The rated normal current is the current that the main circuit of a
across the isolating distance. device can continuously carry under defined conditions. The
heating of components – especially of contacts – must not
The dielectric strength is the capability of an electrical compo- exceed defined values. Permissible temperature rises always
nent to withstand all voltages with a specific time sequence up refer to the ambient air temperature. If a device is mounted in
to the magnitude of the corresponding withstand voltages. an enclosure, it is possible that it may not be loaded with its full
These can be operating voltages or higher-frequency voltages rated current, depending on the quality of heat dissipation.
caused by switching operations, earth faults (internal overvol-
tages) or lightning strikes (external overvoltages). The dielectric Rated peak withstand current
strength is verified by a lightning impulse withstand voltage test The rated peak withstand current is the peak value of the first
with the standard impulse wave of 1.2/50 µs and a power-fre- major loop of the short-circuit current during a compensation
quency withstand voltage test (50 Hz/1 min). process after the beginning of the current flow that the device
can carry in closed state. It is a measure for the electrodynamic Rated short-circuit making current
(mechanical) load of an electrical component. For devices with The rated short-circuit making current is the peak value of the
full making capacity, this value is not relevant (see the para- making current in the event of short-circuit at the terminals of
graph “Rated short-circuit making current” later in this section). the switching device. This stress is greater than that of the rated
peak withstand current, because dynamic forces may work
Rated breaking current against the contact movement.
The rated breaking current is the load breaking current in normal
operation. For devices with full breaking capacity and without a Standards
critical current range, this value is not relevant (see the para- The switching devices, and also non-switching components, are
graph “Rated short-circuit breaking current” later in this section). subject to national and international standards.
Rated short-circuit
Rated short-circuit
withstand current
breaking current
Rated insulation
making current
Rated breaking
Rated voltage
Rated normal
Rated peak
Component designation
current
current
level
Switching devices
Circuit-breaker p p p – – p p
Switch p p p – p p1) p
Switch-disconnector p p p – p – p
Disconnector p – p p – – –
Earthing switch p – – p – – –
4 tȋStored-energy mechanism
tȋ For synchronizing and rapid load transfer
no hazardous overvoltages will appear when unloaded trans-
formers are switched off.
tȋ For auto-reclosing
tȋSpring-operated mechanism (spring CLOSED, stored-energy Breaking of short-circuit currents
OPEN) for normal closing and opening. While breaking short-circuit currents at the fault location directly
downstream from transformers, generators or current-limiting
Switching duties in detail reactors, the full short-circuit current can appear first; second,
the initial rate of rise of the transient recovery voltage can be far
Synchronizing above the values according to IEC 62 271-100. There may be
The closing times during synchronizing are so short that, when initial rates of rise up to 10 kV/s, and while switching off short-
the contacts touch, there is still sufficient synchronism between circuits downstream from reactors, these may be even higher.
the systems to be connected in parallel. The circuit-breakers are also adequate for this stress.
Switching of motors
When small high-voltage motors are stopped during start-up,
switching overvoltages may arise. This concerns high-voltage
motors with starting currents up to 600 A. The magnitude of
these overvoltages can be reduced to harmless values by means
of special surge limiters. For individually compensated motors,
no protective circuit is required.
Switching of generators
When generators with a short-circuit current of < 600 A are
operated, switching overvoltages may arise. In this case, surge
limiters or arresters should be used.
4 25 kA 800 A
1,250 A
SION
SION
SION
SION
3AH5
3AH5
SION
SION
3AH5
3AH5
2,000 A SION SION 3AH5 SION
2,500 A SION 3AH5 SION 3AH5
31.5 kA 800 A SION SION SION
1,250 A SION SION 3AH5 3AH4 3AH4 SION 3AH5
2,000 A SION SION 3AH5 3AH4 3AH4 SION 3AH5
2,500 A SION SION 3AH5 SION 3AH5
3,150 A
4,000 A
40 kA 1,250 A SION SION 3AH4 3AH4 SION 3AK7
2,000 A SION SION 3AH4 3AH4 SION 3AK7
2,500 A SION SION 3AH4 3AH4 SION 3AK7
3,150 A SION SION 3AH4 3AH4 SION 3AK7
4,000 A 3AK7
50 kA 1,250 A 3AH3 3AK7 3AH3 3AK7 3AH3 3AH3 3AK7
2,500 A 3AH3 3AK7 3AH3 3AK7 3AH3 3AH3 3AK7
3,150 A 3AH3 3AK7 3AH3 3AK7 3AH3 3AH3 3AK7
4,000 A 3AH3 3AK7 3AH3 3AK7 3AH3 3AH3 3AK7
5,000 A
6,300 A
63 kA 1,250 A 3AH3 3AH3 3AH3 3AH3
2,500 A 3AH3 3AH3 3AH3 3AH3
3,150 A 3AH3 3AH3 3AH3 3AH3
4,000 A 3AH3 3AH3 3AH3 3AH3
5,000 A
6,300 A
72 kA 3,150 A
4,000 A
5,000 A
6,300 A
Portfolio of circuit-breakers
3AH371/2
6,300 A 180 MVA 260 MVA
1-pole design
4,000 A 120 MVA 160 MVA
3AH375/6*
3AH381
3,150 A 100 MVA 130 MVA
3AK763
40 kA 50 kA 63 kA 72 kA 80 kA 90 kA IEC* Ik
The significant property of the dead-tank technology is the Fig. 4.3-3: Live-tank circuit-breaker
arrangement of the vacuum interrupter in an earthed metal
enclosure (fig. 4.3-4).
4.3.6 Reclosers
Vacuum reclosers offer dependable protection for overhead lines
in order to provide improved reliability of the distribution net-
work. At the core of the system, the controller provides a high
level of protection, easiest operation, and high operating effi-
ciency.
economy circuit, proving a high mechanical endurance and IEC 62271-1 – 106 CDV 01’2010
a low pickup and holding power. An optional latch may hold the IEC 60529 IDIN EN 60529
vacuum contactor in closed position even without excitation of IEC 60721 DIN EN 60721
the magnet system. The vacuum contactor is released electri-
IEC 60282-1 IDIN EN 60282-1
cally by means of a latch release solenoid or mechanically by an
optional cabel operated latch release. Test voltage according to D/L 404, GB 14808, DL/T 593
In case of short circuit, the HV HRC fuse melts already during the Advantages at a glance
IEC 60470/
Standard IEC 60470 IEC 60470
High dielectric stength
Thermal current Ith Depending on installation and coordination with the selected fuses
Mechanical endurance 1 mio. operating cycles 1 mio. operating cycles 1 mio. operating cycles
Max. number of fuses per phase 1 × 315 A or 2 × 250 A 1 × 315 A or 2 × 250 A 1 × 200 A or 2 × 200 A
4.3.9 Disconnectors and Switch- Rated short-time Rated normal Rated voltage
withstand current current
Disconnectors 12 kV 24 kV 36 kV
20 kA 630 A 3DC 3DC/3DA 3DC
Disconnectors (also called isolators) are used for almost no-load
31.5 kA 630 A 3DC
opening and closing of electrical circuits. While doing so, they
can break negligible currents (these are currents up to 500 mA, 1,250 A 3DC 3DC/3DA 3DC
e.g., capacitive currents of busbars or voltage transformers), or 1,600 A 3DC 3DC/3DA 3DA
higher currents if there is no significant change of the voltage 2,500 A 3DC 3DC 3DC
between the terminals during breaking, e.g., during busbar 3,000 A 3DC
transfer in double-busbar switchgear, when a bus coupler is
50 kA 1,250 A 3DC
closed in parallel.
1,600 A 3DC
The actual task of disconnectors is to establish an isolating 2,500 A 3DC
distance in order to work safely on other operational equipment 3,000 A 3DC
that has been “isolated” by the disconnector (fig. 4.3-14). For
63 kA 1,250 A 3DC
this reason, stringent requirements are placed on the reliability,
4
1,600 A 3DC
visibility and dielectric strength of the isolating distance.
2,500 A 3DC
The different disconnectors and their properties are shown in 3,000 A 3DC
table 4.3-9.
Table 4.3-8: Portfolio of disconnectors
Type 3CJ2
Rated voltage 12 kV 17.5 kV 24 kV 36 kV
Rated short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage 28 kV/32 kV 38 kV/45 kV 50 kV/60 kV 70 kV/80 kV
Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage 75 kV/85 kV 95 kV/110 kV 125 kV/145 kV 170 kV/195 kV
Rated normal current 400 A 400 A 400 A 630 A
Rated normal current – without fuse-link 630 A/1000 A 630 A 630 A/1000 A 630 A/1000 A
Rated short-time withstand current (1 sec) 25 kA 25 kA 25 kA 20 kA
Rated short-circuit making current 63 kA 63 kA 50 kA 25 kA
Rated closed-loop breaking current 400 A/630 A 400 A/630 A 400 A/630 A 630 A
Rated cable-charging breaking current 50 A 75 A 50 A 25 A
Rated earth-fault breaking current 150 A 200 A 150 A 70 A
Rated cable-charging breaking current under 86 A 100 A 86 A 40 A
earth-fault conditions
Number of mechanical operating cycles 2,500 2,500 2,500 1,000
Torque of spring-operated/stored-energy mechanism 44/60 54/62 64/64 90/150
Torque of earthing switch 60 65 70 120
Standard fuse reference dimension “e” 292 362 442 538
Arc-extinguishing principle
Switch-disconnectors operate according to the principle of a
hard-gas switch, and so the arc is not extinguished in a vacuum
interrupter. The arc splits off some gas from an insulating mate-
rial that surrounds the arc closely and this gas quenches the arc.
4.4 Low-Voltage Devices protective devices, the characteristics of the feeder circuit-
breaker in the overload range (L) and also in the time-lag short-
circuit range (S) should be optionally switchable (I4t or I2t
4.4.1 Requirements on the Switchgear characteristic curve). This facilitates the adaptation of upstream
in the Three Circuit Types and downstream devices.
with a rated current of 630 A or 800 A. As the ACB is not a load (power outlet), etc.). The protective device must satisfy the
current-limiting device, it differs greatly from other protective requirements of the consumer to be protected by it.
devices such as MCCB, MCB and fuses.
Note:
Fig. 4.4-1 shows the major differences and limits of the All protection settings, comparison of characteristic curves, etc.
respective protective devices. always start with the load. This means that no protective devices
are required with adjustable time grading in the final circuit.
Device application in the final circuit
The final circuit receives power from the distribution circuit and
supplies it to the consumer (e.g., motor, lamp, non-stationary
Standards IEC
circuit-breaker
Yes
molded-case
circuit-breaker
Yes
disconnector
Yes
disconnector
with fuses
Yes
miniature
circuit-breaker
Yes
values,
specifications
Region
4
Application System protection Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Power supply system
Installation Fixed mounting Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Plug-in – Up to 800 A – Partly – Availability
Withdrawable unit Yes Yes – – –
Rated current In 6,300 A 1,600 A 630 A 630 A 125 A Normal current IB
Short-circuit Maximum short-
Icu Up to 150 kA Up to 100 kA Up to 120 kA Up to 120 kA Up to 25 kA
breaking capacity circuit current Ik max
Current carrying
Icw Up to 80 kA Up to 5 kA – – – Circuit
capacity
Number of poles 3-pole Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Power supply system
4-pole Yes Yes – Partly –
Tripping ETU Yes Yes – – –
characteristic Power supply system
TM – Up to 630 A Yes Yes Yes
Tripping function LI Yes Yes Yes* Yes* Yes
LSI Yes Yes – – –
Power supply system
N Yes Yes – – –
G Yes Yes – – –
Characteristics Fixed – Yes Yes Yes Yes
Adjustable Yes Yes – – – Power supply system
Optional Yes Yes – – –
Protection against
Detection No No Depends on Depends on Depends on Minimum short-
electric shock,
of Ik min limitation limitation *) cable length cable length cable length circuit current Ik min
tripping condition
Communication High Yes – – – –
(data Customer
transmission) Medium Yes Yes – – –
specification
Low Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Activation Local Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Customer
Remote (motor) Yes Yes – – specifications
Fig. 4.4-1: Overview of the protective devices; *) with ETU: No limitation / with TMTU: depends on cable length
MCCB SD MSP
M M M
1. Application
Plants/motors/disconnectors
2. 3-pole/4-pole
3. Fixed mounting/plug-in/
withdrawable-unit design
4. Rated current In
ACB: 6,300 A
MCCB: 1,600 A
Fuse: 630 A
M M
5. Short-circuit
breaking capacity Icu
6. Release
Influences selectivity
and protection setting
M M M 7. Communication M M M
and data transfer
4.4.3 Busbar Trunking Systems, Cables tȋThe BD01 busbar system from 40 to 160 A for supplying
workshops with tap-offs up to 63 A
and Wires
tȋThe BD2 busbar system from 160 to 1,250 A for supplying
medium-size consumers in buildings and industry
Busbar trunking systems tȋThe ventilated LD system from 1,100 to 5,000 A for power
When a planning concept for power supply is developed, it is not transmission and power distribution an production sites with a
only imperative to observe standards and regulations, it is also high energy demand
important to discuss and clarify economic and technical interre- tȋThe LX sandwich system from 800 to 5,000 A (6,300 A on
lations. The rating and selection of electric equipment, such as request), mainly for power transmission insensitive to position
distribution boards and transformers, must be performed in such in buildings with the requirements of degree of protection IP54
a way that an optimum result for the power system as whole is and special conductor configurations such as double N or
kept in mind rather than focusing on individual components. insulated PE
tȋThe encapsulated LR system from 400 to 6,150 A for power
All components must be sufficiently rated to withstand normal transmission for extreme environmental conditions (IP68).
operating conditions as well as fault conditions. Further For the configuration of a busbar system, the following points
important aspects to be considered for the preparation of an are to be noted:
Structural parameters and boundary conditions: tȋDimensions of the distribution board, system supplies and
tȋPhase response (changes of direction in the busbar routing tap-off units:
possible, differences in height, etc.) tȋ Installation clearance from ceiling, wall and parallel systems
tȋFunctional sections (e.g., various environmental conditions or for the purpose of heat dissipation and installation options
various uses) tȋ Crossing with other installations (water, gas pipes, etc.)
tȋCheck use in sprinkler-protected building sections tȋ Swing angle for installing and operating the tap-off units
tȋFire areas (provision of fire barriers –> what structural tȋ Minimum dimensions for changes of direction in the busbar
(e.g., type of walls) and fire fighting (local provisions) routing, fire protection compartmentalization, wall cutouts
boundary conditions are there? tȋ Space requirement for distribution connection
tȋFire protection classes of the fire barriers (S90 and S120) tȋ Cutout planning (sizes and locations of the cutouts)
tȋFunctional endurance classes (E60, E90, E120) and tȋLinear expansion (expansion units, if applicable).
certifications of the busbar systems (observe relevant
deratings)
tȋFire loads/halogens (prescribed fire loads in certain functional
sections, e.g., fire escape routes, must not be exceeded). More information:
Fixing of the busbar systems to the structure: Technical data, dimension drawings, components, etc. are included in the
tȋMaximum clearance from fixings taking into consideration
location, weight of system and additional loads such as tap-off
technical catalog LV 70 of Siemens AG:
t(FSNBO0SEFSOP&,""
t&OHMJTI0SEFSOP&,""
4
units, lighting, etc.
tȋAgreement on possible means of fixing with structural analyst Manual:
Planning with SIVACON 8PS – Busbar Trunking Systems up to 6,300 A
tȋUse of tested fixing accessories with busbar systems with
t(FSNBO0SEFSOP"&
functional endurance t&OHMJTI0SEFSOP"&
tȋObserve derating for type of installation
CD-K system 25 A – 40 A
The system is designed for
applications of 25 to 40 A and
serves to provide an econom-
ical and flexible power supply
for lighting systems and
low-consumption equipment.
Typical areas of application are
department stores, supermar-
kets, storerooms or clean room
technology.
4 1.Trunking unit
tȋ2, 3, 4, 2 × 4,
(1 × 4 + 1 x 2)-conductor
(PE = casing)
tȋDegree of protection:
IP54, IP55
tȋStandard lengths:
2 m and 3 m
tȋRated current: 30 A, 40 A,
2 × 25 A, 2 × 40 A
tȋSpacing of the tapping
points: 0.5 m and 1 m
tȋRated operating voltage:
400 V AC
2. Feeding unit
tȋCable entry:
from three sides
3. Tap-off component
tȋPluggable while energized
tȋ3-pole for 10 A and 16 A
tȋEquipped as L1, L2 or L3
with N and PE
tȋ5-pole for 10 A and 16 A
tȋCodable
4. End flange
5. Possible supplementary
equipment
tȋFixing clamp
tȋSuspension hook 1 Busbar case
tȋHanger 2 Feeding unit
tȋCable fixing 3 Tap-off component
tȋCoding set 4 End flange
5 Supplementary equipment
4 5
1 Busbar case
2 Directional change component
4
3 Feeding unit
4 Tap-off unit
5 Device case
6 Supplementary equipment
6. Possible supplementary
2 equipment
tȋEnd flange
tȋFor fixing:
tȋ Universal fixing clamp for on
5
2 edge or flat position
tȋ Fixing elements for vertical
3 5 phases, for fixing to walls or
4 ceilings
tȋTerminal block
1
1 Busbar case
2 Directional change component
3 Feeding unit
4 Tap-off unit
5 Supplementary equipment
1. Trunking unit
tȋ4 and 5-conductor system
tȋBusbar material: 6
copper or aluminum
tȋRated current: 4
1,100 to 5,000 A
tȋ LDA1 to LDC3
(180 mm x 180 mm) 1
tȋ LDA4 to LDC8
(240 mm x 180 mm) 6
tȋDegree of protection:
IP34 and IP54 (IP36 and IP56
upon request) 4 2 4
tȋStandard lengths:
1.6 m, 2.4 m and 3.2 m
tȋLengths available: 5
from 0.5 m to 3.19 m
tȋTapping points:
tȋ Without
tȋ With user-configurable
tapping points 1 Busbar case
tȋFire protection partitions:
2 Directional change component
fire resistance class S120 in
3 3 Feeding unit
accordance with DIN 4102-9
4 Tap-off unit
5 Distribution board connection
6 Supplementary equipment
LR system
from 400 A – 6,150 A
1 LR – LX adapter
The LRA/LRC busbar trunking
2 Encapsulated link component
system is used for power
3 Straight busbar component
transmission. A special feature
4 Directional change component
of the system is high resis- 5 Expansion unit
tance to external influences of 6 Connector
chemical and corrosive sub- 7 Fire barrier
stances, and it is particularly 8 Connector for distribution board connection
suitable for use in the open air 9 Fixing component
and in environments with high 10 Tap-off point with tap box
air humidity. The high degree 11 Cable feeding unit
of protection IP68 is guaran- 11
teed with the encapsulated
epoxy cast-resin casing, and
serves to provide reliable 1
power transmission when
there is a high energy 4
demand. The system can be
used in industry as well as for 2
relevant infrastructure projects 3
such as railroad stations, 4
airports, office blocks, etc.
5
1. Trunking unit
tȋ4 and 5-conductor system
tȋBusbar material:
10
copper or aluminium
tȋDegree of protection: IP68
tȋUser-configurable lengths:
from 0.30 m to 3.00 m 9
8
tȋLayout: horizontal and
vertical without derating
tȋFire barriers: fire resistance
class S120 in accordance
6
with DIN 4102 Part 9
2. Directional change
components 7
tȋWith or without fire
protection
tȋHorizontal angle unit with or
without offset
tȋZ-unit Fig. 4.4-12: System components for LRA/LRC system
tȋT-unit
4.4.4 Subdistribution Systems tȋAccessibility, e.g., for installation, maintenance and operating
Selection of protective devices and connecting lines would be disabled with the other circuits continuing to be
The selection and setting of the protective devices to be used supplied with power without interruption (chapter 6 “Protection,
must satisfy the following three conditions: Substation Automation, Power Quality and Measurement”).
tȋProtection against non-permissible contact voltage for indirect
contact (electric shock) Because the attainment of selectivity results in increased costs,
tȋOverload protection it should be decided for which circuits selectivity is useful.
tȋShort-circuit protection Backup protection is the lower-cost option. In this case, an
upstream protective device, e.g., an LV HRC fuse as group
For detailed information on the three conditions, see section backup fuse, supports a downstream protective device in mas-
3.3.2 “Dimensioning of Power Distribution Systems”. tering the short-circuit current, i.e., both an upstream and a
downstream protective device trip. The short-circuit current,
An exact protective device selection and thus the dimensioning however, has already been sufficiently reduced by the upstream
of subdistribution systems requires extensive short-circuit protective device so that the downstream protective device can
current and voltage drop calculations. Catalog data for the short- have a smaller short-circuit breaking capacity. Backup protection
circuit energies, the selectivity and the backup protection of the should be used when the expected solid short-circuit current
individual devices and assemblies must also be consulted. In exceeds the breaking capacity of the switching device or the
addition, the appropriate regulations and standards must be
observed. At this point, a reference should be made to the
consumers. If this is not the case, an additional limiting protec-
tive device unnecessarily reduces the selectivity or, indeed, 4
SIMARIS design dimensioning tool that automatically takes removes it.
account of the above mentioned conditions, catalog data,
standards and regulations, and consequently automatically The following scheme should be followed for the selectivity or
makes the device selection. backup protection decision:
tȋDetermine the maximum short-circuit current at the
Selectivity and backup protection installation point,
Rooms used for medical purposes (IEC 60364-7-710, tȋCheck whether the selected protective devices can master this
DIN VDE 0100-710) and meeting rooms (IEC 60364-7-718, short-circuit current alone or with backup protection using
DIN VDE 0100-718) require the selection of protective devices in upstream protective devices,
subareas. For other building types, such as computer centers, tȋCheck at which current the downstream protective devices and
there is an increasing demand for a selective grading of the the upstream protective devices are selective to each other.
protective devices, because only the circuit affected by a fault
ABC 1.1A.1a
Circuit-breaker
In = 630 A
3WL11062CB411AA2/L51
LVMD 1.1A
TN-S Un = 400 V
Fuse-SD 1.1A.1a
Fuse Switch Disc.
In = 100 A
3 x 3NA3830/Size 000
3NP40100Ch01
Busbar 1.1A.1
Busbar
14 m
BD2A-2-160
TN-S Un = 400 V
LVSD 1.1A.1
Fig. 4.5-3 shows the sectional view of a tube design arrester. The Grading hood
housing consists of a fiberglass-reinforced plastic tube with Metal-
insulating sheds made of silicone rubber. The advantages of this oxide resistors
design, which has the same pressure relief device as an arrester Supporting rods
with porcelain housing, are absolutely safe and reliable pressure Enclosure
Another important design are the gas-insulated metal-enclosed Fig. 4.5-6: Medium-voltage Fig. 4.5-7: Arrester condition
surge arresters (GIS arresters, fig. 4.5-5). Siemens has been MO arrester for monitor (ACM)
making these arresters for more than 25 years. There are two special applications
reasons why, when GIS arresters are used with gas-insulated
switchgear, they usually offer a higher protective safety margin
than when outdoor-type arresters are used: First, they can be
installed closer to the item to be protected so that traveling
wave effects can be limited more effectively. Second, compared
with the outdoor type, inductance of the installation is lower
(both that of the connecting conductors and that of the arrester
itself). This means that the protection offered by GIS arresters is
much better than that offered by any other method, especially in
the case of surges with a very steep rate of rise or high fre-
quency, to which gas-insulated switchgear is exceptionally
sensitive.
Monitoring
Siemens also offers a wide range of products for diagnosis and
monitoring of surge arresters. The innovative arrester condition Fig. 4.5-8: Medium-voltage Fig. 4.5-9: Medium-voltage
monitor (fig. 4.5-7) is the heart of the future-proof (IEC 61850) arrester 3EK4 for arrester 3EK7 for
monitoring product line. distribution systems distribution systems
SIEMENS
R
Tab. 4.5-1: Medium-voltage metal-oxide surge arresters and limiters (300 V to 72.5 kV)
Porcelain Silicone
3EP5 3EP4 3EP6 3EP3 3EL5 3EL1 3EL2 3EQ1 3EQ4 3EQ3 3EQ5
4 Medium
and high-
voltage
Medium
and high-
voltage
High-
voltage
systems,
High-
voltage
systems,
Medium
and high-
voltage
Medium
and high-
voltage
Medium
and high-
voltage
Medium
and high-
voltage
High-
voltage
systems,
High-
voltage
systems,
High-
voltage
systems,
systems, systems, outdoor outdoor systems, systems, systems, systems, outdoor outdoor outdoor
outdoor outdoor installa- installa- station station station outdoor installa- installa- installa-
Applications
installa- installa- tions tions, and line and line and line installa- tions tions, tions,
tions tions HVDC, surge ar- surge ar- surge ar- tions HVDC, HVDC ap-
SC&SVC rester rester rester SC&SVC plications
applica- applica-
tions tions
Maximum rated
96 288 468 612 126 288 468 288 468 612 850
voltage kV
Maximum nominal
10 10 20 20 10 10 20 10 20 20 20
discharge current kA
Maximum line
3 3 5 5 2 2 4 3 5 5 5
discharge class
Maximum thermal
energy absorption
8 8 14 25 2 5 10 8 18 25 66
capability
(per kV of Ur) kJ/kV
Maximum long-
duration current 1,100 1,100 2,000 7,000 550 750 1,200 1,100 3,200 8,500 11,000
impulse, 2 ms A
their original resistance value so that only a so-called leakage discharge voltage value of the arresters or limiters must not
current of a few mA flows at operating voltage. Because this exceed the dielectric strength of the operational equipment to
leakage current heats up the resistors, and thus the arrester, the be protected.
device must be designed according to the neutral-point treat-
ment of the system in order to prevent impermissible heating of The medium-voltage product range includes:
the arrester. tȋThe 3EB and 3EC surge arresters for railway DC as well as AC
applications (fig. 4.5-6).
In contrast to the normal surge arrester, the surge limiter con- tȋThe 3EF group of surge arresters and limiters for the protection
tains a series gap in addition to the MO resistor stack. If the load of motors, dry-type transformers, airfield lighting systems and
generated by the overvoltage is large enough, the series gap cable sheath as well as for the protection of converters for
ignites, and the overvoltage can be discharged to earth until the drives (fig. 4.5-6).
series gap extinguishes and the varistors return to their non-con- tȋThe 3EK silicone-housed surge arrester for distribution
ductive state. This process is repeated again and again systems, medium-voltage switchgear up to 72.5 kV and line
throughout the entire duration of the fault. This makes it pos- surge arresters for outdoor use (fig. 4.5-8 and fig. 4.5-9).
sible to design the device with a considerably lower discharge
voltage as a conventional surge arrester, and is especially useful An overview of the complete range of Siemens arresters appears
for the protection of motors with – normally – a poor dielectric
strength. To guarantee a sufficient protective function, the
in the table 4.5-1 to table 4.5-3.
4
3ES5-C/M/N, 3ES with oil-
3ES2-E 3ES4-L, 3ES5-H 3ES9-J 3ES6
3ES4-K SF6
1-phase 1-phase 1-phase 3-phase
3-phase 1-phase
Tab. 4.5-3: Metal-oxide surge arresters for GIS (72.5 to 800 kV)
4 allow accurate determination of revenue billing. solid electrical connection between the core housing and the
ground.
When used for protection purposes, the instrument transformer
outputs must accurately represent the transmission line values If over pressure occurs, the protection is guaranteed by the:
during both steady-state and transient conditions. These critical tȋWelded elastic housing
signals provide the basis for circuit breaker operation under fault tȋStainless-steel bellows for the oil expansion.
conditions, and as such are fundamental to network reliability
and security. Both the welded seam, which connects the upper and lower
portions of the head housing, and the metallic bellows are
Instrument transformers used for network control supply impor- designed to act as pressure relief points in the event of severe
tant information for determining the state of the operating internal pressure buildup.
conditions of the network.
Because the unit has a normal internal oil pressure of approxi-
Reliability and security mately 1 bar absolute, it is possible to design these pressure
Reliability of an instrument transformer refers to its ability to relief points to rupture at very moderate pressures. Additional
consistently satisfy prescribed performance criteria over its safety is achieved by the selection of composite insulators,
expected useful lifetime under specified operating conditions. available in the whole range as an alternative to the traditional
Security refers to the acceptability and consequences of the porcelain.
instrument transformer failure mode in the event that it does
fail, due either to being subjected to stresses in excess of those Pressure relief for capacitor voltage transformers is provided by a
for which it was designed, or due to its reaching the end of its bellows puncture pin and through the use of porcelain, which is
expected service life. strong enough to result in any rapid pressure rise being released
through the seal plates at the ends of the porcelain rather than
The reliability and security characteristics of an instrument via explosion of the porcelain itself.
transformer are governed by the electrical and insulation design,
the manufacturing and processing technology used and the Gas-insulated instrument transformers
specific physical arrangement. The partial discharge perfor- The reliability and security of Trench gas-insulated instrument
mance under in-service conditions is a key determining factor in transformers is based on:
the life expectancy and long-term reliability of an instrument tȋ50 years of experience as a manufacturer of instrument
transformer. transformers covering epoxy resin and oil-paper
tȋThousands of gas-insulated instrument transformers in service
IEC standards for oil-immersed or gas-filled devices require a under a wide variety of different environmental conditions.
partial discharge value of less than 10 pC at Umax. Due to the
demanding requirements of today’s HV and UHV networks, the Explosion-proof design
Trench Group has elected to adopt even more stringent internal The present Trench gas-insulated instrument transformers were
requirements. As such, Trench instrument transformers typically initially designed in 1965 at the request of customers who
perform much better than required by these standards with sought to achieve explosion-proof operation. SF6 gas insulation,
proven field experience with hundreds of thousands in operation combined with composite insulators, is particularly suitable for
over more than 50 years in almost every country worldwide. this, because in the event of an internal flashover, the pressure
Typical designs are oil-immersed (fig. 4.6-2), gas-insulated increase will be linear and hence technically manageable. A
(fig. 4.6-1). controlled pressure relief device at the head of the transformer
(rupture disc) eliminates unacceptable mechanical stresses in
the housing; i.e., only the rupture disc is released. Gas escapes,
but the complete transformer remains intact and no explosion
occurs.
Current transformers
All Trench current transformer (CT) designs are based on “head
type” construction. CTs are available with either oil (fig. 4.6-2) or
SF6 gas dielectric systems (fig. 4.6-3).
grading system especially developed for this application The resulting system can accurately transform voltages within a
tȋWide range ferroresonance-free design without the use of an defined burden range with linear frequency response of up to
external damping device (please ask for details) approximately 10 kHz. Thus, the system is ideal for measure-
tȋEssentially unaffected by external stray magnetic fields ment of dynamic and transient phenomena and harmonics
tȋStable accuracy over a long period of time associated with HVDC systems.
tȋSuitable for line discharging
tȋOptimized high-voltage coil ensures identical electric stresses
under both transient and steady state conditions
tȋExclusive use of corrosion-resistant materials
tȋApplicable as a low-cost alternative to small power
transformer.
Fig. 4.6-9: 145 kV, 100 kVA gas- Fig. 4.6-10: 420 kV gas-insulated
insulated Power VT combined instrument
for AIS transformers
Features of RC-dividers
tȋRC divider for voltage measurements
tȋConform to microprocessor-based secondary technology
tȋFerroresonance-free
tȋAble to perform voltage test on site
tȋ1-phase or 3-phase system
tȋSignificant size and weight reduction.
Features
tȋThe voltage transducers are based on resistive, capacitive, as
well as resistive-capacitive dividers
tȋThe current transducers are based on an iron-core or an air-
core design and provide a secondary voltage that represents
the primary current
tȋStandard cables and connectors; twisted pair and double
shielded cable
tȋConnection capability for multiple protection and measuring
4 devices
tȋMetal-clad housing ensuring operator safety Fig. 4.6-17: 145 kV Siemens switchgear 8DN8 with Trench voltage-
and current transformer
tȋImmune to all methods of online switchgear and cable testing
tȋCurrent transducers provide a linear transmission up to short-
circuit current
tȋCompletely EMC shielded: immune to RFI/EMI.
Advantages
tȋSystem conforms to low-power digital microprocessor-based
technology for protection and metering
tȋSimple assembly with compact size and low weight
tȋNo secondary circuit problems; voltage transducers are short-
circuit-proof, current transducers can have an open secondary
tȋVoltage transducers are ferroresonance-free
tȋEnvironment-friendly (no oil).
Voltage level [kV] 72.5 123 145 170 245 300 362 420 550
4 Output current
Rated short-time thermal
[A] 1 – 5 (LoPo: 3.25 V)
[kA] 31.5 50 63
current
Rated duration of short circuit [s] 1–3
Insulation class E, F
Values in accordance with IEC; other values like ANSI are available
Tab 4.6-1: Technical data of Trench current transformers for gas-insulated substations (GIS)
Voltage level [kV] 72.5 123 145 170 245 300 362 420 550 800
4
Rated power frequency
[kV] 140 230 275 325 460 460 510 630 680 975
withstand voltage
Rated lightning impulse
[kV] 325 550 650 750 1,050 1,050 1,175 1,425 1,550 2,100
withstand voltage
Rated switching impulse
[kV] – – – – – 850 950 1,050 1,175 1,550
withstand voltage
Output voltage [V] 110/√3 – 200/√3 (other values upon request) (AC & DC RC Divider: 5 – 200V)
Rated voltage factor 1.2 – 1.5 – 1.9 (other values upon request)
Insulation class E
IID × × × × × × × × ×
Values in accordance with IEC; other values like ANSI are available; 1) valid only for voltage transformers
Tab 4.6-2: Technical data of Trench voltage transformers for gas-insulated substations (GIS)
4 Voltage range
Insulation medium
[kV] 72.5 – 800
SF6
72.5 – 550
SF6
72.5 – 550
Oil
Composite insulator × × ×
Porcelain insulator × ×
Technical data
Voltage level [kV] 72.5 123 145 170 245 300 362 420 550 800
Rated power frequency
[kV] 140 230 275 325 460 460 510 630 680 975
withstand voltage
Rated lightning impulse
[kV] 325 550 650 750 1,050 1,050 1,175 1,425 1,550 2,100
withstand voltage
Rated switching impulse
[kV] – – – – – 850 950 1,050 1,175 1,550
withstand voltage
Rated normal current up to [A] 5,000
Values in accordance with IEC; other values like ANSI are available
Tab 4.6-3: Technical data of Trench current transformers for air-insulated substations (AIS)
Voltage range
Insulation medium
[kV] 72.5 – 800
SF6
72.5 – 420
SF6
72.5 – 550
Oil
72.5 – 1200
Oil
72.5 – 800
Oil
72.5 – 800
Oil / SF6
4
Composite insulator × × × × × ×
Porcelain insulator × × × × ×
Technical data
Voltage level [kV] 72.5 123 145 170 245 300 362 420 550 800
Rated power frequency
[kV] 140 230 275 325 460 460 510 630 680 975
withstand voltage
Rated lightning impulse
[kV] 325 550 650 750 1,050 1,050 1,175 1,425 1,550 2,100
withstand voltage
Rated switching impulse
[kV] – – – – – 850 950 1,050 1,175 1,550
withstand voltage
Output voltage [V] 110/√3 – 200/√3 (other values upon request) (AC & DC RC Divider: 5 – 200V)
Rated voltage factor 1.2 – 1.5 – 1.9 (other values upon request)
Output burden (only AC) for different classes according to customer specification
Values in accordance with IEC; other values like ANSI are available; 1) valid only for voltage transformers
Tab 4.6-4: Technical data of Trench voltage transformers for air-insulated substations (AIS)
4 Voltage range
Insulation medium
[kV] 72.5 – 800
SF6
72.5 – 245
SF6
72.5 – 300
Oil
Composite insulator × × ×
Porcelain insulator × ×
Technical data
Voltage level [kV] 72.5 123 145 170 245 300 362 420 550 800
Rated power frequency
[kV] 140 230 275 325 460 460 510 630 680 975
withstand voltage
Rated lightning impulse
[kV] 325 550 650 750 1,050 1,050 1,175 1,425 1,550 2,100
withstand voltage
Rated switching impulse
[kV] – – – – – 850 950 1,050 1,175 1,550
withstand voltage
Rated frequency [Hz] 16 ⅔ – 50 – 60
[mm/
Creepage distance 25 – 31 (higher upon request)
kV]
Temperature range [°C] –40 – +40 (other values upon request)
CT ratings
Rated normal current up to [A] 5,000
Output current [A] 1–2–5
Rated short-time thermal current [kA] 63 (80 on special request)
Rated duration of short circuit [s] 1–3
Rated dynamic current [kA] 160 (200 on special request)
Insulation class E (SF6 insulated devices) – A (oil insulated devices)
Metering accuracy class 0.1 – 0.2 – 0.2S – 0.5 – 0.5S – 1.0
Protection accuracy class 5P – 10P – TPY – TPX – TPZ – TPS – PR – PX
VT ratings
Output voltage [V] 110/√3 – 200/√3 (other values upon request)
Rated voltage factor 1.2 – 1.5 – 1.9 (other values upon request)
Metering accuracy class 0.1 – 0.2 – 0.5 – 1.0 – 3.0
Output burden for different classes according to customer specification
Protection accuracy class 3P – 6P
Output burden for different classes according to customer specification
Thermal limiting output [VA] 3000 (other values upon request)
Values in accordance with IEC; other values like ANSI are available
Tab 4.6-5: Technical data of Trench combined instrument transformers for air-insulated substations (AIS)
Type PSVS
Tab 4.6-6: Technical data of Trench power voltage transformers for air-insulated substations (AIS)
Type PSUD
Tab 4.6-7: Technical data of Trench power voltage transformers for gas-insulated substations (GIS)
The windings are mechanically reinforced with epoxy resin- Current-limiting reactors
impregnated fiberglass, which after a carefully defined oven- Current-limiting reactors reduce the short-circuit current to
cure cycle produces an encapsulated coil. A network of hori- levels within the rating of the equipment on the load side of the
zontal and vertical fiberglass ties coupled with the encapsulation reactor (fig. 4.7-2). Applications range from the simple distribu-
minimizes vibration in the reactor and achieves the highest tion feeder reactor to large bus-tie and load-balancing reactors
available mechanical strength. The windings are terminated at on systems rated up to 765 kV/2100 kV BIL.
each end to a set of aluminum bars called a spider. This con-
Capacitor reactors
Capacitor reactors are designed to be installed in series with a
shunt-connected capacitor bank to limit inrush currents due to
switching, to limit outrush currents due to close-in faults, and to
control the resonant frequency of the system due to the addition
of the capacitor banks. Reactors can be installed on system
voltages through 765 kV/2100 kV BIL. When specifying capacitor
reactors, the requested continuous current rating should
account for harmonic current content, tolerance on capacitors
and allowable system overvoltage.
Duplex reactors
Duplex reactors are current limiting reactors that consist of two
half coils, wound in opposition. These reactors provide a desir-
able low reactance under normal conditions and a high reac-
tance under fault conditions.
Filter reactors
Filter reactors are used in conjunction with capacitor banks to
form series tuned harmonic filter circuits, or in conjunction with
capacitor banks and resistors to form broadband harmonic filter
circuits. When specifying filter reactors, the magnitudes of
fundamental and harmonic frequency current should be indi-
cated. If inductance adjustment for fine-tuning is required, the
required tapping range and tolerances must be specified. Many
filter applications require a Q factor that is much lower than the
natural Q of the reactor. This is often achieved by connecting a
resistor in the circuit.
Shunt reactors
Shunt reactors are used to compensate for capacitive VARs
generated by lightly loaded transmission lines or underground
cables. They are normally connected to the transformer tertiary
winding but can also be directly connected on systems of up to
345 kV.
HVDC reactors
HVDC lines are used for long-distance bulk power transmission
as well as back-to-back interconnections between different
transmission networks. HVDC reactors normally include
smoothing reactors, AC and DC harmonic filter reactors, as well 4
as AC and DC PLC noise filter reactors.
Smoothing reactors
Smoothing reactors (fig. 4.7-4) are used to reduce the magni-
tude of the ripple current in a DC system. They are used in power
electronics applications such as variable-speed drives and UPS
systems. They are also required on HVDC transmission lines for
system voltages of up to 800 kV. Several design and construction
techniques are offered by Trench.
Fig. 4.7-4: HVDC smoothing
reactor
Test lab reactors
Test lab reactors are installed in high-voltage and high-power
test laboratories. Typical applications include current limiting,
synthetic testing of circuit breakers, inductive energy storage
and artificial lines.
Arc-suppression coils
Single-phase neutral earthing (grounding) reactors (arc-
suppression coils) are intended to compensate for the capacitive
line-to-earth current during a 1-phase earth fault. The arc-sup-
pression coil (ASC) represents the central element of the Trench
earth-fault protection system (fig. 4.7-5).
Because the electric system is subject to changes, the induc-
tance of the ASC used for neutral earthing must be variable. The
earth-fault detection system developed by Trench utilizes the
plunger core coil (moveable-core design). Based on extensive
experience in design, construction and application of ASCs,
Trench products can meet the most stringent requirements for
earth-fault compensating techniques.
4.8 Bushings 1
Introduction 2
HSP Hochspannungsgeräte GmbH – known as HSP – and Trench 3
have a long history and a well-known reputation in manufac- 4
turing high-voltage bushings and equipment. Both are world
leaders in power engineering and design of specialized electrical
5
products.
Typical environmental conditions are: Transformer bushings: oil-impregnated paper design (OIP)
tȋOil-to-air An oil-impregnated paper transformer bushing is made of the
tȋOil-to-gas following components (fig. 4.8-1):
tȋOil-to-oil
tȋSF6-to-air 1. Terminal
tȋAir-to-air. Terminal (Al or Cu) for connection of overhead lines or busbars
and arcing horns. State-of-the-art designs provide maintenance-
The internal insulation of a bushing is made of a combination of free termination, and ensure that the connection will not
different insulating materials: become loose in service.
tȋOil-impregnated paper (OIP)
tȋEpoxy-resin-impregnated paper (ERIP) 2. Assembly
tȋSF6 gas. The whole bushing is tightened together by the central tube or
conductor.
The external insulation is made of:
tȋEpoxy resin for indoor applications 3. Head
tȋPorcelain or fiberglass tubes with silicone rubber sheds for Al-casted head with oil expansion chamber and oil level
outdoor application indicator. The chamber is hermetically sealed against the
atmosphere.
4. Oil filling 1
State-of-the-art bushings are filled with dried, degassed
insulating mineral oil. 2
5. Insulator
3
Porcelain insulator made of high-grade electrotechnical
porcelain according to IEC 815. The insulator is connected to the
mounting flange using Portland cement, and sealed with O-ring
gasket. Composite insulators are increasingly demanded and are
readily available.
6. Active part
The active part is made of oil-impregnated wide-band paper with 4
conductive layers made of aluminum foil to control the electrical
field radially and axially. Depending on the current rating, the
paper and foil are wound on either a central tube or a solid
conductor. 5
4
7. Flange
The mounting flange with integrated test tap made of corrosion 1. Terminal
free aluminum alloy is machined to ensure an excellent seal 2. Dry filling
between the bushing and the transformer. 3. Insulator
6
4. Active part
5. Flange
8. CT pocket
6. Oil-side end
If current transformers are required on the bushing, the ground
sleeve can be extended.
Fig. 4.8-2: Transformer bushing – epoxy-resin-impregnated paper
(RIP) design – sectional view
9. Oil-side end
The insulator on the oil side is made of an epoxy resin tube. It is
designed to stay installed during the in-tank drying process of
the transformer, and can withstand temperatures of up to
130 °C.
1. Terminal
Terminal (Al or Cu) for connection of overhead lines or busbars
and arcing horns. State-of-the-art designs provide maintenance- Fig. 4.8-3: Transformer bushing – high current
free termination, and ensure that the connection will not
become loose in service.
4. Active part
2. Dry filling The active part is made of resin-impregnated paper with conduc-
State-of-the-art bushings are filled with dry-type foam. tive layers made of aluminum foil to control the electrical field
radially and axially. Depending on the current rating, the paper
3. Insulator and foil are wound on either a central tube or a solid conductor.
The external insulation consists of a composite insulator with
silicone sheds. These are vulcanized on the mechanical support, 5. Flange
a high-quality wound insulating tube made of epoxy resins with The mounting flange with integrated test tap made of corrosion
glass fiber laminate structure. In most cases the flange is part of free aluminum alloy is machined to ensure an excellent seal
the insulator. between the bushing and the transformer.
6. Oil-side end (including CT pocket if required) copper on request. The main insulation is vacuum-impregnated
The insulator on the oil side is made of an epoxy resin tube. It is epoxy condenser (fig. 4.8-3).
designed to stay installed during the in-tank drying process of the
transformer, and can withstand temperatures of up to 130 °C. Other transformer bushings: oil-to-gas and oil-to-oil
Oil-to-gas types are intended for the direct connection of power
Connections transformers to gas-insulated switchgear; oil-to-oil types are
The modular bushing systems offer a large choice of connecting intended for the direct connections within the power trans-
systems. At the upper end of the bushing head, there is a clamp former (fig. 4.8-4). Both consist of a main insulating body of
through which the conductor or the cable bolt is fixed. A releas- ERIP (epoxy-resin-impregnated paper). The condenser core is
able cross-pinned fitting at the clamping device prevents it from made of special epoxy resin vacuum-impregnated paper incorpo-
slipping into the transformer during operation. In addition it rating grading foils to ensure uniform voltage distribution. This
serves as locking element. The bolt is sealed through double insulation has proven its reliability in over 40 years of service in
seals. The clamp is made of stainless steel, and all screws are of various system applications. A high-quality insulation enables a
non-corrosive steel. The venting of the central tube is located on compact design. Furthermore, bushings with this insulation have
one side under the edge of the clamp, and can be operated a low partial discharge level, not only at service voltage but far
independently of the conductor bolt. In addition to the cable in excess.
Fig. 4.8-5: Transformer bushing – 800 kV UHVDC – project Yunnan- Fig. 4.8-6: Transformer bushing – 500 kV HVDC – project Three
Guangdong, China Gorges, China
Wall bushings
Wall bushings (fig. 4.8-7) are designed for use in high-voltage
substations for roof or wall according to their positioning:
tȋIndoor/indoor bushings for dry indoor conditions
tȋOutdoor/indoor bushings for use between open air (outer
atmosphere) and dry indoor conditions
tȋOutdoor/outdoor bushings where both ends are in contact
with the open air (outer atmosphere)
Fig. 4.8-8: Wall bushing – 800 kV HVDC – project Yunnan-
Guangdong, China
4
The main insulating body is capacitive-graded. A number of
conductive layers are coaxially located at calculated distances
between the central tube and the flange. This leads to a virtual
linearization of the axial distribution of voltage on the bushing
surface resulting in minimum stress on the surrounding air.
GIS bushings
These bushings are designed for use in GIS substations mainly to
connect to overhead lines. Designs are either electrode design
up to 245 kV or condenser design above 245 kV (fig. 4.8-9).
Composite designs are increasingly demanded, especially for
higher voltage ranges and polluted areas.
Generator bushings
Generator bushings (fig. 4.8-10) are designed for leading the
current induced in the stator windings through the pressurized
hydrogen-gastight, earthed generator housing. Generator
bushings are available from 12 kV to 36 kV and current ratings
of up to 50,000 A. They are natural, gas or liquid-cooled.
Fig. 4.8-9: GIS bushing – 420 kV SF6 outdoor bushing with composite
housing
Design 4
The 3FL insulator housing is a one-piece HTV1 silicone rubber
housing made by the one-shot injection molding process. The
HTV silicone is directly molded onto the core rod by overlapping
the triple junction point and part of the metal end fittings. The
design ensures a total enclosure of the most sensitive part of a
silicone insulator – the junction zone (metal end fitting/FRP
rod/silicone housing), where usually the highest electrical field
strength is concentrated. This overlapping system eliminates any
need of traditional sealing systems while preventing any mois-
ture ingress attacks.
Core Fig. 4.10-1: HTV silicone rubber for best pollution performances
The core rod is a boron-free, corrosionresistant ECR2 glass-fiber-
reinforced plastic rod (FRP rod). Due to the extremely high
hydrolysis and acid resistance of the FRP rod the risk of so-called
brittle fracture is completely eliminated on 3FL insulators.
End fittings
The end fittings, made of hot-dip galvanized forged steel or
ductile cast iron, are directly attached to the FRP core rod by a
circumferential crimping process. Each crimping process is
strongly monitored with a special control system. A complete
range of end fittings according to the latest IEC and ANSI stan-
dards is available up to 120 kN of SML. The 3FL is 100%
exchangeable and compatible with existing insulators and line
hardware of all types.
The special design of the end fitting in the junction zone reduces
to a minimum the electrical field strength and partial discharge
accordingly inside the junction zone as well as on the silicone
housing surface by modeling an integrated grading ring. This
reliably prevents corrosion of the insulating material and elimi-
nates the risk of subsequent failure of the insulator.
Fig. 4.10-2: 3FL long rod insulators can be used either as suspension
or tension insulatorsrequirements
Accessories
Arc protection devices such as arcing horns and corona rings
(also known as grading rings) for field/corona reduction are
available as standard solutions. Customer-specific solutions as
well as other connection and cable clamps are also available on
request.
C
H
L
S
H
S
L 4
Fig. 4.10-7: 3FL2 end fittings Fig. 4.10-9: 3FL4 end fittings
3FL2 long rod insulators for distribution overhead 3FL4 long rod insulators for transmission overhead
power lines power lines
3FL2 long rod insulators are designed to meet the highest 3FL4 long rod insulators are designed to meet the highest
requirements in distribution power systems up to 72 kV. They requirements in transmission power systems up to 170 kV.
have high lightning impulse and power frequency withstand They have a long creepage class (> 31 mm/kV) as well as high
voltages and a long creepage class (> 31 mm/kV). 3FL2 insula- lightning impulse and power frequency withstand voltages.
tors are available with mechanical ratings up to SML = 70 kN. 3FL4 insulators are available with mechanical ratings up to SML
= 120 kN.
4 (1.2/50
µs, dry)
(50 Hz,
1 min,
wet)
Um Un LIWL min PFWL min S C H L SML RTL D W
kV kV kV kV mm mm mm mm kN kN mm kg
12.0 10, 11, 12 95 28 214 420 178 332 3FL2-009-4xx00-1xx1 70 35 – 1.6
24.0 15, 20, 22, 24 145 50 304 799 268 422 3FL2-014-4xx00-1xx1 70 35 – 2.0
36.0 30, 33, 35, 36 170 70 394 1178 358 512 3FL2-017-4xx00-1xx1 70 35 – 2.4
72.5 60, 66, 69, 72 325 140 664 2315 628 782 3FL2-032-4xx00-1xx1 70 35 – 3.55
* Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage and power frequency withstand voltage in accordance with IEC 60071. The physical value is higher.
** Reference value of the section length of the insulator for version with ball and socket end fittings of size 16 in accordance with IEC 60120. In order to obtain the section
length of the insulator implemented with other end fittings, the housing length and connection lengths (see table “End fittings”) of both end fittings must be added
together. All electrical values refer to an insulator without arcing horns or corona rings.
Product standards
Insulators for overhead lines – composite suspension and tension insulators for AC systems with a nominal voltage
IEC 61109
greater than 1,000 V – definitions, test methods, and acceptance criteria
Polymeric insulators for indoor and outdoor use with a nominal voltage greater than 1,000 V – general definitions,
IEC 62217
test methods, and acceptance criteria
IEC 60815 Selection and dimensioning of high-voltage insulators intended for use in polluted conditions 4
Composite string insulator units for overhead lines with a nominal voltage greater than 1,000 V –
IEC 61466-1
Part 1: Standard strength classes and end fittings
Composite string insulator units for overhead lines with a nominal voltage greater than 1,000 V –
IEC 61466-2
Part 2: Dimensional and electrical characteristics
IEC 60120 Dimensions of ball and socket couplings of string insulator units
IEC 60471 Dimensions of clevis and tongue couplings of string insulator units
Fig. 5.1-1 and table 5.1-1 are an overview of how various trans-
formers can be used in a network.
Global Footprint
Emerging countries are not just “extended workbenches” for
producing goods. First and foremost, they are important future
markets. Through its own local production and sales locations,
Siemens provides service to customers in the most important
global markets. The local presence of Siemens in many coun-
tries also ensures that customers have better access to Siemens
services and that they benefit from an efficient and effective
distribution of Siemens resources as part of a global network.
As Siemens factories around the world develop and produce
their products, Siemens also encourages them to share their
expertise.
Generator and System Above 2.5 MVA up to more than 1,000 MVA, above 30 kV up to 1,500 kV (system and system
5
Transformers interconnecting transformers, with separate windings or auto-connected), with on-load tap
changers or off-circuit tap changers, of 3-phase or 1-phase design
Phase Shifters To control the amount of active power by changing the effective phase displacement
Reactors Liquid-immersed shunt and current-limiting reactors up to the highest rated powers
Reactors for HVDC transmission systems
HVDC Transformers Transformers and smoothing reactors for bulk power transmission systems up to 800 kV DC
Transformers for DC coupling of different AC networks
Cast-Resin Distribution and 100 kVA to more than 40 MVA, highest voltage for equipment up to 36 kV, of 3-phase or 1-phase
Power Transformers GEAFOL design, GEAFOL-SL substations
Liquid-immersed Distribution 50 to 2,500 kVA, highest voltage for equipment up to 36 kV, with copper or aluminum windings,
Transformers hermetically sealed or with conservator of 3- or 1-phase design
pole mounted transformers and distribution transformers acc. to IEC with amorphous cores
5 tȋCustomer integration
tȋEmbedded quality in processes and projects
Fig. 5.2-1: Cornerstones of quality strategy
tȋConsequent supplier management
tȋBusiness-driven quality planning
tȋFocused quality reporting
tȋQualification of employees on quality issues
tȋContinuous improvement
tȋManagement commitment achieved by a high degree of process standardization. All pro-
tȋControl and support role of quality manager cesses should be standardized for all employees based on simple
procedures. If this condition is met, it is possible to implement
Elements of quality (mandatory elements) clearly defined work instructions (fig. 5.2-2).
Customer integration Quality gates are placed at points in the process at which
Customer integration depends on the consistent use of: quality-relevant decisions are necessary. The following quality
tȋAnalysis tools for customer requirements and market studies gates are mandatory for the power transformer business.
tȋAnalysis of customer satisfaction tȋBid approval
tȋProfessional management of feedback from and to the tȋEntry order clarified
customer tȋRelease of design
tȋComplaint management tȋRelease of fully assembled transformer
tȋEvaluation of project
Customer requirements need to be precisely defined in a specifi-
cation. And the specification must be continuously updated For each quality gate, there is a clear definition of participants,
throughout the definition phase of a transformer project. The preconditions, results (traffic light) and the escalation process, if
actual requirements must also be available to all responsible necessary. If the result is not acceptable, the process must be
employees. stopped until all requirements are fulfilled.
Rapid feedback loops – in both directions – are essential in order Supplier management
to increase customer trust and satisfaction. The quality of the product depends not only on the quality of the
own processes but also on that of the suppliers. Problems and
Siemens resolves customer complaints to the customer’s satis- costs caused by inadequate supplier quality can only be reduced
faction in a timely manner through its complaint management by a systematic supplier management process that includes:
system. tȋSelection
tȋAssessment
Embedded quality in processes and projects tȋClassification
The quality of the processes used to produce a product has a tȋDevelopment
significant impact on the quality of the product that is actually tȋPhasing out of suppliers as well as the support process Supplier
produced. Process discipline and process stability can be Qualification
A further condition for a high level of supplier quality is close TPD TPD
SIEMENS Core assembly – stacking core SIEMENS Core assembly–stacking core
cooperation with the suppliers. Joint development of require- PEQ laminates
2.01.02
Page 1/6 PEQ laminates
2.01.02
Page 1/6
1. Purpose/objective
ments for suppliers and processes leads to continuous improve- Process description for the manufacture of transformer core
within the tolerances which are laid down
4. Process sequence
Subprocess 1:
the transformer business. washers, small accessories Job – related core drawings
Process report TPD 2.01.01
Planning quality means analyzing possible future scenarios and Process owner
Staff trained in core assembly Adjusting
the support
the core-limb laminations
ness factors are considered in planning. That means that quality Measure--
Measure
ment
Clearance support trestles
< 650
support trestles
550
1,000 to 1,200
350
300
Locking the screwed connections in accordance with TPD 3.036.01
activities and quantitative indicators. Measurement of insulation resistance with TUQ 1634 1,200 to 1,500 250
Drawn up by: Matthes Checked/approved: Dr. Knorr As of date: 2004-02 Drawn up by: Matthes Checked/approved: Dr. Knorr As of date: 2004-02
The passing on as well as the duplication of this document. use and communication of its contents is not permitted. nor may thecontents be expressed. Offenders are liable to pay damages. All rights The passing on as well as the duplication of this document. use and communication of its contents is not permitted. nor may thecontents be expressed. Offenders are liable to pay damages. All rights
reserved. in particular for the case of patent granting or GM-entry reserved. in particular for the case of patent granting or GM-entry
E T TR Plant Plant Plant Plant Plant Plant Plant Plant Plant Plant Plant Plant Plant Plant Plant
1 2 3 4 5 6 7* 8 9 10 11 12 13* 14** 15
N 11,278 572 1,704 755 793 774 534 – 735 1,076 705 649 994 – 1007 980
SY 51,429 2,358 7,479 3,858 3 4,326 1,996 – 3,341 4,561 4,17 2,889 4,899 – 3,781 4,771
nF 91 9 7 10 11 1 11 – 3 6 2 7 8 – 3 13
FRe (%) 0.18 0.38 0.09 0.26 0.37 0.02 0.55 – 0.09 0.13 0.05 0.24 0.16 – 0.08 0.27
MTBF (yrs) 565 262 1068 386 273 4,326 181 – 1,114 760 2,085 413 612 – 1,26 367
* Plant 7 & 13: new plants; ** Plant 14: 9 years 2001 – 2009
Methods like, Kaizen, 5S and methods and tools from Six Sigma
e.g. DMAIC circle, FMEA, IPO are helpful in supporting this
5.3 Transformer Loss
continuous improvement process (fig. 5.2-3). Evaluation
Management commitment
Every manager in a company also bears responsibility for quality. The sharply increased cost of electrical energy has made it
Thus, each manager’s actions must be characterized by a high almost mandatory for buyers of electrical machinery to carefully
level of quality awareness. evaluate the inherent losses of these items. For distribution and
power transformers, which operate continuously and most
The level of commitment shown by all levels of management in frequently in loaded condition, this consideration is especially
the event of quality problems, the establishment of quality important. As an example, the added cost of loss-optimized
demands and the creation of targeted quality controls in day-to- transformers can in most cases be recovered via savings in
day work together produce a culture in which there is a high energy use in less than three years.
level of quality.
Low-loss transformers use more and better materials for their
Control and support role of the quality manager construction and are thus intially more expensive than low-cost
The role of the quality manager is of fundamental importance transformers. By stipulating loss evaluation figures in the trans-
for well-running processes. The quality manager combines a former inquiry, the manufacturer receives the necessary incen-
supporting role with that of a neutral controller. Quality man- tive to provide a loss-optimized transformer rather than the
agement must be directly involved in processes and projects. low-cost model. Detailed loss evaluation methods for trans-
The independence of the quality department and individual formers have been developed and are described accurately in
Measure
4000
tȋCost of load loss (CPk) based on the load loss (Pk), the
3000
2000
1000
What must be done What is preventing Note that the lowest purchase price is unlike the total cost of
in order to achieve us to fulfill the ownership.
the goal requirements
taking into account the purchase price Cp, the interest rate p, Depreciation period n = 20 years Depreciation
and the depreciation period n Interest rate p = 12 % p. a. factor r = 13.39
Energy charge Ce = 0.25 € / kWh
Cc = Cp · r / 100 [amount / year]
Demand charge Cd = 350 € / (kW . year)
Cp = purchase price
Equivalent annual load factor _ = 0.8
r = p . qn / (qn –1) = depreciation factor
q = p / 100 + 1 = interest factor
p = interest rate in % p.a A. Low-cost transformer B. Loss-optimized transformer
n = depreciation period in years
C Pk = Ce · 8,760 h / year a2 Pk
CD = 350 · (19 + 167) CD = 350 · (16 + 124)
a = constant opperation load / rated load = € 65,100 / year = € 49,000 / year
Pk = copper loss [kW]
Fig. 5.3-1: Calculation of the individual operation cost of a Fig. 5.3-2: Example for cost saving with optimized distribution
transformer in one year transformer
Specific items
tȋTransformer design according to national and international
standards (IEC/ANSI) with or without voltage regulation
tȋ3-phase or 1-phase
tȋTank-attached radiators or separate radiator banks
5.5 Reactors
In AC networks, shunt reactors and series reactors are widely
used in the system to limit the overvoltage or to limit the short-
circuit current. With more high-voltage overhead lines with long
transmission distance and increasing network capacity, both
types of reactors play an important role in the modern network
system.
Oil filled reactors offer individual solutions: They satisfy all the
specified requirements regarding voltage, rating, type of opera-
tion, low-noise and low loss and type of cooling, as well as trans-
portation and installation.
5 construction of transformers.
Shunt reactors
For extra-high-voltage (EHV) transmission lines, due to the long
Fig. 5.5-1: Reactor
distance, the space between the overhead line and the ground
naturally forms a capacitor parallel to the transmission line,
which causes an increase of voltage along the distance.
Depending on the distance, the profile of the line and the power
being transmitted, a shunt reactor is necessary either at the line
terminals or in the middle. An liquid-immersed shunt reactor is a
solution. The advanced design and production technology will
ensure the product has low loss and low noise level.
Series reactors
When the network becomes larger, sometimes the short-circuit
current on a transmission line will exceed the short-circuit
current rating of the equipment. Upgrading of system voltage,
upgrading of equipment rating or employing high-impedance
transformers are far more expensive than installing liquid-
immersed series reactors in the line. The liquid-immersed design
can also significantly save space in the substation.
Specification
Typically, 3-phase or 1-phase reactors should be considered first.
Apart from the insulation level of the reactor, the vector group,
overall loss level, noise level and temperature rise should be
considered as main data for the shunt reactor.
Although the above data are also necessary for series reactors,
the rated current, impedance and thermal/dynamic stability
current should also be specified.
Design options
tȋDirect or indirect regulation
tȋOn-load or no-load tap changer (OLTC/NLTC)
tȋBuilt-in reactor for long arc stability
tȋSecondary bushing arrangements and designs
tȋAir or water-cooled
tȋInternal secondary phase closure (internal delta)
Rectifier transformers
Rectifier transformers are combined with a diode or Thyristor
rectifier. The applications range from very large aluminum
electrolysis to various medium-size operations. The transformers
may have a built-in or a separate voltage regulation unit. Due to
a large variety of applications, they can have various designs up
to a combination of voltage regulation, rectifier transformers in
double-stack configuration, phase-shifting, interphase reactors,
transductors and filter-winding (fig. 5.6-2).
Specific items
Thyristor rectifiers require voltage regulation with a no-load tap
changer, if any. A diode rectifier will, in comparison, have a
longer range and a higher number of small voltage steps than an
on-load tap changer. Additionally, an auto-connected regulating
transformer can be built in the same tank (depending on trans-
port and site limitations).
Design options
tȋThyristor or diode rectifier
tȋOn-load or no-load tap changer (OLTC/NLTC)/filter winding Fig. 5.6-2: Rectifier transformer for an aluminum plant
5.7 Phase-Shifting
Transformers
A phase-shifting transformer is a device for controlling the
power flow through specific lines in a complex power transmis-
sion network.The basic function of a phase-shifting transformer
is to change the effective phase displacement between the input
voltage and the output voltage of a transmission line, thus
controlling the amount of active power that can flow in the line.
Design options
The design concept of HVDC transformers is mainly influenced
by the rated voltage, rated power and transportation require-
ments like dimensions, weight and mode of transportation.
Many large power HVDC converter station are located in rural
areas of low infrastructure. Frequently, special geometrical
Fig. 5.8-1: Converter transformer for UHVDC bipolar transmission
profiles have to be fulfilled in order to move such transformers
system ± 800 kVDC, 6,400 MW; 2,071 km: single phase;
by railway.
550 kVAC, 816 kVDC; 321 MVA; high pulse wye system
feeding
Typically, HVDC transformers are single phase units containing
5.9 Distribution
Transformers
5.9.1 Liquid-immersed Distribution
Transformers for
European/US/Canadian Standard
On the last transformation step from the power station to the
consumer, distribution transformers (DT) provide the necessary
power for systems and buildings. Accordingly, their operation
must be reliable, efficient and, at the same time, silent.
Sub-bases
To raise the voltage regulator to meet safe operating clearances
from the ground to the lowest live part.
5.9.3 GEAFOL Cast-Resin Transformers GEAFOL transformers are installed wherever oil-filled units
cannot be used or where use of liquid-immersed transformers
GEAFOL transformers have been in successful service since would require major constructive efforts such as inside build-
1965. Many licenses have been granted to major manufacturers ings, in tunnels, on ships, cranes and offshore platforms, inside
throughout the world since then. Over 100,000 units have wind turbines, in groundwater catchment areas and in food
proven themselves in power distribution or converter operation processing plants. For outdoor use, specially designed sheet
all around the globe. metal enclosures are available.
Advantages and applications Often these transformers are combined with their primary and
GEAFOL distribution and power transformers in ratings from 100 secondary switchgear and distribution boards into compact
to approximately 50,000 kVA and lightning impulse (LI) values substations that are installed directly at their point of use.
up to 250 kV are full substitutes for liquid-immersed trans-
formers with comparable electrical and mechanical data. They When used as static converter transformers for variable speed
are designed for indoor installation close to their point of use at drives, they can be installed together with the converters at the
the center of the major load consumers. The exclusive use of drive location. This reduces construction requirements, cable
flame-retardant insulating materials frees these transformers costs, transmission losses and installation costs.
from all restrictions that apply to oil-filled electrical equipment,
such as the need for oil collecting pits, fire walls, fire extin- GEAFOL transformers are fully LI-rated. Their noise levels are
guishing equipment. For outdoor use, specially designed sheet comparable to oil-filled transformers. Taking into account the
metal enclosures are available. indirect cost reductions just mentioned, they are also mostly
5
LV terminals Three-leg core
Normal arrangement: Made of grain-oriented,
Top, rear low-loss electrolaminations
Special version: insulated on both sides
Bottom, available on
request at extra charge Resilient spacers
To insulate core and
windings from mechanical
vibrations, resulting in low
noise emissions
HV terminals HV winding
Variable arrangements, Consisting of vacuum-potted
for optimal station design. single foil-type aluminum coils.
HV tapping links for See enlarged detail
adjustment to system in fig. 5.9-5
conditions, reconnectable
in de-energized state*
HV winding
The high-voltage windings are wound from aluminum foil
interleaved with high-grade insulating foils. The assembled and
connected individual coils are placed in a heated mold and are
potted in a vacuum furnace with a mixture of pure silica (quartz
sand) and specially blended epoxy resins. The only connections
to the outside are casted brass nuts that are internally
bonded to the aluminum winding connections.
operating conditions.
The properties laid down in the standards for ratings within the
category relating to environment (humidity), climate and fire
behavior have to be demonstrated by means of tests.
These tests are described for the environmental category Fig. 5.9-6: Flammability test of cast-resin transformer
(code numbers E0, E1 and E2) and for the climatic category
(code numbers C1 and C2) in IEC 60076-11. According to this
5
standard, the tests are to be carried out on complete trans-
formers. The tests of fire behavior (fire category code numbers
F0 and F1) are limited to tests on a duplicate of a complete
transformer that consists of a core leg, a low-voltage winding
and a high-voltage winding.
Insulation class and temperature rise Fig. 5.9-7: Radial cooling fans on GEAFOL transformer for AF cooling
The high-voltage winding and the low-voltage winding utilize
class F insulating materials with a mean temperature rise of
100 K (standard design).
Um (kV) LI (kV) AC (kV)
Overload capability 1.1 – 3
GEAFOL transformers can be overloaded permanently up to 50 % 12 75 28
(with a corresponding increase in impedance voltage and load 24 95* 50
losses) if additional radial cooling fans are installed (dimensions
36 145* 70
can increase by approximately 100 mm in length and width.)
* other levels upon request
Short-time overloads are uncritical as long as the maximum
winding temperatures are not exceeded for extended periods of Table 5.9-1: Standard insulation levels of GEAFOL
time (depending on initial load and ambient air temperature).
Temperature monitoring
Each GEAFOL transformer is fitted with three temperature
sensors installed in the LV winding, and a solid-state tripping ating voltages of the LV winding of 3.6 kV and higher, special
device with relay output. The PTC thermistors used for sensing temperature measuring equipment can be provided.
are selected for the applicable maximum hot-spot winding
temperature. Auxiliary wiring is run in a protective conduit and terminated in
a central LV terminal box (optional). Each wire and terminal is
Additional sets of sensors can be installed, e.g. for fan control identified, and a wiring diagram is permanently attached to the
purposes. Alternatively, Pt100 sensors are available. For oper- inside cover of this terminal box.
Optimum compromise
Fig. 5.9-8: GEAFOL transformer with plug-type cable connections The GEAFOL Basic distribution transformer represents an
optimum compromise between performance, safety and small
dimensions. In addition, the high degree of standardization
ensures the best possible cost-benefit ratio. Thanks to their
compact shape and comprehensive safety certification, GEAFOL
Basic distribution transformers can be used in almost every
environment.
5 4
6
2
5
8
Siemens offers suitable transformers in its GEAFOL design The effects of such conversion equipment on transformers and
(fig. 5.9-10), which has proved successful over many years and additional construction requirements are as follows:
is available in ratings of up to 50 MVA. The range of rated tȋIncreased load by harmonic currents
voltage extends to 36 kV, and the maximum impulse voltage is tȋBalancing of phase currents in multiple winding systems
200 kV (250 kV). The main applications of this type of trans- (e.g., 12-pulse systems)
former are in modern industrial plants, hospitals, office and tȋOverload capability
apartment blocks and shopping centers. tȋTypes for 12-pulse systems, if required
Linking 1-pole tap changer modules together by means of Siemens supplies oil-filled converter transformers of all ratings
insulating shafts produces a 3-pole on-load tap changer for and configurations known today, and dry-type cast-resin con-
regulating the output voltage of 3-phase GEAFOL transformers. verter transformers up to 50 MVA and 250 kV LI (fig. 5.9-11).
Fig. 5.9-10: 16/22-MVA GEAFOL cast-resin transformer with oil-free on-load tap changer
5
Transformers for Silicon-reactor power feeding
These special transformers are an important component in
plants for producing polycrystalline silicon, which is needed
particularly by the solar industry for the manufacture of collec-
tors.
5 Characterization
tȋVarious cooling media for all ratings: mineral oil, silicone or
ester fluid for highest environmental compatibility
Technically, traction transformers are in general characterized as
follows: In case of customer request:
tȋ1-phase transformers tȋWith cooling plant – integrated in one frame together with the
tȋRatings up to 10 MVA and above transformer or stand-alone solution
tȋOperating frequencies from 16⅔ to 60 Hz tȋNomex insulation for highest energy density
tȋVoltages: 1.5 kV DC, 3 kV DC, 15 kV, 25 kV, 11.5 kV
or other specific solutions Examples
tȋWeight: < 15 t The examples shown in the table are typical applications where
tȋAuxiliary windings and/or heater windings according to traction transformers from Siemens were used (table 5.10-1).
customer specification
tȋSingle or multiple system operation
tȋUnder floor, machine room or roof assembly
tȋTraction windings to be used as line filters
High speed train AVE S102 for RENFE Spain Electric locomotive for ÖBB Austria World’s most powerful series-production
(1216 Series) for cross-european haulage freight locomotive for China
Operation: Madrid – Barcelona 4 system operation 6 axle machine
Travel time: 2 h 30 min for 635 km AC 15 kV: 16⅔ Hz 9,600 kW on 6 axles
Number of cars: 8 AC 25 kV 50 Hz hauling of 20,000 t trains
Power system: 25 kV/50 Hz DC 3 kV
Maximum power at wheel: 8,800 kW DC 1.5 kV
Max. speed: 350 km/h Speed: 200 – 230 km/h
Number of seats: 404 Weight 87 t
Table 5.10-1: Siemens develops and produces traction transformers for rolling stock applications of all relevant ratings and voltage levels
What is TLM™?
Siemens Transformer Lifecycle Management™ (TLM™) includes
highly experienced transformer experts who provide the most
effective lifecycle solutions for power transformers of any age
and any brand.
The SITRAM® DIAG program consists of three layers and provides Fig. 5.11-2: SITRAM® DIAG provides diagnostic modules for
diagnostic modules for individual transformer and for the assess- individual transformers and for the assessment of
ment of complete installed fleets and transformer populations. complete fleets
The repair facilities handle all problems that arise over the
lifecycle of a transformer, including installation of new on-load
tap changers and tapping switches, increasing performance, as
well as completely replacement of windings. In addition, all
components can be reconditioned and retrofitted with the latest
materials as needed. For everything from design to the latest
modern winding techniques to final inspection and testing, the
manufacturing processes at our renowned transformer plants
are continuously being improved. These improvements support Fig. 5.11-6: Repair shop in Nuremberg, Germany
the maintenance and repair of your transformers (fig. 5.11-6).
Siemens is one of the world’s leading suppliers of protection Section 6.2.2 gives an overview of the various product lines of
equipment for power systems. Thousands of Siemens relays the Siemens protection.
ensure first-class performance in transmission and distribution
systems on all voltage levels, all over the world, in countries Section 6.2.3 offers application hints for typical protection
with tropical heat or arctic frost. For many years, Siemens has schemes such as:
also significantly influenced the development of protection tȋCables and overhead lines
technology: tȋTransformers
tȋMotors and generators
tȋIn 1976, the first minicomputer (process computer)-based tȋBusbars
protection system was commissioned: A total of 10 systems for
110 / 20 kV substations was supplied and is still operating To ensure a selective protection system, section 6.2.4 gives hints
6
satisfactorily today. for coordinated protection setting and selection for instrument
tȋIn 1985, Siemens became the first company to manufacture a transformers. The „Relay Selection Guide“ in section 6.2.5 provides
range of fully numerical relays with standardized an overview of the relay function mix as a guide for selecting the
communication interfaces. Siemens now offers a complete right protection relay for the corresponding protection applica-
range of protection relays for all applications with numerical tion.
busbar and machine protection.
6.2.2 SIPROTEC and Reyrolle Relay their grids in an intelligent, ecological, reliable and efficient way,
Families and to operate them economically. As a pioneer, Siemens has
decisively influenced the development of numerical protection
systems (fig. 6.2-4). The first application went into operation in
Solutions for today's and future power supply systems – Würzburg, Germany, in 1977. Consistent integration of protec-
for more than 100 years tion and control functions for all SIPROTEC devices was the
SIPROTEC has established itself on the energy market for innovation step in the 90ies. After release of the communication
decades as a powerful and complete system family of numerical standard IEC 61850 in the year 2004, Siemens was the first
protection relays and bay controllers from Siemens. manufacturer worldwide to put a system with this communica-
tion standard into operation.
SIPROTEC protection relays from Siemens can be consistently
used throughout all applications in medium and high voltage. How can system operators benefit from this experience?
With SIPROTEC, operators have their systems firmly and safely tȋProven and complete applications
under control, and have the basis to implement cost-efficient tȋEasy integration into your system
solutions for all duties in modern, intelligent and “smart” grids. tȋHighest quality of hardware and software
Users can combine the units of the different SIPROTEC device tȋExcellent operator friendliness of devices and tools
series at will for solving manifold duties – because SIPROTEC tȋEasy data exchange between applications
stands for continuity, openness and future-proof design. tȋExtraordinary consistency between product- and
systemengineering
As the innovation driver and trendsetter in the field of protection tȋReduced complexity by easy operation
systems for 100 years, Siemens helps system operators to design tȋSiemens as a reliable, worldwide operating partner
SIPROTEC easy
SIPROTEC easy are CT power supplied or auxiliary power sup-
plied, numerical time-overcurrent protection relays, which can
be used as line and transformer protection (back-up protection)
in electrical power supply systems with single-ended supply.
They offer definite time-overcurrent and inverse time-overcur-
rent protection functions according to IEC and ANSI. The com-
fortable operation via DIP switch is self-explanatory and simple.
SIPROTEC Compact
Perfect protection, smallest space reliable and flexible protection
for energy distribution and industrial systems with minimum
space requirements. The devices of the SIPROTEC Compact
family offer an extensive variety of functions in a compact and
thus space-saving 1/6 x 19" housing. The devices can be used as
main protection in medium-voltage applications or as back-up
protection in high-voltage systems.
SIPROTEC Compact – system features Fig. 6.2-12 shows exemplary how the most different tasks can
Field devices in energy distribution systems and in industrial be easily and safely solved with the matching
applications must cover the most varying tasks, and yet be SIPROTEC Compact devices.
adjustable easily and at short notice. These tasks comprise, for
example: Operation
tȋ Protection of different operational equipment such as lines, During the development of SIPROTEC Compact, special value
cables, motors and busbars was placed not only on a powerful functionality, but also on
tȋDecoupling and disconnecting of parts of the power supply simple and intuitive operation by the operating personnel. Freely
system assignable LEDs and a six-line display guarantee an unambig-
tȋLoad shedding and load restoration uous and clear indication of the process states.
tȋVoltage and frequency protection
tȋLocal or remote control of circuit-breakers In conjunction with up to 9 function keys and the control keys
tȋAcquisition and recording of measured values and events for the operational equipment, the operating personnel can
tȋCommunication with neighboring devices or the control center react quickly and safely to every situation. This ensures a high
operational reliability even under stress situations, thus reducing
the training effort considerably.
Infeed
7SJ80 7RW80
SIEMENS
Backup transformer SIEMENS
Voltage/frequency
52 protection protection
Busbar protection Load shedding
via reverse interlocking Load restoration
6
MV substation
52 7SD80 52 7SJ80 52
7SJ80 52 7SJ80 7SJ80
SIEMENS
Busbar protection SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENS 52 SIEMENS
G M
52 52
Cable Generation
Load Balancing
Balance the load within a feeder by moving the Normally Open
Point
Section Isolation
Isolate a dedicated section of a feeder for maintenance without
affecting other sections
Local operation
All operations and information can be
executed via an integrated user interface:
2 operation LEDs
4 navigation keys
Fig. 6.2-14b:
Battery compartment accessible from outside. with closed cover
and open battery
compartment
All binary inputs are independent and the pick-up thresholds are
settable using software settings (3 stages). The relay current
transformer taps (1 A / 5 A) are new software settings. Up to 9
function keys can be programmed for predefi ned menu entries,
switching sequences, etc. The assigned function of the function
keys can be shown in the display of the relay.
Fig. 6.2-15: 7SK80, 7SJ80, 7SD80 Fig. 6.2-17:
rear view Current terminal block
If a conventional (inductive) set of primary voltage transformers
is not available in the feeder, the phase-to-ground voltages can
be measured directly through a set of capacitor cones in the
medium-voltage switchgear. In this case, the functions direc-
tional time-overcurrent protection, ground (ANSI 67N), voltage
protection (ANSI 27/59) and frequency protection (ANSI 81O/U)
are available. With overcurrent protection 7SJ81 there is also a
device for low-power current transformer applications.
6 * RU = rack unit
Fig. 6.2-18: 7SJ81 rear view Fig. 6.2-19: 7RW80 rear view
Current terminals – ring cable lugs
L = 10 mm (0.39 in) or L = 12 mm
Conductor sleeve with plastic sleeve
(0.47 in)
SIP-0004a-de.ai
System solutions
IEC 60870
Devices with IEC 60870-5-103 interfaces can be connected to
SICAM in parallel via the RS485 bus or radially via optical fiber.
Via this interface, the system is open for connection of devices Fig. 6.2-22: Bus structure for station bus with Ethernet and
from other manufacturers. IEC 61850, ring-shaped optical-fiber connection
IEC 61850
An interoperable system solution is offered for IEC 61850 together
with SICAM. Via the 100 Mbit/s Etherbus, the devices are con-
nected electrically or optically to the station PC with SICAM. The
interface is standardized, thus enabling the direct connection of
devices from other manufacturers to the Ethernet bus.
Engineering has moved from schematic diagrams toward a Thus, service personnel are now able to correct the failure upon
parameter definition procedure. The powerful user-definable occurrence, resulting in a significantly upgraded availability of
logic of SIPROTEC 4 allows flexible customized design for protec- the protection system.
tion, control and measurement.
6
52
21 67N FL 79 25 SM ER FR BM
85
SIPROTEC Line protection
kA, ER
to remote line end kV,
FR
Hz,
MW, SM
21 Distance protection MVAr,
67N Directional earth-fault protection MVA BM
Load monitor
FL Distance-to-fault locator
79 Auto-reclosure Fault report
25 Synchrocheck
Fault record
85 Carrier interface teleprotection
SM Self-monitoring Relay monitor
ER Event recording
FR Fault recording Breaker monitor
BM Breaker monitor Supervisory control
Adaptive relaying
Numerical relays now offer reliable, convenient and comprehen- 1000 Parameter
1100 Line data D
sive matching to changing conditions. Matching may be initiated 1000 .
Parameter
.
either by the relay’s own intelligence or from other systems via 1100 Line
1200data O/C C Phase settings
1000 .
Parameter .
contacts or serial telegrams. Modern numerical relays contain a . . B
1100 Line data
1200 O/C Phase settings
1000 .
Parameter . 1500 O/C Earth settings
number of parameter sets that can be pretested during commis- . . A .
1100 Line data .
sioning of the scheme. One set is normally operative. Transfer to . 1200 O/C Phase
1500 settings
O/C Earth settings
. . . 2800 Fault recording
. . .
the other sets can be controlled via binary inputs or a serial data 1200 O/C Phase settings
1500
.
. . O/C Earth settings
2800 Fault
3900recording
Breaker failure
link (fig. 6.2-28). . . .
1500 O/C Earth .
settings
. 2800 Fault
3900recording
Breaker failure
. .
There are a number of applications for which multiple setting .
2800 Fault
3900recording
Breaker failure
groups can upgrade the scheme performance, for example: .
.
tȋFor use as a voltage-dependent control of overcurrent-time 3900 Breaker failure
relay pickup values to overcome alternator fault current
decrement to below normal load current when the automatic
Fig. 6.2-28: Alternate parameter groups
voltage regulator (AVR) is not in automatic operation
tȋFor maintaining short operation times with lower fault
currents, e.g., automatic change of settings if one supply
transformer is taken out of service
tȋFor “switch-onto-fault” protection to provide shorter time
settings when energizing a circuit after maintenance so that
normal settings can be restored automatically after a time
delay
tȋFor auto-reclosure programs, that is, instantaneous operation
for first trip and delayed operation after unsuccessful reclosure
tȋFor cold load pickup problems where high starting currents
may cause relay operation
tȋFor “ring open” or “ring closed” operation.
6
Implemented functions
SIPROTEC relays are available with a variety of protective func-
tions (please refer to section 6.2.6). The high processing power
of modern numerical units allows further integration of non-pro-
tective add-on functions.
With the well-proven SIPROTEC 4 family, Siemens supports both The following solutions are available within one relay family:
stand-alone and combined solutions on the basis of a single tȋSeparate control and protection relays
hardware and software platform. The user can decide within tȋFeeder protection and remote control of the line circuit-breaker
wide limits on the configuration of the control and protection, via the serial communication link
and the reliability of the protection functions (fig. 6.2-30). tȋCombined relays for protection, monitoring and control.
Busbar
7SJ61/62/63/64 7SJ62/63/64 2)
52
Local/remote control CFC logic Metering values
Command/feedback 25 Synchronization
Set points,
mean values, I, V, Watts,
Trip circuit Vars, p.f., f V, f, P
74TC Lockout 86 Min/Max-Log
supervision P<>
Q<> p.f. df/dt
Motor 33 Communication RTD1) box Energy meter: 32 55 81R
control modules interface calculated and/or by impulses
f<> V> V<
HMI RS232/485/FO/ Fault Motor protection 81O/U 59 27
Ethernet recording Bearing Starting Fault
temp. I< time locator Directional
IEC60870-5-103
IEC61850 38 37 48 21FL phase-sequence
47 monitoring
Profibus-FMS/-DP
DNP 3.0 14 Locked 66/86
Restart I dir.>> I E dir.>>
rotor inhibit I dir.> I E dir.>
MODBUS RTU Ipdir. I Epdir.
67 67N
I E >,
I>> I>, Ip I E >> I Ep I2 > >
Inrush Interm.
50 51 50N 51N 46 49 restraint earth flt. 50BF
Dir. sensitive
Breaker failure earth-fault detection
protection I EE>>
I E >, High-impedance Auto- I EE> VE>
I E >> I Ep restricted earth-fault 79 reclosure I EEp
51N 87N 67Ns 64
50N
Mechnical design
Terminals: standard relay version with screw-type terminals
SIPROTEC 4 relays are available in 1 / 3 to 1 / 1 of 19” wide hous-
Current terminals
ings with a standard height of 243 mm. Their size is compatible
with that of other relay families. Therefore, compatible exchange
Connection Wmax =12 mm
is always possible (fig. 6.2-31 to fig. 6.2-33).
Ring cable lugs d1 =5 mm
Wire size 2.7 – 4 mm2 (AWG 13 – 11) All wires (cables) are connected at the rear side of the relay with
Direct connection Solid conductor, flexible lead, or without ring cable lugs. A special relay version with a
connector sleeve detached cable-connected operator panel (fig. 6.2-34) is also
Wire size 2.7 – 4 mm2 (AWG 13 – 11) available. It allows, for example, the installation of the relay
Voltage terminals itself in the low-voltage compartment, and of the operator panel
separately in the door of the switchgear.
Connection Wmax =10 mm
Current terminals
Screw type (see standard version)
Voltage terminals
2-pin or 3-pin connectors
Fig. 6.2-31: 1 / 1 of 19” housing
Fig. 6.2-34: SIPROTEC 4 combined protection, control and monitoring Process and relay information can be displayed on the large
illuminated LC display either graphically in the form of a mimic
relay with detached operator panel diagram or as text in various lists.
The keys mainly used for control of the switchgear are located
on the “control axis” directly below the display.
Two key-operated switches ensure rapid and reliable changeover
between “local“ and “remote“ control, and between “interlocked“
and “non-interlocked“ operation.
The r.m.s. values are calculated from the acquired current and
voltage along with the power factor, frequency, active and
reactive power. The following functions are available depending
on the relay type
tȋCurrents IL1, IL2, IL3, IN, IEE (67Ns)
tȋVoltages VL1,VL2, VL3, VL1-L2,VL2-L3, VL3-L1
tȋSymmetrical components I1, I2,3I0; V1, V2,3V0
tȋPower Watts, Vars, VA / P, Q, S
tȋPower factor p.f. (cos φ)
tȋFrequency
tȋEnergy ± kWh ± kVarh, forward and reverse power flow
tȋMean as well as minimum and maximum current and voltage
values Fig. 6.2-37: Operational measured values
tȋOperating hours counter
tȋMean operating temperature of overload function
tȋLimit value monitoring
6 Limit values are monitored using programmable logic in the
CFC. Commands can be derived from this limit value indication.
tȋZero suppression
In a certain range of very low measured values, the value is set
to zero to suppress interference.
Display editor All setting parameters are stored in the Flash EPROM and are not
A display editor is available to design the display on SIPROTEC 4 lost if the power supply or battery fails. The SIPROTEC 4 unit
units with graphic display. The predefined symbol sets can be remains fully functional.
expanded to suit the user. The drawing of a single-line diagram
is extremely simple. Load monitoring values (analog values) and Commissioning support
any texts or symbols can be placed on the display where Special attention has been paid to commissioning. All binary
required. inputs and output contacts can be displayed and activated
directly. This can significantly simplify the wiring check for the
Four predefined setting groups for adapting relay settings user. Test telegrams to a substation control system can be
The settings of the relays can be adapted quickly to suit changing initiated by the user as well.
network configurations. The relays include four setting groups
that can be predefined during commissioning or even changed CFC: Programming logic
remotely via a DIGSI 4 modem link. The setting groups can be With the help of the CFC (Continuous Function Chart) graphic
activated via binary inputs, via DIGSI 4 (local or remote), via the tool, interlocking schemes and switching sequences can be
integrated keypad or via the serial substation control interface. configured simply via drag and drop of logic symbols; no special
knowledge of programming is required. Logical elements, such
Fault recording up to five or more seconds as AND, OR, flip-flops and timer elements are available. The user
The sampled values for phase currents, earth (ground) currents, can also generate user-defined annunciations and logical combi-
line and zero-sequence currents are registered in a fault record. nations of internal or external signals.
The record can be started using a binary input, on pickup or
when a trip command occurs. Up to eight fault records may be Communication interfaces
stored. For test purposes, it is possible to start fault recording via With respect to communication, particular emphasis has been
DIGSI 4. If the storage capacity is exceeded, the oldest fault placed on high levels of flexibility, data integrity and utilization
record in each case is overwritten. of standards commonly used in energy automation. The design
of the communication modules permits interchangeability on
For protection functions with long delay times in generator the one hand, and on the other hand provides openness for
protection, the r.m.s. value recording is available. Storage of
relevant calculated variables (V1, VE, I1, I2, IEE, P, Q, f-fn) takes
future standards.
6
place at increments of one cycle. The total time is 80 s. Local PC interface
The PC interface accessible from the front of the unit permits
Time synchronization quick access to all parameters and fault event data. Of particular
A battery-backed clock is a standard component and can be advantage is the use of the DIGSI 4 operating program during
synchronized via a synchronization signal (DCF77, IRIG B via commissioning.
satellite receiver), binary input, system interface or SCADA (e.g.,
SICAM). A date and time is assigned to every indication.
Continuous self-monitoring
The hardware and software are continuously monitored. If
abnormal conditions are detected, the unit immediately signals.
In this way, a great degree of safety, reliability and availability is
achieved.
Fig. 6.2-39: Protection relay Fig. 6.2-40: Communication Fig. 6.2-43: Rear view with wiring, terminal safety cover and serial
module, optical interfaces
Substation
control system
MODBUS RTU
MODBUS is also a widely utilized communication standard and is
used in numerous automation solutions.
DNP 3.0
DNP 3.0 (Distributed Network Protocol, version 3) is a messag-
ing-based communication protocol. The SIPROTEC 4 units are
fully Level 1 and Level 2-compliant with DNP 3.0, which is
supported by a number of protection unit manufacturers.
Control
In addition to the protection functions, the SIPROTEC 4 units also
support all control and monitoring functions required for oper-
ating medium-voltage or high-voltage substations. The main
application is reliable control of switching and other processes.
The status of primary equipment or auxiliary devices can be
obtained from auxiliary contacts and communicated to the relay Fig. 6.2-47: Protection engineer at work
via binary inputs.
Therefore, it is possible to detect and indicate both the OPEN The positions of the circuit-breaker or switching devices are
and CLOSED positions or a faulty or intermediate breaker monitored by feedback signals. These indication inputs are
position. The switchgear can be controlled via: logically assigned to the corresponding command outputs. The
tȋIntegrated operator panel unit can therefore distinguish whether the indication changes as
tȋBinary inputs a consequence of a switching operation or due to a spontaneous
tȋSubstation control system change of state.
tȋDIGSI 4
6 Automation
Indication derivation
A further indication (or a command) can be derived from an
With the integrated logic, the user can set specific functions for existing indication. Group indications can also be formed. The
the automation of the switchgear or substation by means of a volume of information to the system interface can thus be
graphic interface (CFC). Functions are activated by means of reduced and restricted to the most important signals.
function keys, binary inputs or via the communication interface.
Switching authority
The following hierarchy of switching authority is applicable:
LOCAL, DIGSI 4 PC program, REMOTE. The switching authority is
determined according to parameters or by DIGSI 4. If the LOCAL
mode is selected, only local switching operations are possible.
Every switching operation and change of breaker position is
stored in the status indication memory with detailed information
and time tag.
Command processing
The SIPROTEC 4 protection relays offer all functions required for
command processing, including the processing of single and
double commands, with or without feedback, and sophisticated
monitoring. Control actions using functions, such as runtime
monitoring and automatic command termination after output
check of the external process, are also provided by the relays.
Typical applications are:
tȋSingle and double commands using 1, 1 plus 1 common
or 2 trip contacts
tȋUser-definable feeder interlocking
tȋOperating sequences combining several switching operations,
such as control of circuit-breakers, disconnectors (isolators)
and earthing switches
tȋTriggering of switching operations, indications or alarms by
logical combination of existing information (fig. 6.2-47).
For system operators, holistic workflow in SIPROTEC 5 means: Smart automation for transmission grids
An end-to-end tool from system design to operation – even The extraordinary range of integrated functionalities for all the
allowing crossing of functional and departmental boundaries – demands of your smart grid.
saves time, assures data security and transparency throughout
the entire lifecycle of the system. Climate change and dwindling fossil fuels are forcing a total
re-evaluation of the energy supply industry, from generation
to distribution and consumption. This is having fundamental
effects on the structure and operation of the power grids.
Operation Design
t%PDVNFOUBUJPO t"QQMJDBUJPO
t5FTUJOH t4QFDJmDBUJPO Smart automation is a major real-time component designed
t.BJOUFOBODF to preserve the stability of these grids and at the same time
conserve energy and reduce costs.
Holistic
SIPROTEC 5 offers the optimum smart automation platform for
Workflow
smart grids.
tȋ“Smart functions”, e.g., for power system operation, analysis Functional integration – Protection
of faults or power quality (power systems monitoring, power SIPROTEC 5 provides all the necessary protection functions to
control unit, fault location) address reliability and security of power transmission systems.
tȋIntegrated automation with optimized logic modules based on System configurations with multiple busbars and breaker-and-a-
the IEC 61131-3 standard half schemes are both supported. The functions are based on
tȋHighly precise acquisition and processing of process values and decades of experience in putting systems into operation,
transmission to other components in the smart grid including feedback and suggestions from system operators.
tȋProtection, automation and monitoring in the smart grid.
The modular, functional structure of SIPROTEC 5 allows excep-
Functional integration tional flexibility and enables the creation of a protection func-
Due to the modular design of its hardware and software and the tionality that is specific to the conditions of the system while
powerful engineering tool DIGSI 5, SIPROTEC 5 is ideally suited also being capable of further changes in the future.
for protection, automation, measurement and monitoring tasks
in the electrical power systems. Functional integration – Control
SIPROTEC 5 includes all bay level control and monitoring func-
The devices are not only pure protection and control equipment, tions that are required for efficient operation of the substations.
their performance enables them to assure functional integration The application templates supplied provide the full functionality
of desired depth and scope. For example, they can also serve to needed by the system operators. Protection and control functions
perform monitoring, phasor measurement, fault recording, a access the same logical elements.
wide range of measurement functions and much more, concur-
rently, and they have been designed to facilitate future function- A new level of quality in control is achieved with the application
ality expansion. of communication standard IEC 61850. For example, binary
information from the field can be processed and data (e.g., for
SIPROTEC 5 provides an extensive, precise data acquisition and interlocking across multiple fields) can be transmitted between
bay level recording for these functions. By combining device the devices. Cross communications via GOOSE enables efficient
functionality with communication flexibility, SIPROTEC 5 has the solutions, since here the hardwired circuits are replaced with
ability to meet a wide range of today’s applications and specific
project specifications as well as the functional expansion capa-
data telegrams. All devices are provided for up to 4 switching
devices (circuit-breakers, disconnectors, earthing switches) in
6
bility to adapt to changing needs in the future. the basic control package. Optionally, additional switching
devices and the switching sequence block can be activated
With SIPROTEC 5 it is possible to improve the safety and reli- (Continuous Function Chart (CFC)).
ability of the operator’s application. Fig. 6.2-52 shows the
possible functional expansion of a SIPROTEC 5 device. Functional integration – Automation
An integrated graphical automation function enables operators
to create logic diagrams clearly and simply. DIGSI 5 supports this
with powerful logic modules based on the standard IEC 61131-3.
Test
Meas.point I-3ph 1
1
CT 1 Phase current
2
K 51 OR Information exchange between FG
3-phase
3
Meas.point V-3ph 1 Interface
Circuit breaker
QA1
52 Voltage
21 Interface
K 3-phase
OR
VT 1
Meas.point I-3ph 2
Protection-function group Line 1 K
Protection-function
Phase current 50BF group
K
Line 1 3-phase Interface
Interface xx:yy
Trip. Trip command
K
CB function group QA1
Contacts Protection-function
QA2 K
Phase current
50BF group
52 3-phase
Interface
Interface xx:yy
Trip. Trip command
K
CT 2 CB function group QA2 K User can configure the assignment
with DIGSI 5
Application template: DIS overhead line, earthed power systems, 1.5 CB
Line 2 CB = Circuit-breaker
Fig. 6.2-53: System configuration with application template for one breaker-and-a-half scheme
Functional integration – Cyber Security Optimizing the application template for the specific application
A multi-level security concept for the device and DIGSI 5 pro- The system operator can adapt the application templates to the
vides the user with a high level of protection against communi- corresponding application and create his own in-house stan-
cation attacks from the outside and conforms to the require- dards. The required number of protection stages or zones can be
ments of the BDEW Whitebook and NERC CIP. increased without difficulty. Additional functions can be loaded
into the device directly from an extensive function library. Since
Functional integration – Test the functions conform to a common design structure throughout
To shorten testing and commissioning times, extensive test and the SIPROTEC 5 system, protection functions and even entire
diagnostic functions are available to the user in DIGSI 5. These function groups including parameterization can be copied from
are combined in the DIGSI 5 Test Suite. one device to another.
The test spectrum includes, among other tests: Hardware and order configurator
tȋHardware and wiring test The SIPROTEC 5 hardware building blocks offer a freely configu-
tȋFunction and protection-function test rable device. System operators have the choice:
tȋSimulation of digital signals and analog sequences by
integrated test equipment Either to use a pre-configured device with a quantity structure
tȋDe-bugging of function charts already tailored to the corresponding application, or to build a
tȋCircuit-breaker test and AR (automatic reclosing) test function device from the extensive SIPROTEC 5 hardware building blocks
tȋCommunication testing themselves to exactly fit their application.
tȋLoop test for communication connections
tȋProtocol test. The flexible hardware building blocks offer:
tȋBase modules and expansion modules, each with different I/O
The engineering, including the device test, can therefore be modules
done with one tool. tȋVarious on-site operation panels
tȋA large number of modules for communication, measured
Application templates value conversion and memory extension
Application templates allow systems operators to fast track their
solution. A library of application templates is available that can be The SIPROTEC 5 hardware building blocks offer:
6
tailored to the specific functional scope for typical applications.
Durability and robustness
Fig. 6.2-54 shows an example of a system configuration with a tȋTailored hardware extension
breaker-and-a-half scheme. The functions in the application tȋRobust housings
template are combined in functional groups (FG). The functional tȋExcellent EMC shielding in compliance with the most recent
groups (FG) correspond to the primary components (protection standards and IEC 61000-4
object: line; switching device: circuit-breaker), thereby simpli- tȋExtended temperature range –25 °C to +70 °C/–13 °F to
fying the direct reference to the actual system. For example, if +158 °F.
the switchgear concerned includes 2 circuit- breakers, this is also
represented by 2 “circuit-breaker” functional groups – a sche- Modular principle
matic map of the actual system. tȋFreely configurable and extendable devices
tȋLarge process data range (up to 24 current and voltage
transformers for protection applications and up to 40 for
central busbar protection, as well as more than 200 inputs
and outputs for recording applications possible)
tȋOperation panel that is freely selectable for all device types
(e.g., large or small display, with or without key switches,
detached operation panel)
tȋIdentical wiring of flush-mounting and surface-mounting
housings.
6.2.3 Operating Programs DIGSI 4, IEC 61850 System Configurator and SIGRA 4
Description
The PC operating program DIGSI 4 is the user inter-
face to the SIPROTEC devices, regardless of their
version. It is designed with a modern, intuitive user
interface. With DIGSI 4, SIPROTEC devices are config-
ured and evaluated – it is the tailored program for
industrial and energy distribution systems.
Functions
Simple protection setting
From the numerous protection functions it is
possible to easily select only those which are really
required (see fig. 6.2-56). This increases the clear-
ness of the other menus.
Fig. 6.2-56: DIGSI 4, main menu, selection of protection functions
Assignment matrix
The DIGSI 4 matrix shows the user the complete
configuration of the device at a glance (fig. 6.2-57).
For example, the assignment of the LEDs, the
6
binary inputs and the output relays is displayed in
Fig. 6.2-57: DIGSI 4, assignment matrix
one image. With one click, the assignment can be
changed.
Commissioning
Special attention has been paid to commissioning.
All binary inputs and outputs can be set and read
out in targeted way. Thus, a very simple wiring test
is possible. Messages can be sent to the serial
interface deliberately for test purposes.
6
Fig. 6.2-59: Typical time-signal representation
SIGRA 4 can be used for all fault records using the COMTRADE
file format.
Functions
Different views of a fault record
In addition to the standard time signal representation,
SIGRA 4 also supports the display of circle diagrams (e.g.
R/X diagrams), vectors, which enable reading of angles,
and bar charts (e.g. for visualization of harmonics). To do
this, SIGRA uses the values recorded in the fault record to
calculate additional values such as positive impedances,
r.m.s. values, symmetric components, vectors, etc.
Operational features
The main aim of the developers of SIGRA 4, who were
6 assisted by ergonomic and design experts, was to produce
a system that was simple, intuitive and user-friendly:
tȋThe colours of all the lines have been defined so that
they are clear and easily distinguishable. However, the
colour, as well as the line style, the scale and other
surface features, can be adjusted to suit individual
requirements.
tȋPop-up menus for each situation offer customized
functionality – thus eliminating the need to browse
through numerous menu levels (total operational
efficiency).
tȋConfiguration of the individual diagrams is simple and
intuitive: Object-oriented, measured variables can be
simply dragged and dropped from one diagram to
another (also diagrams of different types).
tȋ“Snap-to-grid” and “snap-to-object” movement of the Fig. 6.2-63: Vector diagrams
cursor lines for easy and accurate placement.
tȋRedundancy: Most user tasks can be achieved via up to
five different operational methods, thus ensuring quick
and easy familiarization with the analysis software.
tȋUtilization of the available screen space is automatically
optimized by an intelligent function that, like the
“synchronous mouse cursors”, has since been patented.
Ring-main circuit
Infeed
General notes: Transformer
tȋOperating time of overcurrent relays to be coordinated with protection
see fig. 6.2-84
downstream fuses of load transformers (preferably with strong 52 52
inverse-time characteristic with about 0.2 s grading-time
delay)
tȋThermal overload protection for the cables (option) 52 52
tȋNegative sequence overcurrent protection (46) as sensitive 7SJ80 *) 7SJ80 *)
I>, t I E >, t I2 >, t > I>, t I E >, t I2 >, t >
protection against asymmetrical faults (option)
51 51N 46 49 51 51N 46 49
Switch-onto-fault protection
If switched onto a fault, instantaneous tripping can be effected.
If the internal control function is used (local, via binary input or
via serial interface), the manual closing function is available 52
Busbar
without any additional wiring. If the control switch is connected
to a circuit-breaker bypassing the internal control function, TRIP (high-speed dead fault clearance) (511)
52 52 52
manual detection using a binary input is implemented.
I>>, I>>>
Feeder earthed 50
&
Manual close
Typical feeder (356 > m close) 7SJx, 7SAx
Blocking bus
tion is used for complete selective backup protection. If operated
50 7SJ80 *)
in a closed-circuit connection, an interruption of the transmis- Pick- *) Alternatives:
up
sion line is detected. 7SJ60
52
50
Blocking signal
Non-directional
6
50 7SJ80 *) fault detection
Pick- Direction
up of fault (67)
Sectionalizers
Fuses
52 Fuse opens on
sucessful reclosure
Circuit-breaker opens on
unsucessful reclosure
51
*) Alternatives:
7SJ60, 7SJ62/63/64, 7SJ80
6
Fig. 6.2-72: 3-pole multishot auto-reclosure (AR, ANSI 79)
52
52 52
Load Load
52 52
52
52 52 52 52
Load Backfeed
Fig. 6.2-76: Cables or short overhead lines with infeed from both ends
Load Backfeed
Fig. 6.2-77: Overhead lines or longer cables with infeed from both ends
Subtransmission line
Note:
Connection to open delta winding if available. Relays 7SA6 / 522
and 7SJ62 can, however, also be set to calculate the zero-
sequence voltage internally.
1)
6
zone
t8FBLJOGFFEUFSNJOBMT
are no problem (Echo
and Weak Infeed logic is
included)
Drawbacks t0WFSMBQQJOHPGUIF t;POFSFBDIBOETJHOBM Same as POTT Same as POTT
zone 1 reaches must be timing coordination with t4MPXUSJQQJOHoBMM
ensured. On parallel the remote end is teleprotection trips must
lines, teed feeders and necessary (current be delayed to wait for the
tapped lines, the reversal) eventual blocking signal
influence of zero t$POUJOVPVTDIBOOFM
sequence coupling and monitoring is not
intermediate infeeds possible
must be carefully
considered to make sure
a minimum overlapping
of the zone 1 reach is
always present.
t/PUTVJUBCMFGPSXFBL
infeed terminals
Transmission line with reactor (fig. 6.2-79) Teleprotection schemes based on distance relays therefore
have operating times on the order of 25 to 30 ms with digital
Notes: PCM coded communication. With state-of-the-art two-cycle
1) 51N only applicable with earthed reactor neutral. circuit-breakers, fault clearing times well below 100 ms (4 to 5
2) If phase CTs at the low-voltage reactor side are not available, cycles) can normally be achieved.
the high-voltage phase CTs and the CT in the neutral can be tȋDissimilar carrier schemes are recommended for main 1 and
connected to a restricted earth-fault protection using one main 2 protection, for example, PUTT, and POTT or
7VH60 high-impedance relay. Blocking / Unblocking.
tȋBoth 7SA522 and 7SA6 provide selective 1-pole and / or 3-pole
General notes: tripping and auto-reclosure.
tȋDistance relays are proposed as main 1 and main 2 protection. The earth-current directional comparison protection (67N) of
Duplicated 7SA6 is recommended for series-compensated the 7SA6 relay uses phase selectors based on symmetrical
lines. components. Thus, 1-pole auto-reclosure can also be executed
tȋOperating time of the distance relays is in the range of 15 to with high-resistance faults.
25 ms depending on the particular fault condition. The 67N function of the 7SA522 relay can also be used as
These tripping times are valid for faults in the underreaching time-delayed directional overcurrent backup.
distance zone (80 to 85 % of the line length). Remote end tȋThe 67N functions are provided as high-impedance fault
faults must be cleared by the superimposed teleprotection protection. 67N is often used with an additional channel as a
scheme. Its overall operating time depends on the signal separate carrier scheme. Use of a common channel with
transmission time of the channel, typically 15 to 20 ms for distance protection is only possible if the mode is compatible
frequency shift audio-tone PLC or microwave channels, and (e.g., POTT with directional comparison). The 67N may be
lower than 10 ms for ON / OFF PLC or digital PCM signaling via blocked when function 21 / 21N picks up. Alternatively, it can
optical fibers. be used as time-delayed backup protection.
6 CC
52L
52R
TC1 TC2
CVT
50/50N 51/51N BF
7SJ600
Reactor 87R
25 59 21/21N 25 21/21N
7VH60
2)
79 67N 79 67N
51N
7SJ600
68/79 BF 68/79 87 BF
1)
BF, 59
S Direct trip
85 Trip
R channel
7SA6 52L
7SA522
S Channel To remote
R 2 line end
S Channel
R 3
6
7VK61 7SA522 or
BF 85 7SA6
UBB1
1) 1) 2)
79
21/21N 67N 50/50N 51/51N 59
52
25
UBB1 UL1 or
UL1
UL2 or
UBB2
Line 1
7VK61 7SD5
87L
BF
52 79
25
UL2
Line 2
Fig. 6.2-82: Transmission line, one-breaker-and-a-half terminal, using 3 breaker management relays 7VK61
General notes for fig. 6.2-82 and fig. 6.2-83: tȋThe voltages for synchrocheck have to be selected according to
tȋFor the selection of the main 1 and main 2 line protection the circuit-breaker and disconnector (isolator) position by a
schemes, the comments of application examples fig. 6.2-77 voltage replica circuit.
and fig. 6.2-78 apply.
tȋAuto-reclosure (79) and synchrocheck function (25) are each General notes for fig. 6.2-83:
assigned directly to the circuit-breakers and controlled by main tȋIn this optimized application, the 7VK61 is only used for the
1 and 2 line protection in parallel. In the event of a line fault, center breaker. In the line feeders, functions 25, 79 and BF are
both adjacent circuit-breakers have to be tripped by the line also performed by transmission line protection 7SA522
protection. The sequence of auto-reclosure of both circuit- or 7SA6.
breakers or, alternatively, the auto-reclosure of only one
circuit-breaker and the manual closure of the other circuit-
breaker, may be made selectable by a control switch.
tȋA coordinated scheme of control circuits is necessary to ensure
selective tripping interlocking and reclosing of the two circuit-
breakers of one line (or transformer feeder).
7SA522 or
UBB1 BF 85
1)
7SA6
1) 2)
6
52 21/21N 67N 50/50N 51/51N 59
25
UBB1
UL1 or
UL2 or
UBB2 UL1
Line 1
7VK61 7SD5
BF 87L
52 79
25
UL1 or UL2 or
UBB1 UBB2
Line 2
UL2
BB2
Fig. 6.2-83: Tranmission line, breaker-and-a-half terminal, using 1 breaker management relay 7VK61
2. Transformers
Small transformer infeed
HV infeed
General notes: 52
tȋEarth faults on the secondary side are detected by current
relay 51N. However, it has to be time-graded against I>> I>, t IE > > I2 >, t
52 7VH60 51N
IE > 7SJ60
or 7SJ80
Distribution bus
52
O/C Fuse
relay
Load Load
Load bus
52 52
Load Load
Load
52 52 52 bus
Load Load
Three-winding transformer
HV Infeed
52
Notes:
1) The zero-sequence current must be blocked before entering I>>, I >, t > I2 >, t
Autotransformer
52
Notes:
1) 87N high-impedance protection requires special class ×
51N 50/BF 46 50/51 2) 87N 7VH60
current transformer cores with equal transformation ratios.
7SJ60, 7SJ61 or 7SJ80
2) The 7SJ60 relay can alternatively be connected in series with 1)
the 7UT613 relay to save this CT core.
52
6
3. Motors
Small and medium-sized motors < about 1 MW
General note:
tȋApplicable to low-voltage motors and high-voltage motors
I>> IE > > I2 >
with low-resistance earthed infeed (IE ≥ IN Motor)
50 51N 49 48 46
b) With high-resistance earthed infeed (IE ≤ IN Motor)
7SJ60/7SK80
Notes: M
1) Core-balance CT.
2) Sensitive directional earth-fault protection (67N) only
applicable with infeed from isolated or Petersen coil earthed
Fig. 6.2-92: Motor protection with effective or low-resistance
system (for dimensioning of the sensitive directional earth- earthed infeed
fault protection, see also application circuit no. 30)
3) The 7SJ602 relay can be applied for isolated and compensated
systems. 52
50 49 48 46 37 51U
IE > 2)
7XR96
1) 51N 67N
60/1A 3)
7SJ62/7SK80
52
Notes:
1) Core-balance CT.
I >> > I2 > U<
2) Sensitive directional earth-fault protection (67N) only
applicable with infeed from isolated or Petersen coil earthed 50 49 48 46 27
system. Optional
3) This function is only needed for motors where the startup IE > 2) I < 37
7XR96
time is longer than the safe stall time tE. According to 1) 51N 67N
IEC 60079-7, the tE time is the time needed to heat up AC 60/1A
windings, when carrying the starting current IA, from the Startup
super- 49T 87M
temperature reached in rated service and at maximum visor 3) 5) 7UM62
ambient air temperature to the limiting temperature. A
3)
separate speed switch is used to supervise actual starting of
Speed RTD´s 4)
the motor. The motor circuit-breaker is tripped if the motor switch optional
does not reach speed in the preset time. The speed switch is
part of the motor supply itself.
4) Pt100, Ni100, Ni120
5) 49T only available with external temperature monitoring
device (7XV5662)
Fig. 6.2-94: Protection of large HV motors > about 1 MW
6
Cold load pickup
52
By means of a binary input that can be wired from a manual Trip
close contact, it is possible to switch the overcurrent pickup
I >> t I>t
settings to less sensitive settings for a programmable amount of
51.1 51.2
time. After the set time has expired, the pickup settings auto-
matically return to their original setting. This can compensate for Binary input 51.1
82
initial inrush when energizing a circuit without compromising (1727 > c/o) Trip
51.2
the sensitivity of the overcurrent elements during steady-state Desensitized
7SJ60x, 7SJ61
conditions. during inrush
52 or 7SJ80
Busbar
52 52 52 52
Trip
M
I >> t I > t
51.1 51.2
Typical feeder
Binary input 51.1
(1727 > C/O = cold
(1727 > C/O)
51.2 load pickup of over-
7SJ60x, 7SJ61 current pickup)
or 7SK80
4. Generators
LV
Generators < 500 kW (fig. 6.2-96 and fig. 6.2-97)
Note:
If a core-balance CT is provided for sensitive earth-fault protec- G I >, I E >, t I2 > >
tion, relay 7SJ602 with separate earth-current input can be used.
51/51N 46 49
Generators, typically 1–3 MW
(fig. 6.2-98) 7SJ60 or 7SJ80
Note:
Two VTs in V connection are also sufficient. Fig. 6.2-96: Generator with solidly earthed neutral
Notes:
1) Functions 81 and 59 are required only where prime mover G1 I >, I E >, t I2 > >
can assume excess speed and the voltage regulator may Generator 2
permit rise of output voltage above upper limit. 51/51N 46 49
1)
2) Differential relaying options: 7SJ60 or 7SJ80
– Low-impedance differential protection 87.
– Restricted earth-fault protection with low-resistance UN
RN
earthed neutral (fig. 6.2-98). 0.5 to 1 Irated
1)
I >/U <
50/27
59 U <
Field 1)
f 1) 87
G 81
81 f
RG Field <
G 64R
I E >, t IG >, t
2)
51N 51N 87N
7UM61 7UM62
Fig. 6.2-98: Protection for generators 1–3 MW Fig. 6.2-99: Protection for generators >1–3 MW
Generators > 5 –10 MW feeding into a system For the most sensitive setting of 2 mA, we therefore need 20 mA
with isolated neutral secondary earth current, corresponding to (60 / 1) × 20 mA =
(fig. 6.2-100) 1.2 A primary.
52 3)
I>/U<
Redundant 50/27
protection IG 67N IG
67N
U<
27
27 U < 59N 87 Δ I
59 U > 4) U >
O
64R 59 U >
46 I2 > 81 f >
<
81 f >
<
32 40 51V I > t, U < L. O. F. –P > I2 >
–P L. O. F. I > t, U < 51V 40 32 49 46
7UM61 or 7UM62 2) 7UM62
Unit
Overvolt. 59 aux.
81 51N
Overfreq. Trans.
78
Loss of neut.
sync. 24 OC
40 Volt/Hz
87T
A
Stator Loss of Trans.
field
6
O.L. diff.
49S 32
E Reverse
Generators > 50 –100 MW in generator transformer 87G power
unit connection Gen.
(fig. 6.2-101) 2) diff.
64R 64R
Field Field 46 21
Notes:
grd. grd.
1) 100 % stator earth-fault protection based on 20 Hz voltage Neg. Sys.
seq. backup
injection
2) Sensitive rotor earth-fault protection based on 1–3 Hz voltage
injection
59/GN
3) Non-electrical signals can be incoupled in the protection via
Gen.
binary inputs (BI) neut. OV
1)
4) Only used functions shown; further integrated functions 51/GN
available in each relay type.
Fig. 6.2-101: Protections for generators > 50 MW
Number
Relay of relays
Functions 4)
type required
7UM62 21 24 32 40 46 49
1) 2)
51GN 59GN 59 64R 64R 78 2
Synchronization of a generator
Bus
Fig. 6.2-103 shows a typical connection for synchronizing a
generator. Paralleling device 7VE6 acquires the line and gener- 52 U1
ator voltage, and calculates the differential voltage, frequency
and phase angle. If these values are within a permitted range, a
CLOSE command is issued after a specified circuit-breaker make 7VE6
U2
time. If these variables are out of range, the paralleling device U f
25
automatically sends a command to the voltage and speed con-
troller. For example, if the frequency is outside the range, an
actuation command is sent to the speed controller. If the voltage
is outside the range, the voltage controller is activated. G
6 5. Busbars
Busbar protection by overcurrent relays with reverse
interlocking
Infeed
General note: Reverse interlocking
tȋApplicable to distribution busbars without substantial
(< 0.25 × IN) backfeed from the outgoing feeders. I >, t0 I >, t
50/50N 51/51N
52 7SJ60
t0 = 50 ms
52 52 52
General notes:
87BB
tȋNormally used with single busbar, one-breaker-and-a-half, and
double busbar schemes, different transformation ratios can be
adapted by matching transformers.
52
86 6
tȋUnlimited number of feeders.
52 52 52 7SS601
tȋFeeder protection can be connected to the same CT core.
50BF
7SV60
50BF
7SV60
50BF
7TM70
7SV60 G 7SS60
Load
General notes:
tȋSuitable for all types of busbar schemes.
tȋPreferably used for multiple busbar schemes where a
disconnector (isolator) replica is necessary. 52 52 52 52
tȋThe numerical busbar protection 7SS52 provides additional 50BF 50BF 50BF 50BF
breaker failure protection. 50 50 50 50
tȋDifferent CT transformation ratios can be adapted numerically. 51 51 51 51
tȋThe protection system and the disconnector (isolator) replica Bay
units 50N 50N 50N 50N
are continuously self-monitored by the 7SS52.
51N 51N 51N 51N
tȋFeeder protection can be connected to the same CT core.
7SS523 FO 7SS523 FO 7SS523 FO 7SS523 FO
87BB 50BF
Central unit 7SS522
6. Power systems
Load shedding
In unstable power systems (e.g., isolated systems, emergency Overexcitation protection
power supply in hospitals), it may be necessary to isolate U >, t; U >>, t U/f >, t; U/f >>, t; U/f=f(t)
f >,t; f <, t; U <, t U >, t; U >>, t f >,t; f <, t; U <, t U >, t; U >>, t
81 27 59 81 27 59
7RW600, 7RW80, 7SJ62 or 7SJ80 7RW600, 7RW80 or 7SJ62 M
Decoupling Load shedding
6 is thus possible to detect and record any major active power loss
in the power system, to disconnect certain consumers accord-
f
fm
ingly and to restore the system to stability. Unlike frequency t
protection, rate-of-frequency-change protection reacts before 49
fa
the frequency threshold is undershot. To ensure effective protec-
fb
tion settings, it is recommended to consider requirements
throughout the power system as a whole. The rate-of-frequency- fc
change protection function can also be used for the purposes of
system decoupling. 48
0 1 2 3 4 5
Rate-of-frequency-change protection can also be enabled by an t
underfrequency state.
52
General note:
CB 1
The SIPROTEC protection relay 7SJ64 disconnects the switchgear
Connection to power utility
from the utility power system if the generator feeds energy back
Switch- Customer switchgear with autonomous supply
into the power system (protection function Preverse>). This
disconnector
functionality is achieved by using flexible protection. Disconnec-
1)
tion also takes place in the event of frequency or voltage fluctua- 7UT612
tions in the utility power system (protection functions
ƒ<, ƒ>, U<, U>, Idir >, IEdir > / 81, 27, 59, 67, 67N). G
Notes:
1) The transformer is protected by differential protection and
inverse or definite-time overcurrent protection functions for
the phase currents. In the event of a fault, the circuit-breaker 52 52
CB1 on the utility side is tripped by a remote link. Circuit- CB 2 CB 3
breaker CB2 is also tripped.
2) Overcurrent-time protection functions protect feeders 1 and 2
against short-circuits and overload caused by the connected 7SJ64
loads. Both the phase currents and the zero currents of the f< f> U< U> Sync. I>dir I E>dir
Preserve >
feeders can be protected by inverse and definite-time 32 81 81 27 59 25 67 67N
overcurrent stages. The circuit-breakers CB4 and CB5 are
Busbar
tripped in the event of a fault.
7SJ61/ 2) 7SJ61/ 2)
7SJ80 7SJ80
52 52
CB 4 CB 5
6
Feeder 1 Feeder 2
The relay operating times, depending on the current, can be 51F 51F
derived from the diagram or calculated with the formula given in 0.2-0.4
fig. 6.2-117. Time grading
Fault Fault Interruption of
The Ip / IN settings shown in fig. 6.2-116 have been chosen to get inception detection fault current
t 51F t 52F
pickup values safely above maximum load current. Circuit-breaker
Set time delay interruption time
This current setting should be lowest for the relay farthest down-
Overshoot*
stream. The relays further upstream should each have equal or t OS Margin tM
higher current settings.
t 51M
The time multiplier settings can now be calculated as follows: *also called overtravel or coasting time
Time grading
Station C:
trs = t51M – t51F = t52F + tOS + tM
tȋFor coordination with the fuses, we consider the fault in
location F1. Example 1 tTG =0.10 s + 0.15 s + 0.15 s = 0.40 s
The short-circuit current Iscc. max. related to 13.8 kV is 523 A. Oil circuit-breaker t52F = 0.10 s
This results in 7.47 for I / Ip at the overcurrent relay in location C. Mechanical relays tOS = 0.15 s
tȋWith this value and Tp = 0.05, an operating time of tA = 0.17 s
Safety margin for
can be derived from fig 6.2-114.
6
measuring errors, etc. tM = 0.15 s
Example 2 tTG = 0.08 + 0.02 + 0.10 = 0.20 s
This setting was selected for the overcurrent relay to get a safe
grading time over the fuse on the transformer low-voltage side. Vacuum circuit-breaker t52F = 0.08 s
Safety margin for the setting values for the relay at station C are Numerical relays tOS = 0.02 s
therefore: Safety margin tM = 0.10 s
tȋPickup current: Ip / IN = 0.7
tȋTime multiplier: Tp = 0.05 Fig. 6.2-115: Time grading of overcurrent-time relays
Station B:
The relay in B has a primary protection function for line B-C and Load
a backup function for the relay in C. The maximum through-fault 13.8 kV/ Fuse: D
A F4 B F3 C F2 F1
0.4 kV 160 A
current of 1.395 A becomes effective for a fault in location F2. Load
For the relay in C, an operating time time of 0.11 s (I / Ip = 19.93) 13.8 kV 625 kVA L.V. 75
is obtained. 51 51 51 5.0 % Load
7SJ60 7SJ60 7SJ60
It is assumed that no special requirements for short operating
times exist and therefore an average time grading interval of Station Max. ISCC. max* CT Ip / IN** Iprim*** I max
load ratio I / Ip = scc.
―――
0.3 s can be chosen. The operating time of the relay in B can Iprim
A A A
then be calculated.
A 300 4,500 400 / 5 1.0 400 11.25
B 170 2,690 200 / 5 1.1 220 12.23
tȋtB = 0.11 + 0.3 = 0.41 s C 50 1,395 100 / 5 0.7 70 19.93
1,395 A D – 523 – – – –
tȋValue of Ip / IN = ―――― = 6.34 (fig. 6.2-116)
220 A *) ISCC. max = Maximum short-circuit current
**) Ip / IN = Relay current multiplier setting
tȋWith the operating time 0.41 s and Ip / IN = 6.34, ***) Iprim = Primary setting current corresponding to Ip / IN
Tp = 0.11 can be derived from fig. 6.2-117.
Fig. 6.2-116: Time grading of inverse-time relays for a radial feeder
Note:
To simplify calculations, only inverse-time characteristics have
been used for this example. About 0.1 s shorter operating times
could have been reached for high-current faults by additionally Normalinverse
applying the instantaneous zones I>> of the 7SJ60 relays. 0.14
t = ――――― · T (s)
(I / Ip)0.02 – 1 p
Coordination of overcurrent relays with fuses and low-voltage
trip devices Strong inverse characteristics may be used with expulsion-type
The procedure is similar to the above-described grading of fuses (fuse cutouts), while extremely inverse versions adapt
overcurrent relays. A time interval of between 0.1 and 0.2 s is better to current limiting fuses.
usually sufficient for a safe time coordination.
In any case, the final decision should be made by plotting the
Strong and extremely inverse characteristics are often more curves in the log-log coordination diagram.
suitable than normal inverse characteristics in this case.
Fig. 6.2-119 shows typical examples. Electronic trip devices of LV breakers have long-delay, short-
delay and instantaneous zones. Numerical overcurrent relays
Simple distribution substations use a power fuse on the sec- with one inverse-time and two definite-time zones can closely
ondary side of the supply transformers (fig. 6.2-119a). be adapted to this (fig. 6.2-119b).
Ip = 0.7 IN
Bus-C
Tp = 0.05 s
I>> = ∞
100/5 A Ip = 0.10 – 4.00 IN
Tp = 0.05 – 3.2 s
52 7SJ600 I>> = 0.1 – 25 IN
13.8/0.4 kV
TR 625 kVA
5.0%
6 MV bus
MV bus
Time Inverse-time relay
51
50/51
Other Fuse
consumers
n
a n
LV bus a
LV bus
Fuse 0.2 s
Current
a) Maximum fault available at HV bus
Fig. 6.2-119: Coordination of an overcurrent relay with an MV fuse and low-voltage breaker trip device
Coordination of distance relays Where measured line or cable impedances are available, the
The distance relay setting must take into account the limited protected zone setting may be extended to 90 %. The second
relay accuracy, including transient overreach (5 %, according to and third zones have to keep a safety margin of about 15
IEC 60255-6), the CT error (1 % for class 5P and 3 % for class to 20 % to the corresponding zones of the following lines.
10P) and a security margin of about 5 %. Furthermore, the line The shortest following line always has to be considered
parameters are often only calculated, not measured. This is a (fig. 6.2-120).
further source of errors. A setting of 80 to 85 % is therefore
common practice; 80 % is used for mechanical relays, while 85 % As a general rule, the second zone should at least reach 20 %
can be used for the more accurate numerical relays. over the next station to ensure backup for busbar faults, and the
third zone should cover the longest following line as backup for
the line protection.
VTratio
XPrim Min = XRelay Min · ———
CTratio
6
XPrim Min
lmin = ————
X’Line R1A R 2A R 3A
A R
The shortest setting of the numerical Siemens relays is 0.05 Ω
for 1 A relays, corresponding to 0.01 Ω for 5 A relays. This allows
distance protection of distribution cables down to the range of
some 500 meters.
CT data 50BF
The prerequisite for a high-impedance scheme is that all CTs A
used for that scheme must have the same ratio. They should also N
P1 D
be of low leakage flux design according to Class PX of O
IEC 60044-1 (former Class X of BS 3938) or TPS of IEC 60044-6, R
P1: primary P 2: alternate P2
when used for high-impedance busbar protection schemes. protection protection
When used for restricted earth-fault differential protection of,
e.g., a transformer winding especially in solidly earthed systems, Fig. 6.2-122: Breaker failure protection, logic circuit
CTs of Class 5P according to IEC 60044-1 can be used as well. In
each case the excitation characteristic and the secondary
winding resistance are to be provided by the manufacturer. The
knee-point voltage of the CT must be at least twice the relay
Fault incidence BFI =
pickup voltage to ensure operation on internal faults. breaker failure
Normal interrupting time initiation time
Current (intermediate
Relay detector relays, if any)
(50 BF)
The relay can be either: Protect. Breaker inter. reset time Margin BFT =
breaker failure
a) a dedicated design high-impedance relay, e.g., designed as a time time tripping time
sensitive current relay 7VH60 or 7SG12 (DAD-N) with external (1~) (2~) (1~) (2,5~) (auxilary relays,
[2~] [4~] [2~] [2,5~] if any)
series resistor Rstab. If the series resistor is integrated into the
relay, the setting values may be directly applied in volts, as with (5~) (2~)
0,5~ 0,5~
[8~] [4~]
the relay 7VH60 (6 to 60V or 24 to 240 V); or
BFI BF timer (F) (62BF) BFT Adjacent
b) a numerical overcurrent protection relay with sensitive current
6 input, like 7SJ6 or 7SR1 (Argus-C). To the input of the relay a series
stabilizing resistor Rstab will be then connected as a rule in order
Total breaker failure interrupting time
(9~) [15~]
breaker
int. time
Calculation example: Moreover, Rstab must have a short-time rating large enough to withstand
Restricted earth-fault protection for the 400 kV winding of 400 MVA the fault current levels before the fault is cleared. The time duration of
power transformer with Ir, 400 kV = 577 A installed in a switchgear with a 0.5 seconds can be typically considered (Pstab, 0.5s) to take into account
rated short-time withstand current of 40 kA. longer fault clearance times of back-up protection. The r.m.s. voltage
Given: developed across the stabilizing resistor is decisive for the thermal stress
N = 4 CTs connected in parallel; Ipn / Isn = 800 A / 1 A – CT ratio; of the stabilizing resistor. It is calculated according to formula:
Uk = 400 V – CT knee-point voltage;
Im = 20 mA – CT magnetizing current at Uk; I sn
Urms,relay 1.3u 4 Uk3 u Rstab u I k,max,int 1.3u 4 400 3 u 1000u 50 1738.7 V
RCT = 3 Ω – CT internal resistance; I pn
Rlead = 2 Ω – secondary wiring (lead) resistance
Relay: 7SJ612; time-overcurrent 1-phase input used with setting range The resulting short-time rating Pstab, 0.5 s equals to:
Iset = 0.003 A to 1.5 A in steps of 0.001 A; relay internal burden
Urms, relay2 1,7392
Rrelay = 50 mΩ Pstab, 0.5s = ———— = —— = 3023 W
Rstab 1,000
Stability calculation
Isn 1 Check whether the voltage limitation by a varistor is required
Us ,min = Ik, max, thr — (RCT + Rlead) = 10,000 ―― (3+2) = 62.6 V
Ipn 800 The relay should normally be applied with an external varistor which
should be connected across the relay and stabilizing resistor input termi-
with Ik, max, thr taken as 16 . Ir, 400 kV = 16 . 577 A = 9,232 A, rounded up to 10 kA.
nals. The varistor limits the voltage across the terminals under maximum
The actual stability voltage for the scheme Us can be taken with internal fault conditions. The theoretical voltage which may occur at the
enough safety margin as Us = 130 V (remembering that 2Us < Uk). terminals can be determined according to following equation:
Fault setting calculation Isn 1
For the desired primary fault sensitivity of 125 A, which is approx. 22 % Uk, max, int = Ik, max, int — (Rrelay + Rstab) = 40,000 — (0.05 + 1,000) = 50,003 V
Ipn 800
of the rated current of the protected winding Ir, 400 kV (i.e., Ip, des =
125 A) the following current setting can be calculated: with Ik,max,int taken as the rated short-circuit current of the switchgear = 40 kA.
Isn Us 1 130 The resulting maximum peak voltage across the panel terminals
Iset = Ip, des — – N . Im — = 125 —— – 4 . 0.02 —— = 0.13 A
Ipn Uk 800 400 (i.e., tie with relay and Rstab connected in series):
through-fault stability but also to higher CT magnetizing and CT requirements for protection relays
varistor leakage currents, resulting consequently in a higher
primary pickup current. Instrument transformers
Instrument transformers must comply with the applicable
A higher voltage setting also requires a higher knee-point voltage IEC recommendations IEC 60044 and 60186 (PT),
of the CTs and therefore greater size of the CTs. A sensitivity of ANSI / IEEE C57.13 or other comparable standards.
10 to 20 % of Ir (rated current) is typical for restricted earth-fault
protection. With busbar protection, a pickup value ≥ Ir is normally Voltage transformers (VT)
applied. In systems with neutral earthing via impedance, the Voltage transformers (VT) in single-pole design for all primary
fault setting shall be revised against the minimum earth-fault voltages have typical single or dual secondary windings of 100,
conditions. 110 or 115 V / √3, with output ratings between 10 and 50 VA
suitable from most applications with digital metering and pro-
Non-linear resistor (varistor) tection equipment, and accuracies of 0.1 % to 6 % to suit the
Voltage limitation by a varistor is needed if peak voltages near or particular application. Primary BIL values are selected to match
above the insulation voltage (2 kV … 3 kV) are expected. A those of the associated switchgear.
limitation to Urms = 1,500 V is then recommended. This can be
checked for the maximum internal fault current by applying the Current transformers
formula shown for Umax relay. A restricted earth-fault protection Current transformers (CT) are usually of the single-ratio type
may sometimes not require a varistor, but a busbar protection in with wound or bar-type primaries of adequate thermal rating.
general does. However, it is considered a good practice to equip Single, double or triple secondary windings of 1 or 5 A are
with a varistor all high impedance protection installations. The standard. 1 A rating should, however, be preferred, particularly
electrical characteristic of a varistor can be expressed as U = C Iβ in HV and EHV substations, to reduce the burden of the con-
where C and β are the varistor constants. nected lines. Output power (rated burden in VA), accuracy and
saturation characteristics (rated symmetrical short-circuit current The requirements for protective current transformers for tran-
limiting factor) of the cores and secondary windings must meet sient performance are specified in IEC 60044-6. In many prac-
the requirements of the particular application.The CT classifica- tical cases, iron-core CTs cannot be designed to avoid saturation
tion code of IEC is used in the following: under all circumstances because of cost and space reasons,
tȋMeasuring cores particularly with metal-enclosed switchgear.
These are normally specified with 0.2 % or 0.5 % accuracy CT dimensioning formulae
(class 0.2 or class 0.5), and an rated symmetrical short-circuit
Rct + Rb
current limiting factor FS of 5 or 10. K’ssc = Kssc · ―――― (effective)
Rct + R’b
The required output power (rated burden) should be higher
than the actually connected burden. Typical values are 2.5, 5 Iscc max
with K’ssc ≥ Ktd · ―――― (required)
or 10 VA. Higher values are normally not necessary when only Ipn
electronic meters and recorders are connected.
A typical specification could be: 0.5 FS 10, 5 VA. The Siemens relays are therefore designed to tolerate CT satura-
tȋCores for billing values metering tion to a large extent. The numerical relays proposed in this
In this case, class 0.25 FS is normally required. guide are particularly stable in this case due to their integrated
tȋProtection cores saturation detection function. The effective symmetrical short-
The size of the protection core depends mainly on the circuit current factor K'SSC can be calculated as shown in the
maximum short-circuit current and the total burden (internal table above. The rated transient dimensioning factor Ktd
CT burden, plus burden of connected lines, plus relay burden). depends on the type of relay and the primary DC time constant.
Furthermore, a transient dimensioning factor has to be For relays with a required saturation-free time from ≤ 0.4 cycle,
considered to cover the influence of the DC component in the the primary (DC) time constant TP has little influence.
short-circuit current.
CT design according to BS 3938 / IEC 60044-1 (2000)
IEC Class P can be approximately transfered into the IEC Class PX (BS
Glossary of used abbreviations Class X) standard definition by following formula:
(according to IEC 60044-6, as defined)
Kssc = Rated symmetrical short-circuit current factor (Rb + Rct) · In · Kssc
6
Uk = ―――――――――
(example: CT cl. 5P20 Kssc = 20) 1.3
K’ssc = Effective symmetrical short-circuit current factor Example:
Ktd = Transient dimensioning factor IEC 60044: 600 / 1, 5P10, 15 VA, Rct = 4 Ω
Issc max = Maximum symmetrical short-circuit current
(15 + 4) · 1 · 10
Ipn = CT rated primary current IEC PX or BS: UK = ―――――――― = 146 V
1.3
Isn = CT rated secondary current Rct = 4 Ω
Rct = Secondary winding d.c. resistance at 75 °C / 167 °F For CT design according to ANSI / IEEE C 57.13 please refer to page 331
(or other specified temperature)
Rb = Rated resistive burden The CT requirements mentioned in table 6.2-3 are simplified
in order to allow fast CT calculations on the safe side. More
R’b = Rlead + Rrelay = connected resistive burden
accurate dimensioning can be done by more intensive calcula-
TP = Primary time constant (net time constant)
tion with Siemens’s CTDIM (www.siemens.com/ctdim) program.
UK = Knee-point voltage (r.m.s.) Results of CTDIM are released by the relay manufacturer.
Rrelay = Relay burden
2·ρ·l Adaption factor for 7UT6, 7UM62 relays in fig 6.2-122
Rlead = ―――― (limited resolution of measurement)
A
with Ipn INrelay Ipn · √3 · UnO INrelay
l = Single conductor length from CT to relay in m FAdap = ―― · ――― = ――――――― · ――― Request: ⅛ ≤ 8
InO Isn SNmax Isn
ρ = Specific resistance = 0.0175 Ωmm2 / m (copper wires)
at 20 °C / 68 °F (or other specified temperature) 7SD52, 53, 610, when transformer inside protected zone
A = Conductor cross-section in mm2
In-pri-CTmax 1
―――― · ―――――― ≤ 8
In-pri-CTmin Transformer ratio*
In general, an ac-curacy of 1 % in the range of 1 to 2 times
nominal current (class 5 P) is specified. The rated symmetrical * If transformer in protection zone, else 1
short-circuit current factor KSSC should normally be selected so
In-pri-CT-Transf-Site ≤ 2 · In-Obj-Transf-Site AND
that at least the maximum short-circuit current can be trans-
mitted without saturation (DC component is not considered). In-pri-CT-Transf-Site ≥ In-Obj-Transf-Site with
InO = Rated current of the protected object
This results, as a rule, in rated symmetrical short-circuit current UnO = Rated voltage of the protected object
factors of 10 or 20 depending on the rated burden of the CT in INrelay = Rated current of the relay
relation to the connected burden. A typical specification for pro- SNmax = Maximun load of the protected object
tection cores for distribution feeders is 5P10, 10 VA or 5P20, 5 VA. (for transformers: winding with max. load)
Relay type Transient dimensioning Min. required sym. short- Min. required knee-point
factor Ktd circuit current factor K’ssc voltage Uk
6
Ktd (a) · ――――――――― Ktd (a)· ――――――――― · (Rct + R’b) · Isn
(with distance function) Ktd (a) 1 2 4 4 Ipn 1.3 · Ipn
Ktd (b) 4 5 5 5 and: and:
Iscc max (zone 1 – end fault) Iscc max (zone 1 – end fault)
Ktd (b) · ―――――――――― Ktd (b) · ―――――――――― · (Rct + R’b) · Isn
Ipn Ipn
132 kV, 50 Hz
*) without
CB arrangement inside power plant is not shown distance function
x“d = Generator direct axis subtransient reactance in p.u.
uk 1-2 = Transformer impedance voltage HV side – LV side in %
Rrelay = Assumed with 0.1 , (power consumption for above relays is below 0.1 VA)
1) Current from side 3 is due to uk 2-3 and x“d of G2 in most cases negligible
Fig. 6.2-125: Example 1 – CT verification for 7UM62, 7UT6, 7SD52 (7SD53, 7SD610)
Ktd = 5 (from table 6.2-3) Ktd = 3 (from table 6.2-3) Ktd = 3 (from table 6.2-3) Ktd = 1.2 (from table 6.2-3)
Iscc max (ext. fault) Iscc max (ext. fault) Iscc max (ext. fault)
K’ssc ≥ Ktd · ――――――― K’ssc ≥ Ktd · ――――――― K’ssc ≥ Ktd · ―――――――
Ipn Ipn Ipn
Sn 20 VA Sn 20 VA Sn 50 VA
Rb = ―― = ――― = 20 Ω Rb = ―― = ――― = 20 Ω Rb = ―― = ――― = 2 Ω
I2sn 1 A2 I2sn 1 A2 I2sn (5 A)2
R’b = Rlead + Rrelay R’b = Rlead + Rrelay R’b = Rlead + Rrelay R’b = Rlead + Rrelay
18 Ω + 20 Ω 18 Ω + 20 Ω 0.96 Ω + 2 Ω 17,000 A
= 20 · ――――――― = 40.8 = 20 · ――――――― = 41.2 = 20 · ――――――――― = 30.6 = 1.2 · ――――― · (0.8 Ω + 0.625 Ω) ·5 A
18 Ω + 0.625 Ω 18 Ω + 0.450 Ω 0.96 Ω + 0.975 Ω 1.3 · 1,000 A
= 111.8 V
K’ssc required = 28.8, K’ssc required = 17.9, K’ssc required = 18.7, UK required = 111.8 V,
Kssc effective = 40.8 Kssc effective = 41.2 Kssc effective = 30.6 UK effective = 200 V
28.8 < 40.8 17.9 < 41.2 18.7 < 30.6 111.8 V < 200 V
CT dimensioning is ok CT dimensioning is ok CT dimensioning is ok CT dimensioning is ok
Ipn · √3 · UnO INrelay Ipn · √3 · UnO INrelay Ipn · √3 · UnO INrelay Ipn max
FAdap = ―――――― · ――― FAdap = ―――――― · ――― FAdap = ―――――― · ――― ――― ≤ 8
SNmax Isn SNmax Isn SNmax Isn Ipn min
Attention (only for 7UT6 V4.0): When low-impedance REF is zone): Maximum ratio between primary currents of CTs at the
used, the request for the REF side (3-phase) is: end of the protected line:
1/ ≤ F 1
4 Adap ≤ 4, (for the neutral CT: / 8 ≤ FAdap ≤ 8) Ipn max
――― ≤ 8
Further condition for 7SD52x, 53x, 610 relays (when used as Ipn min
line differential protection without transformer inside protected
Specific resistance:
Iscc max 30,000 A Ω · mm2
――― = ―――― = 50 ρ = 0.0175 ―――― (copper wires) at 20 °C / 68 °F
Ipn 600 A m
1
K’ssc ≥ ― · 50 = 25
2 CT design according to ANSI / IEEE C 57.13
6
15 VA Class C of this standard defines the CT by ist secondary terminal
Rb = ――― = 15 Ω
1 A2 voltage at 20 times rated current, for which the ratio error shall
not exceed 10 %. Standard classes are C100, C200, C400 and
Rrelay = 0.1 Ω C800 for 5 A rated secondary current.
2 · 0.0175 · 50
Rlead = ――――――― = 0.3 Ω This terminal voltage can be approximately calculated from the
6
IEC data as follows:
R’b = Rlead + Rrelay = 0.3 Ω + 0.1 Ω = 0.4 Ω
ANSI CT definition
Rct + Rb 4 Ω + 15 Ω Kssc
K’ssc = ―――― · Kssc = ――――― · 10 = 43.2 Us.t.max = 20 · 5 A · Rb · ――
Rct + R’b 4 Ω + 0.4 Ω 20
with
Pb
Rb = ―― and INsn = 5 A, the result is
Isn2
Result:
The effective K’ssc is 43.2, the required K’ssc is 25. Therefore the Pb · Kssc
Us.t.max = ――――
stability criterion is fulfilled. 5A
Example:
Relay burden IEC 600 / 5, 5P20, 25 VA,
The CT burdens of the numerical relays of Siemens are below 0.1 60044
VA and can therefore be neglected for a practical estimation. ANSI (25 VA · 20)
Exceptions are the busbar protection 7SS60 and the pilot-wire C57.13: Us.t.max = ―――――― = 100 V, acc. to class C100
5A
relays 7SD600.
SIPROTEC Compact
SIPROTEC 600er
Device series
SIPROTEC 4
SIPROTEC 5
SIPROTEC 4
SIPROTEC 5
Reyrolle
Reyrolle
7PG2111
7SG163
7SG164
7SD610
7SA522
7SG18
7SD60
7SD80
7SD84
7SD86
7SD87
7SA61
7SA63
7SA64
7SA84
7SA86
7SA87
7SD5
ANSI Function Abbr.
Protection functions for 3-pole
tripping
3-pole p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p
Protection functions for 1-pole
tripping
1-pole 1 1 1 1 – – p – 1 – – 1 1 – – p – –
6 FL
24
Fault locator
Overexcitation protection
FL
V/f
p p p p p
– – – – –
p
–
p p p
– – –
–
–
–
–
p p p
– – –
p
–
p
–
–
–
–
–
Synchrocheck, synchronizing
25
function
Sync 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 – – – 1 1 1 1 – –
27TN/59TN Stator ground fault 3rd harmonics V0<, > (3rd harm.) – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
SIPROTEC Compact
SIPROTEC 600er
SIPROTEC easy
SIPROTEC 5
SIPROTEC 4
SIPROTEC 5
Reyrolle
Reyrolle
7SR23 1)
7SJ85 1)
7SR210
7SR220
7SR224
7SJ600
7SJ602
7PG23
7SG12
7SC80
7SR11
7SR12
7SL86
7SL87
7SJ45
7SJ46
7SJ80
7SJ81
7SJ61
7SJ62
7SJ63
7SJ64
7SJ86
p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p
– p p – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 1
– – – – – – – – – – – – 1 1 1 1 – – – – – – –
p p – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
p
–
p
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
1
–
1
–
1
–
–
–
1
–
1
–
1
–
1
–
1
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
6
1 1 – – – – – – – 1 – 1 1) – 1 – 1 1 1 – – – – 1
1 1 – – – – – – – 1 1 1 – 1 1 1 1 1 – p – p p
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
1 1 – – – – – – – 1 1 1 – 1 – 1 1 1 – – – – –
– – – – – – – – p p p p p p p 2) p 1 1 p p p p –
– – – – – – – – 1 – – – 1 1 1 1 1 1 1) – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
1 1 – – – – – p p p p p p p p p p p 1 1 p p p
1 1 – – – – – p p p p p p p p p p p 1 1 p p p
p p – – – – – – – 1 1 1 p p p p p p – p – p p
– – – – – – – – – – – – 1 1 1 1 – – – – – – –
1 1 – – – – – p p p p p p p p p p p 1 1 p p p
p p – – – p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p
1 1 p p – – – – 1 1 1 p 1) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1) 1 1 p p p
– – – – – – – – – p 1) – – 1 1 – 1 – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – 1 1 1 1 – – – – – – –
1 1 – – – – – p p p p p p p p p 1 1 p p p p p
p p – – – p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p
– – – – – – – – – 1 1) – – – p – p – – – p – p p
SIPROTEC Compact
SIPROTEC 600er
Device series
SIPROTEC 4
SIPROTEC 5
SIPROTEC 4
SIPROTEC 5
Reyrolle
Reyrolle
7PG2111
7SG163
7SG164
7SD610
7SA522
7SG18
7SD60
7SD80
7SD84
7SD86
7SD87
7SA61
7SA63
7SA64
7SA84
7SA86
7SA87
7SD5
ANSI Function Abbr.
55 Power factor cos p p p p p p p – – – – p p p p p – –
66 Restart inhibit I 2t – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
6 67
Directional time-overcurrent
protection, phase
Directional time-overcurrent
I>, IP (V, I) p p p p 1 1 1 – – – 1 1 – 1 1 1 – –
67N
protection for ground-faults
IN>, INP (V, I) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 – – – 1 1 1 1 1 1 – –
79 Automatic reclosing AR 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 – 1 1 1 1 1 1 – –
85 Teleprotection p p p p p p p 1 1 p p p p – – – 1 p
86 Lockout p p p p p p p p p – p p p p p p – p
87 Differential protection ΔI – – – – – – – – – p p p p p p p p p
87N Differential ground-fault protection ∆IN – – – – – – – – – p p 1 1 – – – – –
SIPROTEC Compact
SIPROTEC 600er
SIPROTEC easy
SIPROTEC 5
SIPROTEC 4
SIPROTEC 5
Reyrolle
Reyrolle
7SR23 1)
7SJ85 1)
7SR210
7SR220
7SR224
7SJ600
7SJ602
7PG23
7SG12
7SC80
7SR11
7SR12
7SL86
7SL87
7SJ45
7SJ46
7SJ80
7SJ81
7SJ61
7SJ62
7SJ63
7SJ64
7SJ86
p p – – – – – – – 1 1 1 – 1 p 2) 1 p 2) p 2) – – – – –
1 1 – – – – – – 1 1 1 1 – 1 1 1 1 1 – p – p p
– – – – – – – – – 1 1) – – – 1 – 1 – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – 1 – – – 1 1 1 1 – – – – – – –
1 1 – – – – – – – 1 1 1 – 1 1 1 1 1 – p – p p
6
1 1 – – – – – – – 1 1 1 – 1 1 1 1 1 – p – p p
1 1) 1 1) – – – – – – 1 1 1 p 1) – 1 1 1 1 11) – – – – –
1 1 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
p p p – p – – p p p p p 1) p p p p p p p p p p p
1 1 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
1 1 – – – – – 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 p
1 1 – – – – – – – 1 1 1 – 1 1 1 1 1 – p – p p
– – – – – – – – – 1 1 1 – 1 – 1 – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
p p – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 1 – – – – –
p p – – – – – – – p p p p p p p p p p p p p p
p p p p p – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – p p – – – – 1 1 – – 1 1 1 1 – – 1 1 p p p
p p – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
1 1 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 1 1 – – – – –
SIPROTEC Compact
SIPROTEC 600er
Device series
SIPROTEC 4
SIPROTEC 5
SIPROTEC 4
SIPROTEC 5
Reyrolle
Reyrolle
7PG2111
7SG163
7SG164
7SD610
7SA522
7SG18
7SD60
7SD80
7SD84
7SD86
7SD87
7SA61
7SA63
7SA64
7SA84
7SA86
7SA87
7SD5
ANSI Function Abbr.
Further functions
Measured values p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p – p
Switching-statistic counters p p p p p p p p p – p p p p p p – p
Logic editor p p p p p p p – – – p p p p p p – –
Inrush-current detection – – – – p p p – – 1 p p p p p p – –
Fast-scan recorder – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Slow-scan recorder – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Continuous recorder – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
GOOSE recorder – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Sequence-of-events recorder – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
SIPROTEC Compact
SIPROTEC 600er
SIPROTEC easy
SIPROTEC 5
SIPROTEC 4
SIPROTEC 5
Reyrolle
Reyrolle
7SR23 1)
7SJ85 1)
7SR210
7SR220
7SR224
7SJ600
7SJ602
7PG23
7SG12
7SC80
7SR11
7SR12
7SL86
7SL87
7SJ45
7SJ46
7SJ80
7SJ81
7SJ61
7SJ62
7SJ63
7SJ64
7SJ86
p p p – p – – p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p
p p p – – – – – – p p p p p p p p p p p p p p
p p p – – – – – – p p p p p p p p p p p p p p
p p – – – – – – – p p p p p p p p p p p p p p
p p p – p – – p p p p p p p p 2) p p p p p p p p
p p p – p – – – – p p p p p p p p p p p p p p 6
p p p – p – – p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
p p p – p – – p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p
p p p – p – – – – – – – – – – – 1 1 p p p p p
8 8 8 – 8 1 1 1 1 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 8 8 4 4 8 8 8
SIPROTEC Compact
Device series
SIPROTEC 5
SIPROTEC 4
SIPROTEC 4
SIPROTEC 5
Reyrolle
7SK85 1)
7UM61
7UM62
6MD61
6MD63
6MD66
6MD85
6MD86
7SG17
7SK80
7SK81
ANSI Function Abbr.
Protection functions for 3-pole tripping 3-pole p p p p p p – – – 1 1
Protection functions for 1-pole tripping 1-pole – – – – – – – – – – –
FL Fault locator FL – – 1 – – – – – – – –
p p
6
24 Overexcitation protection V/f – – – – – – – – –
SIPROTEC Compact
SIPROTEC 600er
SIPROTEC 600er
SIPROTEC 4
SIPROTEC 4
SIPROTEC 5
SIPROTEC 4
SIPROTEC 5
SIPROTEC 4
SIPROTEC 5
Reyrolle
Reyrolle
Reyrolle
7KE85 1)
7UT85 1)
7UT86 1)
7UT87 1)
7SG117
7SG118
7UT612
7UT613
7RW60
7RW80
7VK61
7VK87
7SG14
7SG15
7UT63
7SR24
7SS60
7SS52
7VE6
p p p p p p p p p p p p 1 – p p p – –
p – – – – – – – – – p p – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
1 1 1 1 1 1
6
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – 1 1 1 – – 1 p p p – 1 – – –
– – – 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 – p p p – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – 1 1 1 1 1 – – – 1 – – – – – – –
– – – – – – 1 – – – – – – – – –
– – 1 1 1 1 1 1 – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – 1 1 1 1 1 1 p p – – – – – – – – –
– – 1 1 1 1 1 1 p p – – – – – – – – –
– – p p p p p p – – – – – – p p – p –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – p p p p p p 1 1 – – – – – – – – –
– 1 p p p p p p 1 1 1 1 – – – – – – –
– – – – – 1 1 1 – – – 1 – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – 1 – – – – – – – – – –
– p 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 p p p – – – – – – –
– 1 p p p p p p 1 1 1 1 – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
SIPROTEC Compact
Device series
SIPROTEC 5
SIPROTEC 4
SIPROTEC 4
SIPROTEC 5
Reyrolle
7SK85 1)
7UM61
7UM62
6MD61
6MD63
6MD66
6MD85
6MD86
7SG17
7SK80
7SK81
ANSI Function Abbr.
55 Power factor cos 1 1 p 2) 1 1 – – – – – –
66 Restart inhibit I 2t p p p 1 1 – – – – – –
67N
ground-faults
IN>, INP (V, I) 1 1 1 p p – – – – – –
79 Automatic reclosing AR – – 1 – – – – – 1 – 1
81 Frequency protection f<, f> 1 1 1 p p – – – – 1 1
81R Rate of change of frequency df/dt 1 1 – p p – – – – – –
85 Teleprotection – – – – – – – – – – –
86 Lockout p p p p p p – – – – –
87 Differential protection ΔI – – – – p – – – – – –
SIPROTEC Compact
SIPROTEC 600er
SIPROTEC 600er
SIPROTEC 4
SIPROTEC 4
SIPROTEC 5
SIPROTEC 4
SIPROTEC 5
SIPROTEC 4
SIPROTEC 5
Reyrolle
Reyrolle
Reyrolle
7KE85 1)
7UT85 1)
7UT86 1)
7UT87 1)
7SG117
7SG118
7UT612
7UT613
7RW60
7RW80
7VK61
7VK87
7SG14
7SG15
7UT63
7SR24
7SS60
7SS52
7VE6
– – p p p 1 1 1 – – – – – – – – –
– – – 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 – p p p – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – p – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – 1 1 1 – – – 1 – – – – – – –
6
– – – – – 1 1 1 – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – 1 1) 1 1) 1 1) – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – 1 p p p p p p p p p p – p p p – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – p p – – – – – – –
– – – 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 – 1 1 – p p 1 – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – 1 – p p – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – 1 – – 1 – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 1 – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
p – p p p 1 1 1 p p p p – – – p p – –
p p p p p p p p p p – – – – – – – – –
– – 1 1 1 p p p – – – – – – – – – – –
– – p p p – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – p –
– – – – – 1 1 1 – – – 1 – – – – – p
p = basic 1 = optional (aditional price) – = not available 1) in preparation 2) via CFC
SIPROTEC Compact
Device series
SIPROTEC 5
SIPROTEC 4
SIPROTEC 4
SIPROTEC 5
Reyrolle
7SK85 1)
7UM61
7UM62
6MD61
6MD63
6MD66
6MD85
6MD86
7SG17
7SK80
7SK81
ANSI Function Abbr.
Further functions
Measured values p p p p p p 1 p p p p
Switching-statistic counters p p p p p p p p p p p
Logic editor p p p p p – – p p p p
Inrush-current detection p p p – 1 – – – – 1 1
External trip initiation p p p p p – – – – – –
Control p p p p p – p p p p p
6 Fault recording of analog and binary signals
Extended fault recording
p
–
p
–
p
–
p
–
p
–
p
–
–
–
–
–
1
–
p
–
p
–
Fast-scan recorder – – – – – – – – – – –
Slow-scan recorder – – – – – – – – – – –
Continuous recorder – – – – – – – – – – –
Power quality recorder (class S) – – – – – – – – – – –
GOOSE recorder – – – – – – – – – – –
Sequence-of-events recorder – – – – – – – – – – –
Extended trigger functions – – – – – – – – – – –
Monitoring and supervision p p p p p p p p p p p
Protection interface, serial – – 1 – – p – – – 1 1) 1 1)
No. Setting groups 4 4 8 2 2 8 4 4 4 8 8
SIPROTEC Compact
SIPROTEC 600er
SIPROTEC 600er
SIPROTEC 4
SIPROTEC 4
SIPROTEC 5
SIPROTEC 4
SIPROTEC 5
SIPROTEC 4
SIPROTEC 5
Reyrolle
Reyrolle
Reyrolle
7KE85 1)
7UT85 1)
7UT86 1)
7UT87 1)
7SG117
7SG118
7UT612
7UT613
7RW60
7RW80
7VK61
7VK87
7SG14
7SG15
7UT63
7SR24
7SS60
7SS52
7VE6
p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p –
– – p p p p p p p p p p p p – p p p –
– p p p p p p p – p p p p – – p – – –
– – p p p p p p p p – p – – – – – – –
– p p p p p p p p p p p 1 p 1 p p – –
– – p p p p p p p p p p p p – p p p –
p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p – 6
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – p
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – p
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – p
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – p
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 1 1)
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 1 1)
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 1 1)
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 1
p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p –
– – – – – p p p p p – 1 – p – – p p –
1 1 4 4 4 8 8 8 8 8 4 8 4 8 1 4 8 8 –
Even in such configurations, the user can benefit from full blocks are designed to substitute conventional terminal blocks,
automation and communication capabilities. This means that thereby realizing a very economic design. Existing protection
classical RTU solution, interfaces to other IEDs are included, and relays can be connected either by IEC 60870-5-103 or by the
HMIs for station operation and supervision can be added as an more enhanced IEC 61850.
option. Also, the protection relays are connected to the RTU, so
that data from the relays are available both at the station opera- In new substations, the amount of cabling can be reduced by
tion terminal and in the control centers. decentralizing the automation system. Both protection relays
and bay controllers are situated as near as possible to the pri-
All members of the SICAM AK, TM, BC, EMIC and MIC family can mary switchgear. Typically they are located in relay houses (EHV)
be equipped with different combinations of communication, both or in control cabinets directly beneath HV GIS feeders. The
serial and Ethernet (TCP / IP). Different protocols are available, rugged design with maximum EMC provides high security and
mainly IEC standards, e.g., IEC 60870-5-101 / 103 / 104 IEC 61850, availability.
IEC 62056-21, but also a lot of other well-known protocols from
different vendors. For station control, two different products are available: SICAM PAS
is a software-oriented product based on standard industrial
Fig. 6.3-2 shows an example of refurbishment and centralized hardware, whereas SICAM AK, TM, BC, EMIC and MIC represents
data acquisition in an MV substation. The interface to the pri- the modular hardware-oriented design which bridges the gap
mary equipment is connected via a marshalling rack, but can use between remote terminal units (RTUs) and substation automa-
any peripheral voltage (DC 24–220 V). The electronic terminal tion (SA) (fig. 6.3-3).
Control centers
SICAM 230
SICAM AK
6
IEC 61850 Ethernet TCP/IP
SIPROTEC
PE elements
Protection relais Parallel data Alternative interface
(from marshalling rack) (substitution of terminal blocks)
Control centers
SICAM 230 or
SICAM AK, TM, SICAM SCC
SICAM PAS BC, EMIC, MIC
IEC 61850 Ethernet TCP/IP
IEC - 104
SIPROTEC
SICAM MIC
High-voltage Medium-voltage Station data
n x bays m x relais
Fig. 6.3-3: Basic principle of a SICAM station automation solution with alternative station controllers
Control center
SICAM AK
IEC 61850 Ethernet TCP/IP
SIPROTEC
SICAM MIC
Combined control and protection, Station data
situated directly in low-voltage compartments
Fig. 6.3-4: Combined control and protection, situated directly in low-voltage compartments
Control center
6
IEC 61850 Ethernet TCP/IP
IEC -104
SIPROTEC
SICAM MIC
Combined control and protection, Station data
situated directly in low-voltage compartments
The flexible Siemens solutions are available for every kind of single-point data input. This means that multiple data input is
substation: avoided. Even if different engineering tools are necessary for
tȋFor different voltage levels, from ring main unit to certain configurations, these tools exchange their data for more
transmission substation efficient engineering.
tȋFor new substations or refurbishment
tȋFor gas-insulated or air-insulated switchgear Example of a small medium-voltage substation: Typically it
tȋFor indoor or outdoor design consists of 4 to 16 MV feeders and is unmanned. In most cases,
tȋFor manned or unmanned substations combined bay control and protection devices are located directly
in the low-voltage compartments of the switchgear panels.
Communication is the backbone of every automation system.
Therefore, Siemens solutions are designed to collect the data A station operation terminal is usually not required, because
from the high-voltage equipment and present them to the such substations are normally remote-controlled, and in case of
different users: the right information for the right users at the local service / maintenance they are easy to control at the front
right place and time with the required quality and security. side of the switchgear panels (fig. 6.3-4).
Here are some default examples for typical configurations. They Example of a distribution substation in industry supply: In
are like elements which can be combined according to the principle they are similar to the configuration above, but they
respective requirements. The products, which are the bricks of are often connected to a control center via local area network
the configurations, are an integral part of the harmonized (LAN). A distinctive feature is the interface to low-voltage
system behavior, and support according to the principle of distribution boards and sometimes even to the industrial auto-
Control centers
IEC - 101
IEC - 104
SIPROTEC
SICAM MIC
n x HV feeders n x MV feeders Station data
combined
control and protection
SICAM AK
(reduntant)
IEC 61850 Ethernet TCP/IP
6
IEC - 104
SICAM MIC
mation system for data exchange. Here, the compatibility with operation and maintenance of such substations, such as voltage
SIMATIC products simplifies system integration (fig. 6.3-5). regulation by controlling on-load tap changers, synchrocheck,
automatic command sequences, etc. (fig. 6.3-7).
A subtransmission substation requires even more complexity: 2 or
3 voltage levels have to be equipped; a station operation terminal The devices are as flexible as the configurations: Bay controllers,
is usually required; more communication interfaces to external protection relays, station control units, station operation units
locations, separated control and protection devices on HV level, and RTUs can be configured from small to very large. The well-
powerful LAN based on IEC 61850, and remote maintenance known products of the SICAM and SIPROTEC series are a well
access are typical features of such applications (fig. 6.3-6). proven base for the Siemens solutions.
In transmission substations, typically two to four voltage levels Secure and reliable operation
are to be automated. According to the high importance of such Siemens solutions provide human machine interfaces (HMI)
substations, availability is of the highest priority. Therefore, for every control level and support the operators with reliable
redundancy at substation level is generally required, both for information and secure, easy-to-use control features.
station control units and station operation. Multiple operator
stations are often required, multiple communication links to At feeder level:
different control centers or neighboring substations are stan- tȋConventional panels with pushbuttons and instruments
dard. Although most standard applications are IEC protocols, for refurbishment
specific protocols also have to be offered for interfacing existing tȋElectronic front panels combined with bay control units
third-party devices. Complex automation functions support the (default)
tȋAccess points for remote terminals connected to the station are maintenance free and easy to expand at a later date. Last but
operation units not least, the powerful services for remote maintenance (diag-
tȋPortable touch panels with wireless access in defined areas nosis, settings, updates, test, etc.) provide a very economic way
to keep any substation up-to-date and running.
At substation level:
tȋSingle or redundant HMI Simple handling of the solutions is provided by:
tȋDistributed server / client architectures with
multiple and / or remote terminals tȋSame look and feel of all HMI on different levels.
tȋInterface to office automation tȋVertical and horizontal interoperability of the involved
products.
All images and pictures of the HMIs are designed according to tȋPlug and play for spare parts by simple exchange of flash cards.
ergonomic requirements, so as to give the operators clear infor-
mation that is easy to use. Control commands are only accepted Reduction of engineering effort by
if access rights are met, the local / remote switches are in the tȋSeamless data management, only single data input for
right position and the multi-step command sequence is actively whole project.
handled. Care is taken that only commands which are intended tȋEasy up and downloads, even remote.
and explicitly given are processed and sent to the switchgear. tȋIntegrated test tools.
Reduction of complexity by seamless communication control centers, and IEC 60870-5 for remote communication.
tȋWorldwide standard IEC 61850 promoted by Siemens They form the strong backbone for the seamless solutions in
tȋIntegrated IT security concepts energy automation. Additionally, the systems are tested in
tȋLatest technology integrated rugged environmental conditions and certified according to
applicable IEC standards.
Efficient and state-of-the-art projects
The solutions for energy automation are part of the extensive Investments in our solutions are secured by the “evergreen
programme, “Siemens One”. This means that energy automation concept”, which defines migration methods when a new genera-
solutions are integrated in different applications of the vast tion of products is introduced to the markets, e.g., the migration
activity and expertise of Siemens: solution for SICAM LSA 678 from the early 90ies: By substituting
tȋPower grids in transmission and distribution the station control device with today’s SICAM PAS, it is possible
tȋComplete building automation to retain the installed feeder devices and import the existing
tȋSolutions for pipelines and infrastructure
tȋTurnkey railway systems
Professional implementation of complete solutions from
They all make use of the energy automation solutions and the competence centers
associated transfer of expertise for efficient project and order Consulting
execution. Our worldwide engineering centers are always close Engineering
services Training
to the system operators (fig. 6.3-9).
USA CH OES
6
USA
ITL IND CHN
MEX
SICAM PAS
Fiber-optic
connections
ILSA protocol TCP/IP
IEC61850
Fiber-optic
Bay 1 ... n connections
ILSA protocol
Switchgear
Bay 1 ... n
Switchgear
database with the settings into the new tool SICAM PAS UI. This System overview, application and functionality of SICAM PAS
method reduces the refurbishment work significantly and adds tȋSICAM PAS is an energy automation solution; its system
new features to the system: In the next years the substation can architecture makes it scalable.
be expanded with new feeder devices through the use of tȋSICAM PAS is suitable for operating a substation not only from
IEC 61850, even though some parts of the system might already one single station level computer, but also in combination with
be older than 15 years (fig. 6.3-10). further SICAM PAS or other station control units. Communica-
tion in this network is based on a powerful Ethernet LAN.
Our solutions are not only compatible with older devices, they tȋWith its features and its modular expandability, SICAM PAS
are also very innovative. The Frost&Sullivan Technology Leader- covers a broad range of applications and supports distributed
ship Award 2006 was presented to Siemens for pioneering in the system configurations. A distributed SICAM PAS system
development of an innovative technology, the IEC 61850. operates simultaneously on several computers.
tȋSICAM PAS can use existing hardware components and
With Siemens energy automation solutions, every user is on the communication standards as well as their connections.
safe side: The combination of long-term experience and the tȋSICAM PAS controls and registers the process data for all
newest innovation supplies safety for many years to come. devices of a substation, within the scope of the data transfer
protocols supported.
tȋSICAM PAS is a communication gateway. This is why only one
single data connection to a higher-level system control center
is required.
tȋSICAM PAS enables integration of a fully graphical process
6.3.3 SICAM PAS visualization system directly in the substation.
tȋSICAM PAS simplifies installation and parameterization of new
SICAM PAS (Power Automation System) meets all the demands devices, thanks to its intuitive user interface.
placed on a distributed substation control system – both now tȋSICAM PAS is notable for its online parameter setting features,
and in the future. Amongst many other standardized communi- particularly when the system has to be expanded. There are no
cation protocols, SICAM PAS particularly supports the IEC 61850 generation times; loading into a target system is not required
6 standard for communication between substations and IEDs.
SICAM PAS is an open system and – in addition to standardized
at all or only required if configuration is performed on a
separate engineering PC.
data transfer processes – it features user interfaces for the tȋSICAM PAS features integrated testing and diagnostic functions.
integration of system-specific tasks and offers multiple automa- tȋIts user-friendliness, its operator control logic, its orientation
tion options. SICAM PAS can thus be easily included in existing to the Windows world and its open structure ideally suit users'
systems and used for system integration, too. With modern requirements.
diagnostics, it optimally supports commissioning and mainte- tȋSICAM PAS is developed in accordance with selected security
nance. SICAM PAS is clearly structured and reliable, thanks to its standards and meets modern demands placed on safe
open, fully documented and tested system (fig. 6.3-11). communication.
Corporate
network TCP/IP
Control center
HMI
Station bus Ethernet TCP/IP
Serial hub
IEC 61850
Fig. 6.3-11: Typical SICAM PAS configuration; IEDs are connected to the station unit with IEC 61850 and various other protocols
(IEC 60870-5-103,DNPV3.00, etc.). The station unit communicates with the higher-level system control center by means
of IEC 60870-5-101 and / or 104
System architecture
SICAM PAS works on industrial-standard hardware with the
Microsoft Windows operating systems. The advantages of this
platform are low hardware and software costs, ease of opera-
tion, scalability, flexibility and constantly available support. With
the powerful real-time data distribution system, applications can
be allocated among several computers, thus boosting perfor-
mance, connectivity and availability.
Corporate
network TCP/IP
HMI
Station unit clients Station unit
“Full Server” “Full Server”
Station bus
Ethernet TCP/IP
IEC 61850
Fig. 6.3-15: Typical redundant configuration: The station unit and the HMI server are
based on a redundant structure to boost availiability
the Web clients. SICAM Diamond allows access to archive files Automation tasks
and fault recordings through the World Wide Web. The archive can be configured in SICAM PAS with the CFC (Continuous
files can be saved on the Web client for evaluation, e.g. with
Microsoft Excel. Fault recordings can be visualized directly in
Function Chart), which conforms to IEC 61131. In this editor,
tasks are configured graphically by wiring function blocks.
6
the Internet Explorer. SICAM PAS comes with an extensive library of CFC function
blocks, developed and system-tested specially for energy auto-
Further station control aspects mation.
During, e.g., maintenance work or for other operational reasons,
information exchange with the control centers or the substation Applications range from generation of simple group indications
itself can be blocked with the telecontrol blocking and bay through switching interlocks to complex operating sequences.
blocking functions. The telecontrol blocking function can also be Creation of operating sequences is supported by the SFC Editor
configured for specific channels so as to prevent the transfer of (Sequential Function Chart).
information to one particular control center during operation,
while transfer continues with other control centers. The bay In this context, additionally pre-configured and system-tested
blocking and telecontrol blocking functions act in both the applications such as frequency-based load shedding, transformer
signaling and the command directions. Channel-specific monitoring and SF6 gas monitoring can be optionally licensed.
switching authority also makes it possible to distinguish Besides special functional components and CFCs, the scope of
between local control (SICAM SCC) and remote control for the supply also covers operating images for SICAM SCC.
switching direction, but also between control center connec-
tions. For these three functions, information-specific exceptions Redundancy
can be declared additionally, so that, e.g., certain messages are SICAM PAS features comprehensive redundancy functions to
transmitted despite an activated block, or special commands are boost the availability of the station automation system:
processed and issued despite of a defined switching authority. tȋThe substation control unit can be used in a duplicate
While a 1-out-of-n check is normally effective in IEDs, i.e. only configuration (“system redundancy“)
one command is accepted and issued at the same time, an tȋThe communication to IEDs and RTUs can be redundant
m-out-of-n check is supported on the side of the substation (“interface redundancy”)
control system with SICAM PAS. This helps to define how many tȋSubordinate units can be duplicated (redundancy at the bay
commands can be processed at the same time for all IEDs. control level)
Circuit-breakers can be controlled in synchronized/unsynchro- tȋSubunits that are only designed for communication with one
nized mode. master (e.g., with only one serial interface) can be supported.
0A
TP 0 TP 0 TP 0 TP 0
= K01/02
6 The individual applications (communication protocols) operate With a distributed PAS system using a full server and up to 6
independently of each other in a hot/standby connection, i.e. a DIPs, a maximum of 350 IEDs and 20,000 data points can be
changeover, e.g., of the IEC 61850 client from one station supported.
control unit to the other due to a disturbance has no effects on
the communication connection to the control center, which Process visualization with SICAM SCC
remains on the first station control unit without interruption. In the operation of a substation, SICAM PAS is used for config-
Apart from a higher stability in unaffected communication uration purposes and as a powerful data concentrator.
connections, the redundancy changeover of affected compo- SICAM SCC serves as the process visualization system. Several
nents takes place within a very short time (depending on appli- independent SICAM SCC servers can be connected to one
cation and configuration, between 250 ms and max. 3 sec). SICAM PAS. Connection of redundant servers is also possible.
Adjustments during operation such as bay/telecontrol blocking, SICAM SCC supports the connection of several SICAM PAS sys-
switching authority, but also marking commands to the SoftPLC tems. In the signal lists, the original time stamps are logged in
for operational control of the automation functions, are kept ms resolution as they occur in the devices. With every signal, a
synchronous in both station control units during redundancy series of additional data is also presented to provide information
operation. The current adjustments are also valid after a redun- about causes (spontaneous, command), event sources (close
dancy changeover. SICAM SCC communicates simultaneously range, local, remote), etc. Besides process signals, command
with both redundant station control units. A redundant structure signals are also logged. IndustrialX controls are used to control
is also possible for process visualization with SICAM SCC and and monitor switchgear. These switching-device objects support
fault-record archiving with SICAM PQ Analyzer as shown in four different forms of presentation (IEC, DIN, SINAUT LSA,
fig. 6.3-15. SICAM) for circuit-breakers and disconnectors. It is also possible
to create bitmaps (defined for a specific project) to represent
Scope of information switching devices, and to link them to the objects. For informa-
The amount of information to be processed by SICAM PAS is tive visualization, not only nominal and spontaneous flashing
essentially determined by the following factors: are supported, but also the display of various device and com-
tȋComputer network concept (multiple-computer network or munication states (e.g., up-to-date / not up-to-date, feeder and
single-station system) telecontrol blocking, etc.). Measured values and switching
tȋPerformance data of the hardware used device states that are not continuously updated due to, e.g.,
tȋPerformance data of the network device or communication failure or feeder blocking, may be
tȋSize of the database (RDBMS) updated directly via the operation panel with SICAM SCC
tȋRate of change of values (fig. 6.3-16).
In conjunction with the SICAM PAS station unit, the switching SICAM SCC is based on SIMATIC WinCC, which has advanced to
devices can be controlled either directly or with “select before become both the industrial standard and the market leader in
operate”. When visualizing the process by single-line diagrams, Europe. It features:
topological coloring can be used. The WinCC add-on SIMATIC tȋMultilingual capability
Web navigator can be used for control and monitoring via the tȋAll operation and monitoring functions on board. These
Internet. SICAM Valpro can be used to evaluate measured and include not only the graphics system for plant displays and the
metered values. It not only allows a graphical and a tabular signaling and archiving system for alarms and measured
display of archived values, but also enables subsequent evalua- values, but also a reporting and logging system. Further
tion functions such as minimum, maximum and averages values advantages are integrated user administration, along with the
(on an hourly or daily basis). For protection devices connected granting and checking of access rights for configuration and
with the protocols IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-103 as well as runtime operations.
PROFIBUS FMS (SIPROTEC 4) or SINAUT LSA ILSA, fault record- tȋEasy and efficient configuration
ings can be retrieved and archived automatically. SICAM PQ Configuration is assisted by dialogs, wizards and extensive
Analyzer with its component Incident Explorer is used for man- libraries.
agement and evaluation of the fault recordings. tȋConsistently scalable, even via the Web
In conformity with requirements, the bandwidth ranges from
SICAM SCC V7.0 SP1 can also be used as a process visualization small single-user stations up to client/server solutions with
system for user stations on the Web as well as support of the server
tȋSICAM AK, TM, BC, EMIC and MIC redundancy.
tȋIEC 61850 devices (for example, SIPROTEC 4) tȋWinCC/Redundancy – increases system availability by
redundant WinCC stations or servers monitoring each other
SICAM SCC for SICAM AK, TM, BC, EMIC and MIC mutually, ensuring the operability of the system and enabling
For communication with SICAM AK, TM, BC, EMIC and MIC, the complete data acquisition.
protocol IEC 60870-5-104 or IEC 61850 can be used. Both tȋOpen standards for easy integration
SICAM TOOLBOX II V5.0 and SICAM SCC V7.0 SP1 support –ȋUsing any external tools, archived data can be accessed
exchange of configuration data. through a series of open interfaces (such as SQL and ODBC)
Overview of the operator control philosophy and A common feature of all views is that they have an Explorer
user interface window that shows the system configuration in a clearly
The SICAM PAS user interface is based on customary Windows arranged tree structure. As in the Windows Explorer, it is pos-
technology, which allows to navigate in the familiar Windows sible to open individual levels of this tree structure to work in
environment both when configuring the system and during them. Meanwhile, other levels can be closed to improve clarity.
ongoing operation. The system distinguishes between configu- Depending on the current navigation level and the chosen
ration and operation of a substation. In SICAM PAS, these two component, in the context menu (right mouse button)
tasks are firmly separated by two independent programs. SICAM PAS offers precisely those program functions that are
currently appropriate.
The SICAM PAS UI – configuration program (fig. 6.3-17) is used
to create and edit a project-specific configuration. To enhance Operation takes place through the necessary steps in the data
clarity, four views are distinguished: window on the right. Here, parameters can be set, information
selected and assignments defined to form a user-specific, process-
tȋConfiguration oriented system topology. The user interface is uncomplicated and
tȋMapping structured according to the task definition, so as to enable intuitive
tȋSystem topology working and to simplify changes. The user interface assists the
tȋDevice templates editing process by displaying parameter descriptions and messages
when incorrect parameters are entered. In the tabular views for
Power supply
Primary power supply
DC 24 – 60 V
AC/DC 110 – 230 V
Secondary power supply
without
DC 24 – 60 V
AC/DC 110 – 230 V no secondary power supply
CPU type
CPU module with single core CPU
(Celeron® M 440, 1.86GHz), 2 x 4GB CF, 2GB RAM, image SU V2 20, backup DVD
CPU module with dual core CPU
(Core Duo T2500, 2GHz), 2 x 4GB CF, 2GB RAM, image SU V2 20, backup DVD
CPU module with dual core CPU with RAID System
(Intel Core 2 Duo L7500 1.6GHz), 2 x 4GB CF, 4GB RAM, Image SU V2 20,
Backup DVD, incl. RAID controller and RAID system level 1 incl. 2x100GByte hard disks
I/O boards
None
One digital I/O module (32 binary contacts)
Two digital I/O modules (64 binary contacts)
PCI adapter
without PCI-adapter
with PCI-adapter
Optional extensions:
tȋExternal USB-DVD drive for image DVD
tȋExternal USB hard disk for backup
tȋUSB memory stick
tȋPCI adapter for up to 4 PCI cards
tȋCOM-port extension cards
tȋPROFIBUS card
tȋGPS / DCF 77 time signal receiver manufactured by Hopf
tȋUp to 64 binary I/O-contacts
6.3.5 Configuration Examples Several SICAM PAS full servers connected to a human-
machine interface (HMI)
Configuration for medium to large applications The example illustrates a SICAM SCC human-machine interface
If the subsgtation comprises 30 to 150 bay control units, (HMI) with 2 SICAM station units to which bay devices are
SICAM PAS and SICAM SCC must run on separate PCs. The connected. This configuration makes sense in cases where no
example below illustrates the connection of the bay control units spatially distributed human-machine interface and no failsafe
to a SICAM station unit (fig. 6.3-23). SICAM SCC are required (fig. 6.3-25).
6
Feeder devices
Feeder devices
Fig. 6.3-23: Connection of feeder devices to a SICAM station unit Fig. 6.3-25: SICAM SCC with several SICAM station units
Feeder devices
Feeder devices
Fig. 6.3-24: Connection of feeder devices in a distributed system Fig. 6.3-26: Redundant SICAM PAS in client / server configuration
Distributed system with full server and DIP tȋRedundant full servers
The example shows a distributed SICAM PAS system. It consists tȋRedundant SICAM SCCs implemented in server/client
of a full server and DIP, and communicates with a control center architecture
via TCP/IP. Bay control units and substations are connected to a tȋConnection of bay control units to 2 SICAM PAS stations
distributed system via Ethernet and serial interfaces (fig. 6.3-27).
Bay control units with 2 interfaces are required for the redun-
Redundant connection of bay control units and substations dant connection of bay control units. Alternatively, bay control
SICAM PAS supports the redundant connection of bay control units equipped with one interface can be connected redundantly
units and substations. The example illustrates the following via a splitter (fig. 6.3-28).
configuration:
Control center
Internet
SICAM SCC
Fig. 6.3-27: Example of a distributed SICAM PAS system with full server and DIPs
SICAM SCC
clients
Company network
TCP/IP
Redundant
SICAM SCC
servers
Fig. 6.3-28: SICAM PAS station bus configuration with redundant connection of the feeder devices and the redundant SICAM SCC station controller
6.3.6 SICAM AK, TM, BC, EMIC and MIC All components of the ACP family are using the same communi-
cation modules, and therefore they can use all available proto-
Versatile functionality and high flexibility are fundamental for a cols. In addition to standards like IEC 60870-5-101 / 103 / 104
modern remote control system. SICAM AK, TM, BC, EMIC and and IEC 61850 (client and / or server), also DNP 3.0 and Modbus
MIC adds comprehensive options for communication, automa- are available in addition to a lot of legacy and third-party proto-
tion and process interfaces. The different components of cols for connecting third-party devices.
SICAM AK, TM, BC, EMIC and MIC offer optimal scalability regard-
ing the number of interfaces and signals. Nevertheless these Another joint feature of all components is the integrated flash
components are all based on the same system architecture, the memory card, where all parameters and firmwares are stored. A
same technology, and are handled with the same engineering simple exchange of a component is now possible, just by
tool (SICAM TOOLBOX II). changing the memory card.
tȋSICAM AK is the large automation component for a flexible mix
of communication, automation and I / O. It offers optimal The SICAM TOOLBOX II offers all functions for an integrated,
support as master controller or RTU, gateway or front-end, seamless engineering of complete projects, and works with all
with local or distributed I / O. Versatile redundancy concepts components of SICAM AK, TM, BC, EMIC and MIC. It supports all
are another asset of these components. phases of an RTU or station automation project. Data exchange
tȋSICAM TM is the solution for compact applications. This with DIGSI and PAS UI means a single entry point for data engi-
component offers up to 4 communication interfaces plus neering avoiding multiple manual data inputs for a mixed con-
automation function and process interface per distributed figuration.
terminal modules. All modules are easily mounted to standard
DIN rails. The terminal modules can be distributed up to 200 m With SICAM AK, TM, BC, EMIC and MIC there is always enough
with fiber-optic cables. performance at hand: The modular multiprocessor concept
tȋSICAM BC is the ruggedized component for highest EMC and grows with every enhancement of the system. The distributed
direct process interface up to DC 220 V. High switching architecture and the principle of “evolutionary development”
capacity and direct interface for measurement transformers, cater for a future proof system with long lifetime expectation
plus expandability with TM modules provide flexible and high security of investment. SICAM AK, TM, BC, EMIC and
6 application in centralized and distributed configurations. Up to
3 communication interfaces and automation functions are
MIC carries the experience of more than 30 years of remote
control and automation; many references are proving the flex-
integrated. ible ways of application.
tȋSICAM MIC is a small RTU and offers either a serial interface
according to IEC 60870-5-101 or an Ethernet interface with Automation component SICAM AK
IEC 60870-5-104. Up to 8 terminal modules for I / O can be
connected. A simplified automation function and a Web server Longevity through continuity and innovation
for easy engineering are integrated. SICAM AK features high functionality and flexibility through the
tȋSICAM EMIC, the new smart automation system. Thanks to its implementation of innovative and reliable technologies, on the
node functionality with 3 interfaces,SICAM EMIC has many stable basis of a reliable product platform.
different potential applications. It can be used as an ordinary
telecontrol substation with any kind of communication to a
control center. If SICAM EMIC doesn’t offer adequate signal
scope, it can be connected additional. Freely programmable
application programs for local control functions complete the
all-round versatility of the SICAM EMIC.
For this, the system concept ACP (Automation, Control and Scalable redundancy:
Protection) creates the technological preconditions. Balanced tȋComponent redundancy
functionality permits the flexible combination of automation, tȋDoubling of processing / communication elements
telecontrol and communication tasks. Complemented with the
scalable performance and various redundancy configurations, an The intelligent terminal – SICAM TM, EMIC and MIC:
optimal adaptation to the respective requirements of the process tȋDirect connection of actuators and sensors with wire cross-
is achieved (fig. 6.3-29). sections up to 2.5 mm2
tȋCan be located remotely up to 200 m
SICAM AK is thus perfectly suitable for automation with inte- tȋBinary input / output also for DC 110 / 220 V
grated telecontrol technology as: tȋAssembly on 35 mm DIN rail
tȋTelecontrol substation or central device
tȋAutomation unit with autonomous functional groups Versatile communication capability
tȋData node, station control device, front-end or gateway With SICAM AK, a variety of media can be utilized for local and
tȋWith local or remote peripherals remote communication. (wire connections, FO, radio, dial-up
tȋFor rear panel installation or 19 inch assembly traffic, GSM, GPRS, WAN, LAN, field bus etc.)
SICAM AK – the forward-looking product Through the simple installation of serial interface modules, in
Versatile communication: total up to 66 communication interfaces are possible in one
tȋUp to 66 serial interfaces according to IEC 60870-5-101 / 103 SICAM AK, whereby a different individual protocol can be used
tȋLAN / WAN communication according to IEC 60870-5-104 for each interface.
tȋLAN communication according to IEC 61850
tȋVarious third-party protocols possible For standard communication protocols according to IEC 60870-
5-101 / 103 / 104 and IEC 61850 are implemented.
Easy engineering with SICAM TOOLBOX II:
tȋObject-oriented data model Besides the standard protocols there are also a variety of third-
tȋCreation of open-loop and closed-loop control application party protocols available (DNP 3.0, Modbus etc.).
programs according to IEC 61131-3
tȋAll engineering tasks can also be carried out remotely Simple process interfacing
6
In addition to the central acquisition and output of process
Plug and play for spare parts: signals within an SICAM AK mounting rack, it is possible to use
tȋStorage of parameters and firmware on a flash card SICAM TM, EMIC and MIC peripheral elements (fig. 6.3-30).
tȋSpare part exchange does not require additional loading with
SICAM TOOLBOX II An essential feature of the SICAM TM, EMIC and MIC peripheral
elements is the efficient and simple interfacing possibility of the
Open system architecture: process signals. This takes place on so-called I / O modules, which
tȋModular, open and technology-independent system structure are distinguished through a robust casing, a secure contact as
tȋSystem-consistent further development and therefore an well as solid electronics. The I / O modules are lined up in rows.
innovative and future-proof product The contact takes place during the process of latching together,
Fig. 6.3-29: SICAM AK Fig. 6.3-30: SICAM TM, EMIC and MIC peripheral elements
without any further manipulation. Thereby each module remains Consequently, with the exchange of modules, new loading is no
individually exchangeable. longer required, since new modules obtain all data from the
memory card. With the replacement of spare parts, plug and
A clearly arranged connection front with LEDs for the status play becomes a reality: No special tool is required, even loading
display ensures clarity locally. The structure of the terminals is no longer necessary.
enables a direct sensor / actuator wiring without using interme-
diate terminal blocks with wire cross-sections up to 2.5 mm2. Thereby, work during a service operation is reduced to a min-
Modules for binary inputs and outputs up to DC 220 V open imum.
further saving potentials at the interface level.
Open system architecture
Depending on the requirements, the I / O modules can be fitted The basis for this automation concept is a modular, open and
with either an electrical bus or an optical bus, through which the consequently technology-independent system architecture for
peripheral signals can be acquired as close as possible to the processing, communication and peripherals (multi-processor
point of origin. In this way, broad cabling can be reduced to a system, firmware).
minimum.
Standardized interfaces between the individual elements again
Easy engineering permit, even with further developments, the latest state of
An essential aspect in the overall economical consideration are technology to be implemented, without having to modify the
the costs that occur for the creation, maintenance and service. existing elements. In this way, a longevity of the product and
For this, the reliable SICAM TOOLBOX II is used. consequently investment security and continuity can be ensured
tȋObject orientation: (fig. 6.3-31).
The object orientation makes it possible to also utilize the
same characteristics of same-type primary-technology units Every board and every module on which a firmware can run,
and operational equipment (e.g., disconnectors, circuit- forms, together with the function-determining firmware, one
breakers, feeders etc.) for the configuration. The close system element.
coupling with the design tool ensures the consistent, uniform
6 documentation of the entire plant through to circuit diagram.
Through this, considerable rationalization results with
The adaptation to the specific requirements of the application is
achieved through the individual configuration and through the
engineering. loading of standard firmware and parameters. Within their
tȋOpen-loop and closed-loop control according to IEC 61131-3: defined limits, the parameters thereby not only influence the
Open-loop and closed-loop control application programs are behavior of the firmware functions, but also that of the hard-
created by means of CAEx plus according to IEC 61131-3, a ware functions. With that, for all module types, all mechanical
standard that is generally accepted and recognized in the parameter settings are omitted, such as e.g., the changing of
market. As a result, the training periods are reduced jumpers or loads, thus enabling not only the online change, but
considerably. also a consistent documentation of the set parameters by the
tȋAll engineering tasks can also be carried out remotely: SICAM TOOLBOX II as well as a simplified storage.
All engineering tasks, from the system diagnostic through to
the online test, can also be performed remotely with the System overview
SICAM TOOLBOX II. For this, a separate communication link Mechanics
between SICAM TOOLBOX II and SICAM AK is not necessary: Fig. 6.2-32 and fig. 6.2-33 show two types of basic mounting
Every available communication interface can be used. Using racks: module CM-2832 with 9 slots and module CM-2835 with
further automation units of SICAM TM, AK or BC, the 17 slots.
SICAM TOOLBOX II can be remotely positioned over an
arbitrary number of hierarchies. Module CM-2833 (not pictured here) is the expansion mounting
rack for up to 16 peripheral elements outside the basic
The access to the engineering data is fundamentally protected mounting rack.
by a password.
With the mechanics, value has been placed on flexibility and
Plug and play for spare parts easy handling. Consequently, the mounting rack is available for
All data of an automation unit – such as firmware and parame- rear panel installation or for 19“ (swing) frame installation.
ters – are stored non-volatile centrally on an exchangeable flash
card. With a restart of the automation unit, and also with Almost all necessary external connectors (e.g., communication,
a restart of individual modules, all necessary data are automati- peripherals, external periphery bus) can be connected with the
cally transferred from the flash card to all CPUs and modules. help of standard cables or prefabricated cables without any
additional tools (fig. 6.3-34, fig. 6.3-35, fig. 6.3-36).
Decoupled from
individual
“Protected“ area = Internal communication technology and
functionally
standardized
Autonomous
unit for
expansions and
renewals
– Interfaces
(process,
communication)
– Functions and
“Open“ area = Adaption to the current concepts
technical and economic demands – Technology
Fig. 6.3-32: CM-2832 – SICAM AK mounting rack with 9 slots Fig. 6.3-33: CM-2835 – SICAM AK mounting rack with 17 slots
Guide plate of
Seating frame Wall bracket
3
Hook 2
Unlocking lever
1
6 CP-2012
CP-2010
Master control element Processing and
comunication element
SIM0
SIM0
SIM1
X13
X11 SI3 (X3) X12
SI1 (X1)
X10 X11
SI2 (X2)
SI0 (X0) X10
SI1 (X1)
CM-2837
CM-2835
SI0 (X0)
Fig. 6.3-36: RJ45 connection technique for external Ax 1703 peripheral bus
SICAM AK
Processing and Communication
supply
supply
Power
Power
Master Control Element
Protocol element(s)
Protocol element(s)
Periphal element
Periphal element
Periphal element
Periphal element
Periphal element
Periphal element
element
optional
6
supply
supply
Power
optional Power
optional
Process
PE PE PE PE
2 2 2 2
Peripheral elements outside the basic mounting rack
Peripheral elements may be PE PE PE PE
tȋinstalled in the basic mounting rack (as shown above), and / or 16 16 16 16
supply
Power
Power
Master control element
Functions of the master control element:
Protocol element(s)
Protocol element(s)
Periphal element
Periphal element
Periphal element
Periphal element
Periphal element
Periphal element
tȋCommunication with installed peripheral elements via the
6 serial Ax 1703 peripheral bus
tȋOpen / closed-loop control function with a freely programmable
optional
element
supply
Power
Power
diagram technology
tȋCommunication with other automation units via protocol
optional optional
elements installable on the master control element (up to 2
interfaces)
tȋCentral coordinating element for all system services and all
Process
internal and overlapping concepts, such as e.g.,
–ȋData flow control
–ȋMonitoring functions Fig. 6.3-39: Master control element
–ȋDiagnostic
–ȋTime management and time synchronization via minute
pulse, serial time signal (DCF77 / GPS-receiver), serial
communication link, NTP – Server over LAN / WAN
–ȋLocal SICAM TOOLBOX II connection
–ȋStorage of parameters and firmware on a flash card
supply
Power
Power
Master control element
user program according to IEC 61131-3, e.g., in function
Protocol element(s)
Protocol element(s)
Periphal element
Periphal element
Periphal element
Periphal element
Periphal element
Periphal element
diagram technology
element
tȋCommunication with other automation units via protocol optional
supply
supply
Power
Power
Peripheral element
Peripheral elements, as shown in fig. 6.3-41, are used for optional optional
6
SICAM AK SICAM AK
Progessing and communication
Processing and communication
supply
supply
supply
Master control element
Power
Power
Power
Protocol element(s)
Protocol element(s)
Protocol element(s)
Protocol element(s)
Periphal element
Periphal element
Periphal element
Periphal element
Periphal element
Periphal element
Periphal element
Periphal element
Periphal element
Periphal element
Periphal element
Periphal element
element
element
optional optional
supply
supply
supply
supply
Power
Power
Power
Power
optional optional optional optional
Process Process
SICAM AK
SICAM TM
supply
supply
Peripherial element
Power
Power
Periphal element
Periphal element
Periphal element
Periphal element
Periphal element
optional
supply
supply
Power
Power
Process
optional optional
Process
The peripheral elements deliver over the Ax 1703 peripheral bus System elements in SICAM AK
tȋperiodical information, Master control element
tȋmessages with process information, and Module Designation
tȋmessages with system information (e.g., diagnostic CP-2010 / CPC25 System functions, processing
information) and communication
Power supply
SICAM AK The mounting racks CM-2832, CM-2835 and CM-2833 are to be
equipped with 80W power supplies of the following types:
Processing and communication
Designation
supply
supply
Power
Power
Master control element
Periphal element
Periphal element
Periphal element
Periphal element
Periphal element
Periphal element
(DC 24 – 60 V)
element
optional
PS-5622 Power supply
(DC 110 – 220 V, AC 230 V)
supply
supply
Power
Power
optional optional
Process
1…4
1 2 3 4 5 6
Peripheral elements
Ax 1703 peripheral
bus (electrical) 16
Communication 16 Mbps patch cable,
with other length up to 3 m
automation units
Ax 1703 peripheral
bus (electrical)
16 Mbps USB cable, 15
length up to 3 m
max. 8 I/O-modules
Note: PE-6410
all in all up to 16 peripheral elements PS-663x
Fig. 6.3-43: SICAM TM system architecture: connection of up to 16 peripheral elements via bus interface (electrical) 6
Function packages
Telecontrol System services
The function package “Telecontrol” includes the following “System Services” is a function package providing general
functions: functions and basic services in an automation unit, which are
tȋProcess input and output on peripheral elements required by other function packages:
tȋCommunication with other automation units tȋCommunication with the engineering system
tȋProtocol elements tȋData flow control
tȋAutomatic data flow routing tȋAddressing
tȋData storage tȋTime management
tȋPriority control tȋGeneral interrogation
tȋRedundant communication routes tȋSelf-test
tȋCommunication within the automation unit tȋFailure
tȋProtocol element control and return information tȋDiagnostic and signaling
tȋAutonomy
Automation
The function package “Automation” includes the following System concept SICAM TM
functions: SICAM TM is designed especially for easy installation and pow-
tȋProcess input and output on peripheral elements erful application. Due to consequent development it fits opti-
tȋTelecontrol functions mally both for automation and telecontrol systems (fig. 6.3-43).
–ȋTreatment for commands according to
IEC 60870-5-101 / 104 An essential feature of SICAM TM is its efficient and simple way
–ȋChange monitoring and generation of messages of interfacing to the process signals. This is accomplished by
with time tag so-called I / O modules boasting a robust housing, reliable con-
tȋOpen / Closed-loop control function tacting, and sound electronics. The I / O modules are arranged
side-by-side. Contact between them is established as soon as
they engage with one another, without requiring any further
manual intervention. Even so, it is still possible to replace every
Product overview
Master control unit IEC 60870-5-104
Module Designation
CP-6014 / CPCX65 Processing and communication
6 DI-6101
(2 × 8, DC 24-60 V)
Binary input
(2×8, DC 110 / 220 V)
IEC 60870-5-101
unbalanced master
of the SICAM Ax,
SICAM TM, AK, BC Master station
DO-6200 Binary output transistor
(2 × 8, DC 24-60 V) or third party
CP-6020 CP-6020
6
CP-6020 CP-6020
Fig. 6.3-48: SICAM MIC configuration – simple dial-up traffic Fig. 6.3-49: SICAM MIC configuration – multi-master dial-up traffic
The master control modules are: tȋClosed-loop control for arc suppression coils (option)
tȋCP-6020 master control module (V.28 / 8 modules) tȋOperation cycle counter
tȋCP-6040 master control module (ET10TX / V.28 / 8 modules) tȋCalculation of r.m.s. values of currents and voltages, active
and reactive power
Configuration
The following figures show the configurations of multi-point Local control panel for feeder operation
traffic (fig. 6.3-47), of dial-up traffic (fig. 6.3-48), of multimaster The bay control unit comes in two mechanical sizes (fig. 6.3-53):
dial-up traffic (fig. 6.3-49), of LAN / WAN (fig. 6.3-50) and of SICAM BC is designed for compact feeders (typical in distribu-
GPRS (fig. 6.3-51). tion); SICAM BC is the modular version for larger amounts of I / O
(typical in transmission).
Bay control units
The Bay Control Unit (BCU) is the linking member between the Both versions are based on the same system architecture and
station control level and the primary system, and is integrated in use the same modules. They are ruggedised for use as near as
the feeder-related local control cubicle. possible to the primary equipment featuring the highest EMC
and a broad temperature range, and the I / O-modules are
It is therefore designed for rough electric and thermal ambient designed for direct interfacing of all signals from the process
conditions and is based on the SICAM BC bay controller. without any interposing level (e.g., interposing relays, mea-
suring transducers, etc.). This means a peripheral voltage of up
The bay control unit acquires all feeder-relevant process data to DC 220 V or direct interfacing of transformers with 1 A to 6 A
and time tags them at a resolution of 1 ms. All feeder related or AC 110 / 220 V.
functions are executed autonomous in the bay control unit:
tȋInterlocking Architecture of SICAM BC
tȋSynchrocheck A SICAM BC forms an automation unit of the SICAM system
tȋAutomatic voltage regulation by control of transformer onload family and consists of the following elements:
tap changer (option)
Router Corporate
network
Internet
s
Base Packet
station
controller
Router
(BSC) Tele
p hon Central station
e ca
ll s
PSTN
Network
Master station
Substation controller (MSC)
General features
tȋPower supply is available in DC 110–220 V / AC 230 V (80 W) or
DC 24–60 V (80 W) and a second power supply can be added
for redundancy
tȋThe signal acquisition has a 1 ms resolution of real-time
stamping.
As shown in the picture, the bay control units are designed for
rough electric and thermal environments.
Supply
Power
Master Control Element
Processing Element
Periphal Element
Periphal Element
Operation and Display Panel
combined both with the compact and the modular version of the
bay controller. It can be directly attached to the SICAM BC, or be
used separated with only two connecting cables (up to 3 m). The
integrated and divided frame allows for either surface mounting,
Supply
without the need for a big cut-out in the door, or for flush Power
Element
Element
Periphal
Periphal
6.3.7 SICAM EMIC – a Member of the Thanks to its node functionality, SICAM EMIC has many different
potential applications. SICAM EMIC can be used as an ordinary
Proven SICAM Family
telecontrol substation with any kind of communication to a
With growing pressure on costs in virtually all processes, there is control center. If SICAM EMIC doesn’t offer adequate signal
an increasing need to also automate smaller stations to make scope, additional SICAM EMIC systems can be connected. Freely
better and more reliable use of existing equipment. Modern, programmable application programs for local control functions
high-performance automation systems allow the integration of complete the all-round versatility of the SICAM EMIC.
smaller stations to provide universal and reliable management of
complex processes. But smaller stations are also being equipped Highly flexible options for communication
with greater functionality because of the increased demand for to the control center
more information. tȋMulti-point traffic
–ȋExternal data transmission equipment –can be connected
From straightforward monitoring activities to control functions via the V.28 interface for multi-point traffic transmission.
and the integration of additional equipment, modern systems tȋDial-up traffic
need to offer a wide range of functionality. –ȋA wide range of connection-oriented trans-–mission media
(analog, ISDN, GSM, TETRA) are supported as standard for
Flexible use of SICAM EMIC dial-up traffic as well.
As the logical consequence of these demands, SICAM EMIC tȋLAN/WAN
(Terminal Module SICAM enhanced microcontrol) represents the –ȋIEC 60870-5-104/DNPi communication based on Ethernet
expansion of the provenproduct SICAM MIC. SICAM EMIC is a TCP/IP is used for communication via LAN/WAN networks.
low-cost, flexible and modular telecontrol station, and is part of
the proven SICAM AK, TM, BC, EMIC and MIC automation family. SICAM EMIC – the system in detail
The hardware consists of a master control element and various Functions of the master control element:
I/O modules, and is designed for DIN railmounting. The proven tȋCentral processing functions
I/O modules can be used and fitted on all products in the tȋStoring of the parameters and the firmware on a flash card
SICAM AK, TM, BC, EMIC and MIC family. tȋInterfacing and supplying of the I/O modules
6 The master control element is used for interfacing and supplying
tȋ3 communication interfaces, with different individual
communication protocols (IEC 60870-5-101, 103, 104,
the I/O modules and provides three communication interfaces Modbus, DNP 3.0, other protocols on request)
(1 × Ethernet and 2 × serial) to meet a wide range of require-
ments. Complete flexibility is ensured here as well, becausedif-
ferent communication protocols can be allocatedfreely. The
option of automation functions roundsout the range of function-
ality of the SICAM EMIC.
Control system
IEC 60870-5-104
... … ...
e.g. Modbus
SICAM EMIC
IEC 60870-5-103 /
...
IEC 60870-5-101
IEC 60870-5-103
IED
Modbus
...
SICAM EMIC
...
...
6.4 Power Quality and tioning as required even when small disturbances occur. In
practice, the voltage can never be perfect.
Measurements
Electrical supply is one of the most essential basic services
supporting an industrial society. Electricity consumers require
6.4.1 Introduction this basic service:
tȋTo be available all the time (i.e. a high level of reliability)
tȋTo enable all consumers’ electrical equipment to work safely
Power quality and satisfactorily (i.e. a high level of power quality).
To avoid the high cost of equipment failures, all customers must Everybody is now aware of the effects of poor power quality but
6 make sure that they obtain an electricity supply of satisfactory
quality, and that their electrical equipment is capable of func-
few really have it under control. The levels of power quality
disturbances need to be monitored weekly, sometimes even
Vo
lt ag
ed
ist
ur
ba
nc
es
Cu
rre
nt
dis
tu
rb
an
ce
s
Fig. 6.4-1: Power quality monitoring provides value to everyone – to the local utility, to the consumer, to the local economy and to the
environment
– Harmonic
– Reactive power
– Flicker
– Unbalance
– Harmonic
predistortion
– Voltage dips/swells
– Voltage variations
– Interruption
Fig. 6.4-2: Utility and industries, both are responsible for voltage quality
three minutes
power in a specific area and maintain power to your area t-PTTPGDPNQVUFSDPOUSPMMFS
Momentary interruptions lasting t"DDJEFOUT
BDUTPGOBUVSF
FUD memory
0 0.1 0.2 time (s) 0.4 0.5
from a half second to 3 seconds t'VTFT
BDUJPOTCZBQSPUFDUJPO t1SPEVDUJPOMPTTFTPSEBNBHF
Temporary interruptions lasting function, e.g. automatic recloser
from 3 seconds to 1 minute cycle
-POHUFSNJOUFSSVQUJPOTMBTUJOH
longer than 1 minute
short voltage dip Voltage dip / sag or swell: t4UBSUVQPSTIVUEPXOPGWFSZ t.FNPSZMPTT
EBUBFSSPST
EJNPS
Any short-term (half cycle to large item of consumer bright lights, shrinking display
Voltage signal
6
reduced voltage level
Variation in the voltage level above change due to normal changing due to undervoltage or even
Voltage signal
or below the nominal voltage under load situations overheating and / or damage to
normal operating conditions equipment due to overvoltage
0 0.1 0.2 time (s) 0.4 0.5
t3FEVDFEFGmDJFODZPSMJGFPG
electrical equipment
Transients
Transient: t6UJMJUZTXJUDIJOHPQFSBUJPOT
t1SPDFTTJOHFSSPST
A transient is a sudden change in starting and stopping heavy t%BUBMPTT
voltage up to several thousand equipment, elevators, welding t-PDLVQPGTFOTJUJWFFRVJQNFOU
volts. It may be of the impulsive or equipment static discharges, and t#VSOFEDJSDVJUCPBSET
oscillatory type (also termed lightning
impulse, surge, or spike)
Notch:
This is a disturbance of opposite
polarity from the waveform
PQ
Description Hardware Measurements
application
6
System
System
improvement
Project Defining PQ installation Start
Evaluation and/or
phases objectives and measuring
counter-
configuration
measures
Standards are different, there are also many other regional or national
The purpose of power quality indexes and measurement objec- recommendations, mainly described in Grid Codes, defining
UJWFTJTUPDIBSBDUFSJ[FQPXFSTZTUFNEJTUVSCBODFMFWFMT4VDI specific or adapted limit values.
indexes may be defined as “voltage characteristics” and may be
stipulated in a Grid Code that applies to electrical system inter- These local standards are normally the result of practical voltage
faces. Power quality Grid Codes make use of existing standards quality measurement campaigns or the system experience,
or guidelines defining voltage and current indexes to be applied which are mostly acquired through a permanent and deep
to interfaces in low, medium, or high-voltage systems, for electrical system behavior know-how. Measuring according to
example, EN 50160. This standard defines and describes the EN 50160 is, however, only part of the power quality measure-
main characteristics of the voltage at the system operator´s ment process. Another important standard for power quality
TVQQMZUFSNJOBMTJOQVCMJD-7BOE.7QPXFSEJTUSJCVUJPOTZTUFNT measurement is IEC 61000-4-30, which defines the measure-
Indexes for HV-EHV will also be described in the new edition of ment methodology.
&/4JODFFMFDUSJDBMTZTUFNTBNPOHSFHJPOTBOEDPVOUSJFT
IEC 61000-4-30
Measurement of voltage quality
Fig. 6.4-4: Overview of international and national standards for Fig. 6.4-5: Illustration of a voltage dip and a short supply
power quality interruption, classified according to EN 50160; VN
– nominal voltage of the supply system (r.m.s.), VA –
amplitude of the supply voltage, V(r.m.s.) – the actual r.m.s.
value of the supply voltage
6 Voltage magnitude
variations
3BQJEWPMUBHFDIBOHFT
-7
.7GPSPGXFFL
NFBO
minutes r.m.s. values (fig. 6.4-5)
-7OPSNBMJOGSFRVFOUMZPlt ≤ 1 for
7
11
5
3.5
9
15
1.5
0.5
4
6 … 24
1
0.5
95 % of week
MV: 4 % normal 6 % infrequently Plt ≤ 1 for 13 3 21 0.5
95 % of week 17 2
4VQQMZWPMUBHFEJQT .BKPSJUZEVSBUJPOT
EFQUI-PDBMMZ 19 1.5
MJNJUFEEJQTDBVTFECZMPBETXJUDIJOHPO-7
10 – 50 %, MV: 10 – 15 % 23 1.5
4*$".1JTBWBJMBCMFXJUINPVOUJOHEJNFOTJPOPGNN§
mm and can be ordered with or without display.
L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3
W B2 B1
N/- N/+
DC: 24-250 V
AC:100-230 V
L1 k l
L2 k l
RS485
L3 k l Master
N station
PE RS232
Parameterization
Other
SICAM P SICAM P SICAM P SICAM P SICAM P
Application field
The input modules can be used for acquisition, display and devices
further processing of external signals with a measurement range Device without
display
PGoN"%$
Fig. 6.4-10: SICAM P with PROFIBUS-DP, MODUBS and
Measured values can be shown together with their units on the IEC 60870-5-103
display. Transmission of the current status of a measured signal
UPBDFOUSBMNBTUFSTUBUJPOWJB130'*#64%17
.0%#64
356"4$**PS*&$JTBMTPQPTTJCMF 'JHTIPXTBOFYBNQMFPGFYUFOEFE*0GPSWBSJPVTBQQMJDB-
tions.
In addition, mean values of all external analog channels as well
as states of digital channels can be recorded and saved into the Application example (fig. 6.4-10)
memory. 4*$".1BTBQBOFMNPVOUFEPSTOBQPONPVOUFEEFWJDFGPSVTF
on a process bus.
All recorded quantities and binary state information can be “read
PVUwBOEFWBMVBUFEXJUIUIFDPOmHVSBUJPOTPGUXBSF4*$".1 /FUXPSLMJOLJOHJTQPTTJCMFXJUIUIFJOUFHSBUFE34QPSUXJUI
Manager. UIFTUBOEBSE130'*#64%1BOE.0%#64356"4$**DPNNVOJDB-
UJPOQSPUPDPM'VSUIFSNPSF
JUJTBMTPQPTTJCMFUPJOUFHSBUF
0VUQVUNPEVMFTDBOCFVTFEGPSDPOWFSTJPOPGBOZFMFDUSJDBM 4*$".1JOUPDPNNVOJDBUJPOOFUXPSLTXJUI*&$
RVBOUJUZ DVSSFOU
WPMUBHF
FUD
JOUPBooN"%$PVUQVU BTTUBOEBSEQSPUPDPM5IBUBMMPXTTFWFSBM4*$".1NFBTVSFE
signal, generation of impulses for metering, indication of limit parameters to be indicated, evaluated and processed at a central
value violations, as well as for switching operations. master station.
Device type
tȋTop-hat rail mounted device
tȋ1MBTUJDDBTFNN§NN§NN
§§JODI 8§)§%
tȋ%FHSFFPGQSPUFDUJPO*1
Fig. 6.4-12: SICAM T electrical measurement transducer
Input and output circuits
tȋ4 inputs for alternating voltage measurements
tȋ3 inputs for alternating current measurements up to 10 A tȋActive, reactive and apparent power
continuous tȋActive, reactive and apparent energy
tȋPQUJPOBM%$BOBMPHPVUQVUTGSFFMZDPOmHVSBCMF tȋPower frequency
–ȋ%JSFDUDVSSFOUTN"UPN"
N"UPN" tȋPhase angle
and –20 mA to 20 mA tȋPower factor and active power factor
–ȋ% JSFDUWPMUBHFT7UP7BOEo7UP7 tȋVoltage and current unbalance
tȋindividually programmable binary outputs. –ȋMean value of the 3 phase voltages: Vavg
6 Signalization LEDs
–ȋMean value of the 3 phase currents: Iavg
V, I V, I V, I
Alarms, measurements
and indications
Ethernet/MODBUS TCP or
Serial: MODBUS RTU or IEC 60870-5-103 (optional)
IEC 61850 (7KG9662)
Main features
tȋ%FTJHODPNQBDUBOESPCVTUGPSnFYJCMFBQQMJDBUJPOJO
industrial and utility environments
tȋConnections in 1-phase systems, in 3-wire and 4-wire systems
tȋApplications: flexible for power utilities, industrial and
commercial sectors applications
tȋMeasurements: up to 60 measured or calculated values
available
tȋ5FNQFSBUVSFSBOHFo $UP $oUP '
6
tȋHigh accuracy: typically 0.1 % for voltage and current at rated
input IEC 60688, and 0,2s acc. to IEC 62053-21
tȋHigh EMC immunity: according to standards EN 61000-6-2 and
EN 61000-6-4 for the EMC directives, and with the standard
EN 61010-1 for the low-voltage directive
tȋ6-$FSUmDBUJPO5IJTQSPEVDUJT6-DFSUJmFEUP4UBOEBSE
6-
8JUI4*$".2
UIFRVBMJUZPGUIFQPXFSTVQQMZTZTUFNDBOCF
continuously monitored. This can be based on the quality criteria
defined in the European electricity supply system quality stan-
dard EN 50160 or other assessment criteria. Moreover, data that
are above or below the defined threshold values are stored and
can thus be used for a meaningful overall analysis. It provides
information that allows to see the whole electrical healthy of the
power system! Fig. 6.4-15: SICAM Q80 – the quality recorder
Features
tȋ4VJUBCMFGPSNPOJUPSJOHTJOHMFQIBTF
BOEXJSFQPXFS Central 1 Central 2
systems (up to 1,000 Vrms)
tȋ4 voltage, 4 current, or 8 voltage measuring channels
tȋ4UBOEBSECJOBSZJOQVUT
CJOBSZPVUQVUT
tȋ4BNQMJOHSBUFL)[GPSOFUXPSLBOBMZTJT
tȋMeasurement accuracy 0.1 % of the range
tȋHigh local storage capability: removable compact flash
TUBOEBSEEFMJWFSZ(#
NTP synchronization
tȋEnhanced data compression process (power quality data)
Ethernet
tȋAutomatic data transfer
tȋAutomatic comparison and reporting of the power quality
profile according to EN 50160 or your local standards Substation 1 Substation 2
tȋAutomatic notification in case of a fault or violations by e-mail,
Ethernet Ethernet
4.4
BOEGBY
tȋExport functions
tȋEthernet and modem communication interfaces for
parameterization, remote monitoring and polling
tȋ(14%$'*3*(#BOE/51GPSTZODISPOJ[BUJPO
tȋNetwork trigger system GPS synchronization GPS synchronization
tȋ4JNQMFPQFSBUJPO
DPNQBDUBOESPCVTUEFTJHO
Function overview
tȋ*OUFHSBUJPOUP4*1305&$GBNJMZ
–ȋConsistent HW concept
–ȋVariety of extension modules
–ȋ%*(4*BTDPOmHVSBUJPOUPPM Fig. 6.4-17: Generator and motor protection device 7KE85
–ȋChoice of functionality via functional points
tȋ%JTUVSCBODFSFDPSEFSDMBTT4GPSBQQMJDBUJPOTJOTVCTUBUJPOTBU
MV / HV / EHV level and in power plants
–ȋ§'BTU4DBOSFDPSEFS
–ȋ§4MPX4DBOSFDPSEFS
–ȋ§$POUJOVPVTSFDPSEFS
tȋ1PXFSRVBMJUZSFDPSEFSDMBTT4BDDPSEJOHUP&/GPS
analysis and recording / archiving of power quality problems of
all power applications
6 tȋEvent recorder for binary signals for observation of the status
of various primary components like circuit-breakers,
disconnectors, etc.
tȋ1.6BDDPSEJOHUP*&&&$
tȋCommunication with IEC 61850
tȋ4BNQMJOHGSFRVFODJFTQSPHSBNNBCMFCFUXFFOL)[BOE,)[
tȋ5JNFTZODISPOJ[BUJPOWJB*3*(#%$'4/51
tȋInternal mass storage:
–ȋ (#ZUFSJOHCVGGFS
–ȋ) FBMUINPOJUPSJOH-PTTMFTTEBUBDPNQSFTTJPO
tȋ'MFYJCMFSPVUJOH Fig. 6.4-18: Expansion module
–ȋAny assignment of a measured value to each recorder
–ȋ'SFFDPNCJOBUJPOPGNFBTVSJOHHSPVQTGPSQPXFSDBMDVMBUJPO
tȋ3FDPSEFERVBMJUZCJUT
–ȋQuality statement for each recorded value + monitoring of
DIBOOFMRVBMJUZJO4*(3"PS4*$".12"OBMZ[FS
tȋ3FDPSEJOHPGBOEUSJHHFSJOHPO(004&WBMVFT
tȋ$SFBUJOHPGnFYJCMFUSJHHFSDPOEJUJPOTXJUI$'$ $POUJOVPVT
'VODUJPO$IBSU
'JHTIPXTUIFQSJODJQMF"NFBTVSFNFOUPGDVSSFOUBOE V2
voltage with regard to amplitude and phase is performed with α2
1.6TPOTFMFDUFETVCTUBUJPOTPGUIFUSBOTNJTTJPOTZTUFN%VFUP
the high-precision time stamps assigned to these phasor quanti-
Substation 4
UJFTCZUIF1.6
UIFTFNFBTVSFEWBMVFTDBOCFEJTQMBZFE
together at a central analysis point. This provides a good over-
view of the condition of the system stability, and enables the
Substation 2
display of dynamic processes, e.g., power swings.
Substation 3
V3
α3
Region 1 Region 2
User interface 1 User interface 2
6
PDC 2
PDC 1
IEEE C37.118
Fig. 6.4-21: Connection of 3 Phasor Measurement Units with two Phasor Data Concentrators (PDCs) SIGUARD PDP
QB1 QB2
QA1 52
MP
V4
V-1ph 1 FG PMU
QB9
I1 V-1ph
MP V-3ph
I2
I-3ph 1
I3 I-3ph
I4
Phasor calculation for Comm.
V1 V and I IEEE C37.118
MP
V2
V-3ph 1
V3
6 Line
FG
MP
Function group
Measuring point
PMU Phasor Measurement Unit
Solution 2:
Solution 1:
Evaluated with:
Evaluated with:
SICAM PQS
SICAM PQS
PQ Analyzer
PQ Analyzer
7KE85
7KE85
Fig. 6.4-23: Monitoring the power feed Fig. 6.4-24: Monitoring the infeed
220 kV
Solution:
7KE85
Evaluated with:
SICAM PQS
PQ Analyzer 6
110 kV
7KE85
20 kV
Solution: 20 kV
7KE85
Evaluated with:
SICAM PQS
PQ Analyzer
400 V
SICAM PQ Analyzer
Extended
Complete documentation
SIPROTEC Others SICAM R 7KE85 Others SICAM Q80 SICAM P855 Others SICAM P/P850 SICAM T Others
6 Fig. 6.4-27: SICAM PQS – One System for all Power Quality Data
SICAM PQS fault record and power quality analysis software The power quality analysis is based on the applicable standards
5IF4*$".124TPGUXBSFQBDLBHFJTTVJUBCMFGPSVTFJOQFSTPOBM EN 50160 and IEC 61000 or on any user-defined Grid Code, and
DPNQVUFSTQSPWJEFEXJUIUIFPQFSBUJOHTZTUFNT.48JOEPXT uses an effective reporting tool that provides automatic informa-
It is used for remote transmission IEC61850, evaluation and tion about any deviations from the defined limit value.
archiving of the data received from 7KE85, digital protection
EFWJDFTBTXFMMBTGSPN4*$".2QPXFSRVBMJUZSFDPSEFST5IF The data transmission is preferably effected via WAN (Wide Area
program is used to setup the system configuration and to param- /FUXPSL
PSUFMFQIPOFOFUXPSL%FQFOEJOHPOUIFQPXFSTZTUFN
FUFSJ[FUIF,&BOE4*$".2VOJUTJOTUBMMFEJOUIFmFME*U XIJDIIBTUPCFNPOJUPSFEUIF4*$".124TZTUFNDBOCFBMJHOFE
enables fully-automated data transmission of all recorded data BDDPSEJOHMZ5IFNPEVMBSTUSVDUVSFPG4*$".124QFSNJUTUIFVTF
(fault records, events, mean values) from the acquisition units to of individual functional packages perfectly matched the require-
POFPSNPSFOFUXPSLFE4*$".124FWBMVBUJPOTUBUJPOTUIF NFOUT'VSUIFSNPSFUIF4*$".124DBOBMTPFBTJMZFYQBOEUP
received data can then be immediately displayed and evaluated create a station control system for combined applications. The
and benchmarked according to quality standards so called Grid program fully supports server / client system architecture.
Codes (fig. 6.4-27).
Highlights
4*$".124PGGFSTBWBSJFUZPGBQQMJDBUJPOTBOEFWBMVBUJPOUPPMT tȋVendor-neutral integration of fault recorders, protection
enabling the operator to carry out detailed fault record analysis devices and power quality equipment via standard protocols or
by using time diagrams with curve profiles, vector diagrams etc. $0.53"%&12%*'JNQPSU
The individual diagrams can, of course, be adjusted to individual tȋQuick overview of system quality through the chronological
requirements with the help of variable scaling and zoom func- display of the PQ index
tions. The different quantities measured can be immediately tȋ4FBNMFTTEPDVNFOUBUJPOPGQPXFSTZTUFNRVBMJUZ
calculated by marking a specific point in a diagram with the tȋAutomatic notification in case of violation of thresholds of a
cursor (impedance, reactance, active and reactive power, har- predefined Grid Code.
monics, peak value, r.m.s. value, symmetry, etc.). tȋAutomatic and precise fault location with parallel line
compensation
Additionally automatic distance to fault calculation and report tȋ4USVDUVSFE
DPOTJTUFOUBOEQFSNBOFOUEBUBEPDVNFOUBUJPO
generation will be executed after an event was recognized in the and archiving
power supply system. tȋAutomatic generation of cyclic power quality report
Incident explorer
Incident explorer is the central navigation interface of
4*$".124*UBDUTBTBDPDLQJUGPSUIFVTFSBOEEFMJWFSTBTUSVD-
tured overview of events throughout the whole system. It
visualizes the contents of the entire power quality archive with
fault records, fault locating reports, post-disturbance review
reports, power quality reports, and the ability for manual fault
location and manual import of comtrade files. The comtrade
viewer, which is part of the scope of delivery, makes it possible
to analyze the fault (fig. 6.4-28).
PQ inspector
The PQ inspector is a supplementary module that shows at a
glance the power quality condition of the entire network for a
selected period. This allows for quick identification of the origin
and type of violation. Another feature of PQ inspector is the
6
option of generating power quality reports through step-by-step
user prompting and on the basis (fig. 6.4-29).
PQ explorer
PQ explorer makes detailed analyses possible based on com-
paring the measured power quality data directly with the Grid
Codes. This comparison and the large number of different
diagrams available for displaying power quality data make it
possible to understand the nature and extent of a power quality
violation very quickly and to initiate adequate (fig. 6.4-30).
Report browser
3FQPSUTBSFDSFBUFEBVUPNBUJDBMMZBUXFFLMZ
NPOUIMZ
BOE
annual intervals and in the event of a violation of the Grid Code.
The report browser shows an overview of these automatically
generated reports in selected time ranges and the assessment of
the results. The individual reports can be opened directly in the
report browser (fig. 6.4-31).
C
Ca
e
bl
bl
e
Ca
B
Field 31 Field 32
Station 3
SDS
Internet / Intranet 6
Fig. 6.4-33: SICAM PQS V7.01 / SICAM Diamond V4.0 HF1 goes Web via SICAM Diamond
5IJTJTXIFSF4*(6"3%1%1 1IBTPS%BUB1SPDFTTPS
DPNFTJO -300
This system for network monitoring using synchrophasors helps
6 with fast appraisal of the current system situation. Power swings
and transients are indicated without delay to help the control
-400
center personnel fi nd the causes and take countermeasures. Fig. 6.4-32: Voltage vector of two measurement points in the
network
Highlights
tȋPhasor data processor per IEEE C37.118 standard
tȋ2 selectable monitoring modes: tȋ1PXFS4XJOH3FDPHOJUJPO
–ȋ0OMJOFNPEF "MMNFBTVSFEWBMVFTGSPN1.6TDBOCFEJTQMBZFEBOE
–ȋ0GnJOFNPEF BOBMZTJTPGQBTUFWFOUT
monitored with easy-to-confi gure phasor diagrams and time
tȋVector view or time chart view can be selected for all p hasors charts. Any power swings that occur are quickly and reliably
tȋCalculation and display of the power system status curve detected. The zone being monitored can be fl exibly adjusted
tȋ4ZTUFNNPOJUPSJOH
JODMDPNNVOJDBUJPOMJOLTBOE1.6TUBUVT to the current situation in terms of time, geography, and
tȋGeographic overview (based on Google Earth) content.
tȋ#BTJTGPSGBTUSFQPSUJOHBGUFSGBVMUT tȋEvaluation of the damping of power swings
tȋ'MFYJCMFBOBMZTJTXJUIGPSNVMBFEJUPSGPSDBMDVMBUJPOTCBTFEPO 6TJOHUIFGVODUJPOi1PXFS4XJOH3FDPHOJUJPOw BWBJMBCMFBT
measured values from Version V2.1), an incipient power swing is detected and
tȋ-JNJUWBMVFTUIBUDBOCFDIBOHFEPOMJOF UIFBQQSPQSJBUFEBNQJOHEFUFSNJOFE%FUFDUJPOPGBQPXFS
tȋ3VOTVOEFS8JOEPXT91BOE8JOEPXT
BTBQVSF1%$ swing and, if applicable, its insufficient or non-existent
XJUIPVUVTFSJOUFSGBDF
BMTPVOEFS8JOEPXT4FSWFS damping is signaled (alarm list).
tȋMonitoring of the load on transmission corridors often as necessary. This makes dynamic events transparent,
The voltage-stability curve is especially suitable for displaying BOESFQPSUTDBOCFRVJDLMZBOEQSFDJTFMZDPNQJMFE4JNQMZDPQZ
the instantaneous load on a transmission corridor. The UIFJOGPSNBUJWFEJBHSBNTGSPN4*(6"3%1%1JOUPZPVSSFQPSUT
currently measured operating point is shown on the work tȋAlarming on limit value violation with an alarm list and color
curve of the line (voltage as a function of the transmitted change in the geographic network overview map
power). In this way, the remaining reserve can be shown at This allows you to locate the position and cause of the
BOZUJNF5IJTSFRVJSFT1.6TBUCPUIFOETPGUIFMJOF disturbance quickly. This function is also available for
analyzing the archive.
tȋ%JTQMBZPGUIFQPXFSTZTUFNTUBUVTBTBDIBSBDUFSJTUJDWBMVFGPS
MlhM to NbgH
the stability of the power system
kV 500
%VFUPUIFDPOTUBOUBWBJMBCJMJUZPGUIFQPXFSTZTUFNTUBUVT
curve in the upper part of the screen, the operator is
400
constantly informed about trends in system dynamics and any
remaining reserves. This curve shows a weighted average of
300 the distances of all measured values, to their limit values.
200
100
0
-1.50 -1.00 -0.50 0.00 0.50 1.00 1.50 For further information:
GW www.siemens.com/powerquality
6
Fig. 6.4-33: Voltage stability curve
Po
we
rc
o nt
ro
ls
y ste
ms
Fig. 7.1-1: Power control systems – serving the complete energy chain from generation to load
As computers became more efficient in the 1970s, the switch- Functions of a network control system
gear in transmission networks was also gradually monitored and With the aid of network control systems, network operators can
automated with the aid of power system control technology. In obtain information from the network, usually in real time, which
response to the growing demand for network control systems, a they can then use as the basis for optimizing supervision and
number of companies began developing standardized systems control of the power supply system (fig. 7.1-3).
for these applications. The systems of that period can be called
the first generation of network control systems. The information transmitted by the station automation systems
via telecontrol must be collected and processed at a central
7
Because of the inadequate graphics capability of computer point. This function is performed by network control systems
terminals at that time, the master computers were used mainly that are installed at central locations, which are also known as
for remote monitoring of unmanned stations or for performing system control centers or control rooms.
Information
Operator Archiving Energy Energy data
Basic system Model SCADA
interface system accounting management
Manager
Applica- Multiple
Long-term Load
Power Schedul- Forecast tions Load Water energy
opera- Training manage-
plant ing appli- applica- for trans- manage- manage- resource
tions simulator ment
control cations tions mission ment gas ment optimiza-
planning electricity
networks tion
A distinction is made between Transmission Management Sys- displayed in order to keep the operator constantly informed
tems (TMS) and Distribution Management Systems (DMS) about the current operating state of the power supply system.
depending on the type of network being managed (transmission The operator can also store additional Information in the system
or distribution). Prior to deregulation, Energy Management or enter corrections for incorrectly reported Information or
Systems (EMS) were commonly used for the integrated manage- Information reported by phone into the system in order to
ment of generation and transmission. After deregulation, the complete the current operational network display (fig. 7.1-4).
unbundling of these two functions led to the creation of Genera-
tion Management Systems (GMS) for the independent manage- The main objective of preprocessing is to relieve the operator of
ment of the generating units. routine work and to supply the operator with essential Informa-
tion. The most important preprocessing Steps to mention are
All types of network control systems use the so-called SCADA limit value monitoring and alarm processing. These are abso-
system platform. Other applications may also use this platform. lutely essential, especially in the case of a fault incident, in order
The most important application components of a network control to enable the operator to identify the cause of the fault quickly
system and their application areas. and precisely and to take suitable countermeasures. The supply
state of the network elements is shown in color (topological
Spectrum Power™ offers you a comprehensive range of func- network coloring) in the process Images used for network moni-
tions for requirements in energy generation, network operations toring in order to provide better visualization of the current
management and communications, including: network state. As a result, the operator can see at a glance
tȋSupervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA). which network sections are supplied and can identify any inter-
tȋData input and data modeling: ruption in the supply at that particular moment.
–ȋData modeling compliant with IEC 61970 using the Common
Information Model (CIM) Another important function performed by the SCADA applica-
–ȋPowerful graphics editor tions is the so-called operational logbook, in which the process
–ȋParallel multi-station engineering with job management und history is shown chronologically in plain text. Entries in the oper-
undo functions ational logbook can be triggered by events in the power supply
–ȋPowerful online data activation system as well as by operator actions.
tȋExtensive communications options with communcation
protocols Switching measures in the power supply system, such as discon-
tȋMaintenance and outage management: necting and earthing a cable so that maintenance can be carried
–ȋFault report handling out without danger, generally require a sequence of individual
–ȋPlanning and monitoring commands. Because disconnection processes of this type have
7 –ȋFault correction
tȋFunctions for managing transmission networks:
to be checked for plausibility in advance, a switching sequence
management system in a control system can assist the operator
–ȋState estimation in drawing up and testing the required switching sequences.
–ȋLoad flow calculation or short circuit calculation During this process, the switching actions carried out in a simu-
–ȋContingency Analysis lation environment are recorded and can then be carried out
tȋFunctions for managing distribution networks: partly or fully automatically after positive testing and in the
–ȋFault isolation and restoration of power real-time environment.
–ȋLoad flow calculation
–ȋShort circuit calculation
–ȋExpert system
tȋFunctions for energy data management
–ȋSchedule management
–ȋForecasting
–ȋArchiving
–ȋReporting
tȋFunctions for demand side management
–ȋLoad management for electricity and gas
–ȋWater supply management
tȋFunctions for electric power producers
–ȋAutomatic generation control with load frequency control
–ȋScheduling applications
Real-time processing
SCADA applications are basic functions of the network control
system and provide a means of supervising and controlling the
power supply system. For this purpose, all information trans-
mitted from the network is collected, preprocessed and visually Fig. 7.1-4: Example for a network diagram of a power grid
Company
Archiving level
Another basic function of a control system is the processing of
archive data. Archive data processing is responsible for cyclical
collection, storage and aggregation. The archive allows different
functions for data collection that group together and further Participating Participating Participating
control area control area control area
process the data received from the real-time database. The
resulting values are stored in turn in the archive. However, Setpoint Setpoint Setpoint Setpoint Setpoint
archives often also provide additional functions such as gener-
ating a sliding average or determining maximum and minimum
Plant Plant
values in order to process the real-time values before they are Virtual Virtual
stored (fig. 7.1-5). Unit Unit plant Unit Unit Unit plant
Included
The calculation functions of an archive usually also comprise
7
Included
functions for implementing recurring calculations for time-
dependent data. For example, the four fundamental operations Fig. 7.1-6: Concept of hierarchical control
can be used on measurement values. These calculations can be
carried out at several levels, with the calculations at the lowest
level being completed before the calculations at the next higher costs, start-up and shutdown times and costs, and rate of power
level are started. A typical application is the totaling of power change) to produce a generation timetable for all power gener-
generation in its entirety and per power plant type, or the ating units. These timetables are then used as target for power
balancing of energy consumption according to regions under generation control (fig. 7.1-6).
different customer groups.
Note that to meet its load the power producer may opt to buy
Load forecasting additional energy
In order to ensure a reliable power supply, a forecast of energy tȋfrom a 3rd party within the same power system in which case
consumption (load) over time is required. Forecasting methods purchase contracts will be integrated to this optimization
working on the basis of a regression approach, Kalman filtering process, and/or
or neural networks are used for medium-term planning in the tȋfrom a 3rd party outside the same power system in which case
range of up to one year (load planning). For the short term, i.e. interconnection exchanges will be integrated to this
in the range of up to one week, pattern-based approach is optimization process.
typically used with options to adjust for actual load values, for
actual weather data, etc. Accordingly purchase and interchange schedules will then be
integrated to these timetables.
Power generation planning
A power producer company has typically a portfolio of different Power generation control and frequency regulation
power plants available for generating electrical power. Power The advantage that electric power has of being universally
generation planning is made whilst economically optimizing the usable is offset by the disadvantage that it is difficult to store.
generation of the power needed according to the load forecast, For this reason, the generation of electrical power must take
market price forecast and contracts, taking into account the place simultaneously with consumption. The frequency is used
characteristics of the different power plants in the portfolio (fuel as the means of measuring whether generation and consump-
tion are balanced. As long as generation and consumption are in The network state estimation is generally followed by a limit
equilibrium, the network frequency corresponds to the rated value monitoring process that compares the result of the esti-
frequency. If consumption exceeds the power generation, the mation with the operating limits of the individual operational
difference is covered from the kinetic energy of the rotating equipment in order to inform the operator about overloads or
generator or turbine masses. This drawing of energy, however, other limit violations in a timely fashion. The load flow solution
causes a reduction in the rotational speed and hence a drop in of the network state estimation is then used by other network
the frequency. In the reverse situation, in other words, in over- functions such as contingency analysis, short-circuit analysis or
generation, the difference is converted into kinetic energy, and optimal power flow.
the speed of rotation increases and so too does the frequency.
The contingency analysis carries out a, typically very large,
Because the system frequency is equal at all points in the number of “What if?” studies in which the failure of one or more
system, it can be easily used as the input quantity for controlling items of operational equipment is simulated. The results of these
the frequency of power systems. New setpoint values for the load flow calculations are then compared against the operational
individual generators are determined there from the measured equipment limits in order to assess the network security resulting
frequency deviation on the basis of technical and economic from an operational equipment failure. Typically a transmission
factors, and transmitted to the decentralized generator control network must remain secure against any single equipment failure
systems by means of telecontrol. If a power supply system is (n-1 criterion) and against selected double and other multiple
linked to adjacent power systems, the frequency as well as the equipment failures which will be all simulated by this contin-
power exchange with the adjoining systems must be monitored gency analysis application. In the case of security violations other
and controlled. This power exchange is taking place over a application tools can then be used to identify preventive or
number of interconnections for which the flow is telemetered. corrective solutions for such cases with violations.
A PI-type controller, based on a so-called Area Control Error The short-circuit analysis simulates different types, e.g. phase-
(ACE) updated, typically, every 2-10 seconds, is used to identify to-ground, of short-circuits at selected node points, typically
the net generation adjustment required to maintain the fre- busbars, of the network to calculate the resulting fault current
quency at or very near its nominal value. Contractual power and fault current contributions from neighboring branches and
exchanges can also be accounted for by the same controller such generating units. The results are then compared to the short-cir-
that deviations from the interchange schedules are minimized. cuit ratings of these near-the-fault equipments, i.e. breaker,
Accordingly, individual generation unit adjustments will be branch and/or generating unit, for possible violations. The
calculated and sent as correction signals to the generating units operator is informed about any limit violations so that suitable
participating to this regulation. This assignment process will also remedial action can be taken in a timely fashion.
7 account for the committed (economic or market) schedules of
the generating units and the reserve requirements. The set of The optimal power flow attempts to determine the settings of
applications supporting this process is referred to as Automatic control equipments, e.g. the tap of a transformer, to operate
Generation Control (AGC). optimally the power system according to some selected criterion
and subject to operating constraints such as equipment limits:
Transmission network management applications tȋNetwork loss minimization – network losses are directly
A transmission network is characterized by a meshed structure, related to the amount of reactive power flow and, therefore,
being mesh-operated and having a number of interconnections to the voltage profile throughout the network. The optimal
with one or more external networks. Most, if not all, of its power flow will minimize the transmission losses by
substations are automated. Typically most, if not all, of its determining the optimal settings of all voltage controls
switchgear statuses, busbar voltages and line flows are teleme- available, i.e. generators, transformers, capacitors, etc.
tered. The transmission network includes typically an extra high tȋGeneration cost minimization – The optimal power flow will
voltage (EHV) part and a high voltage (HV) part. The latter is minimize the total cost of generation by determining the
sometimes referred to as the sub-transmission network. Typi- optimal dispatch of each generating units. Today this criterion
cally, these measurements are in such a number that they is applied mostly in pre-deregulation or centralized markets.
provide more information than it is necessary to solve a power Variations of this criterion, e.g. involving deviations from
flow. However these measurements include errors due to the market set points, are also solved by optimal power flow in
accuracy of their measurement equipment and are even some- fully deregulated energy markets.
times outright wrong due to faulty measurement equipment tȋNetwork security – In the presence of equipment limit
and/or telecommunication. A least square approach for optimal violations the optimal power flow will determine corrective
estimation combined with a statistical analysis for bad measure- actions in terms of voltage control settings and/or real power
ment is applied to this problem to determine most accurately control settings to minimize equipment limit violations, i.e.
the state of the network. This function is commonly referred to the settings to restore the network to a secure state. Similarly,
as State Estimation. The estimation of the network state sup- the optimal power flow can also be used in normal operating
plies the operator with a complete load flow solution for super- conditions to increase the security of the network by
vising the network, including those sections of the network for increasing operational margins to limits, i.e. by enforcing
which no measurement values are available. tighter equipment limits. As increased security margin can be
operationally very expensive it is typically applied only to a performance of the utility towards its customers. Outage Man-
few selected critical equipments. agement with the support from analysis tools provides also for
the coordination of planned outages with the normal operation
The network calculation functions just described can also be of the network to ensure safety of the crews and continuity of
used to study network conditions different from actual condi- service to the customers.
tions. This study mode is used, for example, for checking a
planned switching operation. Other applications in distribution network belong to one of 2
domains: outage analysis or network analysis. Outage analysis
Distribution network management applications includes typically a fault location application destined at pro-
A distribution network is characterized by a mostly radial and viding the operator with the (visual and descriptive) location of
lightly meshed structure that is operated mostly radial. The the fault from real-time events using, for example, fault indica-
distribution network typically includes a medium voltage (MV) tors and distance relays, and a fault isolation/service restoration
part and a low voltage (LV) part and is interconnected to the application destined at providing the operator with a switching
transmission network at HV/MV substations. Depending upon sequence for isolating the fault and restoring service to cus-
countries few to all of the HV/MV substations are today auto- tomers. As the latter may encounter problems meeting all
mated. Under the Smart Grid pressure automation of the MV/LV network security constraints and/or restoring service to all
substations is now accelerating in Europe whilst automation of customers one or more switching sequences may be provided to
the MV feeders is now accelerating as well in the US. For these the operator.
reasons telemetry, e.g. that of power flows, is relatively limited
but rapidly increasing (fig. 7.1-7). Distribution network analysis applications are in many ways
similar to those for transmission network but with a different
Perhaps the most important application in distribution network emphasis due to the specific size, structure and mode of opera-
is the outage management that is responsible for the manage- tion of the distribution network. One resulting requirement is
ment of all planned and unplanned outages, the latter part the need to support balanced, unbalanced and/or unsymmetrical
being also referred to as Fault Management. Outage Manage- operation of the network. Due to the limited amount of available
ment integrates information from SCADA (events), metering measurements and their quality a distribution load flow with
(events), and customers (trouble calls) to infer one or more load scaling has been typically used to determine the state of
concurrent network outages. With the additional help of crews the network. However, as measurement availability increases,
and support from analysis tools, operators are then able to this approach is being progressively replaced by a state-estima-
promptly locate faults, isolate faults and restore service. Outage tion-like approach, e.g. load flow in combination with a least
Management will also provide calculation of performance square approach to optimally scale loads to the measurements,
indices that are typically required by the regulator to assess the to determine the state of the network. This latter function is 7
SCADA
DNA
The power system simulation component is responsible for the Telecontrol Control
accurate simulation of the dynamic behavior of the managed model Simulation data system
system, i.e. that of all its field equipments (generating units, (copy)
Process data
network and loads). The telemetry simulation component feeds
into the management system copy the simulated field data as
they would normally come from field equipments into the
control center.
electrical energy market, considerable importance is attched to Fully supplied customer Small customer Large customer
reliable, economical and neutral network operation. In order to
ensure such operation, a new regulatory element must be
introduced at the same time that other sections of the Fig. 7.1-10: Players in the deregulated energy market
The ISO/TSO does not have its own generation capability. There- Similarly, network planning necessary to support a properly
fore it must purchase regulating energy (active and reactive functioning energy market, i.e. one operating without conges-
power) from the power producers. Whilst many energy contracts tion, has become a real challenge between the ISO/TSO,
are established as bilateral contracts some of the energy can TransCos and these same market participants.
Last but not least, energy markets require transparency and use of these tools from the market participants whilst building
auditing. Many services that used to be bundled must now be all its own revenue through network access fees. Many new func-
separately identified and accounted for, detailed market compli- tions will also be required to support an open and fair access to
ance monitoring must be performed, and extensive archiving of the network to all market participants particularly when to
it all must be possible. manage network congestion (e.g. locational marginal pricing),
transfer capacity limitation (e.g. cross-border capacity auc-
Communication tioning), etc.
As extensive communication between the control center and
the various market participants such as power producers, To guarantee open and fair access to the network and equal
distribution companies, energy exchanges and traders will treatment between all market participants, many of these
increase greatly. Whilst some communication media have been functions will be using market mechanisms. This implies that
already in use in the control center, the use of open media such many of the solutions developed for these functions will be
as internet will expand significantly. And the many new market financially-driven whilst still addressing the same physical
interactions such as network access/capacity requests, ancillary problems and therefore will require a lot more integration with
market requests, etc. will require new solutions using this new back office functions such as, for example, settlement.
communication infrastructure. The OASIS system (Open Access
Same-Time Information system) for reserving transmission Network calculations
capacity in the United States is an example of an existing The basic functions, such as state estimator, load flow calcula-
system of this kind. tion, short-circuit calculation and contingency analysis, will not
normally be influenced by the restructuring. However an appli-
Fundamental changes to the properties of network cation such as optimal power flow considering availability/
control systems controllability of generation resources will be affected by the
Many of the ISO/TSO functions will no longer be self-serving but restructuring of the energy business. The total cost optimization
instead will be to serve the market participants towards open of generation is no longer the responsibility of the ISO/TSO but
and fair access to the network. Whilst many functions will that of each market participants. But the use of generation (MW
remain the same as those prior to unbundling, many of the tools and Volt/VAr) whether for security violation relief or network loss
needed by the ISO/TSO for executing them will rest with the reduction, still responsibilities of the ISO/TSO, will require the
market participants. The ISO/TSO will therefore need to buy the application to account for the cost of using (variable cost) that
Business
processes Enterprise service
Energy trading Customer service Invoicing
7
bus (SOA)
Meter data
Higher quality Network management Network information management
network operation
Company-wide
processes:
SCADA network DB SCADA SOA interface
monitoring and IT integration
operation Administration
Operation
Maintenance
Communication
Private and public systems
Field processes
Electricity
Gas
Water
District heating
This process (fig. 7.1-12 and fig. 7.1-13) is quite elaborate and
varies from market to market (e.g. with/without exchange,
single/multiple buyer, etc.) but with some constants with respect Price
to the part under the ISO/RTO responsibility. The ISO/TSO basic
process consists in collecting all market participants’ positions,
MW
i.e. their production plans, and validating it against network
security whilst satisfying load forecasts and planned outage
schedules. In the case network security is not satisfied market Offer vs Demand scheduling
signals are returned to the market participants for a new produc-
tion plan and this until network security is satisfied. In parallel or MW
concurrently the ISO/TSO will also request from the market Load Forecast
participants bids to provide power for ancillary services, e.g.
regulating power. These bids will be finalized upon a market
clearing at the market clearing price. Of course, these bids will
be integrated to the load serving energy schedules in the above
mentioned network security validation process. These market
mechanisms will be, typically, performed at least one day ahead
Offers Price
(day-ahead market), and one hour ahead (real-time market) of
real-time operation. This process will then be completed on the
next day by market settlement to address the actual energy
7 served.
Time
Power generation control
The full set of generation control applications still apply with,
however, some adjustments. Indeed target generation timetable Fig. 7.1-12: Fundamentals
is now defined by the market participants (see process descrip-
tion above). And the availability and limits of regulating power
and reserve power are now defined by the process where the Market particpants
ISO/TSO acquires access to and use of these resources from the Generation/load entites
market participants (see process description above). The produc- Energy offers
tion cost monitoring application is still sometimes used with
adjustment to account only for the regulating costs.
Energy
offers Quantities, Payments,
prices bills
Pre day Day ahead Real time Real time Billing and
ahead market market dispatch settlement
7.1.3 Common Information Model dard into the newest areas of smart grid, Advanced Metering
Infrastructure (AMI), and Home Area Network (HAN).
In order to survive in the deregulated energy market, power
companies today face the urgent task of optimizing their core CIM data model and packages
processes (fig. 7.1-14). This is the only way that they can survive The CIM data model describes the electrical network, the con-
in this competitive environment. One vital step here is to com- nected electrical components, the additional elements and the
bine the large number of autonomous IT systems into a homoge- data needed for network operation as well as the relations
neous IT landscape. However, conventional network control between these elements. The Unified Modeling Language
systems could only be integrated with considerable effort (UML), a standardized, object-oriented method that is supported
because they did not use a uniform data model standard. Net- by various software tools, is used as the descriptive language.
work control systems with a standardized source data based on CIM is used primarily to define a common language for
the Common Information Model (CIM), in accordance with exchanging information via direct interfaces or an integration
IEC 61970, and its extensions IEC 61968 (DMS) and IEC 62325 bus and for accessing data from various sources.
(energy market), offer the best basis for IT integration.
The CIM model is subdivided into packages such as basic ele-
CIM – key to interoperability and openness ments, topology, generation, load model, measurement values
The Common Information Model (CIM) defines a common and protection. The sole purpose of these packages is to make
language and data modeling with the object of simplifying the the model more transparent. Relations between specific types of
exchange of information between the participating systems and
applications via direct interfaces (fig. 7.1-15). The CIM was
adopted by IEC TC 57 and fast-tracked for international standard-
ization. In the United States, CIM is already stipulated by the
North American Reliability Council (NERC) for the exchange of
data between electricity supply companies. The standardized
CIM data model offers a very large number of advantages for
power suppliers and manufacturers:
tȋSimple data exchange
tȋStandardized CIM data remains stable, and data model
expansions are simple to implement
tȋAs a result, simpler, faster and less risky upgrading of energy
management systems, and if necessary, also migration to
systems of other manufacturers
tȋThe CIM application program interface creates an open
7
application interface. The aim is to use this to interconnect the
application packages of all kinds of different suppliers per
“Plug and Play” to create an EMS.
Fig. 7.1-14: The Common Information Model as key-enabler
CIM forms the basis for the definition of important standard for interoperability
interfaces to other IT systems. Siemens is an active member of
the standardization bodies and the working group in IEC TC 57,
playing a leading role in the further development and interna-
tional standardization of IEC 61970 and the Common Informa-
tion Model. Working group WG14 (IEC 61968 Standards) in the
TC57 is responsible for standardization of interfaces between
systems, especially for the power distribution area.
objects being modeled may extend beyond the boundaries of Power system resource Terminal
packages. 0…1 0…1 1…n
Value alias set Value to alias
0…1 0…1 1
Navigation
Topology model 0…n
0…n
0…n 0…n
1
1
The electrically conductive connections between the elements Measurement type Measurement 0…n
0…1
Control Control type
0…n 0…n 0…n
are defined via terminals and nodes (connectivity nodes). Every Current 0…n
Voltage 0…n
conductive element has one or more terminals. A terminal Frequency 1 1
Power factor Limit
connects the element, such as a generator, or one side of, for Active power
example, a circuit-breaker, to a node. A node can hold any
0…n 0…n
number of terminals and provides an impedance-free connection Limit set Limit
1
linking all elements connected to it. A topology processor can
determine the current network topology via these relations and Scada
CCLink
with the current states of the circuit-breakers. This topology Operator Quality 53850
model can also be used to describe gas, water, district heating Estimate
0…n 1
Measurement value source Measurement value Measurement value quality
and other networks for tasks such as modeling interconnected 1 1
control centers.
Service-oriented architecture
A modern network control system provides a service-oriented
architecture with standardized process, interface and communi-
cation specifications based on standards IEC 61968 and
IEC 61970. They form the basis for integrating the network
control system in the enterprise service environment of the
utility.
Energy Management
Fig. 7.1-20 shows an example of the integration of the network Enterprise application Enterprise application
control system in the IT network of the utility. It forms the basis integration ICCP integration ICCP
adapter adapter
for further planning with respect to the tasks required during IT
integration in the heterogeneous system landscapes of the CALISO 1 CALISO 1
utility. EMS EMS
7
CIM SCADA
Full Blown Setup
Data Model CC Segments
Symbol Number Description
5 Application and
Database Server DMZ
Client Alarm Server Handling Demilitarized Zone
(Remote Server 6 Communication
Access) Terminal Applications 2 ISDN (Alarming)
SCADA
Server n
6 UI Clients
4 Data
Control Center 2 Terminal Server
Historian
Communications
Corporate Network Admin Server Segment 5 Field
(Patch Management)
(Anti-Virus Updates) Control Centers Other Control
(Software Updates) Network Centers
UI Segment
ICCP
ICCP
Client
(Remote
Access) RTU EMS Substation
Communications Network Network
Rich Client 1 Thin Client 1 Segment
(Web Browser)
SSA
Enterprise RTU/GW
Applications
Mail Thin Client n
Rich Client n IEDs
(Web Browser) FEP
Fig. 7.1-20: Integration of the network control system in the IT network of the utility
SCADA applications
The SCADA applications group together all Spectrum Power func-
tions that are the minimum required to operate a network
control center. SCADA contains all functions for signaling,
measuring, controlling and monitoring (fig. 7.2-2).
Graphic editor
Automatic display builder
Type and instance editors
7
Remote CC & Multisite
Information
Model Data acquisition and control
CIM-RDF Management Generation and
Import/Export network applications
CIM-based
data model
Field resources
Reporting
System
Archive configuration
Fig. 7.2-3: The Spectrum PowerCC Information Model Management provides the functionality to enter
and maintain all power-system-related data
Job management
and wizard-based ASR Change log files for the different
database, both during commissioning of the system and after- technologies
log applications suites
After activation, newly entered data (e.g., status information, supported for the purpose of major or minor system updates and
analog values, station feeders, entire stations) can immediately the initial loading of the database (bulk loading). The following
be called up and displayed by the operator. functions are provided:
tȋSingle point for all data changes. Avoids the necessity of
Modifications that are recognized later as erroneous can be redundant data maintenance within multiple systems and
corrected by an UNDO function, because all modifications carried locations
out in the database are automatically recorded in a built-in tȋManual data entry or by incremental or bulk data import
database change log. Several levels of security-checking func-
tions provide an audit trail for all data changes in the database
tȋWorkflow oriented views on existing, modified or new data
tȋMultiple and simultaneous data entry sessions of different
7
and guarantee data consistency throughout the entire system. users on different Spectrum Power user interface consoles
tȋCIM-compliant data model allows easy incorporation of future
An integral part of the user interface is the graphics editor. This information types
editor is used to build and maintain the graphic displays used in tȋLifecycle management for planned data modifications
the system. tȋData structure version management and automatic data model
archiving facilities provides a history of changes as well as an
All single-line displays of the Spectrum Power control systems outlook to the planned model at a certain time in the future to
are world-maps. A worldmap is a two-dimensional (2D) graph- reflect the evolutionary nature of models
ical representation of a part of the real world. Each point in a tȋAutomatic change detection
worldmap is defined by a pair of unique X, Y coordinates (world tȋAutomatic and on request data validation provides information
coordinates). A worldmap is divided into a set of planes. Each consistency and secures the integrity of the model
plane covers the complete 2D area including the whole range of tȋActivation of data modifications without impact on Spectrum
the unique world coordinates. The first plane is visible over the Power runtime system
entire worldmap magnification range. Any other plane is visible tȋAutomatic Spectrum Power system wide dissemination of data
within a certain magnification range only, and contains different modifications
graphic representations of the technological (real) objects (e.g., tȋRole-based security features and audit records
plane 2 shows the substation state, plane 3 shows the summary tȋInstance-level access rights provide clear responsibilities within
state of the main feeders, plane 4 shows the single-switching the whole data model
states and so on). Planes can overlap magnification ranges of tȋDisplay (worldmap) editing and automatic generation of
other planes. displays based on the topology of the network models
tȋReport generation
IMM provides standardized interfaces for import and export of tȋHierarchical Model Management supports data maintenance
source data (fig. 7.2-4). Network data and facility data, as well and exchange of modified data in a system of hierarchically
as graphic data, can be imported or exported via these inter- arranged control centers in an automated way to prevent
faces. The ability to import large or small amounts of data is model inconsistencies between or within organizations
User interface
The user interface of the Spectrum Power control system pro-
vides powerful functions to ensure an overview at all times and
to permit fast and easy switching between views across all
worldmaps. The user interface allows the user to operate the
networks and power plant efficiently and permits the adminis-
trator to maintain the database and system parameters. The
system uses static and dynamic display elements to display the
network structure and network state. The user interface provides
means for guiding the operator to the workflows, e.g., by
checking the plausibility of switching actions after each oper-
ating step. Multi-screen operation using drag and drop supports
the operator in having a good overview of the power system and
in accessing the required equipment in a fast and comfortable
manner (fig. 7.2-5).
Fig. 7.2-5: Typical control room environment
Fig. 7.2-7: Samples for network displays of electrical, gas and water networks
Communication front end tȋResultant value formation from raw values using specific
The remote terminal interface of Spectrum Power is the Commu- characteristics
nication Front End (CFE). It is part of the control center system tȋRenewal check of cyclically transmitted values
and communicates with the other Subsystems of a Spectrum tȋInformation type conversion for raised/cleared indication and
Power control system via the local area network (LAN). CFE has transient indications
direct access to the Remote Terminal Units (RTU) of various tȋTime processing and time synchronization. The CFE server
manufacturers. The control center system is connected to the regularly receives the absolute time. The substations are
substations or power stations through these RTUs, which synchronized via time signal transmitters or by protocol
transmit process data of the power supply system. The data is specific synchronization telegrams. All information is kept
preprocessed by the CFE, which exchanges data with the RTU, internally with a resolution of 1 ms.
preprocesses data in real time and monitors and controls the tȋMonitoring of remote terminal units, communication
system, including redundant components. connections and system components
CFE supports different connections of remote terminal units as Communication between Control Centers
point-to-point, multiple point-to-point and multi-point. The with ICCP and ELCOM
transmission can be spontaneous, cyclic, periodic or scanned. The necessity of process data exchange between control centers,
The process interface is able to process several protocols such as often from different vendors, is increasing worldwide. Examples
IEC 870-5-101 or the metered value protocol IEC 870-5-102. are hierarchical control centers, the interconnection of net-
Substation equipment (RTUs, submasters) having a TCP/IP Interface works, energy exchange between suppliers or the use of
according to the standard IEC 60870-5-104 may be connected via external billing systems.
a WAN link directly to the CFE-LAN. Both dual channel connec-
tions and multi-channel connections are possible (fig. 7.2-8). Defacto standard protocols for communication between control
centers have been established, e.g., ELCOM-90 or ICCP. The ICCP
The following data are implemented in the process data protocol was defined as an international standard (IEC 870-6
preprocessing: TASE.2) and is now widely accepted and used all over the world.
tȋDetection of state changes with image maintenance (old/new
comparison of Status messages; forwarding only on change) The Inter-Control Center Communication Protocol (ICCP) is
tȋIntermediate position suppression (parameterizable designed to allow data exchange over wide area networks
monitoring time) (WANs) between a utility control center and other control cen-
tȋPlausibility check of all numeric values (error message on ters. Examples of other control centers include neighboring
invalid data or limit violations) utilities, power pools, regional control centers and non-utility
tȋThreshold value monitoring of analog values (passed on only if
a parameterized threshold value is exceeded)
generators. Exchanged data may include cyclic data, real-time
data and supervisory control commands such as measured
7
tȋMeasured value smoothing (parameterizable filtering function) values and operator messages.
Web access
Engineering station Operator station Operator station
SICAM DECS
SIPROTEC 1703 SIPROTEC 200
Data exchange occurs between a SCADA/EMS server of one Analog values, accumulator values and calculated values (for
control center and the server of another control center. The ICCP example state estimator results) can be stored in the Historical
server is responsible for access control when a client requests Information System as well as status information and messages
data. One ICCP Server may interact with several clients. (for example alarms).
Access control of data elements between control centers is The data to be archived is collected from SCADA and applications
implemented through bilateral agreements. A bilateral agree- (for example state estimator). The data can be collected either
ment is a document negotiated by two control centers that spontaneously or at a configurable cycle. Based on the stored
includes the elements (that is, data and control elements) that data, the Historical Information System provides aggregations
each is willing to transmit to the other. (minimum, maximum, average, integral, sum) and calculations.
Missing or incorrect data can be entered or updated manually.
The ICCP data link supports a redundant configuration utilizing
dual communication servers in active and standby mode. A The online part of the Historical Information System provides the
redundant configuration supports two physically separate paths historical data for immediate access. The retention period for
between the Spectrum Power control systems and the remote this online part is configurable (typically 1 to 3 years). Historical
system to provide backup in the event that the primary data path data that exceeds this retention period can be stored to and
becomes unavailable. reloaded from the so called long term archive.
Incoming Data
"OBMPHT
%JHJUBMT
5BQQPTJUJPOT
"DDVNVMBUPST
&WFOUTBMBSNT HTTP server
Offline
archive
Online Long-term
Data collection
archive archive
Buffered for Oracle DB
redundancy
Fig. 7.2-9: Archiving with the Historical Information System Fig. 7.2-10: Different views on archived data with the
Historical Information System
Energy Accounting according to the pre-specified criteria and store this information
Energy Accounting (EA) provides the capability to collect, edit for reporting as required by the regulatory body.
and store generation, interchange and other energy values on a
periodic basis. These energy values are processed from accumu- Production Cost Monitoring (PCM)
lator data collected from the field and monitored by SCADA. EA The PCM function calculates, typically, the cost of production for
also performs various aggregate calculations such as the inad- monitoring, e.g. deviations from optimum cost, from planned
vertent energy, calculations of energy values over multiple time cost, etc. and for recording purpose. In the case of an ISO/TSO
periods (e.g. hourly, weekly, monthly, yearly), etc. for reporting the function may be configured to include the regulating cost.
and billing purposes. EA provides extensive editing support such
as keeping track of original value, changed value, time of Reserve Monitoring (RM)
change, author of change, etc. for auditing purpose. RM calculates reserve contributions to reserve from generation
and interchanges and compares them to the requirements. The
Load Shedding requirements are typically defined by a regulatory body to
The load shedding application automatically performs load guarantee continued security of operation following the loss of a
rejection or disconnection of parts of the network in the event of generating unit or an interconnection. These requirements are
certain faults and emergencies in order to maintain system divided in 2 or 3 categories, e.g. spinning, secondary and ter-
stability. It analyzes the state of the network, detects significant tiary reserves, characterized by the response time window in
events, defines the load to be shed and prepares the required which such reserves can be activated. Reserve can include many
switching actions. The emergency strategies can be configured types of generation and interchange capabilities. For example,
individually. Depending on the customer requirements, a peakers would be included in secondary reserve and load shed-
configuration can be selected from a simple manual solution to a ding would be included in tertiary reserve.
fully automatic system for dealing with faults and emergencies.
The following strategies are possible: Economic Dispatch (ED)
tȋManual load shedding ED optimally dispatches generation to meet the net interchange,
tȋRotating load shedding (generation shortage for system load and network losses whilst respecting generation
extended time) operating limits. Depending on the operating business, i.e. GMS,
tȋEquipment overload load shedding (delay/avoid tripping EMS or ISO/TSO, ED objective will vary from optimizing produc-
of equipment) tion and/or regulating costs to optimizing profits. ED will also
tȋBalancing load shedding (import target deviation, islanding) operates different dispatch modes, each including a different
tȋUnder-frequency load shedding (system stability). generation set, e.g. online units under AGC control and in
economic mode, online units under automatic control and
Power control applications
The aim of the Power Applications (PA) is to support frequency
online units under plant control, etc. 7
control, i.e. the power system stability (equilibrium between Forecasting applications
generation and demand), whilst maintaining an optimum Forecasting applications are used for predicting the system (i.e.
generation dispatch and scheduled interchanges across the area and customer group) load, water inflow (hydro) and wind
power system interconnections. The power applications support as the basis for generation and interchange planning/scheduling.
single area control, multiple autonomous area controls and These applications are also used in support of operation as
hierarchical area control configurations. To enable this real-time
process the power applications provide several functions:
Power applications
Load Frequency Control (LFC)
LFC provides control mechanisms that maintain equilibrium Load
frequency
between generation and demand in real-time. At the hart of LFC control
Control area
is a PI-controller that, combining actual generation, interchange
and frequency, calculates the deviation from equilibrium, Production
referred to as the area control error (ACE), and sends accordingly cost
correction signals to the (single, groups of, virtual, etc.) gener- monitoring
Generation
ating units participating to this regulation process to maintain or area
restore equilibrium. The corrections will be calculated to meet Economic
numerous generation unit operating constraints (base/target Generating dispatch
Consumers Schedules Schedules Consumers
point, operating and response limits, etc.). LFC will also imple- units
real-time conditions changes. The load forecast applications VSTLF is based on a neural network algorithm and its use divided
further described below supports, besides electricity, also com- in two phases: the training phase and the forecast phase.
modities such as water and gas; supports multiple concurrent Training is executed automatically periodically or on request.
users and a working forecast environment to allow for review
and tuning/adjustments before load forecast is made current for Short-Term Inflow Forecast (STIF)
real-time use; and provides for adjustments (e.g. scaling) and STIF calculates future inflows into a hydrological system. On the
tracking mode (i.e. the next few hours of the active forecast are basis of this data, the planning function (e.g., hydro scheduling)
(automatically or on manual request) adjusted based on the can calculate the schedule for hydro plant units.
observed deviations between the actual measurement and
forecast during the last few hours). Power Scheduling Applications
The aim of Scheduling Applications (SA) is to optimize the use of
Medium-/Long-Term Load Forecast (MTLF/LTLF) individual power plants (thermal, hydro) and external power
MTLF is used to forecast the load over a period of 1 week up to 2 transactions in such a way that either the total operating cost is
years whilst LTLF is used to forecast the load over a period of 1 minimized or the total profit on energy sales is maximized after
year up to 5 years. The methods used in both applications are taking all maintenance and operational constraints into account.
processing historical data with multiple regression analysis (one
method is based on the ARIMA model). The scheduling applications use a sophisticated combination of
Mixed Integer Linear Programming and successive Linear
Short-Term Load Forecast (STLF) Programming. Special techniques are applied to consider
STLF is used to forecast the load over a period of few days up to non-linear effects and speed up the solution process (fig. 7.2-12).
14 days in 30-60 minutes increments. The load forecast supports
several prediction algorithms (e.g. Similar Day, Pattern The scheduling applications include:
Matching, and Regression Analysis) that can be used separately Resource Scheduler (RO)
or in user configurable combination and provides the operator Resource Scheduler optimizes either the medium-term genera-
with tools to edit the forecast. tion plan including energy transactions for minimum cost or the
medium-term electricity delivery contracts including energy
Very Short-Term Load Forecast (VSTLF) trades for maximum profit subject to optimal use of energy
VSTLF is used to forecast the load over a 1-2 hour period in resources (fuels, water, emission, etc.), to maintenance con-
short, e.g. 5 minutes, time increments. The method used by straints, to emission rights, etc.
7
5-20 years Expansion planning Applications
Stochastic
online Control
Automatic generation control
RO determines therefore the optimal generation schedules, the Outage scheduler Transmission network applications (Real-Time)
OS Network sensitivity
amount of traded energy in bilateral, forward and spot markets,
and the corresponding consumption of resources (fuels, emis- Network Fault calculations
SCADA SCADA State
model
estimator
sion, etc.). update
Security analysis
User interface Network
parameter Security analysis
UI
Generation Scheduler (GS) adaptation look ahead
Generation Scheduler optimizes the short-term (thermal and Scheduling appl. Voltage scheduler
STLF
hydro) unit commitment & generation plan including energy Security dispatch
COP
transactions for minimum cost subject to maintenance, fore-
casted load, reserve requirement, energy resources (fuels, water, Power applications Case management
Information model
Results (e.g. reservoir levels, accumulated fuel consumption, management
etc.) from the Resource Scheduler at the end of the short-term
planning horizon are used as targets by the Generation Sched- Fig. 7.2-13: TNA real-time sequence
uler application.
Unit commitment, hydro scheduling and hydro-thermal coordi- Network Model Update (NMU)
nation are integral part of this application. The Network Model Update integrates all external and internal
information, construct the network topology, and update
Trade Scheduler (TS) accordingly the network data required to create the operating
Trade Scheduler is similar to the Generation Scheduler applica- conditions to be evaluated by the State Estimator or the Power
tion except for optimizing the short-term traded energy on the Flow, i.e.:
spot market for maximum profit. tȋGathering data from SCADA and other external sources such as
AGC, Load Forecast and Outage Scheduler (user options in
Results are also similar but for the energy volumes to be bid on study)
the spot market. tȋPerforming topological analysis including identification of
electrical island(s), energized/de-energized equipment(s), etc.
Transmission Network Applications tȋScheduling accordingly all network loads, generations,
The Transmission Network Applications (TNA) suite provides regulation settings and limits.
tools for the advanced monitoring, security assessment and
operational improvement of the operation of an electrical
transmission network. They are used
In study mode the retrieval of data is user configurable and
offers additional retrieval options typically not applicable in
7
tȋto provide a fast and com prehensible assessment of the real-time.
current state of the network and improve monitoring by/
beyond SCADA State Estimator (SE)
tȋto assess the security against faults & outages The purpose of this function is to provide a reliable and com-
tȋto provide preventive/corrective measures against planned/ plete network solution from the real-time measurements,
existing events pseudo-measurements (e.g. non-telemetered loads) from model
tȋto optimize operation against costs & losses update (MU) and operator entries. The state estimator will
identify the observable parts of the network where real-time
These applications considerably increase operational reliability measurements are redundant. Using this redundancy, the state
and efficiency in network management. TNA responds automat- estimator will identify “bad” measurements, remove them from
ically to the many different operational (secure, unsecure, the valid set of measurements, and then solve for the complete
emergency) conditions to provide the appropriate support the network combining, for the portion of the network that is
operator. The application suite will execute, in real-time, period- unobservable, isolated measurements and load, generation and
ically, on events and on operator request as a configurable bus voltage scheduled by the MU function. The state estimator
sequence (fig. 7.2-13). Among many other features, TNA also will also alarm the operator of any operational limit violations. It
supports study mode allowing concurrent users to execute will also enable other applications to develop reliable solutions
different studies including preparing corrective strategies, to specific aspects of network operation (e.g. remedial actions
preparing next day operating plan, analyzing post-mortem against operational limit violations). The state estimator features:
operational events, etc. tȋOrthogonal transformation algorithm
tȋMeasurement consistency check
tȋChi-Square test w/ Normalized Residual or Measurement
Compensation approach
tȋSingle-pass solution
tȋEnforcement of equipment limits in the unobservable parts
of the network.
Although the state estimator’s essential task is to process real- OPF offers also plenty of user selectable options for full flexibility
time data, the State Estimator can optionally also be executed in in identifying remedial measures to operational violations and/or
study mode for, for example, post-mortem analysis. in optimizing secure operational conditions. Depending on the
optimization objectives, the OPF applications can be defined as a
Network Parameter Adaptation (NPA) reactive power optimization or as an active power optimization.
The Network Parameter Adaptation (NPA) maintains a time-
dependent database of adapted network data used by the OPF as described here is used only in study whilst two custom-
network model update to schedule net interchanges, bus loads, ized versions described below are provided for real-time use.
regulated voltages, and statuses of time-dependent breakers.
NPA adapts these network data in real-time via exponential Voltage Scheduler (VS)
smoothing using the state estimator results. Then, VS is a real-time application version of the OPF. It determines the
tȋIn real time execution, the parameters are used by the model optimal use of VAr resources and the optimal voltage profile that
update function to schedule loads and regulated bus voltages should be maintained in order either to minimize operational
to be used by State Estimator as pseudo measurements at voltage violations or/and to minimize the network losses. For
unobservable buses. that purpose, optimal settings of reactive power controls are
tȋIn study, the parameters are used by the model update determined and displayed for implementation.
function to schedule loads and regulated bus voltages for the
user-specified study day-type and hour. The results are then When the objective is to alleviate voltage violations, minimum
used by the Power Flow. shifting of controls from specified setpoints (least-squares shift)
is implemented. For that purpose, VS minimizes an objective
Dispatcher Power Flow (DPF) function consisting of the sum of the quadratic “cost” curves for
DPF is used to evaluate the network state under various oper- all control variables. Each such “cost” curve penalizes its related
ating conditions in the present or the future such as, for control variable for a shift away from the target value. Weighting
example, tomorrow’s work plan. It is used exclusively in study of the “cost” curves is performed by a factor specified for each
and typically in conjunction with other applications such as control variable.
Security Analysis and Optimal Power Flow.
Remedial Dispatch (RD)
DPF solves either – user selectable – using the Fast Decoupled or RD is a real-time application version of the OPF. It determines the
Newton-Raphson algorithm. DPF supports, among many optimal use of MW resources and the optimal loading profile
standard features, that should be maintained in order either to minimize opera-
tȋContinuous (e.g. Generator) and discrete controllers (LTCs, tional overloads or/and to minimize the operating costs. For that
7 Capacitors, etc.);
tȋDC injections and branches (iterative process between DC and
purpose, optimal settings of active power controls are deter-
mined and displayed for open- or closed-loop implementation.
AC power flows) Note that the set of overload constraints can be automatically
tȋArea Interchange control, single/distributed slack, MVAr/MW extended to include branch loading constraints corresponding to
generator curves, etc. critically loaded branches (user specifiable critical loading
factor).
DPF offers plenty of user selectable options for full flexibilit1y of
analysis. Similarly to VS, when the objective is to alleviate overloads,
minimum shifting of controls from specified setpoints (least-
Optimal Power Flow (OPF) squares shift) is implemented. For that purpose, RD minimizes
The OPF is used to improve the system operation under normal an objective function consisting of the sum of the quadratic
(secure) as well as abnormal (unsecure) conditions by recom- “cost” curves for all control variables. These “costs” are con-
mending control adjustments to achieve either of the following structed and handled as described for VS.
optimization objectives:
tȋSECURITY: active & reactive security optimization Basically, RD provides optimal dispatch similarly to conventional
tȋCOST: active cost & reactive security optimization economic dispatch (ED). Compared to ED, however, it is
tȋLOSS: loss minimization extended to also take into account network loading constraints.
tȋFULL: COST optimization & LOSS optimization This is particularly useful in usually highly loaded systems as well
as during exceptional load situations, e.g., due to outages of
OPF solves the LOSS minimization using Newton optimization generating units or transmission lines.
and the other optimizations using Linear Programming. OPF
supports, among many standard features, Security Analysis (SA)
tȋConstraint & Control priorities The purpose of this function is to determine the security of the
tȋConstraint relaxation power system under a very large number of contingencies (e.g.
(e.g. long-to-medium & medium-to-short limits) n-1 criteria). Contingency evaluation in large meshed transmis-
tȋLoad shedding sion networks is an exhaustive task because a lot of contingen-
cies (single outages and multiple outages) have to be studied in
order to get a reliable result. On the other hand, usually only nected to the faulty bus. Fault current contributions from
very few of the possible contingencies are actually critical, and branches and generating units near the faulted bus are also
therefore a lot of computation effort could be wasted. To calculated and may be compared against their respective fault
overcome this difficulty, a two-step approach is used. The two ratings. FC includes, among many features, the effects of mutu-
sub-functions of SA are as follows: ally coupled lines, the modeling of fault and fault-to-ground
tȋContingency Screening (CS) provides a ranking of impedance and the combination of a fault with a single branch
contingencies from the contingency list according to the outage.
expected resulting limit violations. For that purpose, a fast
power flow calculation (user definable number of iterations) is Operator Training Simulator (OTS)
performed. OTS is based on 4 key components (fig. 7.1-9, section 7.1.1):
tȋContingency Analysis (CA) checks contingencies from the tȋTraining management function
ranked list produced by the CS sub-function. For each of those tȋPower system simulation
contingencies, a complete AC power flow is performed. tȋTelecontrol model
tȋPower Control System (copy).
Security analysis supports, among many features,
tȋuser specified contingency and monitored equipment lists The training management component provides tools for creating
tȋSingle and multiple contingencies training sessions, executing training sessions and reviewing
tȋautomatic simulation of contingencies corresponding to the trainee performance. It provides tools to
real-time violations tȋinitialize the training session, e.g. from real-time or a saved
tȋconditional contingencies case;
tȋload transfer and Generator reallocation tȋdefine the system load profile;
tȋmodeling of regulating controllers (LTC, ...) tȋcreate event sequences, e.g. a breaker opening, a telemetry
tȋcontingency screening bypass failure, etc., that can be either time triggered, event triggered
or command triggered;
Security Analysis Look-Ahead (SL) tȋcreate training scenarios, i.e. a number of event sequences, to
Provides the very same function as SA but merges, to the base be activated during the training.
case, outages from Outage Scheduler that are scheduled within
a configurable time window from real-time. SL provides the It also provides start/stop and pause/resume functions for the
operator with the security impact from these scheduled outages execution of the training session. During the training session it is
on real-time operation (which may differ from the conditions possible for the trainer to create new events and/or modify the
used to validate the scheduling of the outage). In case the running scenario.
scheduled outage put real-time operation at risk, the operator
can decide whether to cancel the outage, reschedule the outage The power system simulation component provides a realistic
7
and/or take preventive measures to allow the scheduled outage simulation of the power system behavior to support training
to take place as scheduled. from normal operation to emergency operation including
islanding conditions and blackout restoration. The simulation is
Network Sensitivity (NS) based on a long-term dynamic modeling of the power system
The purpose of this function is to support calculation and man- including:
agement of loss penalty factors for use by Power Applications tȋload modeling with voltage & frequency dependency;
(PA) and Scheduling Applications (SA). Penalty factors are used tȋgeneration modeling with governor, turbine/boiler and
for taking network transmission losses into consideration when generator models;
dispatching generation whilst minimizing total cost. This NS tȋfrequency modeling;
function is executed automatically as part of the real-time net- tȋvoltage regulator modeling;
work application sequence. It calculates, for the current network tȋprotection relay modeling;
state, the sensitivity of system losses to changes in unit genera- tȋexternal company LFC modeling.
tion and interchanges with neighboring companies. It, then,
maintains, using exponential smoothing, a database of such loss The telemetry simulation component provides the simulation of
sensitivities for a number of system load ranges and net inter- the data communication between the power system and the
change ranges. In real-time mode, NS operates from the network control system. It transfers as simulated field telemetry the
solution produced by the state estimator function, and in study results of the power system simulation to the control system
mode from that produced by the dispatcher power flow function. copy. And it processes all commands issued by SCADA (oper-
ator), LFC, etc. and transfers them to the power system simula-
Fault Calculation (FC) tion. This simulated telemetry can be modified via the scenario
The purpose of this function is to calculate the fault current and builder by the trainer to reflect measurement errors, telemetry
fault current contributions for single fault and multiple faults or RTU failures, etc.
(user selection). Fault rating violations at and near the fault are
provided to the operator. The short-circuit values are compared This operator training simulator provides a dedicated environ-
against all circuit-breaker ratings for each circuit-breaker con- ment for the trainee (operator) and one for the instructor that
Fault Management
Fault Management is a set of applications used for locating
system incidents and providing fault (or planned outage) isola- Fig. 7.2-14: View into a large power control center
tion and service restoration in distribution networks.
The main Fault Management functionality consists of: The user can select the way of ranking of suggested switching
tȋFault location procedures according to one or more performance indices and
Locating the faulty section or area of the network as closely as select the best one for service restoration.
possible
tȋFault isolation Fault Management switching procedures are typically transferred
Isolating the planned outage or the faulty section or area of to a Switching Procedure Management (SPM) application for
the network further processing, that is, edit, review and implementation.
tȋService restoration
Restoring power to de-energized non-faulty areas of the Fault isolation and service restoration can also be used for
network sections isolation due to maintenance work.
tȋFault isolation and immediate restoration
Isolating faulty areas and immediately restoring power to Outage Management (OM)
de-energized areas of the non-faulty or isolated network is a collection of functions, tools and procedures that an oper-
7 tȋRestore to normal or pre-fault state
Restoring selected number of switches to their normal state or
ator/dispatcher uses to manage the detection, location, isola-
tion, correction and restoration of faults that occur in the power
pre-fault state supply system. OMS is also used to facilitate the preparation and
resolution of outages that are planned for the network. These
Fault location, as a part of the Fault Management application, processes are used to expedite the execution of the tasks associ-
helps to locate permanent faults. Outage faults (for example, ated with the handling of outages that affect the network and
short circuits) as well as non-outage faults (for example earth provide support to operators at all stages of the outage life
faults) are considered. Fault location is performed by using cycle, starting from events such as the reception of a trouble call
remotely controlled and manually updated information (commu- or a SCADA indication of an outage and extending until power is
nicated by the field crews) from, for example, protection devices restored to all customers. This process is used to solve the
and fault indicators. Fault Management localizes the faulty outage regardless of whether the outage is at the level of a
section as closely as possible, based on available real-time data single distribution transformer providing power to one or a few
from SCADA and/or field crews. energy consumers, or at the level of a primary substation pro-
viding power to many energy consumers. All operations, autho-
The isolation function is performed to determine a set of rizations and comments that occur in these processes are docu-
switching operations to isolate an area of the network. mented and collected in outage records. This information is
made available to external sites for further statistical analysis
It can be initiated by the location of the faulty segment or area, and processing. QMS provides the automatic processing of an
or by selecting sections directly on the user interface. The outage record used to monitor changes in the network and has
purpose is to isolate sections or areas of the network specified an internal interface to the crew management or switching
by the isolation request to minimize the outage effect on the procedure management. OMS also provides an interface to the
network. external trouble call systems and an SQL interface (fig. 7.2-14).
Service restoration provides a possible choice of switching Switching Procedure Management (SPM)
procedures to restore service. For each switching procedure allows the operator to create, edit, select, sort, print, execute
suggested by the restoration tool, performance indices are and store switching procedures. Entries in a switching procedure
calculated based on the network conditions. can be created manually by recording the operator’s actions in a
Simulation mode, by modifying an existing procedure or by currents A) through lines and transformers, and active and reactive
recording the operator’s actions in real-time mode or automati- power losses that allow to detect potential limit violations.
cally by applications such as FISR and the OMS system. The
switching procedure management capabilities can be used to DSPF is used to calculate the network statuses under different
prepare, study and execute clearance operations. It can also be load conditions and configurations:
used to execute switching operations to alleviate fault condi- tȋCalculate the actual state of the distribution networks using
tions and to restore power following a fault, as well as to opti- real-time measurements and the current topology
mize the network operation. SPM provides management capabil- tȋCalculate the state of the distribution network in the near
ities via summary displays and easy-to-use menus. future (look-ahead) with actual topology but load values of the
given time
Crew Management (CM) tȋStudy the state of the distribution network in the near future
This system provides convenient access to the information with different topology (i.e. according to planned
necessary to track, contact and assign work schedules (outage maintenance) and the load values of the given time
records) to the field crews of a Utility. The information consists
of data such as crew name, work assignments and locations. Distribution System State Estimator (DSSE) provides a solution
for monitoring the actual operating state of the network and to
Trouble Call Management (TCM) provide a complete network solution for further analysis, for
This system provides convenient access to the information example, optimization of voltage profile.
necessary to track, contact and assign work schedules (outage
records) to the field crews of a utility. The information consists DSSE provides the statistical estimates of the most probable
of data such as crew name, work assignments and locations. active and reactive power values of the loads using existing mea-
sured values, switching positions, and initial active and reactive
Distribution network applications power consumption of the power system loads.
The distribution system network applications (DNA) provide fast
and comprehensive analysis and optimization of the current The initial active and reactive power values of the loads are
distribution network state (fig. 7.2-15). The Distribution System provided by static load curves or load schedules (generated
Power Flow (DSPF) calculates voltages (magnitudes and angles) based on load curves and measured values/meter readings).
for all nodes (busbars), active/reactive powers for slack buses, Further DSSE estimates the real-time network operating state
and reactive power/voltage angles for nodes with PV generators. using measured values.
All other electrical result values are calculated from the node
voltages and branch impedances/admittances after DSPF is solved. DSPF and DSSE can handle both symmetrical balanced as well as
The most important result values are flows (powers kW / kVArs and unsymmetrical unbalanced distribution systems. 7
Workflows
Trouble call management and outage management
Fault location
Crew management
The results of SCC are presented on network diagrams and in System operational constraints such as line loading and con-
tabular displays. sumer voltage limits are automatically accounted for in terms of
penalties. OFR supports two modes of operation: In online
Voltage/Var Control (VVC) mode, the application uses the existing real-time measurements
calculates the optimal settings of the voltage controller of LTCs, and the current topology. In the study mode, the operator can
voltage regulators and capacitor states, optimizing the opera- simulate short-term operational studies with different topology
tions according to the different objectives. The following and measurements. The output of OFR application includes the
objectives are supported by the application: switching procedure for reconfiguration and the values of the
tȋMinimize distribution system power loss objective functions before and after reconfiguration.
tȋMinimize power demand (reduce load while respecting given
voltage tolerance) Optimal Capacitor Placement (OCP)
tȋMaximize generated reactive power in distribution network The objective of this application is to optimize the placement of
(provide reactive power support for transmission/distribution capacitors – optimal positions (busbars), optimal regulator
bus) positions and optimal sizes of capacitor banks are considered.
tȋMaximize revenue (the difference between energy sales and
energy prime cost) OCP can optimize the placement of mobile capacitors for
tȋKeep the system within constraints planned and unplanned outages as well as fixed capacitors.
When determining the busbars on which capacitor banks should
System operational constraints such as line loading and con- be placed, the sizing of capacitor banks and the positions of
sumer voltage limits are automatically accounted for in terms of capacitor bank regulators, OCP considers minimization of active
penalties. VVC supports three modes of operation: power losses as well as power factor limits and voltage limits.
OCP runs on user request.
DSA assesses
tȋN-1 security in all meshed parts of the distribution network
tȋSecurity of simplified restoration procedures based on the
current reserve
tȋSecurity of reconfiguration scenarios (back-feed, coupling of
substations, etc.)
tȋSecurity of pre-defined restoration procedures
tȋSecurity of scheduled switching procedures
The IAP provides information about the fault location in case of a into account all electrical and operational requirements. The
network disturbance. It is based upon a hierarchical, multi-level algorithm develops the best strategy for the given situation and
problem-solving architecture that combines model-based and considers all necessary steps to reach a solution that fulfils the
heuristic techniques, and works with an object-oriented data
structure. Within the diagnosis, the IAP determines the location
task in a secure, complete and efficient way. 7
and the type of disturbances in electrical networks, e.g., fault With the help of the built-in power flow, each step is checked;
within a transformer. The model used by the IAP corresponds to tagged equipment is respected. The proposed solution changes
the model of the protection system. This provides the additional the actual topology of the network in a minimal way. In the
advantage of monitoring the correct operation of the protection exceptional case in which a complete solution is not available
system. The diagnosis results are displayed in the XPS report list. under the actual circumstances, a partial solution is evaluated,
again taking into account all electrical and operational require-
Advanced Network Operation (ANOP) ments. The results are displayed in the XPS report list and in the
This system supports the following network operations of the XPS balance list, and a switching procedure is created and
operator: inserted in the switching procedure management.
tȋAutomatically triggered operations for:
–ȋAutomatic fault isolation and restoration
–ȋAutomatic removal of overload
tȋManually triggered operations for:
–ȋManual fault isolation and restoration (trigger fault)
–ȋPlanned outage (take out of Service)
–ȋLoad relax
–ȋResupply (energizing)
7.2.2 Common Model Management model and all planning changes. The integrated package pro-
vides consistent, coordinated models for any point in time based
System (CMMS)
on the planned energization dates provided to the system
In parallel with the liberalization of the energy markets, there is (fig. 7.2-17). Point of time models can be exported to most
an ever-increasing need for data sharing, not just to serve the popular applications using CIM (IEC 61970 and IEC 61968) and
own enterprise, but also to respond to needs from outside CIM for planning and dynamics international standards.
entities. Sometimes this need is driven by industry entities.
Sometimes, and lately more than others, this need is driven by The key features and capabilities are:
industry requirements passed by governing bodies such as NERC tȋIndustry standard CIM-based model representation
and FERC. tȋSynchronized chronological model tracking from future to past
horizons
Siemens has been alert to the need for common modeling tȋSingle model integration of planning, engineering, operations,
language and integration platforms for optimizing the benefit market, etc.
also to smart grid implementation across the power delivery tȋElectronically submit network model changes to facilitate
network. In developing the first product of its kind, the Common exchange between the RTO/ISO and the regional TDSP.
Model Management System (Spectrum Power CMMS), Siemens tȋDevelop a planning model for the RTO/ISO combining the
has compiled within a single data model both planning and current regional operating model with the region’s proposed
operations network models for both transmission and distribu- plans. This model can be used as the basis for evaluating
tion and presents model editing and tracking on a time-synchro- network reliability as network changes are implemented over
nized basis – allowing a model of the system to be derived for time.
any point in time in the future or history, in either a planning or tȋElectronic Approval/Rejection Notification provides electronic
an operations protocol. notification to the TDSP when a plan is approved or rejected. If
the plan is rejected, it identifies the reasons so the TSDP can
Siemens is now changing the mindset of modelers from thinking modify and resubmit the plan in a timely manner.
in terms of traditional network models where individual assets tȋApproved plans are placed in a secure accessible repository.
properties are aggregated into a larger component in the model The TDSP can access its approved plans from the repository
(i.e. wave traps, underground cable segments, overhead line and use these to develop the commissioning plan necessary to
segments are all aggregated into one “transmission line” in the put them into operations.
network model – resulting in the individual assets loosing their
identity) to terms of the network really being a series of inter- Managed changes between planning and operations within the
connected assets. This transitional thinking results in significant TDSP provides streamlined electronic coordination of planning
7 reliability, efficiency and resource optimization. model changes to be commissioned with the real-time operating
model.
The Siemens Spectrum Power CMMS provides tools and automa-
tion to efficiently manage the exchange, validation, approval,
and commissioning of transmission network model changes RTO/ Dynamic Transfer
Outage CRR
ISO energy limit
within and between RTO/ISO and Transmission Distribution analysis analysis
evaluation auction
Service Provider (TDSP) operations and planning departments. Reliability Congestion Fault Market
EMS Settlement
CMMS enables generating, managing, and synchronizing net- analysis analysis analysis operations
Approved
work model information from a single shared source to support plans:
utility systems and applications, such as network planning, Approved
Planning model Current operations
Operating model
t1MBO5% plans model
energy management, market operations, congestion revenue t1MBO5% Planned network
changes
Actual network
changes
t1MBO5%
rights, outage scheduling and more. CMMS also provides a t T&D
Planned change Accurate external
approval, rejection network model
foundation for smart grind information management. The t1MBON5%O Participant
approved
Current operations
model
plans
Planning model Operating model
CIM-based architecture provides a unified model, auditable Secure Approved planned
network changes
model change records, approval levels for model changes, as repository
Transfer Load
Reliability Fault Shadow
well as rich model documentation capabilities. It allows chrono- analysis
limit
analysis
analysis
EMS manage-
ment
settlement
te
decentralized generation of electrical power, heat and cold Biomass Power control
rn
power plants system
al
energy becomes more and more important. The generation of
in f
these types of energy near to the consumers offers economical
orm
Block heeating Energy
and ecological benefits. In this context, interest is directed to power plants exchange
at i o
Generation unit s
so-called virtual power plants. A virtual power plant is a collec-
n s o ur c e s
tion of small and very small decentralized generation units that Small hydro- Accounting
power plants
is monitored and controlled by a superordinated energy manage- DEMS
ment system. In general, these generation units produce heating Photovoltaic Meteorogical
and cooling energy as well as electricity (fig. 7.2-18). systems services
DEMS
air temperature for photovoltaic systems). The transformation SQL database, ODBC
matrix can be parameterized according to the unit technical
Excel und ASCII file
specifications and/or is estimated on the basis of historical
power and weather measurements by applying neural network XML interface for time series
algorithms (in an offline analysis step).
COM/DCOM interface
The user interface plays an import role in operator acceptance. It Microsoft Windows
must be user-friendly in order to reduce the training effort and
to avoid faulty operations. Therefore, the user Interface of DEMS
is created using the basis of the WinCC user interface builder Fig. 7.2-22: DEMS components
(fig. 7.2-23).
8
Horizontal IT
Grid-specific
Enterprise IT
Operational IT Energy Ind. Distribution Rail SCADA Distribution Microgrid & Dec. Demand Resp. Meter Data
Mgt. System Mgt. System System Mgt. system Gen. Controller Mgmt. System Management
Information &
Grid specific communication platform
Communicat.
Field
Equipment
Electr./Gas/Water/Heat
Solutions incl.
Primary
equipment
Smart Grid operation
Service Grid consulting & design Grid deployment & automation & optimization Value-added services
Fig. 8.1-1: Siemens offers complete communication network solutions to build a Smart Grid for power utilities
why system operators need to be able to respond quickly in tȋIf a large number of small energy resources are involved, the
critical situations. A prerequisite for this is the integration of the power quality of the low-voltage system must be monitored,
key ring-main units as well as the volatile decentralized wind because the flow of current can change directions when feed
and solar generation into the energy management system, and conditions are favorable
thus into the communication network of the power utilities.
Because the local environment differs widely, it is crucial that The selection of a communication solution depends on the
the right mix of the various communication technologies is customer’s requirements. If only meter data and price signals are
deployed. This mix will need to be exactly tailored to the utilities’ to be transmitted, narrowband systems such as narrowband
needs and the availability of the necessary infrastructure and power line carriers or GPRS modems are sufficient. For smart
resources (e.g., availability of fiber-optic cables, frequency homes in which power generation and controllable loads (e.g.,
spectrum for wireless technologies, or quality and length of the appliances) or e-car charging stations are to be managed, broad-
power cables for broadband power line carrier). band communication systems such as fiber-optic cables, broad-
band power line carriers or wireless solutions are necessary.
In the consumer access area, the communication needs are
rising rapidly as well. The following Smart Grid applications For these complex communication requirements, Siemens offers
request a bidirectional communication infrastructure down to tailored ruggedized communication network solutions for fiber
consumer premises. optic, power line or wireless infrastructures, based on the stan-
dards of the Energy Industry. Naturally, this also includes a full
tȋExchange of conventional meters with smart meters, which range of services, from communication analysis to the operation
provide bidirectional communications connections between of the entire solution (fig. 8.1-2).
the consumer and energy applications (e.g., meter data
management, marketplace, etc.)
For further reading please visit:
tȋManagement of consumers’ energy consumption, using price
www.energy.siemens.com/hq/en/automation/power-
signals as a response to the steadily changing energy supply of transmission-distribution/network-communication
large distributed producers
Communications
infrastructure Applications
Control Center
(EMS/DMS)
High voltage
8
Power Line Generation HV substation HV substation Plant
Carrier Micro Grid
Microwave Controller
Router/ 110 kV–230 kV
Switch Distribution
HV substation Automation
Wind offshore 30 kV–132 kV HV substation
Condition
Network management system
Monitoring
Demand
End-to-end security
Response
Fiberoptic/ Management
Wind onshore MV substation
Medium voltage
SDH/Ether. MV substation
System
BPLC
WiMAX Public charging Marketplace
WIFI Mesh Cold store for e-cars Building Asset
Cellular 6 kV–22 kV Management
Router/ Meter Data
Switch Management
RMU with
meter data Billing/Call
concentrator 400 V 400 V RMU 400 V RMU 400 V RMU Center
Fiberoptic/ E-Car
N/B PLC,
Low voltage
Operation
WiMAX Center
WIFI Mesh Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter
etc.
Cellular
DSL, Rout. Homes Homes (smart meter Smart homes with Distributed
Switch (smart meter with NPLC) with other connection) energy gateway energy resources
For communications at transmission and subtransmission levels, State-of-the-art NG SDH systems are highly integrated, providing
Siemens offers the latest generation of SDH (Synchronous all of the above-mentioned capabilities in a single device. In
Digital Hierarchy) equipment, commonly referred to as NG (Next order to address the varying needs and requirements of the
Generation) SDH (fig. 8.2-1). energy utilities, Siemens offers a wide range of products, from a
single-board CPE to a multiservice platform for PDH (Plesiochro-
NG SDH technology combines a number of benefits that make it nous Digital Hierarchy), SDH, WDM (Wavelength Division Multi-
well-suited to the needs of energy utilities. Among those bene- plexing), and Ethernet.
fits are high availability, comprehensive manageability and
monitoring features, and last but not least SDH’s unique ability Benefits at a glance
to seamlessly support both legacy applications and new, pri- tȋHigh availability
marily packet-based emerging standards. Ethernet-over-SDH tȋVery short delay times in protection signal transmission
provides the capacity to transport packet-based traffic over the tȋFor both legacy and packet-based applications/systems
SDH backbone with high reliability and low latencies. As a result, tȋSupports IEC 61850 standard
Ethernet-over-SDH is the solution of choice for enabling tȋFull-spectrum network management system
IEC61850 across the entire communication backbone.
OPGW OPGW
8
Substation Substation
NG NG NMS
SDH SDH
Router
Control
Access Access center
MUX MUX
Fig. 8.2-1: Typical Next Generation SDH solution for transmission grids
8.2.2 Access Multiplexer An access multiplexer can be employed to create flexible net-
works which can react rapidly to changes in network require-
Today there is still a need to operate a number of different ments. The modular design enables channel units to be com-
conventional communication interfaces in one substation (e.g., bined as required for telephone, data and ISDN signal
a/b phone, ISDN, V.24, X.21, etc.) and this will also apply in the transmission. The multiplexer allows free assignment of user
near future. For this purpose, access multiplexers are used to interfaces to the channels in the 2-Mbit/s signal and rapid
bundle these communication signals and pass them on to the configuration. Fig. 8.2-2 shows an overview of the interfaces
backbone system. provided by an typical access multiplexer.
Subscriber Side
Voice interfaces
POTS, Subscriber Side, 2-wire
POTS, Exchange Side, 2-wire
2-wire, Local battery
2-wire VF and 2xE&M
4-wire VF and 2xE&M
2/4-wire VF
ISDN interfaces:
So-Interface
Uko-Interface, 2B1Q Access 2 Mbps G. NG
Uko-Interface, 4B3T Multiplexer 703 / CAS SDH
Data Interfaces
64 kbps, G.703 codirectional
V.24 / V.28, Subrates up to 64 kbps
V.35, Subrates up to 64 kbps or n x 64 kbps
V.36, Subrates up to 64 kbps or n x 64 kbps
X.21 / V.11, Subrates up to 64 kbps or
n x 64 kbps 10/100 BaseT
n x 64 kbps, G.703
64 kbps, G.703 centralized clock
Fractional E1, n x 64 kbps, 2 Mbps G.703
8.2.3 PowerLink – Power Line Carrier Fig. 8.2-3 shows the typical connection of the PowerLink system
for High-Voltage Lines to the high-voltage line via the coupling unit AKE 100, coupling
capacitor.
The digital power line carrier system PowerLink from Siemens
uses the high-voltage line between substations as a communica- Flexibility – the most important aspect of PowerLink
tion channel for data, protection signals and voice transmission Versatility is one of the great strengths of the PowerLink
(table 8.2-1). This technology, which has been tried and tested system. PowerLink can be matched flexibly to your infrastruc-
over decades, and adapted to the latest standards, has two main ture (table 8.2-2).
application areas:
tȋAs a communication link between substations where a fiber- Multi-service device
optic connection does not exist or would not be economically PowerLink offers the necessary flexibility for transmitting every
viable service the customer might want in the available band. All
tȋAs backup system for transmitting the protection signals, services can be combined in any way within the available band-
in parallel to a fiber-optic link width/bit rate framework.
Bridge to IP Application
IP functionality is best suited for the migration from TDM to Transmission of protection signals, telecontrolling information, data
packet-switched networks. PowerLink offers electrical and and voice via HV transmission lines
optical Ethernet interfaces, including an integrated L2 switch, Advantages
extending the IP network to remote substations with a bit rate Cost-effective for small to medium data volumes over long distances
up to 320 kbps.
Processes analog and digital signals
Maximum efficiency:
The integrated, versatile multiplexer (vMUX)
A large number of conventional communication interfaces
today (e.g., a/b telephone, V.24, X.21, etc.) and in the foresee-
able future must be operated in a switching station. For this
purpose, PowerLink uses an integrated versatile multiplexer that
8
Substation Substation
NMS
PowerLink PowerLink
with integrated with integrated
SWT 3000 SWT 3000 Router
Control
center
bundles these communication forms together and transmits Features Digital Analog
PLC PLC
them by PLC. The vMUX is a statistical multiplexer with priority
system system
control. Asynchronous data channels can be transmitted in
“guaranteed” or “best effort” modes, to guarantee optimum
Universally applicable in analog, p p
digital, or mixed operation
utilization of available transmission capacity. The priority con-
trol ensures reliable transmission of the most important asyn-
Frequency range 24 kHz–1,000 kHz p p
chronous and synchronous data channels and voice channels Bandwidth selectable 2–32 kHz p p
even under poor transmission conditions. Naturally, the vMUX is
integrated in the management system of PowerLink, and is
Data rate up to 320 kbit/s at 32 kHz p
perfectly equipped for the power line communication require- Transmission power 20/50/100 W, p p
ments of the future with extended options for transmitting fine adjustment through software
digital voice and data signals. Operation with or without frequency band spacing p p
with automatic cross talk canceller
Voice compression Digital interface
Voice compression is indispensable for the efficient utilization Synchronous X.21 (max. 2 channels) p
of networks. Naturally, quality must not suffer, which is why Asynchronous RS 232 (max. 8 channels) p
PowerLink offers comprehensive options for adapting the data TCP/IP (2 x electrical, 1 x optical) p
rate to individual requirements. PowerLink offers different E1 (2 Mbps) for voice compression p
compression stages between 5.3 and 8 kbit/s. To prevent any G703.1 (64 kbps) p
impairment of voice quality, the compressed voice band is
Analog interface
routed transparently to PowerLink stations connected in line,
without any further compression or decompression.
VF (VFM, VFO, VFS), max. 8 channels for voice, p p
data, and protection signal
8
One administration system for all applications Protection signal transmission system SWT 3000
PowerLink not only simplifies your communications, but also
makes communications cost-efficient. The PowerSys software
Integration of two devices p p
administers all integrated applications of PowerLink under a
Remote operation via cable or fiber-optic cable p p
identical to the integrated version
standard user interface. This ensures higher operating security
while cutting training times and costs to the minimum.
Single-purpose or multipurpose/alternate p p
multipurpose mode
MUX PDH/SDH
6 9 Alternative transmission routes
Binary I/O Binary I/O
SWT 3000 enables transmission of protection
Fiber optic 11 12 signals via two different routes. Both routes are
14 constantly transmitting. In the event that one
route fails, the second route still bears the signal.
9
Direct fiber-optic connection without repeater
SWT 3000 protection signaling incorporates an
internal fiber-optic modem for long-distance
Pilot Cable
transmission. The maximum distance between
GOOSE I/O GOOSE I/O
two SWT 3000 devices is 150 kilometers.
Power Line Carrier
IEC 61850 IEC 61850
9 10 Fiber-optic connection
between SWT 3000 and a multiplexer
Command Line interfaces Command 12 A short-distance connection of up to two kilometers
interfaces (Analog and Digital) interfaces between SWT 3000 and a multiplexer can be
realized via the integrated fiber-optic modem according
to IEEE C37.94. Alternately, the multiplexer
Application
is connected via FOBox, converting the optical
Transmission of protection signals to quickly identify, isolate and signal to an electrical signal in case the MUX does
resolve problems in the transmission network of a utility not support C37.94.
Advantages
Keeps downtimes to an absolute minimum 13 14 SWT 3000 integration into the PowerLink –
PLC system
Supports IEC 61850 interfaces as well as conventional binary interfaces The SWT 3000 system can be integrated into the
Flexible integration into various customer communication networks PowerLink equipment. Either the analog interface
or a combination of the analog and the digital
Path protection via two different transmission routes for increased
interfaces can be used.
reliability
Analog transmission
Digital transmission
8
EN 100 SDH/PDH EN 100
via MUX and fiber-optic
FO FO
IFC IFC C37.94
SWT 3000 DLE SDH/PDH DLE SWT 3000 One path via digital
11 EN 100 CLE CLE EN 100
network; second path
IFC IFC via 4-wire (or 2-wire)
PowerLink PowerLink
One path via power line
FO CSP CSP FO
SWT 3000 FO FO SWT 3000 and optical fibers; second
12 EN 100 FO DLE EN 100 path via optical fibers and
IFC DLE FO FOBox MUX MUX FOBox IFC
SDH/PDH digital network
PowerLink PowerLink
13 EN 100 EN 100
Power line
IFC IFC
The AKE 100 coupling unit from Siemens described here, In the office area today, the LAN infrastructure is usually suffi-
together with a high-voltage coupling capacitor, forms a high- ciently generously dimensioned to make VoIP communication
pass filter for the required carrier frequencies, whose lower possible without any restrictions. The situation is distinctly
cut-off frequency is determined by the rating of the coupling different if it is necessary to connect distant substations to the
capacitor and the chosen matching ratio. utility’s voice network. If these locations are not integrated in
the corporate backbone network, Power Line Carrier connections
The AKE 100 coupling unit is supplied in four versions and is must be installed. Fig. 8.2-6 shows the basic alternatives for
used for: voice communication via PowerLink.
tȋPhase-to-earth coupling to overhead power lines
tȋPhase-to-phase coupling to overhead power lines Codec Net bit rate Gross bit rate
tȋPhase-to-earth coupling to power cables
G.711 64 kbit/s 87.2 kbit/s
tȋPhase-to-phase coupling to power cables
tȋIntersystem coupling with two phase-to-earth coupling units G.726 32 kbit/s 55.2 kbit/s
G.728 16 kbit/s 31.5 kbit/s
The coupling units for phase-to-phase coupling are adaptable for G.729 8 kbit/s 31.2 kbit/s
use as phase to-earth coupling units. The versions for phase-to-
G.723.1 5.3 kbit/s 20.8 kbit/s
earth coupling can be retrofitted for phase-to-phase coupling, or
can as well be used for intersystem coupling. Table 8.2-3: Bandwidth requirement for VoIP
Analoge interface
a/b
Analog connection
of single phones
8
PowerLink
Analoge interface
E&M
PABX
Analog connection
of PABXs
PowerLink
Digital interface
fE1
PABX Digital connection
of PABXs
PowerLink
TCP/IP interface
PABX
Connection of phones
TCP/IP or PABXs via TCP/IP
Router
PowerLink
Built-in reliability
DECT
Scalable architecture
To allow for quick data transfers between large substations in With live line installation, optical ground wires can be installed
the transmission system, fiber-optic cables are being used to either directly at the top of the tower or below the top between
replace ground wires on high-voltage lines (OPGW: Optical the power-carrying lines (fig. 8.2-9).
Ground Wire).
Special security precautions are taken when high-risk areas
As a result of the growing and often unpredictable feeding of (highways, bodies of water, railways, etc.) are to be crossed
energy into the power supply system by decentralized generators, when installing the optical ground wires below the top of the
it is becoming increasingly difficult and sometimes impossible tower.
for transmission companies to shut off line segments for instal-
lation measures to improve the communication infrastructure. During live line installation, the existing ground wire serves as a
messenger and carries all the installation equipment, such as
The Siemens Live Line Installation process makes it possible to pulleys, the full dielectric prepulling rope and the OPGW itself.
perform such installations or repairs on energized power lines. Thus, the new hybrid cable can be pulled from tower to tower
This installation concept was developed in a joint effort by across the entire delivery length. In high-voltage lines, the usual
Siemens and a team at Dresden University in Germany. delivery length is approximately 4 km.
The Siemens Live Line Installation process can be used for the Siemens is the most experienced and most successful supplier of
following purposes: live line installation of optical ground wires on high-voltage lines
tȋTo replace the ground wire with an optical ground wire, in worldwide, and conducted the first live line installation already
order to provide broadband communication even to smaller in the year 2000.
substations
tȋAdditional installation of a second optical ground wire below
the top of the tower, on especially communication-intensive
segments
tȋTo replace an obsolete or defective optical ground wire.
OPGW
8 2nd OPGW
Backbone communication
via OPGW
Splice Box
Splice box
Fibrer-optic Fibrer-optic
Transmission substations
ODF ODF
Dark fibre Dark fibre
leasing leasing
Corporate network Corporate network
NG NG
backbone backbone
SDH SDH
Automation Transparent Transparent Automation
processes Ethernet channels Ethernet channels processes
Substation for 3rd parties for 3rd parties Substation
Fig. 8.2-8: Live line installation of optical Fig. 8.2-9: Live line installation of OPGW – installation alternatives
ground wire
8.3 Control Center The more recent protocol standards all rely on TCP/IP-based
communication. However, it must be possible today and in the
Communication near future to continue connecting conventional telecontrol
devices (already installed RTUs) via serial interfaces.
8
However, as a result of international standardization there is also tȋProtection against data loss
a market trend here towards standardized protocols like
IEC 60870-5-104, DNP3i protocol or IEC-61850.
CFE Communication Front End Control Center, e.g., Spectrum Power™ (SCADA, Applications)
ELCOM Electricity Utilities Communication
ICCP Inter Control Center
Communication Protocol Communication bus
OPC OLE for Process Control
RTU Remote Terminal Unit TCP/IP
ICCP
CFE OPC
Firewall ELCOM
Different IEC 60870 protocol Automation protocols Inter control
Internet/ telecontrol family (101, 104, DNP3) (SIMATIC NET via TCP/IP for center
Office LAN protocols via IEC 61850, etc. via serial long distances, Profibus communication
serial interface interface or TCP/IP only for short distances) via TCP/IP
Office Web
Utility substation
communication user interface
Fig. 8.3-1: Typical communication interfaces and communication partners of a control center using the example of Spectrum Power™
8
The specification is structured as follows:
• An object-oriented and application-specific data model focused The interfaces can be used for:
on substation automation. • Accessing the protection relays from a PC using the DIGSI
• This model includes object types representing nearly all operating program for aspects of configuration, access of
existing equipment and functions in a substation – circuit- operational and non-operational data.
breakers, protection functions, current and voltage
transformers, waveform recordings, and many more. Remote access via modem or Ethernet modem is possible with a
• Communication services providing multiple methods for serial service port at the relay. This allows remote access to all
information exchange. These services cover reporting and data of the protection relay.
logging of events, control of switches and functions, polling of
data model information. By using the remote communication functions of DIGSI it is
• Peer-to-peer communication for fast data exchange between possible to access relays, e.g., from the office via the telephone
the feeder level devices (protection devices and bay network (fig. 8.4-1). For example, the error log can be trans-
controller) is supported with GOOSE (Generic Object Oriented ferred to the office and DIGSI can be used to evaluate it.
Substation Event). • Integrating the relays into control systems with IEC 60870-5-
• Support of sampled value exchange. 103 protocol, PROFIBUS DP protocol, DNP 3.0 protocol and
• File transfer for disturbance recordings. MODBUS protocol.
• Communication services to connect primary equipment such
as instrument transducers to relays. The new standardized IEC 61850 protocol (section 8.3.1) has
• Decoupling of data model and communication services from been available since October 2004, and with its SIPROTEC units
specific communication technologies. Siemens was the first manufacturer worldwide to provide this
• This technology independence guarantees long-term stability standard.
for the data model and opens up the possibility to switch over • Thanks to the standardized interfaces IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-
RS485
Ethernet-based system with SICAM Signal
converter
SIPROTEC is tailor-made for use with the SICAM power automa- 7XV5650
tion system together with IEC 61850 protocol. Via the 100 Mbit/s
7SJ60 7RW60 7SD60 7**6 7**6
Ethernet bus, the units are linked electrically or optically to the
station unit. Connection may be simple or redundant. The inter-
face is standardized, thus also enabling direct connection of units Fig. 8.4-1: Basic remote relay communication
from other manufacturers to the LAN. Units featuring an
IEC 60870-5-103 interface or other serial protocols can be con-
nected via the Ethernet station bus to SICAM by means of serial/
Ethernet converters. DIGSI and the Web monitor can also be used SICAM
Station unit
over the same station bus. Together with Ethernet/IEC 61850 an
interference-free optical solution can be provided. Thus, the Ethernet cable
8
as well as DNP3 (serial or over IP), and also protocols such as
PROFIBUS DP and MODBUS. SIPROTEC relays with IEC 61850 SIPROTEC relays with serial
protocol and Ethernet interface IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
Specifically with SICAM PAS, the devices with serial commu-
nication can be reliably connected directly to the substation Fig. 8.4-2: Ethernet-based system with SICAM
controller. Moreover it is also possible to use LAN for backbone
communication throughout the substation, connecting such
serial devices with serial hubs in a decentralized approach.
this protocol, thereby providing status information, e.g., to the
Additionally it is also possible to connect subordinated control center, not only for IEDs and substation controllers, but
substations and Remote Terminal Units (RTU) using the protocol also for Ethernet switches and other “SNMP devices”.
standards IEC 60870-5-101 (serial communication) and
IEC 60870-5-104 (TCP/IP). Another communication protocol, well-known from the indus-
trial automation sector, is also required for substation automa-
Especially for communication with small RTUs, dial-up tion applications: OPC (OLE for Process Control, see also Control
connections can be established based on IEC 60870-5-101. Center Communication). Additional interoperable solutions are
possible with OPC, especially for data exchange with devices and
Additional features of TCP/IP communication applications of industrial automation. SICAM PAS supports both
Besides the traditional protocols mentioned for data exchange OPC server and OPC client.
with IEDs, in the world of Ethernet it is also important to be
aware of the status of communication infrastructure devices The linking of protection relays and/or bay controllers to the
such as switches. In this context, the protocol SNMP (Simple station level is chosen according to the size and importance of
Network Management Protocol) helps a lot. SICAM PAS supports the substation. Whereas serial couplings with IEC 60870-5-103
are the most economical solution in small distribution substa- attention should also be paid to correct handling of the earthing,
tions (only medium voltage), Ethernet in compliance with and also to possible impact on the EMC due to the primary
IEC 61850 is normally used for important high-voltage and technology or power cables. Separate cable routes for power
extra-high-voltage substations. In addition there are a number of supply and communications are an essential basis for this. A
different physical designs, based on the local situation as reduction of the number of field devices per master to about 16
regards cable runs and distances, and on the requirements in to 20 devices is recommended in order to be able to make
terms of availability and EMC influences. adequate use of the data transfer performance.
The simplest version is the serial bus wiring in accordance with A star configuration of the wiring is rather easy to handle and
RS 485 in which the field devices are electrically connected to a can be in the form either of electrical wiring as per RS 232, or
master interface on the SICAM central unit (fig. 8.4-3). This optical fiber. Here again, the number of devices per master
wiring is particularly recommended in new installations. Special should be limited as before (fig. 8.4-4).
SICAM SICAM
Converter
RS 485/232 Starcoupler
IEC 60870-5-103 (RS 485)
IEC 60870-5-103
SIPROTEC SIPROTEC
Fig. 8.4-3: Serial bus wiring in accordance with RS 485 Fig. 8.4-4: Star wiring in accordance with RS 232 or
per fiber-optic cable
8
SICAM
Switch
Switch Switch
Fig. 8.4-5: Ethernet: Star configuration electrical or optical Fig. 8.4-6: Ethernet: Optical ring with external switches
The configurations with Ethernet are similar, with star and ring (fig. 8.4-7). In this application, though, a suitable device from
versions available. Variants with redundancy complete these RuggedCom must be used for the central switch so that the fast
configurations. The star configuration is especially recom- switchover times can also be used in the case of a malfunction
mended for central arrangements with short distances for the on the ring. The number of devices in the ring is restricted to 27.
cable routes (fig. 8.4-5).
Several rings can also be combined on the basis of this funda-
A fiber-optic ring can be made up of individual switches. That is mental structure, e.g., one per voltage level. Usually these
especially advisable if several devices are to be connected in rings are combined to form a higher level ring which then
each feeder (fig. 8.4-6). communicates with redundant station devices. This version
offers the highest availability for station-internal communica-
A more economical solution is the fiber-optic ring with SIPROTEC tion (fig. 8.4-8).
relays because these devices have a switch directly integrated
SICAM
Switch
8
Switch Switch
Switch Switch
Protocols
tȋSerial protocols
tȋEthernet protocols
Ethernet protocols
The Ethernet module can be plugged in once or multiple times
in the device. This enables running identical or different protocol
applications in multiple instances. Multiple networks are pos-
sible for IEC 61850 or DNP3 TCP, but they can also be operated
in a common Ethernet network. A module implements the Fig. 8.4-14: Optical Ethernet module
IEC 61850 protocol application, e.g., the data exchange between
8
devices using GOOSE messages. The other module is responsible
for the client-server communication over the DNP TCP protocol.
The client-server architecture of IEC 61850 enables one server
(device) to send reports to up to 6 clients simultaneously. In this
case, only one network is used.
Examples
Redundancies to substation automation systems
IEC 60870-5-103/ IEC 60870-5-103/
tȋ2 redundant substation automation systems DNP3 DNP3
tȋ2 different substation automation systems. Master Master
Serial connections
Example 1: Two redundant substation automation systems
Star coupler Star coupler
Fig. 8.4-15 show shows a serial optical network which connects
the serial protocol interfaces of the device to one master, respec-
tively. Transmission is accomplished in multipoint-star configura-
tion and with interference-free isolation via optical fiber. IEC 103 via serial
double module
or independent
For the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, the device supports special
SIPROTEC 5 serial modules
redundancy procedures. For instance, a primary master can be
Device 1 Device 2 Device n
configured that is preferred to the second master in control
direction. The current process image is transmitted to both
masters. Fig. 8.4-15: Redundant IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP 3 communication
Switch Switch
Switch Switch
SIPROTEC 5
SIPROTEC 5
DIGSI 5
Substation controller Substation controller
DNP3 TCP Slave DIGSI DNP3 Master GOOSE
Client-Server communication
via the integrated Ethernet
interface
Switch Switch
Today, more than 250,000 Siemens devices in more than 3,000 Ethernet ring
substations are in operation worldwide in stations with RSTP. In
case of ring interruptions, RSTP reconfigures the communication
within a short time, and provides a secure operation of substa-
tions.
SIPROTEC 5
Seemless redundancy PRP and HSR
New technologies reduce the time for reconfiguration of Fig. 8.4-21: Operation with integrated switch and ring redundancy
8
communication networks in case of interruptions to about
nothing. These technologies are:
tȋPRP = Parallel Redundancy Protocol
tȋHSR = High Available Seamless Ring Redundancy
Both systems have the same principle and are specified in Ring structure
IEC 62439-3.
Switch 1 Switch 2
PRP-B
A Switch Switch Switch
B
Switch Switch Switch Switch A
Switch
B
Switch Switch Switch Switch Switch
Redbox
Switch Switch
PRP-B
Switch Switch Switch PRP-B
8
Switch Switch Switch
A B
RB RB
Switch Switch
RB RB
Redbox
Switch RB RB Switch
RB = Redbox
Switch
PRP-A
PRP-B
Switch
A B
up to 50 devices on the ring
RB RB
Switch Switch
RB RB
RB RB
Redbox
8
–ȋHSR (seamless)
This cost-effective solution of fig. 8.4-25 can be achieved by: tȋDual link and RSTP: Field proven established technology
tȋ2 switches at the control room tȋPRP: High level redundancy through double network solution
tȋ2 switches in the field tȋHSR: High level redundancy through cost effective ring
tȋ2 Redboxes (RB) per HSR ring network structure. Combinable with PRP network.
tȋUp to 50 devices per HSR ring tȋSiemens Seamless Ethernet Media Redundancy Suite:
tȋEasy expansion by additional 2 PRP switches SICAM PAS, SIPROTEC and Redbox
tȋSIPROTEC with integrated RSTP/PRP/HSR switches
SIPROTEC 4 offers many features to reliably and safely handle A protection topology consists of 2 to 6 devices, which
data exchange via communication networks. Depending on the communicate point to point via communication links. It can be
bandwidth available, a communication converter for structured as a redundant ring or as a chain structure (see
G703-64 kbit/s or X21-64/128/512 kbit/s can be selected. For fig. 8-4.20), and within a topology the protection links can have
higher communication speed, a communication converter with different bandwidths. A certain amount of binary information
G703-E1 (2,048 kbit/s) or G703-T1 (1,554 kbit/s) is available. and measured values can be transmitted bi-directionally
between the devices depending on the bandwidth. The connec-
tion with the lowest bandwidth determines this number. The
user can route the information with DIGSI 5.
10 km overhead line, 110 kV cable
Multi-mode FO 62.5/125 mm
Module 1: 1.5 km ST connectors
This information has the following tasks:
Module 2: 3.5 km ST connectors • Topology data and values are exchanged for monitoring and
testing the link
• Protection data, for example differential protection data or
Single-mode FO 9/125 mm direction comparison data of the distance protection,
Module 3: 24 km LC connectors
7SD610
Module 4: 60 km LC connectors
7SD610 is transferred.
7SA6 7SA6
Module 4: 100 km LC connectors • Time synchronization of the devices can take place via the
8
link, in which case a device of the protection topology
Fig. 8.4-26: Protection Data Interface using direct FO connection
assumes the role of timing master.
• The link is continuously monitored for data faults and failure,
and the runtime of the data is measured.
200 km overhead line, 400 kV
Protection links integrated in the device have previously been
used for differential protection (fig. 8-4.26) and for teleprotec-
820 nm X21
max. G703.1 tion of the distance protection. In addition to these protection
1.5 km Digital applications, you can configure protection links in all devices in
communication
network
SIPROTEC 5. At the same time, any binary information and
Communication Communication measured values can be transferred between the devices. Even
7SD610 converter converter 7SD610
7SA6 7SA6
connections with low bandwidth, e.g., 64 kbit/s can be used for
this.
Fig. 8.4-27: Protection Data Interface using digital communication Use of the protection link for remote access with DIGSI 5
networks
Access with DIGSI 5 to devices at the remote ends is possible via
the protection interface. This allows devices at the remote ends
to be remotely read out, or parameters to be set using the
existing communication connection.
Protection topology
Fig. 8-4.28: Protection communication of the differential protection Fig. 8-4.31: Protection communication via an IEEE C37.94 (2 Mbits/s)
and transfer of binary signals interface – direct fiber-optic connection to a multiplexer
Fig. 8-4.29: Protection communication via a communication network Fig. 8-4.32: Protection communication via single-mode fiber and
52 52
2 km with 62.5 μm/125 μm 9 μm/125 μm single-mode optical fiber
multi-mode optical fiber Communication converter PI PI
FO direct connection
Fig. 8-4.30: Protection communication via a copper connection Fig. 8-4.33: Protection communication via direct fiber-optic
connections
8
bandwidth (64 kbit/s < Bandwidth ≤ 2,048 kbit/s).
8.5 Communication One of the key challenges of a Smart Grid therefore is quickly
balancing out the energy supply and energy consumption in the
Network Solutions distribution system (fig. 8.5-1).
for Distribution Grids A prerequisite for implementing a solution for this demand is
monitoring and managing as many components of a power
(Backhaul/Access supply system as possible all the way to the consumer. The basis
for this is a reliable communication infrastructure. For medium
Communication) voltage, at least the following system components must be
integrated into a Smart Grid and managed:
tȋThe key ring-main units
8.5.1 Introduction tȋAll large distributed producers (solar/wind farms, biogas/
hydroelectric power plants, etc.)
In the past, electricity was mainly produced by bulk generation tȋLarge buildings, campuses, refrigerated warehouses, etc.
at central locations, and distributed to consumers via the distri-
bution systems. Energy peaks (e.g., at midday) were well known For low voltage, primarily households and small producers
and balanced out by reserve capacity of central power plants. It of renewable energy are involved.
was therefore usually not necessary to specially control the
lower-level distribution networks, or even to integrate the With respect to their role in the power supply system, consumers
consumers into the grid monitoring system. can be divided into two groups:
tȋ“Standard consumers”, who have smart meters and optimize
Ever since renewable energy has been significantly their electricity costs via ongoing price signals depending on
expanded, electricity is being fed into both the medium-voltage supply and demand
and low-voltage systems, depending on changing external tȋ“Prosumers” (prosumer = producer + consumer), who can feed
conditions (e.g., weather, time of day, etc.). These fluctuating surplus energy into the power grid – such as solar power or
energy resources can severely impair the stability of the distribu- energy generated by combined heat and power systems (CHP);
tion grids. many can also intermediately store energy using possibilities
such as night storage heaters or e-cars.
Buildings account for 40 % of the world’s energy consumption
and 20 % of total CO2 emissions. Therefore, smart buildings also While the communication requirements for standard consumers
play a central role in the Smart Grid as they provide a huge are concentrated on smart metering including price signals,
potential for energy efficiency. Actively influencing their con- time-critical control signals and power quality data must also be
sumption and generation, smart buildings support the system transmitted for prosumers. Therefore, in addition to smart
stability and allow generators to consider other options before meters, prosumers have energy gateways, which process and
adding new generation facilities. forward these control signals accordingly.
8 Communications Applications
infrastructure
Control Center
(EMS/DMS)
MV substation Wind onshore MV substation Virtual Power Plant
Micro Grid Controller
Fiber optics/ Distribution
Public charging
SHD/Ethernet
Medium voltage
etc.
NPLC, BPLC, WiMAX
(Access)
GSM/UMTS/LTE
DSL, router, switch Homes Homes (smart meter Smart homes with Distributed
(smart meter with NPLC) with other connection) energy gateway energy resources
Fig. 8.5-1: Typical power distribution network integrating ring-main units, consumers, prosumers, distributed energy resources, etc.
The young history of Smart Grids has already shown that utilities 8.5.2 Communication Infrastructures
do not implement it as a whole from the scratch. They usually for Backhaul and Access Networks
start with smart metering projects with later extensions of Smart
Grid applications.
Optical fibers
Already with the first roll-out, the design of the communication The best choice for all communication needs
infrastructure has to consider the growing requirements for Optical fibers is the best transmission medium for medium-
these extensions. After a large deployment of metering infra- voltage and low-voltage applications because it is robust and not
structure in the first step, it is not acceptable to replace the susceptible to electromagnetic disturbances or capacity con-
communication network a few years later because the require- straints. That is why system operators who choose this tech-
ments for the next subsets of Smart Grid applications cannot be nology will be well prepared when their communication needs
met anymore. multiply in the future.
Communications infrastructures for all conditions Fiber-optic cables are laid underground to connect individual
The communication infrastructure in the medium-voltage and substations. This work is associated with heavy civil works, and
low-voltage distribution systems is usually heterogeneous, and therefore with great expense. However, when new power cables
the suitable technologies depend to a large extent on the local are installed, the cost-benefit analysis paints a clear picture.
topology (large city, rural region, distances, etc.). It must there- Fiber-optic cables should generally be the first choice in this
fore be specifically tailored for each customer. case.
8
to make this communication channel a viable option. concentrator
400 V 400 V RMU 400 V RMU 400 V RMU
Depending on the applications being installed inside the RMU, Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter
an Ethernet switch/router might be needed in order to concen- Homes Homes (smart Smart homes Distributed
(smart meter with NPLC) meter with wireless with energy energy resources
trate the flow of communications. These data concentrators can connection) gateway
be implemented as customized solutions or integrated, for
example, in the RTU (remote terminal unit). To meet these Fig. 8-5.2: Fiber-optic infrastructure for distribution network
requirements, Siemens offers a full range of all above-men-
tioned communication technologies including rugged switches
and routers that comply with energy industry standards.
8
MV substation MV substation substation
MV
BPL
Public charging
Cold store for e-cars 6 kV–22 kV 6 kV–22 kV
Service car
MV MV MV MV RMU with
RMU with BPL BPL BPL
LV
BPL
LV
meter data
meter data BPL BPL
concentrator
concentrator 400 V 400 V RMU 400 V RMU 400 V RMU
400 V 400 V RMU 400 V RMU 400 V RMU
LV
BPL
LV
LV LV BPL
BPL BPL
Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter
Homes Homes (smart Smart homes Distributed Homes Homes (smart Smart homes Distributed
(smart meter with NPLC) meter with with energy energy resources (smart meter with NPLC) meter with with energy energy resources
wireless connection) gateway wireless connection) gateway
Fig. 8-5.3: Broadband power line carrier for medium-voltage and Fig. 8-5.4: WiMAX network
low-voltage applications
Communication
Communication
Energy line
Energy line
Energy line with MV
Energy line with
NPLC communication MV substation substation
MV substation MV substation NPLC communication
6 kV–22 kV Service
car
6 kV–22 kV
8
RMU with RMU with
meter data meter data
concentrator concentrator
400 V 400 V RMU 400 V RMU 400 V RMU 400 V 400 V RMU 400 V RMU 400 V RMU
Fig. 8-5.5: Wireless mesh network Fig. 8-5.6: Public cellular network
SCADA firewall
DMZ (demilitarized zone) SCADA honeypot
Secure remote access
Office network
Other control center
Network blueprint incorporates:
Admin LAN Sophisticated logging and auditing concept
Transfer Regular cyber security assessment
networks Hardened network infrastructure
(switches, router)
SICAM PAS network DMZ (demilitarized zone) DMZ (demilitarized zone) SICAM 1703 network
Field devices
Computers exposed to special risks, for example, in the demilita- CERT checks the products for weak points by means of selective
rized zone (DMZ), can also be protected with a host-based hacker attacks. The team also collects and distributes reports on
intrusion prevention system. All computer systems are equipped weak points and upgrade reports for third-party components
with virus scanners in order to withstand the permanent threat and links them to recommendations, concrete proposals and
due to malware. The remote administration and connection of implementation specifications.
other networks is effected by VPN tunnels that guarantee access
protection at the highest level.
8.6.5 Sensible Use of Standards
The load-carrying network infrastructure itself (routers,
switches) also undergoes system hardening in order to match The object of standards is to guarantee quality, to increase IT
up to the consistently high security requirements for the system security in the long term, and to protect investment. There are
as a whole. now hundreds of IT security standards in existence, but only
some of them are really necessary and worthwhile for a system.
8.6.2 Secure throughout from On the basis of its many years experience in the market, Siemens
Interface to Interface chooses those standards and guidelines that protect a network
reliably and effectively. This also includes advising customers on
With the advent of the Internet and increasing networking which IT security standards need to be observed at international
within the systems, every interface represents a potential risk. and also at regional level.
These risks must be easy to estimate in the system. With Inte-
grated Energy Automation, Siemens therefore applies the philos- The object of Integrated Energy Automation (IT Security) is
ophy of IT security offering simple protection. For this reason, permanent IT security for the system in the long term. Therefore
Siemens attaches greatest importance to homogenization by reliable and secure products and infrastructures are not enough.
means of standardized and reproducible processes for authenti- With Integrated Energy Automation, Siemens also implements
cation, authorization, intrusion detection and prevention, mal- appropriate security processes that ensure that IT security is
ware protection, effective patch management for third-party actively implemented throughout, both internally and at the
components, standard logging and continuous security tests. plant operator‘s, and is guaranteed over the entire life cycle of
the plant.
8
and regular tests – also specially for third-party components means that security of products is already integrated in the
– with a defined combination of IT security test programs for entire development process, and not just in the test phase.
detecting weak points (Test Suite) are used for this.
IT security guidelines for development, processing, service and
other functions ensure that IT security is actively implemented
8.6.4 In-House CERT as Know-how throughout all processes. Examples of this are security briefings
Partner for product management before a product is developed or
programmed in the first place. Programmers operate according
Siemens has its own in-house Computer Emergency Response to defined guidelines for secure coding, which are specified by
Team (CERT). An organization such as this that discusses sub- the Siemens CERT.
jects critical to IT security and issues current warnings is nor-
mally only maintained by universities or governments in order to For an effective patch management, Siemens tests updates of
provide users with cross-industry information. third-party security products, for example, firewalls, already in
the development process of the products. Continuous penetra-
The Siemens in-house CERT was established in 1997 and since tion tests of all relevant products are stipulated in a test plan.
then has issued warnings about security loopholes, while This also includes the definition and establishment of a security
offering approaches for solutions which are processed especially test environment and matching test cases.
for the company’s areas of competence. As know-how partner,
the work of the Siemens CERT also involves drawing up rules for In this way, Siemens subjects its products to an objective and
the secure development and programming of in-house products critical certification process with which IT security is guaranteed
and the continuous further training of in-house programmers. and made transparent on the basis of suitably selected stan-
dards.
Plant operators
Considering these trends and inherent requirements for changes LV Distribution System
in the power supply system, based on variations in customer Low-Voltage Network
Distributed Generation Units
structure (location and power demand), new technologies in
generation (renewable generation by wind energy converters)
and network equipment (devices based on power electronics) as Fig. 9.1-1: Hierarchical structure of power supply systems
Standardized design concepts and simple network structures tȋAdequacy, the ability of the system to supply all customers in
are primarily used; however, it is also common to use normal operation
individual and more complex solutions for special areas like tȋSafety, protection of people and equipment against harm and
important HV/MV or MV/MV substations, or customers with damage caused by electricity
special power quality requirements. tȋSecurity, the stability of the system, especially after
tȋThe subtransmission system typically consists of regional disturbances like load shifts or electrical failures
high-voltage (HV, above 50 up to 200 kV) networks and tȋPower quality, continuous supply of electricity within constant
medium-sized power plants. Power is supplied to the separate frequency, voltage level and other quality parameters – also in
HV/MV substations feeding the subordinate MV networks. disturbed operation
While failures in distribution networks often lead to individual tȋEconomical performance, keeping defined budgets and other
or local supply interruptions for customers, failures in the economic performance criteria
subtransmission level can lead to more widespread, regional tȋEcological performance, preventing pollution and minimizing
supply interruptions. Therefore, these networks are typically the impact of electrical equipment (e.g., lines) on the
operated in a meshed structure. environment
tȋFinally, the transmission level contains HV and extra-high-
voltage (EHV, 200 up to 750 kV and above) networks with Network planning is required to develop and support the stra-
interconnections to neighboring systems and countries, where tegic perspective of any renewal, extension or modification
possible. The networks are characterized by a comparably low project in a power supply system, and it links to all steps in the
number of components and by customized concepts. Large life cycle of such projects (fig. 9.2-1). Initially, it is obvious that
power plants providing the bulk of the power generation are network planning assists in the development of the general
connected to the transmission-level structure. Interconnected project idea and in feasibility studies, as well as in the subse-
operation enables the system operators to make use of the quent planning phase. During operation of the equipment,
balancing effects of different load patterns and different issues like failure investigations, performance analyses and
characteristics of power plants in different areas, e.g., pump definition of maintenance strategies call for network planning
storage hydro power plants in the Alps. Such an approach is a support. Finally, the requirement for modification, extension or
highly economical way to provide reserve generation capacity renewal closes the life cycle and/or triggers new projects sup-
and support in emergency situations. Failures in the ported by the input of network consulting.
transmission system involve the risk of blackouts in large areas
or even whole countries. Besides meshed operation, special The complexity of network planning does not only arise from the
attention is also paid to the substation design in transmission significant geographic extent of power supply systems and the
networks. different hierarchical levels of their distinctive functions. It is
also complex because of the fact that different objectives are
often contradictory, e.g., technical performance vs. economical
performance. Network planning covers a wide range of different
time horizons – far future, near future and the next few days,
hours or minutes.
may be extended to several other data items as required for CAPEX Evaluation
customer-specific standards and requirements. It might not be backup protection functionality, and the calculation of
sufficient to execute the defined set of calculations only once – appropriate functional parameters for each protection relay
typically, several different system scenarios need to be analyzed ensure that these requirements are met.
for each variant. Different system scenarios are characterized by, tȋAsset management
for example, different load situations (winter/summer) or oper- The systematic and comprehensive consideration of technical
ating conditions (normal/disturbed operation), or as different and economic performance indicators of both individual
phases in the transition of the present network state into the equipment and the entire system over the complete life cycle
desired target state. In the end, comprehensive information on requires detailed data. Certain information can only be
the technical and economic performance of the various network provided by appropriate network calculations and supports,
variants is available. Assessing these results will lead to the final e.g., the prioritization of equipment in maintenance schedules
solution, or recommendation, for the problem addressed in the or renewal programs, or the prognosis of expected technical
study. system performance.
tȋPower quality
Typical issues addressed in a network planning project Today, many electrical appliances are becoming increasingly
Network planning projects are highly individual, because in each sensitive to power quality issues, like harmonics, voltage
case the special conditions of the supply area, load demand and fluctuations or voltage dips. It is important to identify the
geographic distribution, technical standards and requirements, current status of such power quality aspects in the system
current status of the existing system, etc., have to be consid- through evaluation, and to include these facets in the system
ered. The actual scope and goal of each project are different as model in order to derive suitable mitigation measures, such as
well. Typical topics that may be addressed in network planning filters. Harmonics are becoming an even more widespread
include: problem, because new kinds of electrical appliances often
tȋStrategic network planning generate significant levels of harmonics. As a result, the total
Completely new structures, modifications or extensions are to harmonic distortion is increasing, and certain network
be developed for individual plants, certain areas within the configurations may even lead to resonances.
system, or even for whole power supply systems need to be tȋEarthing and interferences
examined. The project scope can comprise anything from the Earthing is an important aspect of power supply systems and
selection of general network structures and voltage levels highly relevant for safety issues. Appropriate earthing has to
down to detailed functional specifications for substation ensure that fault currents are limited to acceptable levels, and
design. The typical aspects of the system level under in the design of earthing systems the local geological features
consideration – transmission network, distribution network or have to be considered. Fault currents or magnetic fields may
industrial network – need to be considered as well. also cause disturbing interferences with other technical
tȋDynamic performance of generators and transmission networks. Such interferences on other electricity, pipe or
networks communication networks, for example, need to be studied in
Transmission networks are responsible for the secure operation order to delineate suitable mitigation and protection measures
of the power supply system in large areas. A major concern is (called electromagnetic compatibility, EMC).
system stability, including several different aspects such as tȋInsulation coordination, switching transients
inter-area and intra-area oscillations of generators, transient Electrical phenomena related to switching and lightning
stability or voltage stability. In large power systems, several strikes, for example, can lead to high transient overvoltages in
generators or groups of generators may start to oscillate power supply systems. In order to prevent significant
against each other as a result of operational changes or system equipment damage, a suitable insulation level for all
disturbances. These inter-area oscillations need to be damped
effectively in order to prevent system instability. By suitable
calculations, the oscillations are analyzed and the optimal
components is required. Related studies can include
measurements of such transient phenomena, suitable
modeling in special network analysis tools and the placing and
9
placement and settings of damping devices is evaluated. rating of surge arresters and other mitigation equipment.
tȋDynamic performance of industrial networks tȋSpecial power supply systems
In industrial networks comprising local generation, the dynamic Alongside the generally known networks for public and
performance is of crucial importance. Besides the requirement industrial power supply, special power supply systems are
to run the local generation in operation, special scenarios like employed for exceptional tasks, such as oil-drilling or pumping
decoupling from the public network, island operation, or platforms and vessels, underwater systems in wind parks or oil
system recovery after voltage dips need appropriate planning. and gas plants, or isolated supply of ore mines. For all these
In addition, the start-up of large motors may pose challenges systems, different planning tasks need to be defined and
to the dynamic performance of the system. performed in order to ensure a safe and reliable operation
tȋProtection design and coordination despite the many components and aspects involved.
Electrical failures in power supply systems occur rarely, but
nevertheless regularly, e.g., lightning strikes. They need to be
cleared as fast and as selectively as possible in order to
minimize safety risks and disturbances of system operation.
The design of suitable protection systems, considering also
Transmission
Siemens has used its great experience and know-how in network
planning to develop powerful system simulation and analysis
Public Primary tools to assist engineers in their highly responsible work. The
9 utilities equipment software tools of the Power System Simulator PSS®Product Suite
are leading products with respect to technical performance and
user-friendliness. Comprehensive interfaces enable the interac-
tion of all PSS®Product Suite tools, and also support the integra-
tion with other IT systems.
Secondary Industrial
equipment customers PSS®E
With over 800 customers and 10,000 users in more than 100
countries, PSS®E (Power System Simulator for Engineering) is
Distribution the premier software tool used by electrical transmission utilities
and consultants worldwide.
PSS®SINCAL
PSS®SINCAL (Siemens Network Calculation) is a high-perfor-
mance planning tool for the simulation, evaluation and optimi-
zation of supply systems. It is successfully applied by more than
300 municipal utilities, regional and national power supply
companies, industrial plants and consultants worldwide.
PSS®NETOMAC
The deregulation of the energy market is creating new demands
on system planning engineers and system operators in power
utilities and industrial companies. Traditional areas of activity
have to be rethought and new ones acquired. In order to suc- Transient <–>
ceed in the open competitive markets of today, it is extremely Transient mode Stability mode
important to have all required information available at the right
time and in the right place. Also the protection against wide-
area black-outs becomes more and more important (fig. 9.3-5). Fig. 9.3-5: Results from Time- and Frequency Domain calculations
DINEMO
DINEMO (Digital Network Model) is an intelligent signal treating
device that works as a real-time transceiver between protection
relays or turbine controllers and simulation programs for elec-
trical power systems like PSS®NETOMAC. DINEMO runs on a
standard Windows® PC and allows real-time simulation with up
to sixteen analog output signals that are continuously calculated
in PSS®NETOMAC. Four analog or sixteen digital feedback signals
of the equipment under test can be treated, allowing a closed- Fig. 9.3-7: Illustration of single software parts of SIGUARD®Solutions
loop interaction between protection relays or controllers and the
simulation program. Such real-time tests, with round-trip times
of up to 0.15 ms, are possible using PSS®NETOMAC with its SIGUARD®PDP – Phasor Data Processor increases the observ-
high-speed calculation algorithms running on Dual Core CPUs. ability of power systems with the help of time synchronized,
DINEMO is used for tests with analog controllers with input highly exact measurements (PMU – Phase Measurement Units).
voltages of max. ±10 V and with frequencies of up to 5 kHz.
With additional power amplifiers, close-to-reality tests can be SIGUARD®DSA – automatic and intelligent Dynamic Security
accomplished with standard protection relays. DINEMO allows Assessment for calculation of the stability margin and validation
extensive tests on protection relay configurations using detailed
models of all network elements (fig. 9.3-6).
of remedial actions.
SIGUARD®Solutions support the decision making process of the The SIGUARD® team offers a combination of software, training
power system operator. The basic idea is to increase the observ- and consulting to our customers. The software forms the basis
ability and the controllability of the system and to perform an of SIGUARD. We provide the following services:
automatic, intelligent security assessment. An overview of tȋOn-site commissioning of all or single parts of the
SIGUARD® software tools is given in fig. 9.3-7. SIGUARD®Solutions,
9 applications
tȋConvert operations models to planning models. These modeling projects are coupled with MOD® seasonal and
annual profiles to provide the PSS®E user with a procedure for
The integrated PSS®O functionality comprises: organizing and reorganizing system investigations. All this can
tȋTopology processor be done without generating a great number of PSS®E base cases
tȋState estimation or repeatedly rerunning PSS®E cases when planning sequence
tȋReal-time power flow changes.
tȋContingency analysis
tȋOutage ranking MOD® delivers PSS®E formatted power flow models which can
tȋReal-time mode and study mode. be processed and utilized by the full PSS® Product Suite. MOD®
revolutionizes transmission planning data manipulation and the
MOD® generation of major study data sets.
MOD® (Model On Demand) significantly extends the capabilities
of PSS®E by enabling the user to manage a great number of MOD® allows the system study engineer to:
change cases for PSS®E. MOD® assembles sets of model changes tȋOrganize and reorganize study cases without the need to
into “projects” (fig. 9.3-9). Projects can then be managed and generate a multitude of PSS®E “base cases”
organized in various fashions depending on the needs of the tȋStore a single master network model
PSS®E user. tȋAccommodate seasonal and annual profile data sets
SIGRADE
SIGRADE (Siemens Grading) is a software program for overcur-
rent protection coordination of high, medium and low-voltage
networks. It allows the selection of grading paths and drawing of
tripping characteristics of fuses and protection relays into a
log-log current-time diagram. SIGRADE guides the user from the
initial simple sketch of the project through the collected informa-
tion and data to short-circuit calculations, supports the user in
developing a protection concept, and documents the complete
relay coordination of overcurrent protection devices (fig. 9.3-10). Fig. 9.3-10: SIGRADE for overcurrent protection coordination
CTDim
CTDim (Current Transformer Dimensioning) is a software pro-
gram for current transformer (CT) dimensioning, dynamic
simulation of CT behavior and drawing of saturation curves
(fig. 9.3-11). Reports are prepared automatically. The optimiza-
tion of current transformers with regard to technical require-
ments and economic aspects is becoming more and more impor-
tant. CTDim makes current transformer dimensioning more
efficient. CTDim saves engineering and production costs by
optimizing the current transformer data.
PSS®MUST
The capability to move power from one part of the transmission
grid to another is a key commercial and technical concern in the
restructured electric utility environment. Engineers determine
transmission transfer capability by simulating network condi-
tions with equipment outages during changing network condi-
tions. Many uncertainties remain in the process.
9
The purpose of the PSS®MUST (Managing and Utilizing System
Transmission) software is to efficiently calculate:
tȋTransaction impacts on transmission areas, interfaces,
monitored elements or flowgates
tȋGeneration redispatch factors for relieving overloads
tȋIncremental transmission capability (FCITC)
tȋFCITC variations with respect to network changes, transactions Fig. 9.3-12: PSS®MUST for transmission transfer capability analysis
and generation dispatch
tȋThe impact of transmission element outages on power flow by
both DC and AC contingency analysis
PSS®MUST complements PSS®E data handling and analysis func- versatile Microsoft Excel interface, coupled with the ability to run
tions with the most advanced linear power flow and user interface automated scripts, simplifies and reduces data setup time, and
available (fig. 9.3-12). The program’s speed, ease-of-use and improves both results display and understanding.
10
10
The comprehensive portfolio of Network Service solutions Asset HVDC – FACTS Advisory
comprises advisory services, asset management and a wide array Management Services
Services
of operation, management and maintenance packages – all Utility & Industry Networks
provided by professionals with many years of experience, and a
proven track record in power technology applications and the Developers and Investors
energy business. In a nutshell: Siemens helps make the most of
a given power system in terms of efficiency, reliability and
profitability (fig. 10.1-1).
The Siemens approach to the provision of O&M services is Siemens’s portfolio of O&M services includes the following
proven every day. The key to success is combining the organiza- elements (fig. 10.1-3):
Netawork
Services Advisory Services & Asset Management
PMI
10
Transformer Installation/ Reactive
Services Retrofit/ Maintenance/
Upgrade/ Spares/
Extension Repairs
Independent
Development
Assessment
Condition Assessment
Inventory, Diagnostic,
Testing, Monitoring
Acquisition
Financial Management
Planning, Design,
Accounting, Taxes, Revenues,
Procurement, Commissioning
Expenses, Cash Flow, Legal
Licenses, CapEx
Asset Management
Maintenance Program
Risk Management
Time Based (TBM), Condition
Regulatory, Environmental,
Based (CMB), Reliability
Health and Safety, Quality
Based (RBM), Rehabilitation,
of Service, Financial
Replacement, Costs
Operation
Disposal
Balance Run Time,
Rescue Value,
Best Efficiency Point,
Environmental, Legal
Energy Management, Costs
Implementation Performance
Assistance Follow-up
Siemens provides recommendations that are completely inde- The results provided by our due diligence/advisory services
pendent from product, construction or equipment sales of other enable Siemens’s customers to:
affiliates. Indeed, our recommendations are vendor-neutral and tȋGain an insight into the correlation between technical
are well accepted by third parties such as lenders and other decisions and their business implications (e.g., on network
financial institutions.
Advisory services
cost and service quality)
tȋBuild a sound approach for evaluating relevant aspects of the
system expenditures program, with objective and documented
10
Siemens’s advisory services enable power asset owners and decisions
operators to get the most out of their assets while providing tȋIncrease the efficiency of resource utilization while
options to improve performance. The analysis looks at every safeguarding required quality of service levels in the long run.
material issue from a holistic vantage point. Answers and recom-
mendations explicitly recognize that every decision has tech- Fig. 10.1-7 provides an overview of the core elements of
nical, economical and regulatory implications. Siemens Advisory Services.
10.1.2 Substation Modernization nance strategy for important substation assets like high-voltage
gas-insulated switchgear (GIS), high-voltage circuit-breakers,
Projects
and power transformers.
Because top priority is given to operational continuity in substa-
tions and power systems, any long-term maintenance, modern- Cable and line services
ization and system rehabilitation must be precisely planned. In principle all service offerings by Siemens, such as installation
These are the right opportunities for OEM-driven service proj- and repair, also apply to power cables in the T&D environment.
ects. Siemens offers a variety of corresponding service solutions Currently, Siemens is focusing on cable diagnostics with dif-
for extending the lifespan and size of the substation, or for its ferent detection methodologies.
modernization. Countless examples worldwide serve as refer-
ences for successfully executed service projects. Namely high-frequency partial discharge (PD) diagnostics and
frequency response analysis (FRA) are considered as a field of
activity for Siemens. For the second methodology, Siemens uses
patent-pending Line Resonance Analysis (LIRA®) technology.
10.1.3 Monitoring and Diagnostics The LIRA® system assesses and monitors the general degrada-
tion of the cable insulation caused by harsh environmental
Monitoring systems conditions (high temperatures, humidity, radiation). It also
The condition of your assets is highly relevant to your decision- detects local degradation of the insulation material as a result of
making about service or replacement. With insight into condi- mechanical impact or local abnormal environmental conditions.
tion, the transition to Condition Based Maintenance (CBM) can These diagnostics services are valuable for specific applications
take place. Pending failures can be repaired before a breakdown in power transmission and distribution systems, for subsea cable
occurs. Siemens offers both on-site audits and also online installations like in offshore windfarms, or in the oil and gas
condition monitoring as a stand-alone or integrated system. industry, as well as in power plants.
With Integrated Substation Condition Monitoring (ISCM®), Remote Opperational Support (ROS)
Siemens provides online asset condition information through a Remote services are performed by our Remote Diagnostics
comprehensive range of innovative tools for diagnostic analysis. Center – in short, RDC. On the one hand, remote services assist
Through prediction and prevention of equipment failures, ISCM® the costumer in daily business with remote expert consulting,
protects the customer’s company image as well as his invest- troubleshooting and fault investigation, and on the other hand
ment. The integrated monitoring system guarantees minimum support. Siemens O&M contracts with online Integrated Substa-
downtime, maximum asset performance, nearly real-time rating, tion Condition Monitoring (ISCM®), and with innovative services
and extended lifespan. ISCM® is a fundamental prerequisite for for substations as well as for transmission and distribution
securing the customer’s required performance level, and with it, systems.
long-term entrepreneurial success.
At a glance, the RDC offers:
The Siemens ISCM® solution, customized to the individual tȋISCM®, including expert diagnostics
requirements of the substation, monitors all relevant compo- tȋRemote supervision
nents of the power supply system – from transformers (e.g., tȋRemote services for operation and maintenance contracts
SITRAM integrated condition monitoring system) and switchgear tȋOnline asset data
to overhead lines and cables. It can be seamlessly integrated into tȋRemote troubleshooting.
the existing substation communication and visualization infra-
structure, from simple bay controllers to high-end control center The RDC enables asset data management tailored to the system
applications. Siemens offers one integral solution for all network operator’s needs. With these elements, the implementation of
assets. efficient maintenance concepts like condition-based mainte-
and experience along the entire energy conversion chain, Due to its flexible configuration, operation can take place nearby
Siemens is ideally positioned to supply a sophisticated, compre- the customer, and advanced condition analysis can take place
hensive monitoring concept that covers all equipment within the centrally. System operators can share condition data, but keep
power supply. control and protection data private. Close co-operation between
the Remote Diagnostic Center und the Energy Customer Support
SAFE™ – Audits and Assessments Center offers Siemens’s customers one central point of contact.
With SAFE asset audits, Siemens personnel visit substations for
an inspection – ranging from visual inspection all the way to
extended diagnostics, providing the basis for a targeted mainte-
10.1.4 Transformer Services Quick and cost-effective retrofits make switchgear fit for the
future, with minimal disruption of ongoing operations.
The remaining lifetime of transformers decreases continously as
a consequence of normal ageing processes. The transformer’s Retrofit made easy – rely on an experienced partner
rate of ageing varies considerably from one type of construction Siemens is the experienced partner to depend on when it is time
to the next. It depends on several different facts such as to retrofit medium-voltage switchgear and other related
transformer design, capacity, service and load history, climate, equipment. The offering includes:
and environmental conditions. The critical factors which tȋEvaluation of all required technical information. The
influence the rate of ageing are: switchgear to be retrofitted remains in place and in operation.
tȋOperating temperatures (under load, ambient) tȋMeasurement and development of the most suitable solution,
tȋMoisture content and increases (e.g., decomposition product testing, and verifications in AutoCAD.
of hydrocarbons in insulation) tȋTransport of the ready-to-use trucks to the system operator’s
tȋOxygen level and inrush (e.g., trough conservator) plant, installation, and commissioning.
tȋMechanical and electrical stress (e.g., short circuit events, tȋThorough testing of prototype; series production begins after
harmonics, system overvoltage). all tests are successfully passed.
That is why Siemens offers transformer services including: Retrofits quickly pay off. Solutions from Siemens provide many
tȋCondition assessment and diagnostics benefits – and the most important is the high level of system
tȋOnline monitoring availability that can be achieved with the new equipment. In
tȋConsulting and expertise addition to prolonging the equipment’s service life and securing
tȋMaintenance and lifecycle extension the customer’s investments, retrofitting also reduces mainte-
tȋSpare parts, accessories nance costs, as it uses modern vacuum circuit-breaker tech-
tȋRepair and retrofit nology. In addition, retrofitting with Siemens also means a secure
and cost-effective supply of spare parts anywhere in the world.
For details please refer to Transformers, Transformer Lifecycle
Management. Retrofit benefits at a glance:
tȋMinimized downtimes for greater availability of the switchgear
tȋIncreased security of energy supply
tȋCost reduction for maintenance and fault clearance
10.1.5 Switchgear Services tȋNo additional cost for plant and building modifications
tȋSecure global supply of spare parts for crucial wear
Worldwide customer-focused Siemens service centers are able to components.
manage all product-related services for Siemens products, as
well as for Magrini Galileo, Merlin Gerin, Elin Holec and Reyrolle Preventive maintenance and repairs
products. Equipment and systems with a long service life and continuous
fault-free operation provide the best conditions for efficient
Whether in industrial companies, public or private power supply utilization of the operator‘s system. Siemens’s maintenance
and infrastructure, or building technology – power distribution services ensure that all components work safely and reliably, and
plants must basically be available continuously, and they must include major revisions and overhauls to bring assets back to
provide the highest degree of operational safety. Switchgear in reference condition. Siemens keeps customer network assets like
particular must handle the steadily increasing demand for switchgear, transformers, and the substation secondary equip-
electrical energy; but their aging and wear can significantly ment well maintained at all times through regular inspections
impact their functioning. and revisions.
10 SMS
SA 14
SA 36
Ansaldo Siclad
Schneider Fluair
Belldonne
Sprecher & Schuh HPTW
“The only way we can convince our customers to use this con-
tact channel is performance and quality. Test it and get con-
vinced!” Michael Freitag, director of the Energy Customer Sup-
port Center points out.
This ensures a quick and for the customer satisfactory processing Phone: +49 180 524 7000
of all inquiries. Periodically conducted customer satisfaction Fax: +49 180 524 2471
Email: support.energy@siemens.com
surveys give customers the possibility for feedback, and for
Internet: www.siemens.com/energy-support/en
actively forming the process.
10
10 t
8JOEQPXFS
GBSNTHSJE
DPOOFDUJPODPNQMJBODF
t
t
144¤4*/$"-
144¤/&50."$
t
t
1SJODJQMFTPGFMFDUSJDBMFOFSHZ
4NBSU(SJEUFDIOPMPHZBUBHMBODF
t 4PMBSQMBOUTNPOJUPSJOH t 144¤& t 5SBOTNJTTJPOBOEEJTUSJCVUJPOOFUXPSLT
t )7%$BOE'"$54 t 0UIFS4PGUXBSF$PVSTFT t 0JMBOEHBTGVOEBNFOUBMT
t &MFDUSPNPCJMJUZ
t 4NBSUNFUFSJOH
Fig. 10.2-1: Siemens Power Academy TD: Training portfolio for transmission & distribution
Benefit for employers Benefit for participants Benefit for the industry
Employers meet the requirements Participants can certify their skills and knowledge to enhance their Recruiters can aim at certified
of ISO 9001 as employees obtain professional market value at home and abroad. applicants to ensure adequate
specialist knowledge and skills p Enhancement of employee competence (participant receives a capabilities of future employees.
through certification. certificate confirming achieved knowledge)
p More confidence and less mistakes in daily operation through
practice and exercise increases safety and reliability of operation
p Enhancement of one's own market value
p Stay technically up-to-date
10
Customers
Residential >> Commercial and Industrial >> Power Generation
Energy Utilities >> Transmission >> Water Utilities >> Distribution
10
Electricity Water Gas
Prepayment
Some domestic customers prefer to pay for their energy before
they use it, adopting a “pay-as-you-go” approach to energy. This Fig. 10.3-2: Meter installation
can be done via a special prepayment meter that uses a top-up
card or key mechanism.
The UK has the world’s largest meter system, with over 2 million
meter points.
Grid metering
Siemens is a leading provider of grid metering and high-accuracy
metering solutions in the electricity value chain. Siemens offers
services to power generation and transmission companies world-
wide, which enables them to get the most accurate view of the
electricity they produce and put through the network. This
product and service offering fits perfectly with the meter opera-
tions element of the value chain, and enables power generation
and distribution customers to manage and maintain their rev-
enue stream.
Submetering
Siemens provides meter operations services for non-fiscal pur-
10
poses, including submetering applications. These can be
installed and integrated into energy management systems for
individual or multi-utility (gas, water, electricity) applications.
Siemens provides accurate consumption information at the point Fig. 10.3-3: Q-Smart prepayment meter installed
of use and visibility via Web-based solutions. Siemens offers
tailored solutions and enables the system operator to monitor
and control energy usage in different business locations. Large
retailers and industrial customers use this service, which can be
linked to their billing or finance system.
10.3.3 Data Management Siemens also has the ability to support a number of different
communications technologies – GPRS, Power Line Carrier (sig-
In this section of the meter-to-cash value chain, Siemens ensures naling wire for the low-voltage cables) and fixed radio technolo-
that the data is accurate. That means Siemens aggregates and gies – depending upon what the customer or market requires.
processes the data, deletes duplicates in the database and verifies
the data before passing it on to the system operator. In most cases, The core of the offering is the smart metering “scheme”. This is
the system operator uses this data directly for billing purposes. a business process solution combining IT technology, business
process execution and field force management.
For commercial and industrial customers, Siemens provides a full
range of utility metering data – from electricity to gas and water The smart metering scheme brings together the data
meters. Large nationwide retail chains are particularly interested processing and device control systems with business processes
in this service so that they can monitor and control the energy designed to optimize the operation of the smart meter asset
consumption of their stores. The IT warehouse enables Siemens and the skills to transition from a dumb meter to an installed
to collect a wide variety of data, and Siemens can provide base of smart meters.
custom-designed solutions based on the operator‘s in-house IT
system. Siemens also offers custom-designed reporting systems Smart metering is an important global trend, and our regional
and works with various communication interfaces to transfer capability and sales network combined with specialist resources
data to the system operator. makes Siemens the ideal provider of smart metering and smart
grid solutions.
10.3.4 Revenue Management
In this section of the meter-to-cash value chain, Siemens
ensures that the data is meaningful to the system operator.
For instance, revenue protection affects the whole value chain
MDM is NOT:
tȋJust a data warehouse of meter data
tȋJust for commercial and industrial meters and complex
billing systems
tȋLimited to utility metering data
10
11
Automatic multiple An automatic reclosing repeated two or three Continuous Function A Siemens engineering tool that offers
shot reclosing times (usually not more) if it is not successful. Chart (CFC) graphical interconnection and parameterization
of off-the-shelf or user-defined function blocks
B to solve sophisticated continuous control
applications –> SFC.
Back-up protection Interaction of two carefully matched
overcurrent protective devices connected in Current limiting Ability of an overcurrent protective device (fuse
series at points where, in the event of a fault, a or circuit-breaker) to reduce the peak current in
single device is not capable of switching the a circuit beyond the value of the peak short-
prospective short-circuit current. If a circuit current expected on the basis of the
correspondingly high short-circuit current circuit constants (R, L), by opening and clearing
occurs, the back-up overcurrent protective the fault in a sub-cycle time frame.
device relieves the next downstream Current-limiting A circuit-breaker with a break-time short
overcurrent protective device, thus preventing circuit-breaker enough to prevent the short-circuit current
it from being overloaded. reaching its otherwise attainable peak value
Blackout Complete power outage. Current transducer Transducer used for the measurement of an
Breaking operation Interruption of an electric circuit as a result of alternating current.
the contact members of a switching device Current transformer Type of instrument transformer designed to
being opened. (CT) provide a current in its secondary winding
Breaking capacity Highest current a switching device is capable of proportional to the alternating current flowing
breaking under specific conditions. in its primary. CTs facilitate the safe
measurement of large currents, often in the
Busbar A low impedance conductor, to which several presence of high voltages. The current
electric circuits can be connected separately. transformer safely isolates measurement and
Busbar trunking Extended enclosed busbars, equipped with control circuitry from the high voltages
system outgoing points for supplying machines and typically present on the circuit being measured.
other loads with power via variable tap-off D
units.
DCF77 A longwave time signal and standard-frequency
Bushing Device that enables one or several conductors
radio station. The transmitted data repeats
to pass through a partition such as a wall or a
each minute the current date and time, a leap
tank and insulate the conductors from it.
second warning bit, a summer time bit, a
C primary/backup transmitter identification bit,
and several parity bits. The callsign DCF77
Capacitor voltage A –> voltage transformer comprising a stands for D=Deutschland (Germany), C=long
transformer (CVT) capacitor divider unit and an electromagnetic wave signal, F=Frankfurt, 77=frequency:
unit designed and interconnected so that the 77.5 kHz.
secondary voltage of the electromagnetic unit
is substantially proportional to the primary Dead tank circuit- A –> circuit-breaker with interrupters in an
voltage, and differs in phase from it by an angle breaker earthed metal tank.
which is approximately zero for an appropriate Dielectric strength Capability of an electrical component to
direction of the connections. withstand all voltages with a specific time
CAPEX Capital expenditures of an enterprise for fixed sequence up to the magnitude of the
11 (MOV) commonly used to divert excessive current to Phase-shifting A device for controlling the power flow through
the ground and/or neutral lines. transformer specific lines in a complex power transmission
network.
N
(Photovoltaik) Peak Maximum “rated” output of a photovoltaic cell,
Neutral conductor A conductor connected to the neutral point of a Watt module, or system. Typical rating conditions
(N) system, which is suitable for transmitting are 1000 W/m2 of sunlight, 20 oC ambient air
electrical energy. temperature and 1 m/s wind speed.
N-tripping Neutral conductor protection. PEN (conductor) Combined –> PE and –> N conductor.
Power-line carrier A device for producing radio-frequency power Resistance Device for temperature detection based on the
for transmission on power lines. temperatur device/ resistance change in a metal, with the
detector (RTD) resistance rising more or less linearly with
Potential A device required to provide accurate voltages
temperature.
transformer (PT) for meters used for billing industrial customers
or utility companies. Remote terminal An electronic device to transmit data to a
unit (RTU) distributed control system or a SCADA-system
Python A dynamic object-oriented programming
and to alter the state of connected objects
language.
based on control messages received from the
Q system.
S
R
Switch-disconnector A switch which, in the open position, satisfies
Rated breaking Value of the short-circuit current a switching
the isolating requirements specified for a
capacity device is c apable of breaking at the rated
disconnector.
operating voltage, rated frequency and
specified power factor (or specified time Switch-disconnector- A switch-disconnector comprising a –> switch-
constant). fuse (SDF) disconnector and (connected in series zo this)
fusebases for insertign fuse-links.
Rated breaking The load breaking current in normal operation.
current SDH A multiplexing protocol for transferring
multiple bit streams over the same optical fiber.
Rated current The current that an electrical device can carry,
under specified conditions, without resulting in Selectivity Combined operation of overcurrent protective
overheating or mechanical overstress. devices connnected in series to provide graded
disconnection.
Rated insulation The –> dielectric strength from phase to earth,
level between phases and across the open contact Series reactor A reactor intended for series connection in a
gap, or across the isolating distance. The network, either for limiting the current under
dielectric strength is verified by a lightning fault conditions or for load-sharing in parallel
impulse withstand voltage test with the circuits.
standard impulse wave of 1.2 / 50 s and a
power-frequency withstand voltage test SFC A graphical programming language used for
(50 Hz/1 min). PLCs. It is one of the five languages defined by
IEC 61131-3 standard. The SFC standard is
Rated peak The peak value of the major loop of the short- defined in IEC 848, “Preparation of function
withstand current circuit current during a compensation process charts for control systems”.
after the beginning of the current flow, which
the device can carry in closed state. Short-circuit Connection of two or more points of an
electrical circuit that are meant to be at
Rated short-circuit The root-mean-square value of the breaking different voltages across a nebligible small
breaking current current in case of short-circuit at the terminals resistance or impedance.
of the switching device.
Short-circuit current Overcurrent which flows through the –> short-
Rated short-circuit The peak value of the making current in case of circuit which may result in thermal or
making current short-circuit at the terminals of the switching mechanical overloading of the electrical
device. equipment.
Rated voltage The maximum voltage at which an electric Short-circuit The mechanical resistance of switching devices
component can operate for extended periods strength to short-circuit stress, particularily of busbars in
without undue degradation or safety hazard. switchgear stations and distrivution boards.
Release (of a A device, mechanically connected to a Shunt release A release energized by a source of voltage.
mechanical mechanical switching device, which releases
switching device) the holding means and permits the opening or Shunt reactor A reactor intended for shunt connection in a
the closing of the switching device. network to compensate for capacitive current.
Residual current The sum of the instantaneous values of all Single-line diagram A simplified notation for representing a three-
currents that flow through all the active (SLD) phase power system in which the polyphase
conductors of an electrical system at one point. links are represented by their equivalent single
line.
Residual current A mechanical switching device designed to
device (RCB) make, carry and break currents under normal Smart grid Evolving intelligent power distribution network
service conditions and to cause the opening of using communication, advanced sensors, and
the contacts when the residual current attains a distributed computers to improve the
given value under specified conditions. efficiency, reliability and safety of power
delivery and use. It includes the possibility for
Ring main unit Switchgear in distribution systems comprising demand side management, facilitating grid
(RMU) of switches for switching power cable rings and connection of distributed generation power
of switches in series with fuses for the
protection of distribution transformers.
(with photovoltaic arrays, small wind turbines,
micro hydro, or even combined heat power
generators in buildings), grid energy storage
11
Rapid spanning tree Networking protocol according to IEEE 802.1w
for distributed generation load balancing, and
protocol (RSTP) to deactivate redundant paths in a local net or
improved reliability against many different
to activate them if required (e.g. in case of a
component failure scenarios.
failure of a switch, brigde etc.).
SNCP A protection mechanism used in –> SDH Transient Very short duration increase in voltage,
overvoltage between two or more conductors. Transient
SNMP SNMP is used in network management systems
overvoltages are mainly caused by the
to monitor network-attached devices for
secondary effects of lightning or by electrical
conditions that warrant administrative
switching events and may cause serious
attention. It consists of a set of standards for
damages to components of the electrical supply
network management, including an Application
network.
Layer protocol, a database schema, and a set of
data objects. Tripping current Current value at which a tripping element trips
within a particular time.
SOAP A protocol for exchanging –> XML-based
messages over computer networks, normally TT system Power supply system; in the TT system one
using –> HTTP/HTTPS. Formerly SOAP was a point is directly grounded, all exposed
acronym for Simple Object Access Protocol, conductive parts are connected to grounding
which was dropped with Version 1.2. electrodes which are separated from the system
grounding.
SONET Multiplexing protocol for transferring multiple
bit streams over the same optical fiber. TTA Type-tested low voltage switchgear assembly.
SQL Database computer language designed for the Type-tested LV Assembly of low-voltage controlgear and
retrieval and management of data in relational controlgear and switchgear built and type-tested according to
database management systems. switchgear assembly IEC 60439-1/EN 60439-1/DIN VDE 0660-500.
(TTA)
STM Synchronous Transport Module (STM), the basic
unit of framing in –> SDH U
S-tripping Short-time delay short-circuit protection. UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunications System;
Substation A part of an electrical system, confined to a third-generation cell phone standard that
given area, mainly including ends of allows significantly higher data transfer rates
transmission or distribution lines, electrical than GSM.
switchgear and controlgear, buildings and USB Serial bus standard to interface devices.
transformers. A substation generally includes
safety or control devices (for example V
protection).
Virtual power plant A cluster of distributed generation installations
Surge arrester A device designed to protect the electrical (VPP) which are collectively run by a central control
apparatus from high transient overvoltages entity. The concerted operational mode shall
caused by lightning strikes or switching result in an extra benefit as to deliver peak load
operations. electricity or balancing power at short notice.
Switch/switching Device for making or breaking a current in an Visual Basic for An event-driven programming language and
device electric circuit. Applications (VBA) associated integrated development
Switch-disconnector A switch which, in the open position, satisfies environment (IDE) which is built into most
the isolating requirements specified for a –> Microsoft Office applications.
disconnector. Voltage divider Device comprising resistors, inductors,
capacitors, transformer(s) or a combination of
T
these components such that, between two
Total harmonic The THD of a signal is a measurement of the points of the device, a desired fraction of the
distortion (THD) harmonic distortion present and is defined as voltage applied to the device as a whole can be
the ratio of the sum of the powers of all obtained.
harmonic components to the power of the (Line) voltage drop The difference at a given instant between the
fundamental frequency. voltages measured at two given points along a
TN-S, TN-C, TN-C-S Power supply systems; in the TN-S system the line.
neutral conductor and the protective-earth- Voltage regulator A tapped step autotransformer used to
conductor-function is separated throughout the maintain a desired voltage level all the time.
system; in the TN-C system neutral-conductor
and protective-earth-conductor-function are Voltage surge A transient voltage wave propagating along a
combined throughout the system; the TN-C-S line or a circuit and characterized by a rapid
system is a combination of a TN-C and a TN-S increase followed by a slower decrease of the
system. In one part of the system neutral- voltage.
conductor and protective-earth-conductor
Voltage transducer Transducer used for the measurement of an
function are combined, in another part, they
alternating voltage.
are separate.
Voltage transformer An instrument transformer in which the
Total harmonic The THD of a signal is a measurement of the
secondary voltage, in normal conditions of use,
11
distortion (THD) harmonic distortion present and is defined as
is substantially proportional to the primary
the ratio of the sum of the powers of all
voltage and differs in phase from it by an angle
harmonic components to the power of the
which is approximately zero for an appropriate
fundamental frequency.
direction of the connections.
Transformer A substation containing power transformers
substation interconnecting two or more networks of
different voltages.
11
12
A CT Current transformer
AAC All-aluminum conductor Cu Copper
AC Alternating current D
ACB Air circuit breaker DAC Digital-to-analog converter
ACSR Aluminum conductor, steel-reinforced DAU Data acquisition unit
ADC Analog-to-digital-converter DC Direct current
ADM Asynchronous digital multiplexer DEMS Decentralized energy management system
AF Air-forced; (cooling type [of cast-resin] transformers) DER Distributed energy ressources
Al Aluminum DG Distributed generation
AN Air-natural DIN germ.: Deutsches Institut für Normung e. V.;
German Institute for Standardization
AIS Air-insulated switchyard
DINEMO Digital network model
AMI Automated meter infrastucture
DIP Distributed interface processor
AMIS Automated consumption data acquisition and
information system DisCo Distribution company
ANSI American National Standards Institute DMAIC Define-measure-analyse-improve-control
AR Auto-reclosure DMS Distribution management system
ASC Arc suppression coil DMZ Demilitarized zone
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange DN Damping network
ATM Asynchronous transfer mode DNP Distributed network protocol
ATM-IMA Inverse multiplexing over ATM DQS germ.: Deutsche Gesellschaft zur Zertifizierung von
Managementsystemen; German registrar for
AVR Automatic voltage regulator
management systems
B
DSL Digital subscriber line
BCU Bay control unit
DT Distribution transformer
BF (protection) Breaker failure (protection)
DTC Dead tank compact
BFI (time) Breaker failure initiation (time)
E
BFT (time) Breaker failure tripping (time)
E&M interface Ear and month interface
BIL Basic impulse level
EAF Electric arc furnace
BIPV Building-integrated photovoltaik system
ECANSE Environment for Computer Aided Neural Software
BOSL Block oriented simulation language Engineering
BPL Broadband over powerlines ECR Electrical grade corrosion resistant (glass fiber)
(glass fiber)
B2B a) Building-to-building; b) Business-to-business
EDP Electronic data processing
BS British Standard
EHV Extra high voltage
C
EIB European Installation Bus
CAD/CAE Computer aided design/computer aided engineering
EIRP Effective isotropic radiated power
CAPEX Capital expenditure
ELCOM Electricity utilities communication
CB Circuit-breaker
EM Environmental management
CCS Cubicle for customized solutions
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
CERT Computer emergency response team
EMS Energy management system
CFC Continuous Function Chart
EN germ.: Europa-Norm; European Standard
CFM Communication front end
EPC (contract) Engineering, procurement, construction (contract)
CHP Combined heet and power
EPROM Erasable programmable read-only-memory
CIM Common information model
ERIP (design) Epoxy resin impregnated paper (design)
CIP Continuous improvement process
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
CIT Combined instrument transformer
ETU Electronic trip unit
CO2 Carbon dioxide
EU European Union
CSA Canadian Standards Association
12
MSCDN Mechanically switched capacitor bank with damping
IDS Intrusion detection system
network
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
MSP Motor starter protector
12
POTT Permissive overreach transfer trip
SNCP Sub-network connection protection
PP Polypropylene
SNMP Simple network management protocol
STM Synchronous transport module WiMAX Worldwide interoperability for microwave access
T Z
Download: www.siemens.com/energy/peg
40926 0812